Common

User's Guide
Version 2014 R1 (10.1) - UPDATED
June 2014 / February 2018
Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2018 Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.
This computer program, including software, icons, graphic symbols, documentation, file formats, and audio-visual displays; may be
used only as pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Hexagon AB
and/or third parties which is protected by patent, trademark, copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be
provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2018. All Rights Reserved.
Portions of the user interface are copyright © 2012-2018 Telerik AD.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Hexagon PPM
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758

Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.

Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the Software License Agreement ("SLA") delivered with the software
product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the Licensee has
a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and
govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license
agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation as
defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal, non-commercial
use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a SLA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the SLA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

Common User's Guide 2

The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s commercial-off-the-shelf software products, customized software and/or third-party software, including any
technical data related thereto (“Technical Data”), obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, is subject to
the export control laws and regulations of the United States of America. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. To the extent
prohibited by United States or other applicable laws, Intergraph Corporation software products, customized software, Technical Data,
and/or third-party software, or any derivatives thereof, obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors must not
be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, the Crimean region of Ukraine, or Syria, or any national of these countries or territories.
b. To any person or entity listed on any United States government denial list, including, but not limited to, the United States
Department of Commerce Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, the United States Department of Treasury Specially
Designated Nationals List, and the United States Department of State Debarred List
(https://build.export.gov/main/ecr/eg_main_023148).
c. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the software product, customized software,
Technical Data and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors is related to the
design, development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or
sensitive nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export/re-export of relevant Intergraph Corporation software product, customized software, Technical Data
and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, should be addressed to PPM’s
Export Compliance Department, 305 Intergraph Way, Madison, Alabama 35758 USA or at exportcompliance@intergraph.com.
Customer shall hold harmless and indemnify PPM and Hexagon Group Company for any causes of action, claims, costs, expenses
and/or damages resulting to PPM or Hexagon Group Company from a breach by Customer.

Trademarks
Intergraph®, the Intergraph logo®, Intergraph Smart®, SmartPlant®, SmartMarine®, SmartSketch®, SmartPlant Cloud®, PDS®,
FrameWorks®, I-Route, I-Export, Isogen®, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager®, SupportModeler®, SAPPHIRE®, TANK, PV Elite®,
CADWorx®, CADWorx DraftPro®, GTSTRUDL®, and CAESAR II® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation
or its affiliates, parents, subsidiaries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a registered trademark of SPATIAL
TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl, ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl,
ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are trademarks of Infragistics, Inc.
Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights
reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark, and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc. VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of ComponentOne LLC 1991-2018, All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and
Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and
act/cut are trademarks of the Alma company. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Common User's Guide 3

Contents
Preface ..................................................................................................................................................... 13

What's New in Common .......................................................................................................................... 13

Common Overview .................................................................................................................................. 15

The Smart 3D Design Approach ............................................................................................................. 19

Design Objects.................................................................................................................................... 20
Access Control .................................................................................................................................... 21
Permissions Overview .................................................................................................................. 22
Permission Groups and Routing ................................................................................................... 23
Global Workshare ............................................................................................................................... 27
Design Session ................................................................................................................................... 28
Modifying Objects ............................................................................................................................... 30
Design Aids ......................................................................................................................................... 31
Object Relationships and Associations ............................................................................................... 33
To Do List............................................................................................................................................ 35
Interference Detection......................................................................................................................... 35

Best Practices.......................................................................................................................................... 36
Using multiple graphics windows ........................................................................................................ 37
Using clipping...................................................................................................................................... 38
Saving views ....................................................................................................................................... 41
Using transparent styles...................................................................................................................... 42
Using system folders to manage styles ............................................................................................... 44
Using surface style rules ..................................................................................................................... 45
Using enhanced edges render modes ................................................................................................ 46
Changing default colors ...................................................................................................................... 47
Using the Reference Geometry aspect ............................................................................................... 47

File Menu .................................................................................................................................................. 48

Managing Sessions ............................................................................................................................. 49
Managing Sessions Common Tasks ............................................................................................ 50
Session Files Best Practices ........................................................................................................ 51
New .............................................................................................................................................. 52
Open............................................................................................................................................. 55
Close ............................................................................................................................................ 56
Save ............................................................................................................................................. 56
Save As ........................................................................................................................................ 56
Properties (Session Files)............................................................................................................. 57
Send ............................................................................................................................................. 58
Defining Workspace Content .............................................................................................................. 60
Defining a Workspace Common Tasks ........................................................................................ 61
Define Workspace ........................................................................................................................ 62

Common User's Guide 4

 Contents

Refresh Workspace ...................................................................................................................... 69

Importing and Exporting Data ............................................................................................................. 70
PDS Model Data Exporter ............................................................................................................ 71
Import Electrical ............................................................................................................................ 75
Import Equipment ......................................................................................................................... 78
Import Grids .................................................................................................................................. 81
Import HVAC ................................................................................................................................ 83
Import Piping ................................................................................................................................ 86
Import Structure ............................................................................................................................ 89
Export Grids................................................................................................................................ 103
Export Structure.......................................................................................................................... 104
Export Smart 3D Models to PDMS ............................................................................................. 109
PDMS Export Validation ............................................................................................................. 112
PDS Export ................................................................................................................................. 117
Print .................................................................................................................................................. 124
Print the active window ............................................................................................................... 124
Print Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 124
Most Recently Used List ................................................................................................................... 126
Exit .................................................................................................................................................... 127
Quit an editing session ............................................................................................................... 127

Edit Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 128

Undo ................................................................................................................................................. 129
Cancel your last action ............................................................................................................... 129
Turn undo on or off ..................................................................................................................... 130
Copy ................................................................................................................................................. 131
Copying Large Areas of the Model ............................................................................................. 132
Paste ................................................................................................................................................. 133
Copy and paste an object ........................................................................................................... 134
Paste Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 135
Paste and Restore ............................................................................................................................ 137
Restore model objects from backup ........................................................................................... 139
Copying and Pasting Using the Catalog ........................................................................................... 141
Copy to Catalog .......................................................................................................................... 142
Paste from Catalog ..................................................................................................................... 145
Locate Filter ...................................................................................................................................... 149
Change the locate filter ............................................................................................................... 150
Locate Filter Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 150
Delete ............................................................................................................................................... 151
Move ................................................................................................................................................. 152
Move objects to a new location................................................................................................... 154
Move partially constrained objects by a relative distance ........................................................... 155
Select System Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 157
Rotate Object .................................................................................................................................... 158
Rotate an object about an axis ................................................................................................... 164
Rotate an object using perpendicular to references mode ......................................................... 165
Rotate an Object about a Line or Port ........................................................................................ 167
Rotate an object using bearing, pitch, or roll............................................................................... 169
Mirror Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 170
Mirror and copy objects .............................................................................................................. 173

Common User's Guide 5

 Contents

Construct symmetrical connections ............................................................................................ 175

Parent or Related Object Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 175
Update Names .................................................................................................................................. 176
Update Names............................................................................................................................ 176
Properties.......................................................................................................................................... 177
Edit Properties ............................................................................................................................ 178
Transfer ownership of objects in the model ................................................................................ 179
Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 179
Go to Hyperlink ................................................................................................................................. 183
Follow a hyperlink ....................................................................................................................... 183

View Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 184

Clipping ............................................................................................................................................. 185
Clip by Object ............................................................................................................................. 185
Clip by Volume or Plane ............................................................................................................. 187
Clear Clipping ............................................................................................................................. 195
Active View Control ........................................................................................................................... 197
Manipulate the active view.......................................................................................................... 197
Active View Control Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 198
Previous View ................................................................................................................................... 200
Restore the previous view .......................................................................................................... 200
Next View .......................................................................................................................................... 201
Restore the next view ................................................................................................................. 201
Named Views .................................................................................................................................... 202
Save a view ................................................................................................................................ 202
Edit a saved view........................................................................................................................ 202
Recall a saved view .................................................................................................................... 202
Delete a saved view ................................................................................................................... 203
Named Views Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 203
Common Views ................................................................................................................................. 204
Select a standard isometric or orthographic view ....................................................................... 204
Common Views Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 204
View by Points .................................................................................................................................. 206
Adjust a view by points ............................................................................................................... 206
Adjust a view along a line ........................................................................................................... 208
Rotate View....................................................................................................................................... 209
Rotate a view around an axis ..................................................................................................... 210
Rotate a view around a new center point ................................................................................... 212
Rotate a view around a linear object .......................................................................................... 213
Look at Surface ................................................................................................................................. 215
Look at a surface ........................................................................................................................ 215
Viewing Your Work ........................................................................................................................... 216
Navigate View............................................................................................................................. 217
Zoom Tool .................................................................................................................................. 236
Zoom Area .................................................................................................................................. 238
Fit ............................................................................................................................................... 240
Pan ............................................................................................................................................. 240
Center View by Object ................................................................................................................ 241
Apply View Style ......................................................................................................................... 241
Workspace Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 243

Common User's Guide 6

 Contents

Icons in the Workspace Explorer ................................................................................................ 246

Icon Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 254
Workspace Explorer ................................................................................................................... 257
New System ............................................................................................................................... 262
Rulers................................................................................................................................................ 264
Display rulers .............................................................................................................................. 264
Rulers Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 264
To Do List.......................................................................................................................................... 265
Fix objects with errors ................................................................................................................. 267
Update out-of-date objects ......................................................................................................... 267
Display objects on the To Do List ............................................................................................... 268
To Do List Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 269
To Do Record Meter ................................................................................................................... 272

Insert Menu ............................................................................................................................................ 273

Insert File .......................................................................................................................................... 274
Insert a reference file .................................................................................................................. 275
Delete a reference file ................................................................................................................ 276
Reference Attachment File Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................... 276
Reference Element Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................. 276
Translator.ini File Options ........................................................................................................... 277
Hyperlink ........................................................................................................................................... 283
Insert a hyperlink ........................................................................................................................ 283
Remove a hyperlink .................................................................................................................... 283
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 284
Browse to Address Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 285
Note .................................................................................................................................................. 286
Insert a note................................................................................................................................ 286
Follow a note .............................................................................................................................. 287
Insert a note at a precise place on an isometric drawing ............................................................ 287
Insert Note Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 289
Control Point ..................................................................................................................................... 290
Add control points ....................................................................................................................... 294
Edit control points ....................................................................................................................... 294
Set isometric break control points for drawings .......................................................................... 295
Add location point coordinates to PCF ....................................................................................... 295
Indicate elevation on drawings ................................................................................................... 297
Add Ad Hoc Note to control points for drawings ......................................................................... 299
Add CAD details of a support component in the drawings.......................................................... 300
Add the location coordinates of the key plan to drawings ........................................................... 303
Control Point Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 305

Format Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 307

Format View ...................................................................................................................................... 308
Format a view ............................................................................................................................. 309
Set enhanced edge color ............................................................................................................ 310
Format View Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 312
Aspect Refresh in Progress Message Box ................................................................................. 321
Format Style...................................................................................................................................... 322

Common User's Guide 7

 Contents

Create a surface style ................................................................................................................. 324

Apply a surface style .................................................................................................................. 325
Modify a surface style ................................................................................................................. 325
Delete a surface style ................................................................................................................. 325
Apply a permission group to styles ............................................................................................. 326
Create a 3D view style ................................................................................................................ 326
Apply a 3D view style ................................................................................................................. 327
Modify a view style ..................................................................................................................... 327
Delete a view style...................................................................................................................... 327
Style Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 328
New/Modify Style Dialog Box...................................................................................................... 329
New View Style Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 336
Surface Style Rules .......................................................................................................................... 339
Create a surface style rule .......................................................................................................... 340
Add a surface style rule to the workspace .................................................................................. 341
Copy a surface style rule from one model to another ................................................................. 341
Remove a surface style rule from the workspace ....................................................................... 341
Remove a surface style rule from the database ......................................................................... 342
Modify a surface style rule .......................................................................................................... 342
Surface Style Rules Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 342
Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................. 344

Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................................ 347

Select ................................................................................................................................................ 348
Select objects by locate filter for a work session ........................................................................ 351
Select objects by fence for a work session ................................................................................. 351
Select objects using QuickPick ................................................................................................... 353
Select by Filter .................................................................................................................................. 355
Filter Types ................................................................................................................................. 356
Access control of filters ............................................................................................................... 358
Filters - Rules of usage and limitations ....................................................................................... 359
Create a new filter folder ............................................................................................................ 360
Create a new filter ...................................................................................................................... 360
Create a new asking filter ........................................................................................................... 362
Create a new SQL filter .............................................................................................................. 363
Create a new compound filter ..................................................................................................... 363
Rename a filter folder ................................................................................................................. 365
Rename a filter ........................................................................................................................... 365
Move a filter ................................................................................................................................ 366
Copy a filter ................................................................................................................................ 366
Delete a filter folder .................................................................................................................... 366
Delete a filter .............................................................................................................................. 367
Edit filter properties..................................................................................................................... 367
Select objects by filter ................................................................................................................. 369
SQL Queries in SQL Server and Oracle ..................................................................................... 369
Select Filter Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 370
Filter Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 371
Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 382
SQL Filter Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 383
Folder Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 384

Common User's Guide 8

 Contents

Select Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 384

Select Object Type Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 385
Show ................................................................................................................................................. 386
Show an invisible object ............................................................................................................. 386
Hide .................................................................................................................................................. 387
Hide an object............................................................................................................................. 387
Show All ............................................................................................................................................ 388
Show all invisible objects ............................................................................................................ 388
PinPoint............................................................................................................................................. 389
Place objects using rectangular coordinates .............................................................................. 393
Place objects using spherical coordinates .................................................................................. 395
Place objects using cylindrical coordinates ................................................................................ 398
SmartSketch Options ........................................................................................................................ 401
Add to SmartSketch List.................................................................................................................... 404
Add objects to the SmartSketch list ............................................................................................ 408
Get Point ........................................................................................................................................... 409
Point Along........................................................................................................................................ 413
Place objects along another object ............................................................................................. 414
Measure ............................................................................................................................................ 415
Define a coordinate system by three points ................................................................................ 419
Measure an actual distance ........................................................................................................ 419
Measure minimum distance ........................................................................................................ 420
Measure the distance along an element ..................................................................................... 423
Measure a radius or diameter ..................................................................................................... 425
Measure an angle ....................................................................................................................... 426
Checking Interferences ..................................................................................................................... 427
Server-Based Interference Checking (Database Detect) ............................................................ 431
Interactive Interference Checking (Local Detect) ........................................................................ 433
Checking Interferences Common Tasks ..................................................................................... 434
Run Report........................................................................................................................................ 435
Run Report Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 436
Report Parameters Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 438
Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 438
Run an Existing Catalog Report ................................................................................................. 440
Run an Existing Personal Report................................................................................................ 440
Drawing Console............................................................................................................................... 442
Snapshot View .................................................................................................................................. 445
Create a snapshot view containing all objects ............................................................................ 447
Create a snapshot view containing only visible objects .............................................................. 448
Select View Style Dialog Box...................................................................................................... 449
Select Drawing Type Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 449
Select Naming Rules Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 449
Select Space Folder Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 450
Custom Commands .......................................................................................................................... 451
Create custom commands .......................................................................................................... 459
Add custom commands .............................................................................................................. 459
Run a custom command ............................................................................................................. 459
Edit a custom command ............................................................................................................. 460
Delete a custom command ......................................................................................................... 460
Custom Commands Dialog Box.................................................................................................. 460
Utility ................................................................................................................................................. 463

Common User's Guide 9

 Contents

Synchronize Workspace with Catalog ........................................................................................ 463

Review MDR Results .................................................................................................................. 465
User-defined Forms .................................................................................................................... 469
Options.............................................................................................................................................. 495
Change a default color ............................................................................................................... 496
Change a default file location ..................................................................................................... 497
Change a displayed unit of measure .......................................................................................... 497
Change the displayed Workspace Explorer tabs ........................................................................ 497
Manage ToolTips ........................................................................................................................ 498
Restrict edits and propagation to a Permission Group ............................................................... 499
Set the activation time for QuickPick .......................................................................................... 499
Set the Locate Zone ................................................................................................................... 499
Turn a SmartSketch Relationship Indicator on or off .................................................................. 500
Turn the Status Bar on or off ...................................................................................................... 500
Options Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 500
Weight & CG ..................................................................................................................................... 515
Weight & CG Display List ........................................................................................................... 517
Calculate Weight & CG ............................................................................................................... 517

Project Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 519

WBS Items and Projects ................................................................................................................... 520
Select Active Project Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 521
Create WBS Project ................................................................................................................... 522
Create WBS Item........................................................................................................................ 529
Claim................................................................................................................................................. 538
Claiming Objects ........................................................................................................................ 539
Claim Objects ............................................................................................................................. 540
Release Claim................................................................................................................................... 541
Release Claimed Objects ........................................................................................................... 541
Assign to WBS .................................................................................................................................. 542
Assign to WBS Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 543
Assign Objects to a WBS Item.................................................................................................... 543
Remove All Objects from a WBS Item ........................................................................................ 544
Update WBS Assignments ................................................................................................................ 545
Update WBS Assignments ......................................................................................................... 545

SmartPlant Menu ................................................................................................................................... 546

Smart 3D in an Integrated Environment ............................................................................................ 547
Understanding Integration Terminology ...................................................................................... 550
Integrating with SmartPlant Enterprise ....................................................................................... 551
Workflow for Smart 3D in an Integrated Environment ................................................................. 554
Publish documents ............................................................................................................................ 556
Publish........................................................................................................................................ 557
Publish Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 558
Find Documents to Publish ............................................................................................................... 564
Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 564
Retrieving Data ................................................................................................................................. 565
Retrieve Command ..................................................................................................................... 568
Viewing P&IDs .................................................................................................................................. 572

Common User's Guide 10

 Contents

View P&ID Command ................................................................................................................. 574

Publishing 3D Data ..................................................................................................................... 584
Correlate with Design Basis Command ............................................................................................ 585
Correlate with Design Basis Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 586
Correlate Model Objects with Design Basis Objects ................................................................... 590
Manually Correlate Multiple Smart 3D Pipe Runs/Pipelines with a P&ID Pipe
Run/Pipeline ............................................................................................................................... 592
Create a Filter to Select Piping Components Based on Correlation Status ................................ 592
Create a Filter to Select Pipes Based on Correlation Status ...................................................... 593
Correlate Automatically Command ................................................................................................... 594
Correlate Automatically Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 594
Automatically Correlate with the 3D Model ................................................................................. 595
Auto-Correlate Report ................................................................................................................ 596
Compare Design Basis Command .................................................................................................... 600
Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 601
Compare Design Basis with the Model ....................................................................................... 604
Design Basis Viewer Command ........................................................................................................ 606
Design Basis Viewer Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 606
Compare a design basis object with 3D object ........................................................................... 608
Correlate a design basis object with 3D object ........................................................................... 609
Review design basis object properties ....................................................................................... 610
Remove Correlation with Design Basis Command ........................................................................... 611
Remove correlation with design basis ........................................................................................ 611

Tasks Menu ............................................................................................................................................ 612

Catalog.............................................................................................................................................. 613
Common ........................................................................................................................................... 613
Drawings and Reports ...................................................................................................................... 613
Electrical ........................................................................................................................................... 614
Equipment and Furnishings .............................................................................................................. 614
Grids ................................................................................................................................................. 614
Hangers and Supports ...................................................................................................................... 615
HVAC ................................................................................................................................................ 615
Piping ................................................................................................................................................ 615
Space Management .......................................................................................................................... 615
Structural Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 616
Structure ........................................................................................................................................... 616
Systems and Specifications .............................................................................................................. 616
Configure Task List ........................................................................................................................... 617
Configure Tasks ......................................................................................................................... 617
Configure Task List Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 617

Windows Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 619

New Window ..................................................................................................................................... 620
Create a new window ................................................................................................................. 620
Cascade ............................................................................................................................................ 621
Cascade windows....................................................................................................................... 621
Tile Horizontally ................................................................................................................................ 622
Tile windows horizontally ............................................................................................................ 622

Common User's Guide 11

 Contents

Tile Vertically..................................................................................................................................... 623

Tile windows vertically ................................................................................................................ 623

Help Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 624

Help .................................................................................................................................................. 625
Display help topics...................................................................................................................... 626
Printable Guides ............................................................................................................................... 627
Access the Printable Guides....................................................................................................... 627
Custom Documentation..................................................................................................................... 628
Access Customized Files............................................................................................................ 628
About ................................................................................................................................................ 629
About Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 629
Display License Information........................................................................................................ 629

Appendix: Shortcuts ............................................................................................................................. 630

Shortcut Keys.................................................................................................................................... 631
Shortcut Menus ................................................................................................................................. 634

Appendix: Implementing a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) ......................................................... 635

Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor .......................................................................................................... 637

Run the S3D Memory Monitor manually ........................................................................................... 638
Run the S3D Memory Monitor automatically ..................................................................................... 639
Display the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box .................................................................................... 640
Copy memory statistics to the clipboard ........................................................................................... 641
Remove a process that has exited in a Critical or Warning state ...................................................... 641
Set options for the S3D Memory Monitor .......................................................................................... 641
Exit the S3D Memory Monitor ........................................................................................................... 641
S3D Memory Monitor Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 642
S3D Memory Stats Dialog Box.......................................................................................................... 644
Options Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 645

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................. 646

Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 663

Common User's Guide 12

Preface
This document is a user's guide for the Common functionality of Intergraph Smart TM 3D and
provides command reference information and procedural instructions.

Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, comments or suggestions about this
documentation, and documentation updates for supported software versions, please visit
Intergraph Smart® Support (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).

What's New in Common

The following changes have been made to the Common task.
Hot Fix and Service Pack Updates
 The Refresh Reference 3D Interferences command now displays all interferences
associated with Reference 3D objects in the workspace. Before, both objects in the
interference had to be in the workspace for the interference to display. Now, only one of the
two objects needs to be in the workspace. (P2 CP:281320)
 Information related to Paste Dialog Box and Copy and paste an object has been updated.
For more information, see Paste Dialog Box (on page 135) and Copy and paste an object
(on page 133) (P2 CP:264979)
 Added a new custom command, Placing Supports from XLS. For more information, see
Custom Commands. (P2 CP:276908)
 Added the Repair Duplicate Permission Group ID custom command. For more
information, see Custom Commands (on page 450). (P2 CP:278972)
 Information related to the Weight & CG command has been updated. For more information,
see Weight & CG (on page 515). (P3 CP:325420)
 Added the Drawings tab to the Workspace Explorer. For more information, see
Workspace Explorer (on page 243). (P3 CP:278904)
 Information related to Select by Filter and Filter Properties Dialog Box has been updated.
For more information, see Select by Filter (on page 354) and Filter Properties Dialog Box
(on page 371). (P4 CP:279055)
Version 2014R1 (10.1)
 Numerous updates have been made across Smart 3D to improve performance and stability.
 A new progress indicator keeps you better informed of what Smart 3D is doing.
 A new snapshot command, Visible Objects Only, creates a Snapshot Visible Objects
view that only shows the visible objects. For more information, see Snapshot View (on page
444). (P1 CP:240034)
 Nodes with more than 1000 children in the System tab of the Filter Properties dialog box
display in bold type rather than auto-expanding if some of their children are selected in the

Common User's Guide 13

 What's New in Common

filter properties. For more information, see System Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 373).
 Corrected notes on the behavior of original systems when using the Past and Restore
command. For more information, see Paste and Restore (on page 136) and Paste Dialog
Box (on page 135). (P4 CP:273368)
 The Publish > UpdatePublish command is now called Publish > Update and Publish.

Common User's Guide 14

SECTION 1

Common Overview
The various software tasks share some common operations like the View and File menu
commands. You use the Common task commands and functionality in the same
way—regardless of the active task; however, some of the commands and functionality are
unique to a particular task. For example, some commands within the Piping task are not
available in the Equipment and Furnishings task.

The Workspace
The workspace represents the portion of the model data on which you perform your intended
task, and it includes view properties for modeling. The Common task allows you to define that
workspace and perform common operations on it. For more information, see Workspace
Explorer (on page 243) and Viewing Your Work (on page 215).

Saving the Session File

The changes you make in any task or operation are stored in a session file (.ses) when you
save your work. Many tasks on the Tasks menu are not available until you have defined and
saved your workspace. For more information, see Design Session (on page 28) and Managing
Sessions (on page 48).

Access Permissions
The left-most control on the main toolbar is the Active Permission Group
box, which allows you to set the permission group for the objects you are creating or editing.
The drop-down list contains all of the permission groups to which you belong. You can perform
specified functions, depending on your access permissions. For more information, see Access
Control (on page 20).

Locate Filter
You can use locate filters in the software to assist in selection of objects in the workspace. The
Locate Filter box on the main toolbar displays the active filter. For more information, see Locate
Filter (on page 148).

Common User's Guide 15

 Common Overview

Main Toolbar
The main toolbar in each task displays horizontally at the top of the page and contains the same
controls and buttons—regardless of the active task.

New - Creates a new session based on a template. For more information, see
New (on page 52).

Open - Opens an existing session. If you have a session open when you click
this command, you receive a message asking if you would like to save the
changes to the active session. For more information, see Open (on page 54).

Save - Saves the active workspace as a session (.ses) file with its currently
defined name and location. For more information, see Save (on page 56).

Refresh Workspace - Updates all the views in the workspace with the most
current information from the database. Use this command to see changes that
other users in your permission group have made to objects visible in your
workspace, such as repositioning of equipment or adding new objects. You
can press F5 to refresh your workspace. For more information, see Refresh
Workspace (on page 69).

Copy - Copies selected objects and their associated relationships to the

Clipboard. The copied objects replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
For more information, see Copy (on page 131).

Paste - Inserts the Clipboard contents in a selected document or a selected

area of the model. For more information, see Paste (on page 132).

Delete - Removes the selected object from the database and deletes any
relationships and notes placed on the object. For more information, see Delete
(on page 150).

Move - Moves objects from one location to another. You specify the original
location of the object and then indicate the destination location. For more
information, see Move (on page 151).

Rotate Object - Rotates or turns selected objects after the initial placement of
the objects. For precision needs, you can define the angle and an incremental
step value. For more information, see Rotate Object (on page 157).

Undo - Reverses all changes of your transactions on information in the model

database. This command does not affect data stored in your session file. For
example, it does not undo view manipulation commands such a fit, zoom, or
pan. For more information, see Undo (on page 128).

Common User's Guide 16

 Common Overview

Pin Point - Helps you move, place, or modify objects with precision by
displaying coordinate data at the pointer. When you turn PinPoint on, the
PinPoint ribbon displays coordinates relative to a target position you set. You
can reset the target position at any time. For more information, see PinPoint
(on page 389).

SmartSketch 3D Toolbar - Displays a floating toolbar of SmartSketch options.

You can click the options to turn them on and off as you make selections in the
graphic view for other commands. For more information, see SmartSketch
Options (on page 401).

Add to SmartSketch List - Adds an object that you select to the locate list of
SmartSketch 3D. For more information, see Add to SmartSketch List (on page
403).

Point Along - Helps you insert objects at specific locations along a path. A
path can be along a pipe, duct, cableway, or the intersection line between two
surfaces. For more information, see Point Along (on page 412).

Measure - Measures distances and angles between objects in the model,

including edges, faces, and key points. For more information, see Measure (on
page 415).

Clip by Object - Isolates an object or group of objects in your model for closer
viewing or more detailed work. For more information, see Clip by Object (on
page 185).

Clip by Volume or Plane - Sets the view clipping volume. The software hides
all objects not inside the clipped area. This command also lets you edit the
clipped volume by dragging clipping planes in a graphic view. For more
information, see Clip by Volume or Plane (on page 187).

Clear View Clipping - Restores the view to its original state. Any objects
hidden by clipping redisplay. This command displays any objects in the view
that were hidden by the Clip by Volume or Clip by Object commands. Use
this command to restore the view before you define a new clipping volume or
object. For more information, see Clear Clipping (on page 195).

Active View Control - Provides a separate graphic view and methods to

control the camera/eye point position and the clipping of the active graphic
view window. For more information, see Active View Control (on page 196).

Common Views - Displays a two-dimensional or isometric orientation of

objects in the active view. For more information, see Common Views (on page
203).

View by Points - Provides options for specifying the view plane by three
points or along a line. For more information, see View by Points (on page 205).

Common User's Guide 17

 Common Overview

Rotate View - Rotates or turns a view freely about a point or about an axis
parallel to one of the axes in the global coordinate system. For more
information, see Rotate View (on page 209).

Named Views - Assigns a name and description to a view so you can apply
the settings later to the active window. For more information, see Named
Views (on page 201).

Zoom Tool - Increases or decreases the display size of objects in the model.
You can zoom in to get a closer view of an object or zoom out to see more of
the model at a reduced size. You can use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in
and out and to pan at any time without having to select this command. For
more information, see Zoom Tool (on page 235).

Navigate View - Starts 3D navigation in the active window allowing you to fly
around the model in a fluid, multi-directional motion. For more information, see
Navigate View (on page 217).

Zoom Area - Magnifies an area of the model. Click and drag to create a fence
around an object or area of the model that you want to enlarge. For more
information, see Zoom Area (on page 238).

Fit - Fits all visible or selected objects in the active view. If you select one or
more objects before clicking Fit , the software fits only the selected objects
in the view. However, if you do not select any objects, then all visible objects in
the clipping volume display in the view. For more information, see Fit (on page
239).

Pan - Moves the view up, down, left, or right to let you see other areas of the
model. The pointer displays as a hand when this command is active. For more
information, see Pan (on page 240).

Center View by Object - Centers a view based on a given point or object. For
more information, see Center View by Object (on page 241).

Common User's Guide 18

SECTION 2

The Smart 3D Design Approach

Smart 3D is a design application for a wide range of industries, such as process, power,
shipbuilding, bulk-material handling, and bio-pharmaceutical. This data-centric tool provides:
 Rule-driven 3D modeling
 Export to and Import from analysis
 Detailing
 Preparation of manufacturing and construction deliverables
 Automatic drawing production
 Reporting
All of the engineering disciplines work together in a Smart 3D model using a consistent user
interface that has been specifically tailored for detailed design. Smart 3D is fully integrated with
SmartPlant Enterprise to provide managed electronic access to data created by front end
engineering design (FEED) applications such as SmartPlant P&ID, SmartPlant Instrumentation,
and SmartPlant Electrical.
The software automatically creates relationships in the model to facilitate design consistency
between and across disciplines. You can manually create additional relationships for fabrication,
construction planning, and other activities.
Smart 3D does not store your design in flat files. Instead, the design is stored in the model
database so that all of the designers on your team have access to what they need whenever
they need it. This section provides information to help you work efficiently with multiple
designers collaborating in a single model.

Common User's Guide 19

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Design Objects
When you design in Smart 3D, you create various design objects with discipline-specific
properties, behavior rules, and geometry. Specifications and catalog reference information
assist you as you create these objects.
There are many types of objects ( such as equipment, piping, HVAC, and structure). The
software lists these types on the Object tab of the Filter Definition Property dialog box.
Different object types are depicted by distinct icons in the Workspace Explorer. For more
information, see Icons in the Workspace Explorer (on page 246). You can select design objects
based on their type by using Select (on page 347) in combination with a Locate Filter (on
page 148).
Each task has specific commands for creating and editing the design objects needed by that
engineering discipline. For more information, see Tasks Menu (on page 612). These commands
provide a logical interface that steps you through the design process based on the object you
have selected. You use these commands to create and modify objects using the same intuitive
steps and workflows.
The software stores design and reference data objects in standard relational databases
(Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle). Designers and engineers can access any portion of the model
required for their specific design activities, regardless of the discipline. When you create or edit
an object, the software immediately commits that object or change to the database so that it is
available to others. Access control is managed at the individual object level. Managers have the
flexibility to increase the number of users working on an area of the design while still giving
individual users control over their own objects. You are not limited by the access control
constraints of the design files in file-based design systems.
Administrators create and maintain the databases used by Smart 3D as well as the access
control to the data using Project Management.

Common User's Guide 20

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Access Control
Smart 3D manages access to design objects rather than to the application commands that
create the objects. For each model database, the site administrator creates a set of permission
groups in that model database. The permission groups typically represent the management
structure of an organization, such as design disciplines, working groups, or even an individual.
However, the software does not constrain you to this pattern. Your company might have other
ideas on using this access control grouping.
When you create a design object, the software assigns it to a permission group. The
administrator assigns a list of Windows users or user groups and the levels of access (Read,
Write, Modify, or Full) each user has to the objects within that permission group.

The Active Permission Group list on the Common toolbar identifies the
permission group that the software assigns a new object when you create it. This control does
not change the permission group of existing objects when you edit them. For more information,
see Permissions Overview (on page 22).
You can change the Permission Group property of existing objects on the Configuration tab
of the Properties dialog box. For more information, see Properties (on page 176).

Common User's Guide 21

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

The Status property of the design object overrides the Write access. This property can have the
values Working, In Review, Rejected, and Approved. You can only edit a design object if the
status is Working. This allows you to incrementally lock down the design. The status can also
be used as an indicator of when review is wanted or changes are needed.

To change the permission group for an object, you must have Write access to the current
permission group as well as to the permission group assigned to the object.
Only a user with Full (or approval) permission can set an object to Approved or change from
Approved to another status. A user with Write access to an object can change the status from
the other states to any state except Approved. In many organizations, only an administrator has
Full access.
You must also have Write access to the immediate system parent of a design object to create
an object in the system. This is analogous to the access control for creating files in Windows
folders. A separate set of permission groups is created in the catalog database for managing
access to the catalog data.

Permissions Overview
A site administrator can configure permission groups and levels of access in Project
Management (Start > Intergraph Smart 3D > Project Management). Your assigned
permission group, and your level of access (Read, Write, or Full Control) in that permission
group, defines the actions that are available to you when working with the software. The
following list shows some of the actions that permission groups affect:
 Creating objects
 Modifying objects
 Deleting objects
 Accessing menu commands
 Changing properties of objects
 Pasting and restoring objects from a backup
 Claiming objects
 Creating relationships between objects

Common User's Guide 22

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Consider the following example of interaction between permission groups and your work to
modify the model.
 The My Filters folder is assigned to Permission Group One with Full Control access;
however, unannounced to you, access to Permission Group One is changed to Read
Only.
 Create a filter called Surface Style Rule Two in the My Filters folder.
 Click Format > Surface Style Rules to assign this surface style rule.
 Select Surface Style Rule Two, and click Copy.
 Click Paste to add the rule; however, the software displays the following message: You do
not have permissions to access this object.
You cannot successfully complete the filter command because Permission Group One, which
contains Surface Style Rule Two, now has Read Only access and does not allow you to add
the rule.
Another example involves access to systems in the software. When you create a piping run, you
must have Write access to the pipeline system parent.
Approval Status of Objects
In addition to permission groups, the approval status of an object controls change during the
phases of a project. The approval status for an object can range from Working, In Review,
Rejected, or Approved. For example, in the Drawings and Reports task, or through the Tools >
Drawing Console command, you can specify the propagation of properties down the hierarchy,
from parents to children. However, if any of the objects in the hierarchy are set to Approved
status, the properties are not propagated. Likewise, objects set to Approved status cannot be
deleted or updated. For example, if an isometric drawing is approved, you cannot re-extract the
drawing from the model.

 You can change the permission group for an object only if you have Write access to that
permission group and to the permission group in which you plan to place the object. The
permission group is set on the Configuration tab of the Properties dialog box for an object.
 The Active Permission Group box on the main toolbar allows you to change the
permission group when you are placing or editing objects in the model. The list contains all
of the permission groups to which you belong.

Permission Groups and Routing

Several different users in different permission groups can work together when routing if you
know how the software handles the different situations. Piping fully supports different users who
have different sets of privileges and work on different runs, such as when working in a Global
Workshare Configuration.
The software creates an Intermediate End Feature (IEF) at the end of a pipe run connected to
another pipe run and creates a logical connection between the two IEFs/runs. The legs stop at
the IEF and are not shared between pipe runs. You do not need to create a separate permission
group for the pipe run or the pipe run features. All piping objects can be in the same permission
group.

Common User's Guide 23

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Assignment of Permission Groups

Permission groups are assigned as follows:
 Objects that you create directly are assigned to the active permission group.
 Objects the software creates are automatically assigned a permission group determined by
an internal set of rules. The permission group assigned is not necessarily the active
permission group. Examples of automatically placed objects include connections and a pipe
automatically inserted when two touching valves are separated.
 Parts generated by features are assigned the permission group of the parent feature;
however, runs can be in a different permission group than their collective features and parts.
 End features use the permission group of the run to which they belong.
 Connections use the permission group of the parts to which they are connected. If the
connection is between parts with different permission groups, the permission group to which
you have write access is used. If the connection is between an equipment nozzle and a
route part, the route part permission group is used for the connection.
 Piping connection objects (such as welds, bolt sets, gaskets, and clamps) use the
permission group of the connection that generated the object.

Systems and Permission Groups

A system is a logical grouping of sub-systems. When you add or remove a sub-system, you also
modify the parent system definition. Therefore, you must have write access to the parent
system. You do not need write access to the grandparent system. For example, to create a pipe
run, you need write access to the parent pipeline. However, you do not need access to the
system to which the pipeline belongs.
When participating in a Global Workshare Configuration, you must manage all permission
groups at the host site. The sub-system requirement for write access to the parent system is not
possible if the sub-system's permission group is created at the satellite site and the parent
system's permission group is created at the host site.
For example, your host site is Houston and your satellite site is London. You create a system
called Pipe Rack 100 and its controlling permission group is in Houston. You assign write
access to a user who works in London. During the workshare replication process, the Pipe Rack
100 system and permission group are duplicated in London. The user in London can add
objects such as columns, beams, and braces to the Pipe Rack 100 system because you gave
that user write access to the system's permission group in Houston. The London user cannot
delete or change any of the properties of the Pipe Rack 100 system in London because the host
site, Houston, owns it. He can only add objects to the system. If the London user travels to
Houston and logs on there, that user can delete or change any of the properties of the Pipe
Rack 100 system because the Houston host site owns it.

Common User's Guide 24

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Example Configuration A
In this example, two users, John and Peter, are working on the same run with exclusive access.
John is responsible for part of the run, and Peter is responsible for the other part of the run.
Neither John nor Peter should be able to modify the work of the other person.
The administrator should configure the permission groups as follows:
 Create three different permission groups: PG-Run, PG-John, and PG-Peter.
 Both John and Peter should have full control access to PG-Run.
 John should have full control access to PG-John while Peter should have read-only access
to PG-John.
 Peter should have full control access to PG-Peter while John should have read-only access
to PG-Peter.
The run should be created using the PG-Run permission group. When John works on his parts
of the run, he should use PG-John as the active permission group. When Peter works on his
parts of the run, he should use PG-Peter as the active permission group. The two halves of the
run should connect at a component such as a valve (piping) or a union (electrical).
For example, John routes his part of the run, places a flange, and then places a gate valve.
Peter then places a flange manually connecting to the open port of the gate valve, and then
continues his part of the run.

Example Configuration B
In this example, two users, John and Peter, are working on different but in-line connected runs
with exclusive access. For example, John places an elbow, a straight piece, and a union, then
stops. Peter connects to the open port of the union, and then continues routing. The
administrator should configure the permission groups as follows:
 Create two different permission groups: PG-John and PG-Peter.
 John should have full control access to PG-John while Peter should have read-only access
to PG-John.
 Peter should have full control access to PG-Peter while John should have read-only access
to PG-Peter.
John should create the run using the PG-John permission group and route his part of the run.
When Peter works on his part of the run, he should use PG-Peter as the active permission
group. The Intermediate End Features will handle the connection between the two parts of the
run.

Common User's Guide 25

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Example Configuration C
In this example, two users, John and Peter, are working on different runs connected by
branching components such as a tee. The administrator should configure the permission groups
as follows:
 Create two permission groups: PG-John and PG-Peter.
 John should have full control access to PG-John; Peter should have read-only access to
PG-John.
 Peter should have full control access to PG-Peter; John should have read-only access to
PG-Peter.
John creates an initial header run using PG-John as the active permission group and routes it
as needed. Peter now wants to branch from John's run. Peter sets PG-Peter as the active
permission group and selects the header in John's run from which to branch. Instead of creating
the header component (such as a tee), the software generates a To Do List item for John.
When John updates the out-of-date To Do List item, the software modifies the header to add
the tee, and then generates a To Do List item for Peter.
When Peter updates his out-of-date To Do List item, the software fixes the branch leg (the end
of the branch leg is adjusted to the tee port). This is called a double hand-shaking mechanism.

Example Configuration D
In this example, an administrator has created two separate Windows® Active Directory groups,
each with different permissions, under the model.
 The first Windows® Active Directory group, Group A, has been assigned write privileges to
the permission group, PG-1. A user, John, is a member of this group.
 The second Windows® Active Directory group, Group B, has been assigned read-only
access privileges to PG-1. John is also a member of this group.
 Because John is a member of Group A, which has write privileges, John therefore has write
privileges to PG-1.

Common User's Guide 26

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Global Workshare
A Global Workshare Configuration (GWC) allows you to work on a model from several remote
locations. Designed for companies running facilities from multiple sites (EPCs or
Owner/Operators, for example) or for multiple companies that are working on a model, the
Global Workshare function involves a single, central database, called the Host, in which all the
changes come together as if they were created at a single geographic location. Changes to the
databases are automatically distributed to the locations using the underlying database
replication technology (SQL Server or Oracle).
The host location maintains the master site and catalog databases. Administrators at the remote
locations can edit the site and the catalog database directly on the host through authorized
remote logons because the editing operations do not include interactive graphics that consume
high bandwidth. Changes made to the site and catalog databases on the host are automatically
replicated to duplicate databases at remote satellite locations.
You can reference the objects created and owned by other locations as inputs for your designs.
You can change the ownership of the objects through the Configuration tab on the Properties
dialog box. For more information, see Configuration Tab (on page 144).
You can only modify those model objects that are assigned to the permission groups owned by
your workshare location. When you transfer objects from a permission group owned by one
location to a permission group owned by another location, you must also transfer any related
objects that cannot be edited without also editing their required parent. In most cases, Smart 3D
automatically changes such objects into the same permission group. Change the permission
group of one and the software automatically changes the other. Piping features and piping parts
are examples. However, you must manually assure that some objects are kept in the same
permission group when in the workshare configuration.
For more information, see the Global Workshare User's Guide.

Common User's Guide 27

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Design Session
You begin a design session for the first time by starting Smart 3D and then selecting a session
template. The session template contains settings and defaults for the commands of all
application areas. Use Define Workspace (on page 62) to select the model to access, and
then define or select a filter that identifies the specific data to see. Your administrator will have
some standard filters already defined for use. You can also create personal filters that are stored
for you in the database.
The software retrieves the data that you want to see from the model database to your computer
memory, and displays that data in the graphic windows. Each time you create or edit a design
object, the change is immediately committed to the Model database on the database server. No
design data is temporarily saved on your computer. You can see the data that was created by
others after you run Define Workspace by using Refresh Workspace (on page 69) .
Refresh Workspace reruns the filter and retrieves only the new or changed data that
meets the filter criteria.

Session File
When you exit Smart 3D, the software saves the graphics that you see and all the defaults that
you established while modeling in a session file on your computer. You can quickly start another
design session later by opening the saved session file. This restores you to exactly the same
views of the model as when you exited Smart 3D.
Opening a saved session file and running Refresh Workspace is much faster than running
Define Workspace with a new filter in a new session file. It also reduces the load on the
database server. So, as a rule, begin working in Smart 3D by opening an existing session file.
Use Define Workspace only after you have created a new filter. If you experience many
unexpected modeling problems, try starting a design session using a new session file created
using a template.
Save session files that use the different filters needed for your daily work to a folder for easy
access. You can identify this folder as the default location for Open (on page 54) by using
Options (on page 494).

Relationships and Concurrency

Regardless of the data you request to see by using Define Workspace , the relationships
Smart 3D maintains among design objects assure that supporting design data is automatically
retrieved from the database server when it is needed. An edit automatically uses only current
information from the server.

Common User's Guide 28

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

For example, a piping designer and an equipment designer could be working concurrently in the
model. The equipment designer might move a piece of equipment, and then the piping designer
attempts to modify the pipe without refreshing the data in his workspace. The edit of the piping is
controlled by the current equipment model on the database server. The position of the straight
feature is defined by its connection to the equipment nozzle. When the piping user selects the
pipe to edit, the position of the feature is updated based on the current equipment nozzle
position in the database. The graphic display of equipment, however, continues to be that from
the last time the software synchronized the session file with the Model database. This can be
confusing, so good practice is to click Refresh Workspace before editing when you are
working in a concurrent design area. For more information, see Refresh Workspace (on page
69).

Common User's Guide 29

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Modifying Objects
When you select an object in the model, a ribbon displays with tools for editing those design
objects. Usually, the ribbon for a single object is the same or very similar to the create command
for that object. You can edit any design properties of the object by clicking the appropriate
options to select new inputs.
You must click Finish when you change an option or property associated with an object. Smart
3D commits changes to the object properties immediately to the model database. Placement
options are typically on the left side of the ribbon. Object properties are typically on the right side
of the ribbon.

1. Placement options 2. Object properties

In some cases, a create command places multiple design objects. In these cases, the modify
ribbon for each object is different from the ribbon used to create those objects. The ribbon
provides tools that focus on the modification of the specific object you have selected. For
example, Smart 3D creates turns automatically as you use Route Pipe . There is no place
turn command. You can, however, select and edit the turns.

Common User's Guide 30

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Design Aids
PinPoint (on page 389) / is active when any command prompts you to enter a point.
The PinPoint options allow you to enter precision coordinates relative to the selected coordinate
system and precision coordinate offsets relative to any point in the model.

The SmartSketch 3D tool is active whenever a command prompts you to enter a point. When
you position your cursor over geometry, it locates the precision points on the geometry
intersection points.
When your cursor is close to a SmartSketch 3D point, the geometric objects providing the
precision are highlighted and a small glyph near the cursor displays the specific type of precision
point found. For more information, see SmartSketch Options (on page 401). When you click to
enter the point, the coordinates of that precision point, the type of precision point, and the
objects providing the point are supplied to the command prompting for the point. Many
commands create relationships that maintain the point at the precision point location when the
related objects are modified.

Common User's Guide 31

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

The basic types of SmartSketch 3D points are:

 Key points on connection ports such as the connection point on a piping nozzle, a conduit,
HVAC, and foundation ports.
 Key points on geometry such as an end point, a divisor point, a point along a linear object,
and the center of a circle.
 Intersection points such as the intersection point of two linear objects or a point along the
intersection of two planes.
 Linear relationship points. For example, if the command prompts for two points, the second
point can locate the points that make the line between the first and second points parallel or
perpendicular to another linear object or an axis of the active coordinate system.

Common User's Guide 32

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Object Relationships and Associations

All existing 3D design tools use a minimum number of relationships between items in the design
because relationships are hard to manage in the software. The more relationships, the greater
the intelligence of the application. While the intelligence typically increases linearly with the
number of relationships, the complexity and cost of processing time in the software typically
increases geometrically. To address this problem, Smart 3D deals with relationship
management in a generic way, increasing the number of data relationships in Smart 3D without
the exponential increase in software complexity. Thus, Smart 3D makes liberal use of
relationships between design objects to make the applications behave as intelligently as
possible.
It is important to understand the relationships that are established when you create a design
object so that you can build designs that reflect your design intent when modifications are made.
If you do not pay attention to the relationships that you are creating, then you might get
confused by the editing behavior you see when you try to make modifications. For example, if
you tried to just select a corner brace and move it away from the corner, it would not move. That
is because the column and the beam define its position.
The key relationships currently maintained by Smart 3D design objects can be broadly classified
as:
 Positions defined by associative points entered when creating design objects (key point on
design object, intersection between two linear elements, point on linear element, point on
surface, and so on). Examples include:
 Slab or plate system by 3 points
 Handrail path
 Volume by 2 and 4 points
 Volume by path
You see these relationships at work when you place a handrail by path and then modify any
of the related objects.
 Positions defined by reference to planes. Examples include:
 Structure slab or plate system that depends on referenced surface
 Structure ladder that depends on an elevation plane
 Equipment that has mate and align relationships with planes
 Positions defined by reference to another design object as a whole. Examples include:
 Route object that depends on the connectivity to ports of other route objects and
equipment. This is evident when you modify the piping rolling offset.
 Hanger or support that depends on the route object and supporting structure.
 Structure member that depends on the connection to other structure members and on
connection to grid system lines.
You see these relationships at work when you change the beam section size and see
changes in a vertical corner brace. The connected brace adjusts automatically to
maintain the correct work point alignment, and the corner plate adjusts according to the
design rules.

Common User's Guide 33

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

Bracket that depends on referenced plate or profile systems.

 Properties defined by correlation to information from SmartPlant Enterprise
The design object requires some of the relationships because the information from the related
object is needed to calculate the object. Some of the relationships are optional. You can see
which are mandatory and which are optional when you copy and paste a design object. The
optional relationships are indicated. You must pick new required inputs (or keep the same
inputs) to paste. You can elect to delete the optional relationships. For more information, see
Paste (on page 132).

Common User's Guide 34

 The Smart 3D Design Approach

To Do List
When multiple designers work in a single model, there will inevitably be inconsistencies that
must be resolved. Smart 3D keeps track of these issues with the To Do List (on page 264). This
tool shows you issues or inconsistencies identified by the relationships that you must resolve in
your model. Individual designers are expected to review and resolve To Do List issues for their
design objects as part of the normal modeling activity.

Interference Detection
When set up by an administrator, Smart 3D interference detection runs in the background, much
like the spell checking found in many word processing applications. Because of this, the
software identifies interferences so that you can resolve them quickly as they are created.
For example, you can activate a local interference detection process to immediately identify
interferences with objects in your workspace as you create or modify objects. These local
interference indicators are temporary design aids that the software removes when you refresh
your workspace.
A server-based interference process evaluates all objects in the model as they are created or
edited and creates permanent interference records. The server-based interference checking
(Database Detect) process runs directly on the Model database. This concurrent process can
be run on any computer on which the Database Interference Detection service is installed.
After the database administrator starts the service, Smart 3D automatically checks all existing
objects that have not been checked and all new or modified objects for interference. You never
have to be concerned about when to run Interference Check; it runs all the time. The process
can be stopped and restarted later. The system knows which objects need to be checked. When
you clear an interference by editing an object, the related interference record is automatically
deleted from the database.
You can see and select the interferences in the graphic view or in a list view to approve or add
notes. A paper-based interference review process is not needed. Individual designers are
expected to review and resolve interference issues for their design objects as part of the normal
modeling activity.
For more information, see Checking Interferences (on page 426).

Common User's Guide 35

SECTION 3

Best Practices
You might encounter situations where you do not know the best technique for using views,
styles, and aspects. The following best practices guide you through these processes. Because
your modeling environment is unique, specific instructions are not possible. However, enough
detail is provided so that you can work through the solutions.

In This Section
Using multiple graphics windows .................................................. 36
Using clipping ............................................................................... 37
Saving views ................................................................................. 40
Using transparent styles ............................................................... 42
Using system folders to manage styles ........................................ 43
Using surface style rules ............................................................... 44
Using enhanced edges render modes .......................................... 46
Changing default colors ................................................................ 47
Using the Reference Geometry aspect ......................................... 47

Common User's Guide 36

 Best Practices

Using multiple graphics windows

Consider setting up multiple graphics windows for the following situations:
 You need to see both a detailed view and the context for that view in the larger model.
 You need to see things from multiple orientations.
 You need to be able to rotate the display of objects. This is usually easier to do with a
smaller, clipped view.

Common User's Guide 37

 Best Practices

Using clipping
You can use clipping planes to focus your view on specific objects in the model. The following
procedure displays figures from an example model.
Rotating the display of a clipped view rotates about the center of that clipping volume.
Because of this, objects are less likely to rotate out of the display area. Unclipped volumes
rotate the entire model, which can cause unexpected results.

Set the clipping volume

1. Select objects that represents the limits of the area to display.

2. Click Clip by Object .

The objects within the volume defined by the selected objects display.

For more information, see Clip by Object (on page 185).

Common User's Guide 38

 Best Practices

Modify the clipping volume using the Active View Control

1. Click Active View Control .
The Active View Control dialog box displays.
You must establish the clipping planes before using Active View Control to
display the clipping planes on the Active View Control dialog box.
2. Drag the clipping planes to display the correct volume.

For more information, see Active View Control (on page 196).

Common User's Guide 39

 Best Practices

Modify the clipping volume using Clip by Volume or Plane

1. Click Clip by Volume or Plane .
If you have established the clipping planes, they display in the model. Otherwise, you must
provide points to establish the clipping volume.
2. Drag the clipping planes to display the correct volume.

You can also use QuickPick to position the clipping planes.

For more information, see Clip by Volume or Plane (on page 187).

Common User's Guide 40

 Best Practices

Saving views
Saving a view allows you to quickly restore your display with your specified zoom and clipping
settings. Named views are saved in the session file. For more information, see Named Views
(on page 201).

Saving a named view

1. Click a view to make it active.
2. Click View > Named Views.
3. In the blank line indicated by an asterisk, type a name and description for the saved view.

Displaying a named view

1. Click any view.
2. Click View > Named Views.
3. Click a saved view to recall.
4. Click Apply.
The named view displays in the selected window.

Common User's Guide 41

 Best Practices

Using transparent styles

Transparent styles allow you to see more of the detail in your model without zooming in. This is
particularly helpful when you have a lot of objects in the graphics area.

Default style Translucent style

For more information, see Surface Style Rules (on page 338).
1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
The Surface Style Rules dialog box displays.
2. Select the style rule to use. You can modify an existing rule, or create a new one.
The Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box displays.
3. Name the style rule, if necessary.
4. Select a filter that meets your needs.
5. Select a translucent style from the Style applied list.
6. Click Properties next to the Style applied list.
The Modify Style dialog box displays.
7. Change the Opacity box to 0.25.
8. Click OK on the Modify Style dialog box.
Changing the style changes the display for everyone using the model.
9. In the Select all aspects to which the style will be applied list, select the boxes for the
aspects to display in the transparent style.
The mores aspects you select, the larger the session file becomes.

Common User's Guide 42

 Best Practices

10. Click OK on the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box.

11. Select the style rule that you modified from the Style rule library list on the Surface Style
Rules dialog box, and then click Add.
12. Click OK.
The parts that meet your filter display in the translucent color.

Common User's Guide 43

 Best Practices

Using system folders to manage styles

You can use system folders to simplify the use of styles and make it easier to focus on the
objects that you are working on. Create system folders for the types of objects that you want to
display using a specific style. For example, you could have a folder for all of the structure
objects. Assign a view style to that folder, and then all structure created within that folder will
display using that style. For more information, see Surface Style Rules (on page 338).
1. Create the system folders in the Workspace Explorer to meet your needs.
2. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
3. Click New.
4. Type a name for the rule in the Rule name box.
5. Select Create New Filter from the Filter list.
6. Type a name for the filter in the Name box.
7. Click the System tab.
8. Select the system folder.
9. Click OK on the New Filter Properties dialog box.
10. Select the style to apply from the Style applied list.
11. If necessary, click Properties next to the Style applied list, and adjust the style properties.
12. Click OK on the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box.
13. Select the style rule that you created from the Style rule library list.
14. Click Add.
15. Click OK on the Surface Style Rules dialog box.
16. Create the object in the appropriate system folders.
The objects display using the view style assigned to the folder.

Common User's Guide 44

 Best Practices

Using surface style rules

You can use surface style rules to apply a visual style to objects found by a filter. There is a
library of filters delivered with Smart 3D. For more information on surface style rules, see
Surface Style Rules (on page 338).

Common User's Guide 45

 Best Practices

Using enhanced edges render modes

Using enhanced edges makes it easier to see similar objects that overlap.

Smooth Shading Shaded with Enhanced Shaded with Hardware

Edges Enhanced Edges

For more information, see Format View (on page 307).

1. Click Format > View.
The Format View dialog box displays.
2. Select the type of shading to use from the Render Mode list.
3. Click OK.

 Shaded with Enhanced Edges uses software to create the enhancement. Models may
take longer to refresh with this option.
 Shaded with Hardware Enhanced Edges refreshes more quickly. This option is only
available if your graphics card supports it.

Common User's Guide 46

 Best Practices

Changing default colors

Changing the default background color may make it easier to find objects in your model. For
more information, see Options (on page 494).
1. Click Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Click the Colors tab.
3. Select a color from the Background list.
4. Select a color with sufficient contrast to the Background color from the Handle list.
The software uses the Handle color for glyphs. If the Handle color does not have
sufficient contrast to the Background color, the glyphs can be difficult to see.
5. Click OK.

Using the Reference Geometry aspect

You can turn the display of certain objects, such as reference curves, on and off by controlling
the display of the Reference Geometry aspect. For more information, see Format View (on page
307).
1. Click Format > View.
The Format View dialog box displays.
2. Select Reference Geometry from the Selected Aspects list to turn off the display of the
objects included in that aspect.

Common User's Guide 47

SECTION 4

File Menu
The File menu provides commands for managing session files, updating and defining the
workspace, printing, importing, and exporting. Some of the commands on this menu may
change depending on the active task. The Most Recent File list at the bottom of the menu
provides quick access to the session files you use most.

In This Section
Managing Sessions ...................................................................... 48
Defining Workspace Content ........................................................ 58
Importing and Exporting Data ....................................................... 69
Print .............................................................................................. 124
Most Recently Used List ............................................................... 125
Exit ................................................................................................ 126

Common User's Guide 48

 File Menu

Managing Sessions
Each time you use the software, you use a session that allows you to save certain properties,
such as window size, layout, and view orientation from one work session to the next. One of the
settings saved in the session is the workspace. During a session, you define a workspace to
view and work with certain objects in the model data. Defining a workspace also allows you to
create and name filters that restrict the data of the entire model into more manageable subsets
for working.
Therefore, we recommend that you save your session and use this saved session to open your
model in Smart 3D. This practice saves you the effort of defining your workspace from scratch.
You need only use the Refresh Workspace command to update all the views in the
workspace with the most current information from the database.
The name of the current session file appears in the title bar of the application, along with the
name of the task, model name, and active filter. You can also see this information on the
Windows task bar. This information is helpful when multiple instances of the software are
running, such as during a Paste and Restore operation.

The workspace you define appears in the Workspace Explorer, which allows you to move
throughout the hierarchy of your workspace. You can view the workspace using the System,
Assembly, Space, WBS (Work Breakdown Structure), Analysis, PDS, Reference, and
Reference 3D views. Each view corresponds to a tab at the bottom of the Workspace
Explorer. You can use the Tools > Options command to specify the tabs to show in the
Workspace Explorer. For more information, see Change the Displayed Workspace Explorer
Tabs (on page 497).
Whenever you create a new session, you are working with templates. In this context, a template
is a standard Workspace file that you have placed in the Templates folder; you use a template
as a pattern to assemble the parameters you want for a new work session.
The New command creates a new session using any of the available templates. Three standard
templates are delivered with the application: Empty, English Units, and Metric Units. These
templates are in the [Product Folder]\CommonApp\SessionTemplates folder.
You have the option to modify any template to satisfy specific requirements for a site. You can
create a new template by copying one of the delivered templates and renaming it. Then, open
the copied template in the software to specify the views, styles, and other properties.
When the New dialog box appears, the Empty template is selected by default. By storing the
default templates for these session files in sub-directories, the software can supply named tabs
on the New dialog box. This dialog box can expand to accommodate multiple tiers of tabs as
necessary for particular product configurations.
Optionally, you can determine an alternative default selection or configuration. Using multiple
tabs, each tab on the New dialog box has a unique Empty template and other tab-specific
templates for the environment. Template files do not have a special extension. They are regular
workspace documents you have placed in the proper folder on your system.

Common User's Guide 49

 File Menu

The Open dialog box allows you to access any saved session to continue working, to make
changes, or to review completed work. Indicate the location in which you want to find an existing
session using the Look in list. If necessary, filter the displayed files using the Files of type list.
Then, select the file you want to open in the file list and click Open.
You can receive context-sensitive information about commands and dialog boxes by
pressing F1.
See Also
Create a new session (on page 52)
Create a session template (on page 53)
Define a workspace using a new filter (on page 63)
Define a Workspace Using an Available Filter (on page 63)
Open (on page 54)

Managing Sessions Common Tasks

The following tasks are frequently used when you work with sessions.

Create a New Session

You can begin a new session with a unique workspace definition and other properties. For more
information, see Create a new session.

Open a Session
You can open a session you previously saved. For more information, see Open a session.

Save a Session
You can save a session so you can return to it later. This is helpful when you have setup
complicated views and filters in the session file.

Common User's Guide 50

 File Menu

Session Files Best Practices

Use the following best practices when working with session files.

Save Session Files

 After restoring new databases from a backup, open the model, make necessary setting
changes, and save new session files.
 Save a session file after making significant changes, such as splitting blocks and detailing
structure. This minimizes the refresh time the next time you open the model from the
session file.
 You cannot save a session file if you run out of memory or the session terminates
abnormally. Re-open the session file and refresh the workspace to restore. If new objects
are not defined in a filter, browse the database and add the objects to the filter.

Global Workshare
 When working in a global workshare environment, refresh the workspace after opening a
session file.

Share Session Files

When sharing a session file, define the session file with catalog or model filters. You must have
appropriate permissions to create or modify catalog filters and model filters. For more
information, see Permission Group Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) (on page 377) and
Permissions Overview (on page 22).
 Catalog filters are used like reference data in the catalog. A catalog filter applies to
company-wide operations. For example, your administrator can define filters such as
Company_Filter_1, Company_Filter_2.
 Model filters are available to all users assigned to a specific database model.
 Delivered catalog filters query different types of model objects.
 Filters created under My Filters are not available to other users.
 You must have appropriate privileges to create, edit, or delete model and catalog filters.
Do not create model filters at a satellite site.

Common User's Guide 51

 File Menu

New
Creates a new session based on a template.

 You can choose from any of the standard templates or any custom templates created for
your site. Standard templates include the default Empty template, the English Units
template, and the Metric Units template.
 The delivered Nominal Piping Diameter (NPD) default unit in both English and Metric
templates is Native (fractional). The NPD unit default is mm (millimeters) with precision set
to zero.

New Dialog Box (on page 54)

What do you want to do?

 Create a new session (on page 52)
 Create a session template (on page 53)

Create a new session

1. Click File > New.
New Dialog Box (on page 54)
2. On a tab, select a template. You can choose among the standard templates (Empty,
English Units, or Metric Units) or a custom template you defined previously.

 The Workspace Templates path is specified on the File Locations tab of the Tools >
Options dialog box. If the path includes subfolders within a hierarchy, the name of each
subfolder appears as a separate tab on the New dialog box. For example, you can have
tabs named by project or by task.
 The delivered NPD default unit in both English and Metric templates is Native
(fractional). Also, the NPD unit default is mm (millimeters) with precision set to zero.
3. Click OK.
4. If you select the Empty template, click Tasks > Configure Task List to configure the task
list to meet your needs. If you selected another template, you do not need to perform this
step.
Configure Tasks (on page 617)
5. Click File > Define Workspace.
The shortcut key for the Define Workspace command is CTRL+W.
6. In the Model list, select the name of the model database.
7. In the Filter list, select an existing filter or create a new one.

Common User's Guide 52

 File Menu

8. Click OK.
9. Click File > Save to save the new session.
10. Type a name for the session file.
11. Define a location where you want to save the file.
12. Click Save.
The software names your new session Untitled by default until you save the new
session and assign it a new name.

Create a session template

You can create a session template based on any of the standard templates delivered with the
application or a custom template you defined previously.
1. Click File > New.
New Dialog Box (on page 54)
2. On a tab, select a template. You can choose among the standard templates (Empty,
English Units, or Metric Units) or a custom template you defined previously.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the views, styles, and other properties that satisfy specific requirements for a site.
5. Click File > Save As.
6. Browse to the template folder.

 The Workspace Templates path is specified on the File Locations tab of the Tools >
Options dialog box. The default location is [Product
Folder]\CommonApp\SessionTemplates.
 You can store the session templates in subfolders within the template folder. The
software can supply named tabs on the New dialog box. If the path includes subfolders
within a hierarchy, the name of each subfolder appears as a separate tab on the New
dialog box. For example, you can have tabs named by project or by task. In this way,
the New dialog box can expand to accommodate multiple tiers of tabs as necessary for
particular product configurations.
7. In the File name box, specify the name of the session template.
8. Click Save.

Common User's Guide 53

 File Menu

New Dialog Box

Specifies the path to the template you want to use to create a new session.
General
Displays all the available templates for creating a new session. By default, the software
provides three templates: Empty, English Units, and Metric Units. The Empty template is
a default template without any stored units. The English Units template displays
measurements using the English system, while the Metric Units template displays
measurements using the metric system. You can store templates in any location you want,
but by default, the software looks for templates in the location designated for templates. You
can designate a different location or custom path by clicking Tools > Options and selecting
the File Locations tab.
The Workspace Templates path is specified on the File Locations tab of the Tools >
Options dialog box. If the path includes subfolders within a hierarchy, the name of each
subfolder displays as a separate tab on the New dialog box. For example, you could have
tabs named by project or by task.

Common User's Guide 54

 File Menu

Open
Opens an existing session. If you have a session open when you click this command, you
receive a message asking if you would like to save the changes to the active session.
The software examines the file permissions assigned to a session before it opens a session. If
you do not have the necessary permissions to open a session, or if another user has the
session opened exclusively, a warning message indicates why you cannot open the session.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Click Yes to save the current session, or click No to close the current session without
saving.
3. In the Look in box, browse to locate a session.
4. Select a session to open.
5. Click Open.

 You can also open a session file by double-clicking it, or right-click the session file and
select Open.
 If the session connection fails, use the Modify Database and Schema Location utility to
set the Site database and schema. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph Smart 3D >
Database Tools > Modify Database and Schema Location.

Open a session
1. Click File > Open.
2. Click Yes to save the current session, or click No to close the current session without
saving.
3. In the Look in box, browse to locate a session.
4. Select a session to open.
5. Click Open.

 You can also open a session file by double-clicking it, or right-click the session file and
select Open.
 If the session connection fails, use the Modify Database and Schema Location utility to
set the Site database and schema. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph Smart 3D >
Database Tools > Modify Database and Schema Location.

Common User's Guide 55

 File Menu

Close
Closes the active session. If you have changed data since you last saved, or if you have not
saved a new session, the software prompts you to save the file.

Close a session
Click File > Close.
If a session is open when you click this command, you receive a message that asks if
you want to save changes to the active session.

Save
Saves the active workspace as a session (.ses) file with its currently defined name and
location. If you are saving the session for the first time, the Save As dialog box appears, so you
can specify the location, which could be a local or network drive or a UNC path, as well as the
name of the session. The software adds an .ses extension to the file name to indicate that it is a
session file.
The shortcut key for the Save command is CTRL+S.

Save a session
While working in a session, click File > Save, or press CTRL+S.
See Also
Managing Sessions (on page 48)

Save As
Saves the active workspace session file with a different name or in a different location. A dialog
box prompts you to specify the location, which could be a local or network drive or a UNC path,
as well as the name of the session. The software saves all session files with an .ses extension
to the file name. Saving your session file to the desktop creates a session icon that provides you
with the fastest method for returning to your session.

 File names cannot contain the following characters: \, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, |
 If the session connection fails, use the Modify Database and Schema Location utility to
set the Site database and schema. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph Smart 3D >
Database Tools > Modify Database and Schema Location.

Common User's Guide 56

 File Menu

Rename or move a session

1. Click File > Save As.
2. Browse to the location where you would like to save the session.
3. In the File name box, type a new name for the session.

 You can use the Save As command to save a copy of your session file to your desktop or to
another drive (local or network). You can also save a session to a UNC location. Saving
your session file to the desktop creates a session icon that provides you with the fastest
method for returning to your session.
 The software adds the .ses extension to the file name to indicate it is a session file.
 File names cannot contain the following characters: \, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, |
 If the session connection fails, use the Modify Database and Schema Location utility to
set the Site database and schema. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph Smart 3D >
Database Tools > Modify Database and Schema Location.

Properties (Session Files)

Accesses general information about the current session file. On the General tab, you can
change the file properties. For example, you can remove the read-only property so that changes
are possible.

Show session properties

1. Open a session file.
2. Click File > Properties.
3. On the Properties dialog box, select the General tab to view the related properties.
The General tab contains basic information about your session file, such as type,
date created, and so forth. You cannot edit this information. However, you can edit the
Attributes check boxes.

Modify session properties

1. Open a session file.
2. Click File > Properties.
3. On the General tab, view the session type and location, and change the properties as
needed.
If you click File > Properties before saving the session file, the software prompts you
to save the file first.

Common User's Guide 57

 File Menu

Send
Sends a session file to one or more recipients through your e-mail application. When you select
the Send command, the software generates a new mail message and embeds your session
document in the message as an attachment. You can then choose your recipients, add a
descriptive phrase in the Subject box, and add text in the message area to accompany the
attached session document as needed.

 For the Send command to work, you must first have a default e-mail client defined on your
computer.
 The session document must have been saved at least once before it can be sent.

Send a session to another user

1. Open the session that you want to send.
A session document must have been saved at least once before it can be sent.
2. Click File > Send to open a new mail message and embed your session file as an
attachment.
3. Select the recipients for your session file.
4. Type a descriptive phrase for your session file in the Subject box.
5. Type an accompanying message in the message area.
6. Click Send to transmit the e-mail message with the attachment.

Common User's Guide 58

 File Menu

Common User's Guide 59

 File Menu

Defining Workspace Content

The first thing you must do after starting Smart 3D is to define the contents of your workspace.
The workspace contains only those objects that you want to work with from the database.
Keeping an uncluttered workspace allows you to work faster.
Using the File > Define Workspace command, you select a model and specify one of the object
filters designed for your model. The filter is a query that identifies the objects retrieved from the
database. For more information, see Select by Filter (on page 354).
You can also select a role to further refine the workspace filter. Each role is defined with a set of
disciplines and subclass object types. The role filter is applied to the workspace filter so that only
the object types that are included in the selected role are brought into the workspace.

 Selecting a role does not modify the workspace file definition. Commands that make use of
the active workspace filter, such as Snapshot View (on page 444), continue to use the filter
definition in the database.
 Roles and their included object classes and subclasses are defined in the
OptimizationForRole.xml file in the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\XML folder. If
the file is missing, the Define Workspace dialog box does not display the Role box. Your
administrator can customize OptimizationForRole.xml. For more information, see Define
roles (on page 64). For more information, see Define roles (on page 64).
The software retrieves all the objects to your active session that match the criteria defined in the
filter and role for the selected model. Then, when you save your session, the software stores
your workspace definition so you will see the same data the next time you open the session.
Before loading the query results to your workspace, the software determines whether your
computer has enough virtual memory to contain the results. If you do not have adequate
memory available, the software displays a warning that your workspace size is likely to exceed
the available memory of your computer. You can continue by clicking Yes. If you click No, the
query load stops, and the Define Workspace dialog box returns so that you can redefine your
search criteria.
Due to the 32-bit precision limitations of graphic cards, you may need to
create several design coordinate systems so that the objects being modeled are within 10,000
meters (6.2 miles) of the global coordinate system. Objects modeled outside this limit will not
display correctly. If your model coordinate values are larger than this limit (for example, E =
20,000, N = 30,000), to get the coordinate readout that you want, you should define a coordinate
system at correspondingly large negative values (example, E = -20,000, N = -30,000). Then, use
the coordinate system that you created as your active coordinate system for modeling and
output. Do not bring this new coordinate system into your workspace, or you will have the
display problems that you are trying to avoid. In addition to the 10,000 meter global coordinate
system limit described above, the marine mode is limited to a 5,000 meter cube.
See Also
Define a workspace using a new filter (on page 63)
Define a Workspace Using an Available Filter (on page 63)
Define roles (on page 64)
Define Workspace (on page 62)
Define Workspace Dialog Box (on page 68)

Common User's Guide 60

 File Menu

Defining a Workspace Common Tasks

The following tasks are frequently used when you define a workspace and set the view options.

Define a Workspace Using an Available Filter

You can specify the objects you want to appear in your workspace using an existing filter. For
more information, see Define a Workspace Using an Available Filter (on page 63).

Define a Workspace Using a New Filter

You can specify the objects you want to appear in your workspace by creating a new filter. For
more information, see Define a workspace using a new filter (on page 63).

Define Roles
You--or an administrator, if you do not have permissions--can define, in the
OptimizationForRole.xml file in the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\XML folder, a list of
roles for selection in the Role box in the Define Workspace dialog box. For more information,
see Define roles (on page 64).

Show Workspace Properties

You can view the properties of your workspace (session file) after you create it. For more
information, see Properties (Session Files) (on page 57).

Refresh a Workspace
After defining the workspace, you can use File > Refresh Workspace to keep the workspace
objects up-to- date. For more information, see Refresh Workspace (on page 69).

Common User's Guide 61

 File Menu

Define Workspace
Selects a model in which to work, a filter designed for that model, and a role. The filter and role
retrieve from the database the objects that you want to appear in your workspace. For more
information, see Select by Filter (on page 354).This command is on the File menu. The shortcut
key for Define Workspace is CTRL+W.
The first thing you must do after starting Smart 3D is to define the contents of your workspace.
The workspace contains only those objects that you want to work with from the database.
Keeping an uncluttered workspace allows you to work faster.
You can also select a role to further refine the workspace filter. Each role is defined with a set of
disciplines and subclass object types. The role filter is applied to the workspace filter so that only
the object types that are included in the selected role are brought into the workspace.

 Selecting a role does not modify the workspace file definition. Commands that make use of
the active workspace filter, such as Snapshot View (on page 444), continue to use the filter
definition in the database.
 Roles and their included object classes and subclasses are defined in the
OptimizationForRole.xml file in the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\XML folder. If
the file is missing, the Define Workspace dialog box does not display the Role box. Your
administrator can customize OptimizationForRole.xml. For more information, see Define
roles (on page 64). For more information, see Define roles (on page 64).
The software retrieves all the objects to your active session that match the criteria defined in the
filter and role for the selected model. Then, when you save your session, the software stores
your workspace definition so you will see the same data the next time you open the session.
Before loading the query results to your workspace, the software determines whether your
computer has enough virtual memory to contain the results. If you do not have adequate
memory available, the software displays a warning that your workspace size is likely to exceed
the available memory of your computer. You can continue by clicking Yes. If you click No, the
query load stops, and the Define Workspace dialog box returns so that you can redefine your
search criteria.
Due to the 32-bit precision limitations of graphic cards, you may need to
create several design coordinate systems so that the objects being modeled are within 10,000
meters (6.2 miles) of the global coordinate system. Objects modeled outside this limit will not
display correctly. If your model coordinate values are larger than this limit (for example, E =
20,000, N = 30,000), to get the coordinate readout that you want, you should define a coordinate
system at correspondingly large negative values (example, E = -20,000, N = -30,000). Then, use
the coordinate system that you created as your active coordinate system for modeling and
output. Do not bring this new coordinate system into your workspace, or you will have the
display problems that you are trying to avoid. In addition to the 10,000 meter global coordinate
system limit described above, the marine mode is limited to a 5,000 meter cube.

What do you want to do?

 Define a workspace using a new filter (on page 63)
 Define a workspace using an available filter (on page 63)
 Define roles (on page 64)

Common User's Guide 62

 File Menu

Define a workspace using a new filter

Filters define the criteria for the objects included in a workspace. For more information on filters,
see Select by Filter (on page 354).
1. Click File > Define Workspace, or press CTRL+W.
2. In the Model box, select the model in which you want to work.
3. Select Create New Filter in the Filter box.
Another method is selecting the More option in the Filter box, and then selecting
New Filter from the Select Filter dialog box. For more information on creating new filters,
see Create a New Filter (on page 360).
4. Type a name for the new filter in the Name box on the New Filter dialog box. The filter
name can be any number of alphanumeric characters including blanks, but the name must
be unique in the Model database. Filter names cannot include apostrophes.
5. Specify the filter search properties by using one or more of the properties tabs.
6. If you want your search to include nested objects, select the Include nested objects option.
7. After defining the filter, click OK.
8. Select a role from the list in the Role box.
Roles and their included object classes and subclasses are defined in the
OptimizationForRole.xml file in the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\XML folder. If
the file is missing, the Define Workspace dialog box does not display the Role box. Your
administrator can customize OptimizationForRole.xml. For more information, see Define
roles (on page 64).
9. Click OK.
The workspace refreshes with the new filter definition objects. Any objects in the current
select set are removed if they are no longer part of the workspace. Any objects remaining in
the select set are in modify mode.

 If the Database Detect option is running for the selected model, the filter automatically
includes all the associated interferences for the objects in the Workspace Explorer
(although interferences are not included for the filter). For more information, see Checking
Interferences (on page 426).
 Before loading the query results to your workspace, the software determines whether your
computer has enough virtual memory to contain the results. If you do not have adequate
memory available, the software displays a warning that your workspace size is likely to
exceed the available memory of your computer. It then asks if you want to continue. If you
want to continue anyway, click Yes. If you click No, the query load stops, and the Define
Workspace dialog box returns so that you can refine your search criteria.

Common User's Guide 63

 File Menu

Define a workspace using an available filter

1. Click File > Define Workspace, or press CTRL+W.
2. In the Model box, select the model in which you want to work.
3. Complete one of the following actions: (1) Select an existing filter that meets your search
criteria from the list in the Filter box; or (2) Select the More option in the Filter box to view
and select a filter from the other available filters.
4. Select a role from the list in the Role box.
Roles and their included object classes and subclasses are defined in the
OptimizationForRole.xml file in the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\XML folder. If
the file is missing, the Define Workspace dialog box does not display the Role box. Your
administrator can customize OptimizationForRole.xml. For more information, see Define
roles (on page 64).
5. Click OK.
The workspace refreshes with the new filter definition objects. Any objects in the current
select set are removed if they are no longer part of the workspace. Any objects remaining in
the select set are in modify mode.

 The Filter box displays up to the last ten filters selected for the selected model. If the filter
you want is not on this list, you can select the More option to display all the available filters.
If you are the first person to define a workspace for this task, then no previous filters are
listed in the Filter box. In this case, click the More option and select a filter in the tree view,
or click the Create New Filter option to create a new one. For more information, see Create
a New Filter (on page 360).
 When you save a session, the software saves the workspace definition.

Common User's Guide 64

 File Menu

Define roles
The list of roles for selection in the Role box in the Define Workspace dialog box is defined in
the OptimizationForRole.xml file in the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\XML folder.
Each role is defined with a set of disciplines and subclass object types. The role XML format
mimics the object classification hierarchy used in Smart 3D. You can see a tree view of the
object hierarchy in the Object Type tab of the Filter Properties dialog box.

Roles XML Format

<User-defined Name>
<Role Name="" Version="">
<Discipline ClassName="">
<Node ClassName="" >
<Node ClassName="" />
</Node>
</Discipline>
</Role>
</User-defined Name>
The top-most node can be any user-defined name.
The second-level node is the Role class with the Name attribute. The role name is displayed in
the Define Workspace dialog box Role drop-down list.
The third-level node is the Discipline class with the ClassName attribute. This provides the
top-most level of filtering. If the class has no sub-nodes, then all object types of the discipline
are included in the workspace. If the class has sub-nodes, then only the object types defined in
the sub-nodes are brought into the workspace.
The fourth- and fifth-level nodes are the Node class with the ClassName attribute. They define
discipline object types to be included in the workspace. Only the object types listed underneath
the discipline are brought into the workspace. If a node has sub-nodes, then only the object
types defined in the sub-nodes are brought into the workspace.

 Roles applied to filters that pull in referenced files or referenced 3D files must include the
classification nodes for these specific classes to populate the Workspace Explorer tree
view. If these classes are missing from the role definition, references are pulled in but the
Workspace Explorer cannot be populated.
<Discipline ClassName="Reference 3d File" />
<Discipline ClassName="Referenced File" />

Common User's Guide 65

 File Menu

 The discipline names and discipline sub-node names must match those defined in the Smart
3D object classification hierarchy. If in a role definition any of these node names do not
match an existing classification, an error message similar to the following example is shown
when the role filter is loaded. Click OK to continue, but the error node is excluded from the
workspace.

Example Roles Definition

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="windows-1252" ?>
<S3D>
<Role Name="Electrical Designer" Version="1.0">
<Discipline ClassName="Cableway">
<Node ClassName="Cableway Features" />
<Node ClassName="Cableways" />
</Discipline>
<Discipline ClassName="Cabling">
<Node ClassName="Cable Features" />
<Node ClassName="Cable Marker" />
<Node ClassName="Cable Runs" />
</Discipline>
<Discipline ClassName="Equipment and Furnishing">
<Node ClassName="Equipment">
<Node ClassName="Equipment A" />
</Node>
</Discipline>
<Discipline ClassName="Supports" />
</Role>
<Role Name="Equipment Designer" Version="1.0">
<Discipline ClassName="Equipment and Furnishing" />
<Discipline ClassName="Grid Systems" />
<Discipline ClassName="Structure">
<Node ClassName="Equipment Foundations" />
<Node ClassName="Members" />
<Node ClassName="Slabs" />
<Node ClassName="Walls" />
</Discipline>
</S3D>

Common User's Guide 66

 File Menu

In the previous example, two roles are defined:

Role Discipline Object Types

Electrical Designer Cableway Cableway Features

Cableways

Cabling Cable Features

Cable Marker
Cable Runs

Equipment and Furnishing Equipment

Equipment A

Hangers and Supports Supports

Equipment Designer Equipment and Furnishing All Equipment and Furnishing objects

Grid Systems All Grid objects

Structure Equipment Foundations

Members
Slabs
Walls

Common User's Guide 67

 File Menu

Define Workspace Dialog Box

Defines the workspace content using:
 The model in which you want to do your work
 A filter to retrieve objects for display in the workspace. For more information on filters, see
Select by Filter (on page 354).
Plant/Ship
Provides a list of the model databases for your site. Choose a model to work in from those
listed in this box. If your site only has one Model database, then the software lists only one
name. When you create a new Model database, it is added to the list. If you have multiple
sites, only the models associated with the active site appear in the list.
Filter
Displays a maximum of ten of the last filters selected for the workspace. This box is blank if
no filters were previously defined and used.
If you select the More option, the Select Filter dialog box appears. This dialog box displays
a tree view of other filters you can select. For more information, see Select Filter Dialog Box
(on page 369). The Create New Filter option opens the Filter Properties dialog box where
you can create a new filter. The software places the resulting new filter in the My Filters
folder. The software then returns to the Define Workspace dialog box where the new filter
name is displayed. If your permissions include edit privileges, the Define Workspace dialog
box also allows you to rename or delete filters and edit filter properties.
Properties
Displays the Filter Properties dialog box that provides tabs of optional properties for the
selected filter, or query criteria, you can select and apply to your filter. The System,
Assembly, and Named Space tabs allow you to select large groups of objects in the
database. If you want a more restricted selection, choose a tab such as Permission Group
or Object Type. The Permission Group tab properties limit the selection to only those
objects in a designated group. The Object Type tab displays a tree view of all objects in the
system. The objects are organized primarily by the task where you created them. Using this
tab restricts your selection to only those objects of the selected types. For more information,
see Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 371).
Role
Provides a list of user roles that you can select for the workspace. Each role is defined with
a specific set of disciplines and subclass object types. If a role is selected, only the object
types defined for the role are displayed in the workspace. Roles and their included object
classes and subclasses are defined in the OptimizationForRole.xml file in the [Reference
Data Folder]\SharedContent\XML folder. If the file is missing, the Define Workspace dialog
box does not display the Role box. Your administrator can customize
OptimizationForRole.xml. For more information, see Define roles (on page 64).

 The shortcut keys for the Define Workspace command are CTRL+W.
 You can also access the Select Filter dialog box by clicking Tools > Select by Filter.
 Before loading the query results to your workspace, the software determines whether your
computer has enough virtual memory to contain the results. If you do not have adequate

Common User's Guide 68

 File Menu

memory available, the software displays a warning that your workspace size is likely to
exceed the available memory of your computer. You can continue by clicking Yes. If you
click No, the query load stops, and the Define Workspace dialog box returns so that you
can redefine your search criteria.
See Also
Create a new filter (on page 360)
Define a workspace using a new filter (on page 63)
Define a Workspace Using an Available Filter (on page 63)
Define roles (on page 64)
Define Workspace (on page 62)
Edit Filter Properties (on page 367)

Refresh Workspace
Updates all the views in the workspace with the most current information from the database.
Use this command to see changes that other users in your permission group have made to
objects visible in your workspace, such as repositioning of equipment or adding new objects.
You can press F5 to refresh your workspace.
During the update, a small progress dialog box displays that allows you to cancel the update at
any time before it is finished. If another command was active before you selected Refresh
Workspace, the software stops the active command.
You are prompted to refresh your workspace if you select an object that is visible in
your workspace but another user has deleted from the model.

Refresh views in the workspace

Click File > Refresh Workspace, or press F5.
If another command was active before you selected Refresh Workspace, the software stops
the active command.
When Refresh Workspace completes, any objects that were in the select set are removed if
they are no longer part of the workspace. If there are objects in the select set when the
command completes, the modify command for the selected objects is the active command.

Common User's Guide 69

 File Menu

Importing and Exporting Data

Use the File > Import commands to import data for Electrical, Equipment, HVAC, Piping, and
Structure. The commands are similar for each task; however, Structure provides its own Import
and Export commands for CIS/2 files. For more information, see Import Structure (on page 89)
and Export Structure (on page 104).
You import data from XML files. The files are created in two ways - XML files generated using
the PDS Model Data Exporter, or XML files that are written in XMpLant format. PDS Model Data
Exporter exports PDS data into XML files in Intergraph Schema. XMpLant is an industry
standard (ISO15926), neutral format that is used to import third-party software data.

PDS Model Data Exporter XMpLant-formatted XML

 Creates XML data that is compatible with  This XML corresponds with XMpLant
the Intergraph (Ingr) schema. schema.

 Mapping files for Intergraph schema  Mapping files for XMpLant schema
XMLs are written in Excel workbooks. XMLs are written in XML format.

 The PDS Model Data Exporter utility is  XMpLant Samples and XMPlant
delivered separately from Smart 3D.a mapping files are delivered with Smart
3D for Piping, HVAC, Electrical, and
b
Equipment.
a
In the delivered-sample mapping workbook, for example, ElectricalTranslationMap.xls,
several sheets describe the mapping used for raceway, while the ConduitSpec sheet maps
the XML conduit run specifications. The CabletraySpec sheet specifies the mapping of all
the XML cableway specifications.
b
Use the corresponding Import dialog boxes to browse for the XMPlant XMLs and their
mapping files. The XMpLant mapping files to be used to import XMPlant XMLs for each
discipline are listed below:
Electrical - [Product Reference Data
Folder]\Translators\XMPlantS3DImport\ConfigurationFiles\Electrical\S3DXMpLantElectrical
Main.xml
Equipment - [Product Reference Data
Folder]\Translators\XMPlantS3DImport\ConfigurationFiles\Equipment\S3DXMpLantEquipMa
in.xml
HVAC - [Product Reference Data
Folder]\Translators\XMPlantS3DImport\ConfigurationFiles\HVAC\S3DXMpLantHVACMain.x
ml
Piping - [Product Reference Data
Folder]\Translators\XMPlantS3DImport\ConfigurationFiles\Piping\Map_XMpLant_S3D_Attrib
utes.xml
You can temporarily import geometry data in ACIS or IGES format from other software
packages, such as Tribon, NAPA, or Rhino. You can compare the temporary geometry to the
geometry of objects in the Model.
During the import process, the software applies LGF attributes to patches, if they are present.
This information is used later during a copy and mirror operation, if the hull is symmetrical.

Common User's Guide 70

 File Menu

You can also export geometry data in ACIS or IGES format. The export operation operates
against selected sheetbody and wirebody objects.
If you are exporting in IGES format, you can set the output data units using the Tools > Options
command.

 You must have a license for IGES in order to use the Import > IGES or Export > IGES
command.
 The data in the Geometry Analysis and Repair task is not saved in a session file or in the
database. If you delete geometry, or define or refresh the workspace, the imported geometry
is lost. You must export the data to an external file to save it. The imported geometry cannot
be used to create objects in the database.
The Import and Export ACIS/IGES commands are available in the Molded Forms and Geometry
Analysis and Repair tasks. The Structural Detailing task allows you to export ACIS and IGES
data.

Topics
PDS Model Data Exporter............................................................. 71
Import Electrical ............................................................................ 75
Import Equipment ......................................................................... 77
Import Grids .................................................................................. 81
Import HVAC................................................................................. 83
Import Piping................................................................................. 85
Import Structure ............................................................................ 89
Export Grids .................................................................................. 102
Export Structure ............................................................................ 104
Export Smart 3D Models to PDMS ............................................... 108
PDMS Export Validation ............................................................... 112
PDS Export ................................................................................... 117

PDS Model Data Exporter

Generates a discipline-specific XML data file that can be imported by the File > Import
command in Smart 3D. You access this dialog by clicking Start > All Programs > Intergraph
Smart 3D > Translators > PDS Model Data Exporter. You can use the PDS Model Data
Exporter with PDS 2008 SE (9.0) or later. If the PDS project is an earlier version, you need to
upgrade the project before using the utility to export data.
The PDS Model Data Exporter requires the separate lease and installation of the Smart 3D
PDS Project Translators (SEBY801AA). For more information, refer to the Plant Design
System (PDS) Guide available from Help > Printable Guides.
The PDS Model Data Exporter is available for the following disciplines:
 Piping - In the Piping discipline, because you can have piping networks connected across
models, a single XML file is specified for a set of model files being exported.
 Equipment - For the Equipment discipline, the PDS Model Data Exporter generates a single
XML file per model. Therefore, you specify the folder where the XML files should be placed.
The file names are named with the model name.

Common User's Guide 71

 File Menu

 Electrical (Raceway) - When you import the data in Smart 3D, you use the Import
Electrical command to import the route data and the Import Equipment command to
import the electrical equipment data. For the Raceway (Electrical) discipline, the PDS Model
Data Exporter behaves much the same as with Equipment. However, two XML files are
created, one for the route and one for the equipment. When you import the data in Smart
3D, you use the Import Electrical command to import the route data and the Import
Equipment command to import the electrical equipment data.
 HVAC - For the HVAC discipline, the PDS Model Data Exporter does not have access to the
HVAC_PROJ_NODE or HVAC_PROJ_PATH environment variables. Instead, the
executable sets the HVAC_PROJ_PATH to the path of the default HVAC model location as
obtained from pdtable_115. The executable requires that a projlist.txt file reside in the
parent folder. For example, an HVAC project named stdeng is integrated with a PDS project
as follows:
PDS Project Location : PDSServer E:\stdeng\project.
HVAC Models location : PDSServer E:\stdeng\models\hvac\stdeng.
This information is in pdtable_115.
In this configuration, the PDS Model Data Exporter sets the HVAC environment variables as
follows:
HVAC_PROJ_NODE : PDSServer
HVAC_PROJ_PATH : E:\stdeng\model\hvac
The HVAC project list file named projlist.txt should be available in this folder for the export
process to work.
Because you can have HVAC networks connected across models, you specify a single XML
file for a set of model files to be exported.
The PDS Model Data Exporter is not used to export Structure data from
FrameWorks Plus. You must use the CIS/2 interface to move data from FrameWorks Plus to
Smart 3D.

Common User's Guide 72

 File Menu

You can define export configuration files for each discipline. The configuration files include both
user-configurable attributes and user attributes. Sample export configuration files are delivered
with the PDExportToSP3D utility to be customized as needed.

Project
Specifies the PDS project to export. The drop-down provides a list of available PDS
projects.
Discipline
Specifies the discipline to export. You can select: Pipeline, Raceway (Electrical), Equipment,
and HVAC.
Area list
Displays a checkbox list of all the design areas in the selected discipline. You check the
boxes within the list to select the models in those Areas that will be exported.
Model Name list
Shows a list of the models in the selected Areas.
New Session
Resets the dialog box to start fresh from Project selection.
Open Session
Displays the Select Export Set File dialog from which to select a different PDS export set
file (.exp).

Common User's Guide 73

 File Menu

Next
Displays the next dialog box for exporting. This dialog shows a summary of the selected
PDS project and models. You specify the output XML file/folder as applicable, the export
configuration file, and the export set file entries.

Summary
Displays what you have selected to export.
Output XML file
Define the path and filename for the XML file to write. This is the XML file that Smart 3D
uses to import the data.
Export configuration file
Specify the path and file name of the export configuration file to use. There are configuration
files delivered in the \PDShell\PDExportToSP3D\config folder for the "out-of-the-box" PDS
attributes. If you have added custom attributes to PDS, you need to edit the configuration
files before you can use them. For more information about the export configuration files, see
the Plant Design System (PDS) User's Guide.
Export set file
Specify the path and file name for the export set file. This file is a settings file that you can
use with the Open Session command in case you need to rerun the export process. The
PDS Model Data Exporter also creates an export log file in the same folder as the Export
Set file.

Common User's Guide 74

 File Menu

Finish
Exports the data to the specified XML file using the configuration file specified.

Import Electrical
Imports Electrical data from an XML file, using mapping defined in an XLS (Microsoft Excel
workbook) file or an XMpLant XML mapping file. The input XML file is validated against the
defined electrical import schema to make sure the file is valid for import.

Sample Mapping Files

In the delivered sample mapping workbook, ElectricalTranslationMap.xls, click the Index tab
to view the worksheet name of the sheets. Click the name to jump to that sheet. For example,
click Generic-ItemCode-Map and view or specify details about Generic Conduit Component
Mapping on that sheet.
Example mapping configuration files for importing Intergraph Schema files are delivered in
[Product Folder]\Translators\ConfigurationFiles\Electrical.
Example mapping configuration files for importing XMpLant Schema files are delivered in
[Product Folder]\Translators\ConfigurationFiles\XMpLantSP3DMaps\Electrical.

Actions Taken
When you import electrical data, the command does the following:
 Creates cableways and conduit runs
 Imports the route network
 Imports branching configurations
 Imports components
 Imports attributes and user attributes

 You should import Electrical Equipment using File > Import > Equipment.
 You can use the PDS Model Data Exporter to create the input XML file for importing. For
more information, see PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 71).
 If there is an item in the XML file that has the model system set to blank or Undefined, the
Import Electrical command creates a generic system under the root with the naming
convention xxxxxxImport-Date-Time.
For example, the name might be ElectricalImport-6-27-2005 09:09:57AM. All objects with
the blank or Undefined parent system import to this new system. After import, you can
move the objects to your own System hierarchies.

Topics
Import Electrical Data Dialog Box ................................................. 76
Import XMpLant Formatted Electrical Data ................................... 76
Import Electrical Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter ............... 77

Common User's Guide 75

 File Menu

Import Electrical Data Dialog Box

Sets options for importing Electrical data.
XML file
Specifies the XML file to use for import. Click the button next to the box to browse for the
XML file. You can also select the parent folder to import all the XML files in that folder.
Map file
Specifies the XLS map workbook or XMpLant XML mapping file to use for import. Click the
button next to the field to browse for the map workbook or mapping XML file.
Log file
Specifies the location of the log file. By default, the location is the same as that selected in
the XML file box.
OK
Imports the data as specified by closing the import dialog box.
Apply
Imports the data as specified without closing the import dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels the operation.
View Log File
Opens the log file for viewing.
View Ingr File
Opens the Intergraph file for viewing.
XML Editor installs along with Microsoft Office. When the default software for
opening the XML file is XML Editor, the View Ingr File command does not open the XML file.
The XML file opens when the default software is a text editor such as Notepad.
See Also
Importing and Exporting Data (on page 69)
Import Electrical (on page 75)
Import XMpLant Formatted Electrical Data (on page 76)
Import Electrical Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 77)

Import XMpLant Formatted Electrical Data

1. Select File > Import > Electrical.
The Import Electrical Data dialog box opens.
2. Click the button next to the XML file box to select the XMpLant XML file to use for import.
3. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XMplant XML Mapping File,
SP3DXMpLantElectricMain.xml.
4. Click the button next to the Log file box to select the log file location.

Common User's Guide 76

 File Menu

5. Click OK or Apply to import the electrical data as specified. If problems occur, check the
import log file created in the same location as the input XML file.
6. Check the To Do List for items that require attention after importing.
If an item in the XML file has the parent system set to blank or Undefined, the Import
Electrical command creates a generic system under the root with the naming convention
xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be ElectricalImport-6-27-2005
09:09:57AM. All objects with the blank or Undefined parent system import to this new system.
After import, you can move the objects to your own System hierarchies.
See Also
Importing and Exporting Data (on page 69)
Import Electrical (on page 75)
To Do List (on page 264)

Import Electrical Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter

Use the PDS Model Data Exporter to create an import XML file. For more information, see PDS
Model Data Exporter (on page 71).
1. Select File > Import > Electrical.
The Import Electrical Data dialog box opens.
2. Click the button next to the XML file box to select the XML file to use for import.
3. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XLS map workbook to use for import.
4. Click the button next to the Log file box to select the log file location.
5. Click OK to import the electrical data as specified. If problems occur, check the import log
file created in the same location as the input XML file.
6. Check the To Do List for items that require attention after importing.

 The input XML file is validated against the defined electrical import schema to make sure the
file is valid for import.
 If an item in the XML file has the model system set to blank or Undefined, the Import
Electrical command creates a generic system under the root with the naming convention
xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be ElectricalImport-6-27-2005
09:09:57AM. All objects with the blank or Undefined parent system import to this new
system. After import, you can move the objects to your own System hierarchies.
See Also
Importing and Exporting Data (on page 69)
Import Electrical (on page 75)
To Do List (on page 264)

Common User's Guide 77

 File Menu

Import Equipment
Imports Equipment data from an XML file, using mapping defined in an XLS (Microsoft Excel
workbook) file or an XMpLant XML mapping file. The input XML file is validated against the
defined equipment import schema to make sure the file is valid for import.

Importing PDS Parametrics as Catalog Equipment into Smart 3D:

You can use the Type column in the PDS-EQP-Parametrics sheet to map PDS parametric
equipment to Smart 3D catalog equipment. If you specify the Type as CatalogEquipment, then
the software imports the corresponding parametric into Smart 3D as catalog equipment.
Case 1: Multiple parametrics may exist under a Design Equipment tag in a PDS .XML file for
which the Type is specified as CatalogEquipment. In this case, the software creates a new
equipment system, and parametrics are imported as catalog equipment into this new equipment
system. If any primitives follow the parametric equipment under the Design Import tag, then the
software creates an additional Design Equipment tag under the first equipment system. The
primitives are then imported as corresponding shapes under this Design Equipment tag. The
software names both the equipment system and the design system with the name of the design
equipment originating in the input XML.
Case 2: One or more parametrics can exist in a PDS .xml file under a Design Equipment tag.
However, if the Type for exactly one parametric is specified as Catalog Equipment, then that
parametric is imported into Smart 3D as catalog equipment. The remaining parametrics are
imported as equipment components under this catalog equipment. Additonally, all the primitives
that occur under the same parent Design Equipment tag are imported as shapes under this
Catalog Equipment tag. Thus, in this case, the newly created catalog equipment receives the
name of the design equipment from the input XML.

Sample Mapping Files

In the delivered sample mapping workbook, EQPTranslationMap.xls, click the Index tab to view
the worksheet name of the sheets. Click the name to jump to that sheet. For example, click
AspectMap and view or specify the lookup reference between Aspect attribute in XML to the
SP3D Equivalent Aspect.
Example mapping configuration files for importing Intergraph Schema files are delivered in
[Product Folder]\Translators\ConfigurationFiles\Equipment.
Example mapping configuration files for importing XMpLant Schema files are delivered in
[Product Folder]\Translators\ConfigurationFiles\XMpLantSP3DMaps\Equipment.

Common User's Guide 78

 File Menu

Actions Taken
When you import equipment data, the command does the following:
 Creates the design equipment
 Adds shapes, nozzles, and parametrics to the design equipment
 Imports equipment attributes, nozzles, shapes, parametric dimensional attribute, and
orientation
 Imports user attributes for equipment and nozzles

 You can use the PDS Model Data Exporter to create the input XML file for importing. For
more information, see PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 71).
 If there is an item in the XML file that has the model system set to blank or Undefined, the
Import Equipment command creates a generic system under the root with the naming
convention xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be
EquipmentImport-6-27-2005 09:09:57AM. All objects with the blank or Undefined parent
system import to this new system. After import, you can move the objects to your own
System hierarchies.

Topics
Import Equipment Data Dialog Box............................................... 79
Import XMpLant Formatted Equipment Data ................................ 80
Import Equipment Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter ............. 80

Import Equipment Data Dialog Box

Sets options for importing Equipment data.
XML file
Specifies the XML file to use for import. Click the button next to the box to browse for the
XML file. You can also select the parent folder to import all the XML files in that folder.
Map file
Specifies the XLS map workbook to use for import. Click the button next to the box to
browse for the map workbook.
Log file
Specifies the location of the log file. By default, the location is the same as that selected in
the XML file box.
OK
Imports the data as specified by closing the import dialog box.
Apply
Imports the data as specified without closing the import dialog box.

Common User's Guide 79

 File Menu

Cancel
Cancels the operation.
View Log File
Opens the log file for viewing.
View Ingr File
Opens the Intergraph file for viewing.
XML Editor installs along with MS Office. When the default software for opening the
XML file is XML Editor, the View Ingr File command does not open the XML file. The XML file
opens when the default software is a text editor such as Notepad.
See Also
Import Equipment (on page 77)
Import XMpLant Formatted Equipment Data (on page 80)

Import XMpLant Formatted Equipment Data

1. Select File > Import > Equipment.
The Import Equipment Data dialog box opens.
2. Click the button next to the XML file box to select the XMpLant XML file to use for import.
3. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XMplant XML Mapping File,
SP3DXMpLantElectricMain.xml.
4. Click the button next to the Log file box to select the log file location.
5. Click OK or Apply to import the electrical data as specified. If problems occur, check the
import log file created in the same location as the input XML file.
6. Check the To Do List for items that require attention after importing.
If an item in the XML file has the parent system set to blank or Undefined, the Import
Equipment command creates a generic system under the root with the naming convention
xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be EquipmentImport-6-27-2005
09:09:57AM. All objects with the blank or Undefined parent system import to this new system.
After import, you can move the objects to your own System hierarchies.
See Also
Import Electrical (on page 75)
Import Equipment Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 80)

Import Equipment Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter

1. Use the PDS Model Data Exporter to create an import XML file. For more information, see
PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 71).
2. Select File > Import > Equipment.
The Import Equipment Data dialog box appears.
3. Click the button next to the XML file box to select the XML file to use for import.
4. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XLS map workbook to use for import.

Common User's Guide 80

 File Menu

5. Click OK to import the equipment data as specified. If problems occur, check the import log
file created in the same location as the input XML file.
6. Check the To Do List for items that require attention after importing.
If there is an item in the XML file that has the model system set to blank or Undefined, the
Import Equipment command creates a generic system under the root with the naming
convention xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be
EquipmentImport-6-27-2005 09:09:57AM. All objects with the blank or Undefined parent
system import to this new system. After import, you can move the objects to your own
System hierarchies.
The input XML file is validated against the defined equipment import schema to make
sure the file is valid for import.
See Also
Import Equipment (on page 77)
Import XMpLant Formatted Equipment Data (on page 80)

Import Grids
The File > Import > Grids command imports a coordinate system into the model. This
command recognizes XML and XLS files that have been exported from a different model. The
software prompts you to change duplicate coordinate system names before importing.
You can modify the distance and angles in the exported XML or XLS in any accepted Units of
Measure format and then import. It is easier to modify the inputs in XLS than in XML. Refer to
the AvailableUnitFormats sheet in the exported XLS file to understand the accepted Units of
Measure formats.
Grids exported to XLS from versions 2014 or older will import successfully into versions 2014 R1
and newer; however, no grid lines will display. You must modify the grid lines and define the
associated planes for the grid lines to display. We recommend you manually edit these older
version XLS files (those exported by version 2014 or earlier) to include the AssociatePlanes
column that is present in the newer XLS versions. Export grids to XLS from your current version
and use that file as an example for editing your old version XLS files.

Topics
Import coordinate system.............................................................. 81
General Tab (Import Grids Dialog Box) ........................................ 82
Settings Tab (Import Grids Dialog Box) ........................................ 82

Import coordinate system

1. Select Tasks > Grids.
2. Click File > Import > Grids.
3. In the Import Grids dialog box, browse to the import file location of the XLS or XML file that
was exported from a different model.
4. Specify the Import log file location.
5. Select the coordinate systems to import from the list of all available systems.
6. Select a Parent System for the coordinate system.

Common User's Guide 81

 File Menu

7. Select a Permission Group for the coordinate system.

8. Click View to see the import file.
9. Click Import.
A progress bar displays in the bottom of the dialog box.

General Tab (Import Grids Dialog Box)

The Import Grids dialog box allows you to select which coordinate systems to import to the
current model.
Import file location
Specifies the XML or XLS file to import.
Import log file location
Specifies the import process log file location.
Select coordinate systems to be imported
Specifies the coordinate systems to import.
Select All
Selects all available coordinate systems in the list.
Clear All
Selects none of the coordinate systems in the list.
Parent System
Assigns the coordinate system to a particular parent system.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group for the imported coordinate system.
View
Displays the file selected for import.
Import
Begins the import process.
Close
Exits the Import Grids dialog box.

Settings Tab (Import Grids Dialog Box)

Specifies settings for the import process.
Include Custom Attributes
Imports custom attribute settings.

Common User's Guide 82

 File Menu

Import HVAC
Imports HVAC data from an XML file, using mapping defined in an XLS (Microsoft Excel
workbook) file or an XMpLant XML mapping file. The input XML file is validated against the
defined HVAC import schema to make sure the file is valid for import.

Sample Mapping Files

In the delivered sample mapping workbook, HVACTranslationMap.xls, click the Index tab to
view the individual worksheet names. Click the name to jump to that sheet. For example, click
ComponentMap and view or specify Maps XML Component PartNumber, SP3D PartClass, and
SP3D Part Number.
Example mapping configuration files for importing Intergraph Schema files are delivered in
[Product Folder]\Translators\ConfigurationFiles\HVAC.
Example mapping configuration files for importing XMpLant Schema files are delivered in
[Product Folder]\Translators\ConfigurationFiles\XMpLantSP3DMaps\HVAC.

Actions Taken
When you import HVAC data, the command does the following:
 Creates duct runs
 Imports the route network
 Imports branching configurations
 Imports components
 Imports attributes and user attributes

 You can use the PDS Model Data Exporter to create the input XML file for importing. For
more information, see PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 71).
 If there is an item in the XML file that has the model system set to blank or Undefined, the
Import HVAC command creates a generic system under the root with the naming
convention xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be
HVACImport-6-27-2005 09:09:57AM. All objects with the blank or Undefined parent system
import to this new system. After import, you can move the objects to your own System
hierarchies.

Topics
Import HVAC Data Dialog Box ...................................................... 84
Import XMpLant Formatted HVAC Data ....................................... 84
Import HVAC Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter .................... 85

Common User's Guide 83

 File Menu

Import HVAC Data Dialog Box

Sets options for importing HVAC data.
XML file
Specifies the XML file to use for import. Click the button next to the box to browse for the
XML file. You can also select the parent folder to import all the XML files in that folder.
Map file
Specifies the XLS map workbook to use for import. Click the button next to the field to
browse for the map workbook.
Log file
Specifies the location of the log file. By default, the location is the same as that selected in
the XML file box.
OK
Imports the data as specified by closing the import dialog box.
Apply
Imports the data as specified without closing the import dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels the operation.
View Log File
Opens the log file for viewing.
View Ingr File
Opens the Intergraph file for viewing.
XML Editor installs along with MS Office. When the default software for opening the
XML file is XML Editor, the View Ingr File command does not open the XML file. The XML file
opens when the default software is a text editor such as Notepad.
See Also
Import HVAC (on page 83)
Import XMpLant Formatted HVAC Data (on page 84)

Import XMpLant Formatted HVAC Data

1. Select File > Import > HVAC.
The Import HVAC Data dialog box opens.
2. Click the button next to the XML file box to select the XMpLant XML file to use for import.
3. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XMplant XML Mapping File,
SP3DXMpLantHVACMain.xml.
4. Click the button next to the Log file box to select the log file location.

Common User's Guide 84

 File Menu

5. Click OK or Apply to import the electrical data as specified. If problems occur, check the
import log file created in the same location as the input XML file.
6. Check the To Do List for items that require attention after importing.
If an item in the XML file has the parent system set to blank or Undefined, the Import
HVAC command creates a generic system under the root with the naming convention
xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be HVACImport-6-27-2005 09:09:57AM.
All objects with the blank or Undefined parent system import to this new system. After import,
you can move the objects to your own System hierarchies.
See Also
Import HVAC (on page 83)
Import HVAC Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 85)

Import HVAC Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter

1. Use the PDS Model Data Exporter to create an import XML file. For more information, see
PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 71).
2. Select File > Import > HVAC.
The Import HVAC Data dialog box displays.
3. Click the button next to the XML file box to select the XML file to use for import.
4. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XLS map workbook to use for import.
5. Click OK to import the HVAC data as specified. If you checked any of the logging options,
you can review the log file for extra information.
6. Check the To Do List for items that require attention after importing.
If there is an item in the XML file that has the model system set to blank or Undefined, the
Import HVAC command creates a generic system under the root with the naming
convention xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be
HVACImport-6-27-2005 09:09:57AM. All objects with the blank or Undefined parent system
import to this new system. After import, you can move the objects to your own System
hierarchies.
The input XML file is validated against the defined HVAC import schema to make
sure the file is valid for import.
See Also
Import HVAC (on page 83)
Import XMpLant Formatted HVAC Data (on page 84)

Common User's Guide 85

 File Menu

Import Piping
Imports Piping data from an XML file, using mapping defined in an XLS (Microsoft Excel
workbook) file or an XMpLant XML mapping file. The input XML file is validated against the
defined Piping import schema to make sure the file is valid for import.

Sample Mapping Files

In the delivered sample mapping workbook, PipingTranslationMap.xls, click the Index tab to
view the worksheet name of the sheets. Click the name to jump to that sheet. For example, click
InstrumentMap and view or specify details about Instrument Item Mapping.
Example mapping configuration files for importing Intergraph Schema files are delivered in
[Product Folder]\Translators\ConfigurationFiles\Piping.
Example mapping configuration files for importing XMpLant Schema files are delivered in
[Product Folder]\Translators\ConfigurationFiles\XMpLantSP3DMaps\Piping.

Actions Taken
When you import piping data, the command:
 Creates pipeline systems if they do not already exist. If the parent piping system is identified
in the input XML file, the pipelines are created under the Piping system(s). Otherwise, the
pipelines are created under the model root.
 Creates piperuns, route network, branching.
 Imports piping components along the network. However, items not listed in the mapping
XLS are not imported. Some PDS instruments and specialties might not have equivalents in
Smart 3D. Also, some Smart 3D implied parts are handled differently than in PDS.
Therefore, some mapping entries might be hard-coded to take care of them. Examples
include branching components like flanges around valves.
 Creates Smart 3D supports using G-Type graphics for PDS Physical Pipe Supports. In order
to import G-Type graphics using Pipe Import, load the HS_System.xls file located in
[Product Folder]\CatalogData\Bulkload\DataFiles to the existing catalog database.
 Imports tap information, specified as GenericNotes added on associated piperun ends
indicating tap details.
 Places supports (logical only).
 Joins pipeline ends to specified nozzles that have already been imported.
 Attempts to correct eccentric reducer offset mismatches between input data and Smart 3D.

 You need to re-establish piping connectivity as it is not maintained across XML files.
 To maintain connectivity, export all models to a single XML file at once.
 You can use the PDS Model Data Exporter to create the input XML file for importing. For
more information, see PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 71).

Common User's Guide 86

 File Menu

Topics
Import Piping Data Dialog Box ...................................................... 87
Import XMpLant Formatted Piping Data ........................................ 87
Import Piping Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter .................... 88

Import Piping Data Dialog Box

Sets options for importing piping data.
XML file
Specifies the XML file to use for import. Click the button next to the box to browse for the
XML file. You can also select the parent folder to import all the XML files in that folder.
Map file
Specifies the XLS map workbook to use for import. Click the button next to the box to
browse for the map workbook.
Log file
Specifies the location of the log file. By default, the location is the same as that selected in
the XML file box.
OK
Imports the data as specified by closing the import dialog box.
Apply
Imports the data as specified without closing the import dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels the operation.
View Log File
Opens the log file for viewing.
View Ingr File
Opens the Intergraph file for viewing.
XML Editor installs along with MS Office. When the default software for opening the
XML file is XML Editor, the View Ingr File command does not open the XML file. The XML file
opens when the default software is a text editor such as Notepad.
See Also
Import Piping (on page 85)
Import XMpLant Formatted Piping Data (on page 87)

Common User's Guide 87

 File Menu

Import XMpLant Formatted Piping Data

1. Select File > Import > Piping.
The Import Piping Data dialog box opens.
2. Click the button next to the XML file box to select the XMpLant XML file to use for import.
3. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XMplant XML Mapping File,
Map_XMpLant_Sp3D_Attributes.xml.
4. Click the button next to the Log file box to select the log file location.
5. Click OK or Apply to import the electrical data as specified. If problems occur, check the
import log file created in the same location as the input XML file.
6. Check the To Do List for items that require attention after importing.
If an item in the XML file that has the parent system set to blank or Undefined, the
Import Piping command creates a generic system under the root with the naming convention
xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be PipingImport-6-27-2005 09:09:57AM.
All objects with the blank or Undefined parent system import to this new system. After import,
you can move the objects to your own System hierarchies.
See Also
Import Piping (on page 85)
Import Piping Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 88)

Import Piping Data Using PDS Model Data Exporter

1. Use the PDS Model Data Exporter to create an import XML file. For more information, see
PDS Model Data Exporter (on page 71).
2. Select File > Import > Piping. The Import Piping Data dialog box appears.
3. Click the button next to the XML file box to select the XML file to use for import.
4. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XLS map workbook to use for import.
5. Click OK to import the piping data as specified.
6. Check the To Do List for items that require attention after importing.
If there is an item in the XML file that has the model system set to blank or Undefined, the
Import Piping command creates a generic system under the root with the naming
convention xxxxxxImport-Date-Time. For example, the name might be
PipingImport-6-27-2005 09:09:57AM. All objects with the blank or Undefined parent system
import to this new system. After import, you can move the objects to your own System
hierarchies.
The input XML file is validated against the defined piping import schema to make sure
the file is valid for import.
See Also
Import Piping (on page 85)
Import XMpLant Formatted Piping Data (on page 87)

Common User's Guide 88

 File Menu

Import Structure
The File > Import > Structure > CIS/2 command imports a CIS/2 file into the model. This
command recognizes Global User Identities (GUIDs) to uniquely identify objects and manages
the electronic exchange with the other software package.
Members imported by this command are either standard or designed members depending on
the cross-section specified in the import file. Assembly connections are created if that
information is provided in the CIS/2 file and the appropriate import option is selected. Frame
connections are always created and connect the members in the import file if the connection
information is specified. Otherwise, the frame connections are set to "Unsupported".
If you have any questions about using this translator, please contact Intergraph Support. You
can find support information on our web site: http://support.intergraph.com.

Import of Attributes/Properties
User-defined attributes that were defined in the third-party software and exported from that
application to the CIS/2 file can be mapped and imported to Smart 3D properties using the
UserAttribute_Map.xml file. A sample UserAttribute_Map.xml file is delivered with Smart 3D in
the [Product Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder.
If the third-party attribute that you want to map does not have an equivalent property in Smart
3D, you need to add that property to Smart 3D (using bulkload) before you can map to it in the
xml file.
If the third-party attribute does not have an entry in the mapping files but a property with the
same name exists in the Smart 3D, then that third-party attribute will still import and populate the
Smart 3D property even though it is not in the mapping file.

What do you want to do?

 Import Structure Model (on page 89)
 Preview a CIS file (on page 90)

Import structure model

1. Click Tasks > Structure.
2. Click File > Import > Structure > CIS/2.
3. Select the system in which to place the imported objects. You can create new systems in
the Systems and Specifications task.
4. Select the coordinate system to which to associate the imported objects. You can create
new coordinate systems in the Grids task.
5. Specify which objects to import by selecting the New box or which items to update by
selecting the Modified box.
6. Click Defaults and define the default properties for imported objects that do not have
recognized properties.
7. Specify the file name and folder for the CIS file.
8. Define a mapping file, if needed.

Common User's Guide 89

 File Menu

9. Define a log file name and folder.

10. In the Action box, select Import.
11. In the Option box, select whether the software should use default properties.
12. Click Apply to import the CIS file.
13. Click View Log to review the log file.
You can use the File > New Mapping File command to create a section name
mapping file to use when importing a structural model, or you can use one of the delivered
mapping files in the [Product Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps
folder.

Preview a CIS File

1. Click Tasks > Structure.
2. Click File > Import > Structure > CIS/2.
3. Select the system in which to place the previewed objects. You can create new systems in
the Systems and Specifications task.
4. Select the coordinate system to which to associate the previewed objects. You can create
new coordinate systems in the Grids task.
5. Specify which objects to preview by selecting corresponding New or Modified boxes.
6. Click Defaults and define the default properties for imported objects that do not have
recognized properties.
7. Specify the file name and folder for the CIS file.
8. Define a mapping file, if needed.
9. Define a log file name and folder.
10. In the Action box, select Preview.
11. In the Filter box, select the preview option to use.
12. Click Apply to preview the CIS file.
13. Click View Log to review the log file.
You must create a mapping file using the File > New Mapping File Command
before you can use that mapping file when importing a structural model.

Import Structure Dialog Box

Controls how objects are imported from the CIS/2 import file.
System - Select the system to which to assign the objects being read. You can define new
systems in the Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all systems defined in
the workspace or the model. For more information, see "Select System Dialog Box" in Place
Linear Member Systems.
Coordinate System - Select the coordinate system to which to assign the objects being read. If
needed, you can create a new coordinate system in the Grids task.

Common User's Guide 90

 File Menu

New - Loads any object in the CIS/2 file that is not in the model. Use the All On or All Off
commands to select or clear all check boxes.
Modified - Loads any object that exists in both the CIS/2 file and the model that has changed in
the CIS/2 file. Use the All On or All Off commands to select or clear all check boxes.
Members - Select to read into the model the members defined in the CIS/2 file. Openings on
members are not imported. Members defined with a built-up cross-section are imported as
designed members with these limitations:
 The member must be linear.
 The material and dimensions are defined by the build-up cross-section defined in the
catalog. Any material or dimension values specified in the import file are ignored.
 The designed member parts must be imported along with the parent member system.
Stand-alone designed member parts (such as connection parts and clip angles) are not
imported.
Slabs/Plates - Select to read into the model the slabs and plates defined in the CIS/2 file. Slabs
are always read into the model using a sketch 3-D path. You can edit the slab path after the
import, if needed. No grid lines associated with the slab are imported, and there are no
constraints assigned to the slab.
Walls - Select to read into the model the walls defined in the CIS/2 file. All walls are imported as
slabs.
Openings - Select to read into the model the openings (holes) defined in the CIS/2 file for slabs,
walls, grating, and checker plates.
Connections - Select to read into the model the gusset plates, clip angles, and other plates and
standard sections used to connect members. The detailing software marks these objects as
connection parts in the CIS/2 schema during export.
Assemblies - Select to read into the model the assemblies defined in the CIS/2 file.
All On - Click to activate all New and Modified check boxes.
All Off - Click to clear all New and Modified check boxes.
Defaults - Activates a dialog box where you define properties to use when the object being
imported does not have a recognized property.

Default Properties Dialog Box

The Default Properties dialog box defines properties to use when the object being imported
does not have a recognized property. You activate this dialog box from the main Import
Structure dialog box by clicking the Defaults button.

Common User's Guide 91

 File Menu

Member Defaults
Type Category
Select the type category to use when a member being imported does not have a recognized
type category. You can define a custom member type category on the Structural Member
Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook.
Type
Select the type to use when a member being imported does not have a recognized type.
The properties change depending on the member type that you select. You can define a
custom member type on the Structural Member Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls
workbook.
Section Name
Select the cross-section to use when a member being imported does not have a recognized
section. Sections are defined in the reference data. See the Structure Reference Data Guide
for more information about reference data.
Material Name
Select the material to use when a member being imported does not have a recognized
material.
Material Grade
Select the material grade to use when a member being imported does not have a
recognized material grade.

Slab Defaults
Type
Select the slab type to use when a slab being imported does not have a recognized slab
type.
Composition
Select the slab composition to use when a slab being imported does not have a recognized
slab composition.
Material Name
Select the material to use when a slab being imported does not have a recognized material.
Material Grade
Select the material grade to use when a slab being imported does not have a recognized
material grade.

Common User's Guide 92

 File Menu

Plate Defaults
Type
By default, all plates are imported as General plate systems. You cannot change this value.
Naming Category
Select a category for the plate system. Categories specify the role of the plate system in the
model. The category is also used by the naming rule to name the plate part that is a child to
the plate system.
Tightness
Select the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Continuity
Select the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
should react when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate
that the plate system should penetrate the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that
the plate system should be penetrated by the other system.
Priority
Specify the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
penetrated when two plate systems intersect, but have the same Continuity value. Plate
systems with a lower continuity priority (1, 2, 3, for example) penetrate plate systems with a
higher continuity priority (7, 8, 9, for example).
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Specification
Select the structural specification for the plate system.
CIS file - Define the file name and folder path of the CIMsteel Integration Standard file to read.

Common User's Guide 93

 File Menu

Include mapping file - Select this option to use a mapping file when importing the members
from the CIS file. You use a mapping file to:
 Swap the third-party software name for a section (for example, L3.5X2.5X1/4) with the
Smart 3D name for a section (for example, L3-1/2X2-1/2X1/4). You must create the section
mapping file using the File > New Mapping File Command before you can use the
mapping file in this command. Sample mapping files for the FrameWorks Plus AISC table
are delivered with the software in [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps. For more information,
see New Mapping File (on page 99).
 Swap the third-party material and material grade name with the Smart 3D name. A sample
material mapping file for AISC is delivered with the software in [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps.
 Swap the third-party user-attributes (properties) with the Smart 3D properties names. A
sample user attribute mapping file is delivered with the software in [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps.
You must bulkload (create) properties in the Smart 3D catalog for those third-party attributes
that you want to map. For example, the third-party application has an attribute called
"Expected Service Life" for members. Because Smart 3D does not have a property called
"Expected Service Life", you need to add that property to members using reference data
bulkload. See the Reference Data Guide and the Catalog User's Guide for more information
on bulkloading.
Mapping file - Specify the mapping file to use if Include mapping file option is selected.
Log file - Specify a log file name. You can view the log file after processing by clicking View
Log.
Action - Select whether to import or preview the contents of the CIS/2 file.
 Select Import to import objects from the CIS/2 into the model. This option checks the unique
identification numbers in the CIS/2 file with the identification numbers of the model objects
finding matching objects. This option allows you to update model objects that had been
imported previously. Plate objects in the CIS/2 file are imported as slabs.
 Select Import Ignore IDs to import objects from the CIS/2 into the model. This option does
not compare identification numbers in the CIS/2 file with the identification numbers of model
objects. This option allows you to import the CIS/2 objects as new, unique objects to the
model. In marine or material handling models, plate objects in the CIS/2 file are imported as
plates. In plant models, plates in the CIS/2 file are imported as slabs.
 Select Preview to identify problems with the CIS/2 file before the actual import is attempted.
Objects in the CIS/2 file that have not been imported cannot be previewed.

Common User's Guide 94

 File Menu

Filter - Specifies how you want to preview the CIS/2 file. This option is only available when
Action is set to Preview.
 Objects in CIS file with unknown sections, material, or type - Select this option to help
identify potential problems with the CIS/2 file before you attempt the import. After using this
option, you can add unknown sections, materials, and types to the mapping file.
 Objects in DB that exist in CIS File - Select this option to identify objects that are in both
the model workspace and the CIS/2 file.
 Objects in DB that are modified in CIS File - Select this option to identify objects that are
in both the model workspace and in the CIS/2 file but have different attributes (such as
section size) in the CIS/2 file. This option is useful when "round tripping" between Smart 3D
and another software package when you want to see which objects were modified in the
other software package.
 Objects in DB that do not exist in CIS File - Select this option to highlight objects in the
model workspace that do not have a corresponding object in the CIS/2 file. This option is
useful when the CIS/2 file was originally exported from Smart 3D and you are "round
tripping" between Smart 3D and another software package. Using this option, you can
locate members in the model that may have been deleted in the other software package
(and therefore, were not exported to the CIS/2 file.) This option is also useful for verifying
that all members in the other software package were exported to the CIS/2 file.
 Objects in DB that are not modified in CIS File - Select this option to identify objects that
are in both the model workspace and in the CIS/2 file that have the same attributes (such as
section size). This option is useful when "round tripping" between Smart 3D and another
software package when you want to see what objects in the Smart 3D model were not
modified by the other software package.
Option - Specifies how you want to import objects from the CIS/2 file. This option is only
available when Action is set to Import.
 Use no defaults - Select this option to import only those objects known to Smart 3D (known
either in the software or in the specified mapping file) sections. Objects with unknown
sections are not imported into the model but are noted in the log file.
 Use defaults if needed - Select this option to import all objects in the CIS/2 to the model.
Objects with sections not found in the software or in the mapping file will be given the
sections defined in the Defaults dialog box. Objects imported with default sections are
noted in the log file.
Submit Job - Activates the Schedule [Task] dialog box, which is used to define the batch
import of CIS/2 files using SmartPlant Batch Services. For more information on the batch
settings, see Schedule [Task] Dialog Box (on page 98).
View Log - Displays the import log file. You must click Apply when importing in order to view
the log at the end of processing or to use the Preview option. If you click OK, the dialog box is
closed at the end of processing and you cannot click View Log.

Common User's Guide 95

 File Menu

Understanding the Log File

File name : C:\CIMSteel\cis2_out.stp ---- SHOWS HEADER INFORMATION FROM CIS/2
FILE
Mapping file used : C:\CIMSteel\AISC_Master_Physical_Map.XML
Intergraph Smart 3D Structure Version : 09.00.10.0003
CIS/2 Version : Tekla Structures Version : Next Build: 4232 Revision : 26.1.2009
File imported on : Tue Jan 19 16:26:34 2010
Parent System : Import
Coordinate System : Global
Importing with : Use no default sections
Processing Options : ---- SHOWS HOW THE OPTIONS WERE SET ON THE DIALOG BOX
New : On or Off
Members : ON
Slabs and Plates : ON
Walls : ON
Openings : ON
Connections : ON
Assemblies : ON
Modified : On or Off
Members : ON
Slabs and Plates : ON
Walls : ON
Openings : ON
Connections : ON
Assemblies : ON
*********************************Summary********************************
Linear Members................. 333 ---- LISTS SUCCESSFULLY IMPORTED OBJECTS TOTAL
Curved Members................. 0
Slabs.......................... 0
Walls (imported as Slabs)...... 0
Plates......................... 6
Openings....................... 48
Stair Assemblies............... 8
Stair Parts............ 18
Ladder Assemblies.............. 3
Ladder Parts........... 0
Handrail Assemblies............ 76
Handrail Parts......... 249
Assy Connections............... 0
Connection Parts....... 0
Embedment Assemblies........... 0
Embedment Parts........ 0
Total Number of Objects Imported: 741
Total Number of CIS Entities in the import file... 1133
Total Number of Items not found in the catalog......... 360
************************************************************************

Common User's Guide 96

 File Menu

CROSS SECTIONS --- LISTS ANY MISSING AND MAPPED CROSS-SECTIONS

Cross Sections Encountered Mapped To
-------------- ----------- ---------
PL9.525*127 65 Not Found
W8x13 109 W8*13
W13*56 9 W8x13 (Default)

MATERIALS --- LISTS ANY MISSING AND MAPPED MATERIALS

Materials Encountered Mapped To
-------------- ----------- ---------
ANTIMATERIAL 30 A36

Import structure completed successfully on: Tue Jan 19 16:29:40 2010.

*************************DETAILED SUMMARY**********************
Plates Using Default material
2331884
2331863
2331842
1873861
1873822
Linear Members with Missing Cross Sections
2354361
2354229
2013930
2013876
Handrail Parts with Missing Cross Sections
2154615
1995739
1995257
1994775
1994293
Stair Parts with Missing Cross Sections
1908086
1908063
1908040
Zero Length Ladder Parts
2265509
2264060
1880386
Ladder parts with Missing Cross Sections:
1880370
1880231
1880223
1880213
****************************************************************

Common User's Guide 97

 File Menu

Schedule [Task] Dialog Box

Queue
Displays the name of the queues configured by an administrator for the job. For more
information on configuring the queues, see Configure Queues for Jobs in the Project
Management User's Guide.
Run job
Sets the frequency with which the job runs. Jobs can be scheduled to run once or on a
regular interval (daily, weekly, or monthly). Depending on the job frequency selected,
additional controls display. These controls allow you to define more specific scheduling
information. The scheduling controls can be changed only at job submission.
Run on
Sets the time to start running the job.
Options
Opens the Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box (on page 99) that you can use to define
a start and end date.
Run on box
Contains a calendar from which you can select the run date. This option is available when
you select Once from Run job.
Every X days
Specifies how many days pass between job runs. This option is available when you select
Daily from Run job.
Every X weeks
Specifies how many weeks pass between job runs. In addition, you can select on which
days the job runs. This option is available when you select Weekly from Run job.
Day X of the month
Specifies on which day of the month the job runs. This option is available when you select
Monthly from Run job.
The X Y of the month
Specifies on which day of the month the job runs. For example, you can select the last
Monday of the month. This option is available when you select Monthly from Run job.
Job Start
Notifies you when the job starts, if Outlook is set up.
Job Completion
Notifies when the job completes, if Outlook is set up.
Job Abort
Notifies you if the job aborts, if Outlook is set up.

Common User's Guide 98

 File Menu

Address Book
Selects the name of the person to be notified by e-mail of the job status, if Outlook is set up.
If Outlook is not available, this option does not work. You can also type the address
manually. The person you define here receives an email with the job log files after the job
finishes.

 The Batch Services SMTP option must be configured on the batch server for this to work.
For more information, see the Intergraph Smart Batch Services documentation.
 The WinZip application is no longer required on the batch server to compress any emailed
attachments. Compression is now done with functionality included in Smart 3D.

Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box

Provides more options on the Schedule Backup dialog box. This dialog box opens when you
click Options.
Start date
Sets an optional start date.
End date
Sets an optional end date, if checked.

New Mapping File

The File > New Mapping File command creates an XML mapping file for the section names,
and optionally material names, used in the software and third-party application. Many times, the
software and the third-party application use different names for the same section or material.
The mapping file solves the naming conflicts by mapping section names in the software to
section names in the other applications. The mapping file must contain each section standard
table that you have used in the model.
The mapping file created by this command is a template. The software does not
write known-to-be-different section names to the mapping file. You are responsible for verifying,
editing, updating, and maintaining the third-party application section names in the file.

Common User's Guide 99

 File Menu

New Mapping File Dialog Box

Section standard
Select the section standard table for which to create a mapping file.
Include material
Select to include material name mappings in addition to the section name mappings.
Mapping file
Specify a name and folder path for the XML mapping file.

Mapping File Format

The mapping file is an XML-formatted file with which you can define mappings for section
names, material names, member types, slab types, and user-defined attribute/properties
between Smart 3D and the third-party software. The format for each mapping is given below.
You can include all five mappings in a single XML file, or you can define the mappings in
separate XML files and reference the five files in a single master XML file using include
statements. Using separate files that are pulled together using include statements might be a
better workflow as it allows you to quickly mix and match files for different requirements.
You cannot nest include files. Only the master XML mapping file can call an include file. You
cannot call another include file inside an include file. An example of a master XML mapping file
is shown below:
<xml>
<!-- Comment Line -->
<IncludeXML href="SectionStandard.xml" />
<IncludeXML href="Material.xml" />
<IncludeXML href="MemberTypes.xml" />
<IncludeXML href="SlabTypes.xml" />
<IncludeXML href="UserAttribute_Map.xml" />
</xml>

Common User's Guide 100

 File Menu

Section Mapping
The <SectionStandard> area maps the software section names to the third-party section names.
The software section names are labeled section name. The third-party section names are
labeled externalname. When the XML file is created, the software section name is duplicated
for the third-party section name. You must verify that the correct third-party section name is
defined for externalname by manually editing the XML file.
<xml>
<!-- Comment Line -->
<SectionStandard>
<Standard name="AISC-LRFD-3.0" externalname="AISC" externalorganization="user"
externaldate="2002" externalversion="1.0" />
<Sections>
<Section name="W10x39" externalname="W10x39" />
<Section name="W10x33" externalname="W10x33" />
<Section name="W10x30" externalname="W10x30" />
...
</Sections>
</SectionStandard>
</xml>

Material Mapping
The <MaterialStandard> area maps the software material grade names to the third-party
material grade names. You must have selected the Include material option when you created
the XML file to see the material grade name mappings. The software materials are labeled
Material type and grade. The third-party material names are labeled externalname. You must
verify that the correct third-party material grade name is defined for externalname by manually
editing the XML file. You must provide the external material standard name information by
manually editing the XML file.
<xml>
<!-- Comment Line -->
<MaterialStandard>
<Standard name="" externalname="" externalorganization="" externaldate="" externalversion="" />
<Materials>
<Material type="Steel - Carbon" grade="A36" externalname="A36" />
<Material type="Steel - Carbon" grade="A529" externalname="A529" />
<Material type="Steel - Carbon" grade="A588" externalname="A588" />
...
</Materials>
</MaterialStandard>
</xml>

Member Type Mapping

The <MemberTypes> area maps the software member types to the third-party member types.
You must create this section in a text editor. The software member types are labeled Member
type. The third-party member types are labeled externaltype and externalrole.
<xml>
<!-- Comment Line -->
<MemberTypes>
<Member type="Beam" externaltype="Beam" externalrole="" />
<Member type="Girder" externaltype="Beam" externalrole="gantry_girder" />
<Member type="Joist" externaltype="Beam" externalrole="joist" />
...
</MemberTypes>
</xml>

Common User's Guide 101

 File Menu

Slab Type Mapping

The <SlabTypes> area maps the software slab types to the third-party slab types. You must
create this section in a text editor. The software slab types are labeled Slab type and
composition. The third-party slab types are labeled externaltype.
<xml>
<!-- Comment Line -->
<SlabTypes>
<Slab type="4&quot; Cast in Place" composition="CIP_4&quot;_Fc3" externaltype="slab" />
<Slab type="4&quot; Cast in Place" composition="CIP_4&quot;_Fc4" externaltype="flat_slab" />
<Slab type="5&quot; Cast in Place" composition="CIP_5&quot;_Fc3" externaltype="wall" />
...
</SlabTypes>
</xml>

User Attribute Mapping

The <UserAttributes> area maps third-party software attributes to Smart 3D properties. You
must create this section in a text editor.
<xml>
<!-- Comment Line -->
<UserAttributes>
<Object type="CSPSMemberSystemLinear" externaltype="assembly_design_structural_member_linear" role="" >
<Interface name="IJUAStructuralFrameItemAttributes" externalname="IJUAStructuralFrameItemAttributes" >
<Attribute name="item_number" externalname="item_number" />
<Attribute name="item_name" externalname="item_name" />
<Attribute name="item_description" externalname="item_description" />
<Attribute name="life_cycle_stage" externalname="life_cycle_stage" />
</Interface>
<Interface name="IJUAStructuralFrameProductAttributes" externalname="IJUAStructuralFrameProductAttributes" >
<Attribute name="life_cycle_stage" externalname="life_cycle_stage" />
</Interface>

<Interface name="IJUAAssemblyAttributes" externalname="IJUAAssemblyAttributes" >

<Attribute name="assembly_sequence_number" externalname="assembly_sequence_number" />
<Attribute name="complexity_level" externalname="complexity_level" />
</Interface>

<Interface name="IJUAADSMAttributes" externalname="IJUAADSMAttributes" >

<Attribute name="key_member" externalname="key_member" />
<Attribute name="structural_member_use" externalname="structural_member_use" />
<Attribute name="Floor Thickness" externalname="Floor Thickness" />
<Attribute name="structural_member_class" externalname="structural_member_class" />
</Interface>
</Object>
...
</UserAttributes>
</xml>

Create a Mapping File

1. Click File > New Mapping File.
2. In the Section standard box, select the section standard for the mapping file.
3. Optionally, select Include material to write material names to the mapping file.
4. Click Browse, and then specify a name and folder location for the mapping file.
5. Click OK.
6. Edit the mapping file using a text editor such as Notepad, and define the third-party
standard section, material names, member types, and slab types.

Common User's Guide 102

 File Menu

Export Grids
The File > Export > Grids command exports the coordinate system to an XLS or XML file. The
exported file contains all needed information to import the coordinate system into a different
model. All the distance and angle values are exported with the Units and Precision as set in
Tools > Options... > Units of Measure window.

Topics
Export coordinate system ............................................................. 103
General Tab (Export Grids Dialog Box) ........................................ 104
Settings Tab (Export Grids Dialog Box) ........................................ 104

Export coordinate system

1. Select Tasks > Grids.
2. Click File > Export > Grids.
3. In the Export Grids dialog box, select one or more coordinate systems from the list of
available systems.
4. Browse to a folder to save the export file, and give the file a name that ends with an XLS or
XML extension.
5. Specify a location for the export process log file.
6. Click Export.
A progress bar displays at the bottom of the dialog box.
7. After the export process is complete, click View to see the export file.

Common User's Guide 103

 File Menu

General Tab (Export Grids Dialog Box)

Specifies which grid systems to export to a user-defined location.
Select coordinate systems to be exported
Specifies one or more coordinate systems from the list of all available systems.
Select All
Selects all coordinate systems in the list.
Clear All
Selects none of the coordinate systems in the list.
Export file location
Allows you to choose a location for the export file. You must give the file a name with either
an XLS or XML extension.
Export log location
Allows you to choose a location for the export process log file.
View
Displays the file after the export process has completed.
Export
Begins the export process.
Cancel
Exits the Export Grids dialog box.

Settings Tab (Export Grids Dialog Box)

Specifies settings for the export process.
Include Custom Attributes
Retains custom attribute settings during the export process.

Export Structure
The File > Export > Structure command exports the structural physical model to a CIS/2 or IFC
file. For more information, see Importing and Exporting Structure.

Exporting User-defined Properties

You can map user-defined Smart 3D properties to third-party software attributes and export
those properties/attributes to the CIS/2 file using the UserAttribute_Map.xml file. A sample
UserAttribute_Map.xml file is delivered with Smart 3D in the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder.

Common User's Guide 104

 File Menu

Export Structure Model

1. Click File > Export > Structure.
2. Select the filter to use to select the objects to export.
3. Type a description.
4. Type your name in the Author box and your company name in the Organization box.
5. Specify the file name and folder for the export file.
6. Define a mapping file, if needed. For more information on mapping files, see New Mapping
File (on page 99).
7. Define a log file name and folder.
8. Click OK.

 You must create the filter before you can export the physical model.
 You can create a mapping file using the File > New Mapping File Command that can be
used when exporting the physical model.
 You can also use the delivered mapping files located in the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder.

Export Structure Dialog Box

Controls how objects are written to the export file. You can export to the CIMsteel Integration
Standards 2.0 (CIS/2) or to the Industry Foundation Class (IFC) file format.

 You can export only concrete objects such as slabs, walls, structural systems, openings on
slabs and walls, footings, equipment foundations, and design equipment (with an equipment
classification of civil elements or structural elements) to the IFC format.
 Linear and curved concrete members cannot be exported to IFC. We recommend the CIS/2
format for transferring linear and curved members.
 The International System of Units (SI) is used in the exported CIS/2 file regardless of the
settings on the Tools > Options > Units of Measure tab.
If you have any questions about using this translator, please contact Intergraph Support. You
can find support information on our web site: http://support.intergraph.com.
Be sure to check the Compatibility Matrix before you export data. Open
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com https://smartsupport.intergraph.com, select View
Downloads at the top, and then select Product Compatibility under Useful Links on the right.
Export Standard
Select the industry standard to export.
IFC Options
Defines data, display, and organizational information for the IFC file. For more information,
see Export Options Dialog Box (on page 107).

Common User's Guide 105

 File Menu

Filter
Select the filter to use to identify the model objects to export.
Description
Type a description of the model. This description is included in the export file.
Author
Specifies the person who created the export file. The default is the current system user
name.
Organization
Specifies your company or organization name to use in the export file.
Export file
Define the file name and folder path of the export file to write. CIS/2 files have a .stp
extension while IFC files have an .ifc extension.
Include mapping file
Select this option to use a mapping file when exporting the members to the CIS/2 file. You
use a mapping file to:
 Swap the third-party software name for a section (for example, L3.5X2.5X1/4) with the
Smart 3D name for a section (for example, L3-1/2X2-1/2X1/4). You must create the
section mapping file using the File > New Mapping File Command before you can use
the mapping file in this command. Sample mapping files for the FrameWorks Plus AISC
table are delivered with the software in the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder. For more
information, see New Mapping File (on page 99).
 Swap the third-party material and material grade name with the Smart 3D name. A
sample material mapping file for AISC is delivered with the software in the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder.
 Specify the user-attributes that need to be exported and to swap the Smart 3D property
names with the third-party user-attributes (properties) names. A sample user attribute
mapping file is delivered with the software in the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder.
Mapping file
Specify the mapping file to use if Include mapping file option is selected.
Log file
Specify a log file name. You can view the log file by clicking View Log.
Submit Job
Activates the Schedule [Task] dialog box, which is used to define the batch export of files
using SmartPlant Batch Services. For more information on the batch settings, see Schedule
[Task] Dialog Box (on page 98).
View Log
Displays the export log file. You must click Apply when exporting to view the log at the end
of processing. If you click OK, the dialog box is closed at the end of processing, and you are
not able to click View Log.

Common User's Guide 106

 File Menu

Export Options Dialog Box

Defines properties for the IFC file and the data contained in the export file.
Data Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 107)
Presentation Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 108)
Organization Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 108)

Data Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for the format and accuracy of the data contained in the export file.
Boundary Representation (Brep)
Objects are represented by a series of faces that the software stitches together. For
example, a design solid is exported as one object with a series of faces.
Constructive Solid Geometry (CSG)
Objects are represented by a series of solids (cylinders, cubes, and so forth) that the
software constructs to create the entire solid. This option only applies to design solids. All
other solids (slabs, walls, footings, and so forth) are always written out in boundary
representation format.
Include Object's Range
Select to include the overall range of an entity in addition to the geometry of each of their
components. In general, the entities do not have representation (footings and foundations).
Tessellation or Stroking Tolerance
Specifies the accuracy to use when tessellating nonplanar surfaces or stroking nonlinear
curves.

Common User's Guide 107

 File Menu

Presentation Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box)

These properties specify how exported objects should render in other software.
Slab
Select a color for slabs.
Wall
Select a color for walls.
Footing
Select a color for footings.
Foundation
Select a color for foundations.
Design Solid
Select a color for foundations.

Organization Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box)

These properties give a brief description about the organization that owns the data and is used
in the IfcOrganization element.
Name
Type the name of the organization.
Role
Select the role played by the organization.
Description
Type a brief description of the organization.
Role Description
Give a detailed description about the organization and the role it plays. If Role is set to
User-defined, then this field is required.
Address
Specify the address information of the organization.

Common User's Guide 108

 File Menu

Export Smart 3D Models to PDMS

The File > Export > PDMS Datal Export > Export Model command exports model data from
Smart 3D for subsequent import into PDMS. The process involves transferring Smart 3D objects
and their attribute values to PDMS's native DATAL file format. For information about the types of
Smart 3D model data that you can export to PDMS, see Exporting Smart 3D Model Data.
Include first level objects when exporting Smart 3D model data to PDMS:
Equipment, Pipeline, Duct Run, Cableway/Cable tray/Conduit run, Member systems/Root plate
system, and Support assembly.
Prior to using the export to PDMS functionality, you must perform the following tasks:
1. Ensure that the Smart 3D and PDMS catalogs are set up properly. For more information,
see Set up the PDMS and Smart 3D Catalogs.
2. Edit the options in the delivered initialization file to define the parameters used in the export
process. For more information about the initialization file, see Configure the PDMS export
initialization file.
3. Edit the mapping workbooks to reflect the customizations that you have made to the Smart
3D model object attributes. For more information about the mapping worksheets, see
Appendix: Smart 3D Export to PDMS Workbook.
4. Ensure that the mapping and INI (PDMSExportTranslator.ini) files are in the same file path
before exporting model data to PDMS.
5. Use the PDMS Export Validation command to validate the mapping details that you have
defined. For more information, see PDMS Export Validation.

Export Model to PDMS Datal Dialog Box (on page 110)

What do you want to do?

 Generate catalog and reference data in Smart 3D and PDMS formats for export
 Export Smart 3D model data to PDMS (on page 109)

Common User's Guide 109

 File Menu

Export Smart 3D model data to PDMS

Prior to exporting Smart 3D data to PDMS, verify that all of the required
mapping is completed and that both catalogs are set up appropriately. For more information
about mapping and setting up the catalog, see Appendix: Smart 3D Export to PDMS Workbook
and Define matching reference data, respectively.
1. In the Smart 3D Common task, click File > Export > PDMS Datal Export > Export Model.
The Export Model to PDMS Datal dialog box displays.
2. Select the filter to use for selecting the objects to export.
3. Type a description of the model.
4. Type your name in the Author box and your company name in the Organization box.
5. Specify the name and full path location of the output DATAL file.
6. Navigate to the mapping file to use in the export process.
7. Specify the name and full path location for the log file.
8. Click OK to start the export process.
When processing completes, the dialog box closes.
If you click Apply instead of OK, the dialog box remains open when processing
completes so you can click View Log to open the log file. Otherwise, you must manually
navigate to the log file.
9. Review the log file for errors and warnings.

 You must create the filter before you can export the model objects. Otherwise, the export
process might fail.
 The mapping file is a Microsoft Excel workbook that is used to map all the objects and their
properties in Smart 3D and PDMS. This workbook is delivered to the [Reference Data
Folder]\SharedContent\Translators\S3DPDMSExport folder during setup.
 If you want the software to create a separate datal file for each discipline, you must select
Generate separate file for each discipline.
 To export profile parts when working in Marine mode, the plate parts that connect to the
profile parts must be selected in the filter.

Common User's Guide 110

 File Menu

Export Model to PDMS Datal Dialog Box

Provides options that control how Smart 3D model objects are written to the PDMS output datal
file.
If you have any questions about using this translator, please contact Intergraph Support. You
can find support information on our web site at http://support.intergraph.com.
Filter
Specifies the filter to use to identify the model objects for export.
Description
Specifies a description of the model. The description you enter is included in the output
DATAL file.
Author
Identifies the person who creates the output DATAL file.
Organization
Specifies the company or organization name to use in the output DATAL file.
Datal file
Defines the file name and folder path of the output DATAL file to write. The DATAL file is a
native file format for PDMS.
Mapping file
Indicates the mapping file to use in the export process. The mapping file is a Microsoft Excel
workbook that is used to map all the objects and their properties in Smart 3D and PDMS.
For more information, see Appendix: Smart 3D Export to PDMS Workbook.
Log file
Specifies a name for the log file. You can view the log file at the end of processing by
clicking View Log.
View Log is available only if you click Apply to begin the export process.
Generate separate file for each discipline
Creates a separate output DATAL file for each discipline. Exporting Smart 3D model data by
discipline reduces DATAL file size and assists in identifying and resolving export issues.
OK
Exports the data as specified and closes the Export Model to PDMS Datal dialog box.
Apply
Exports the data as specified without closing the Export Model to PDMS Datal dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels the operation and closes the Export Model to PDMS Datal dialog box.
View File
Opens the output DATAL file for viewing.

Common User's Guide 111

 File Menu

View Log
Displays the export log file. To view the log file, you must click Apply to begin the export
process. If you click OK, the dialog box closes at the end of processing and View Log is
unavailable.
See Also
Export Smart 3D model data to PDMS (on page 109)

PDMS Export Validation

The File > Export > PDMS Datal Export > PDMS Export Validation command validates the
mapping data that you have defined in the S3DPDMSExportMapping.xls workbook. This
command uses a set of user-specified criteria to locate missing mapping details, and then
updates the mapping file as follows:
 Creates a worksheet named Smart 3D Objects-Missing Mapping in the
S3DPDMSExportMapping.xls workbook. This sheet lists the missing mapping information.
 Updates individual worksheets with missing mapping information. For easy identification, the
software highlights any updated cell in red.
The results of the validation process are also written to a log file.
PDMS Export Validation Dialog Box (on page 113)

Validate mapping details

Close the mapping file before running the PDMS Export Validation
command. To avoid errors, the mapping file must remain closed during the validation process.
1. Click File > Export > PDMS Datal Export > PDMS Export Validation.

2. Click Browse , and select the filter. By default, the software displays the active filter for
the current session file.
3. Select Validate from mapping file.
4. In the Validation criteria list, select the object types for which mapping is to be validated.
You must select at least one criterion from the list.
5. In the Log file details box, type the name and folder location of the log file.
6. Click Validate.

 By default, the validation tool updates the mapping file located in [Product
Folder]\3DRefData\SharedContent\Data\Translators\S3DPDMSExport. To specify a
mapping file in a different location, select Specify alternative location and then type the full
path location and file name in the Datal/Mapping file to validate box.
 If the mapping file is read-only, the software creates a copy of the mapping file with the
name <Mapping file name>_COPY.xls, and saves it in the same location as the original
mapping file. The software updates the copy of the mapping file with the missing mapping
details.

Common User's Guide 112

 File Menu

PDMS Export Validation Dialog Box

Filter

Displays the active filter of the session file. Click Browse to navigate to and select a
different filter.
Target (PDMS) object selection criteria
Specify the selection criteria. The current release of the software supports only the Validate
from mapping file option.
Specify alternative location
Allows you to specify a mapping file other than the one in the default location. By default, the
software updates the mapping file located in [Product
Folder]SharedContent\Data\Translators\S3DPDMSExport. To specify a different location,
select this option and then type the full path location and file name in the Datal/Mapping file
path box. Alternatively, click the browse button , and then navigate to the location.
Datal/Mapping file path
Type the full path location and name of the mapping file to validate. This option is available
only if you select Specify alternative location. Updating DATAL files is not supported in the
current release of the software.
Validation criteria
Select the Smart 3D objects whose mapping you want to validate. Objects are listed by
discipline. For each criterion that you select, the software validates the corresponding
worksheet in the mapping file. You must select at least one object in the Validation criteria
list.

Validation Criteria Details

Reports missing mapping for the Smart 3D objects hierarchy in the

Hierarchy
CustomizeS3DHierarchyMap sheet.

Equipment Models
For more information about any of the equipment mapping sheets referenced in the
following rows, see Equipment Translation Maps.

Reports missing mapping for pipe nozzle CATRef attributes in the

CPStraightNozzleCAtRefMap and CPElbowNozzleCAtRefMap
Nozzles sheets.
Reports missing mapping for HVAC nozzle CATRef attributes in the
CPHvacNozzleCatRefMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for PartNumber and TempPartNumber

Catalog equipment attributes in the PartNumberValueMap and the
DesParamAdditonalAttrMap sheets, respectively.

Reports missing mapping for ShapePartClass in the

Shapes
CPShapeValueMap sheet.

Common User's Guide 113

 File Menu

Piping Models
For more information about any of the piping mapping sheets referenced in the
following rows, see Piping Translation Maps.

Reports missing mapping for the following:

 Smart 3D part identifiers for pipe parts in the
SP3DPartIdentifierMap sheet.
 Smart 3D catalog components in the
CatalogComponentSPREFMap sheet.
 Smart 3D catalog components in the NPDSpecificSPREFMap
sheet.
Components  Smart 3D catalog specialty items in the
CatalogSpecialtySPREFMap sheet.
 Smart 3D catalog instrument items in the
CatalogInstrumentSPREFMap sheet.
 Smart 3D on-the-fly specialty items in the
OnFlySpecialitySPREFMap sheet.
 Smart 3D on-the-fly instrument items in the
OnFlyInstrumentSPREFMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for pipe run specification in the

Specification
PipeRunSpecMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for the end connection of pipe parts in the
End Connection
PipingEndConnectionMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for stock parts SpecRef attributes in the

Stock parts
CatalogComponentSPREFMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for gaskets and field fitted welds SpecRef
Connections attributes in the CatalogComponentSPREFMap sheet and in the
NPDSpecificSPREFMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for pipe supports in the

Supports CatalogComponentSPREFMap sheet and in the
NPDSpecificSPREFMap sheet.

Common User's Guide 114

 File Menu

Structure Models
For more information about any of the structure mapping sheets referenced in the
following rows, see Structure Translation Maps.

Reports missing insulation on member parts in the

Fire proofing InsulationAttrMap sheet. The tool also reports the missing
insulation SpecRef attributes in the InsulationSpecAttrMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for cross-section of member parts in the

Cross sections
StrucClassAdditionalAttributes sheet.

Reports missing mapping for materials for objects such as <member

parts, handrails, ladders, stairs, slabs footings, equipment
Materials
foundations, plate parts, and hole fittings in the
StructureMatSpecMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for cross section of profile parts in the

MarineCrosssections MarineCSAdditionalAttributes sheet. Only applicable when using
the software in Marine mode.

HVAC Models
For more information about any of the HVAC mapping sheets referenced in the
following rows, see HVAC Translation Maps.

Reports missing mapping for the following:

 Smart 3D part identifiers for HVAC parts in the
HVACPartIdentifierMap sheet.
 Smart 3D part number for catalog components in the
Components HVACComponentSPREFMap sheet.
 Smart 3D concatenated string for duct turn and transition
features in the HVACComponentSPREFMap sheet. The
concatenated string includes the specification name, HVAC
component type, and cross section type. For more information,
see HVACComponentSPREFMap.

 Reports missing mapping for duct run specifications in the

DuctRunSpecMap sheet.
Specification  Reports missing mapping for duct run specification and cross
section type in the HVACRunAttributesMap sheet. For more
information, see HVACRunAttributesMap.

Reports missing mapping for the end connection of duct parts in the
EndConnection
HVACEndConnectionMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for duct parts SpecRef attributes in the

DuctParts
HVACComponentSPREFMap sheet.

Common User's Guide 115

 File Menu

Reports missing mapping for gaskets SpecRef attributes in the

Connections
HVACComponentSPREFMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for duct/design supports in the

Supports
HVACComponentsSPREFMap sheet.

Hangers and Supports Models

For more information about any of the piping mapping sheets referenced in the
following rows, see Supports Translation Maps.

 Reports missing PartNumber mapping for support components

in the SupportPartNumber sheet.

Supports
 Reports the missing mapping for a support component's GType
attribute in the SupportGTYPE sheet.
 Reports the missing mapping for a support component's
Attributes in the SupportUserAttributes sheet.

Electrical Models
For more information about any of the electrical mapping sheets referenced in the
following rows, see Electrical Translation Maps.

Reports missing mapping for conduit and cable tray parts in the
Components ElectricalPartIdentifierMap and ElectricalComponentSPREFMap
sheets.

Reports missing mapping for electrical specifications in the

Specifications
ElectricalRunSpecMap sheet.

Reports missing mapping for conduit and cable tray stock parts in
ElectricalStockParts the ElectricalPartIdentifierMap and
ElectricalComponentSPREFMap sheets.

Reports missing mapping for electrical end preparations in the

EndPreparation
ElectricalEndConnectionMap sheet.

Log file details

Specify the full path location and file name of the log file to be created. Alternatively, you can
click Browse and navigate to the necessary location and file.
Validate
Runs the PDMS Export Validation command based on the criteria that you have specified.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without performing the validation process.

Common User's Guide 116

 File Menu

PDS Export
The File > Export > PDS Export command exports model data from Smart 3D into PDS. The
process involves transferring Smart 3D objects and their attribute values to PDS file format. For
information about the types of Smart 3D model data that you can export to PDS, see Export to
PDS Workflow.
Please refer to the Export to PDS Guide or help file for detailed information about exporting
Smart 3D data to PDS.
Prior to using the export to PDS functionality, you must perform the following
tasks:
1. Edit the options in the delivered initialization file to define the parameters used in the export
process. For more information about the initialization file, see Configure the PDS Export
Initialization File.
2. Edit the mapping workbooks to reflect the customizations that you have made to the Smart
3D model object attributes. For more information about the mapping worksheets, see
Appendix: Export to PDS Workbook.
3. Ensure that the mapping and PDSExportTranslator.ini files are in the same file path before
exporting model data to PDS.

Export to PDS Dialog Box (on page 118)

Export Settings (on page 121)

Export Smart 3D Models
1. Click File > Export > PDS Export > Export Model.
The Export to PDS dialog box displays.
2. Click the Export Model tab, and select the discipline from the Discipline list.
3. Type the location of the mapping file in the Hierarchy Mapping File box, or browse to the
location.
4. Type the location of the log file in the Log File box, or browse to the location.
5. Click Export Model.
6. Review the log files for errors and warnings.
7. Repeat this procedure for each discipline that you need to export.
You must have MicroStation J install on the same computer as Smart 3D
when you export the model data for equipment, HVAC, and structural equipment. The export of
structural data to CIS/2 and piping data to APL does not require MicroStation J.

Common User's Guide 117

 File Menu

Export to PDS Dialog Box

Controls parameters for exporting Smart 3D model data to PDS.
 Extract Hierarchy Tab (Export To PDS Dialog Box) (on page 118)
 Export Model Tab (Export To PDS Dialog Box) (on page 121)

Extract Hierarchy Tab (Export To PDS Dialog Box)

Exports or updates a hierarchy for Smart 3D systems to the hierarchy mapping file.
For example, if you want to export Equipment, this command finds the object ID for each system
that contains equipment objects, finds those equipment objects, and exports or updates that
hierarchy to the mapping file.
 A sheet named EquipmentHierarchy in the mapping file is updated with the hierarchy of
the Smart 3D systems for the equipment discipline.
 In the same way, worksheets for each discipline are updated at the time of hierarchy export.
The PipingHierarchy, RaceWaysHierarchy, StructureHierarchy, and HVACHierarchy
sheets are updated for their respective disciplines.
 For piping, the pipeline systems, the OID and number of pipe runs under that system are
exported to the hierarchy mapping file.
Discipline
Specifies the discipline (such as piping or equipment) for which to export the hierarchy. You
can select a discipline from the list.
Hierarchy Mapping File
Specifies the mapping file to use in the export process. The mapping file is a Microsoft Excel
workbook that is used to extract or update Smart 3D hierarchy information. Templates of
hierarchy mapping sheets are delivered with the mapping file. This file is delivered by default
to the [Product Folder]\SharedContent\Data\Translators\S3DPDSExport folder. You can
copy these sheets to another workbook to create your own hierarchy mapping file.
Log file
Specifies the location and file name for logging process information. Click View Log to view
the log file.
Extract/Update Hierarchy Mapping
Extracts or updates the hierarchy as specified.

Generate PDS Project Configuration File

FWP Project Number
Specifies the sub project number for FrameWorks Plus projects. This setting is only used If
Discipline is set to Structural.
PDS Model Directory
Specifies the model folder. You can type the network path, or navigate to it. This information
is updated in the hierarchy mapping file and used when you export the model.

Common User's Guide 118

 File Menu

Common User's Guide 119

 File Menu

Common User's Guide 120

 File Menu

Hierarchy Mapping File

Specifies the mapping file to use in the export process. The mapping file is a Microsoft Excel
workbook that is used to extract or update Smart 3D hierarchy information. Templates of
hierarchy mapping sheets are delivered with the mapping file. This file is delivered by default
to the [Product Folder]\SharedContent\Data\Translators\S3DPDSExport folder. You can
copy these sheets to another workbook to create your own hierarchy mapping file.
PDS Project Configuration File
Specifies the location and file name of the ASCII file. This file is used in PDS when creating
areas and models with Create Model Data Using ASCII File. For more information, see
Configure the PDS Export Initialization File.
Log file
Specifies the location and file name for logging process information. Click View Log to view
the log file.
Generate PDS Project Configuration File
Generates an ASCII file as specified, and updates the hierarchy mapping file with the PDS
model directory information.

Export Model Tab (Export To PDS Dialog Box)

Discipline
Specifies the discipline (such as piping or equipment) for which to export the hierarchy. You can
select a discipline from the list.
Hierarchy Mapping File
Specifies the mapping file to use in the export process. The mapping file is a Microsoft Excel
workbook that is used to extract or update Smart 3D hierarchy information. Templates of
hierarchy mapping sheets are delivered with the mapping file. This file is delivered by default to
the [Product Folder]\SharedContent\Data\Translators\S3DPDSExport folder. You can copy
these sheets to another workbook to create your own hierarchy mapping file.
Log file
Specifies the location and file name for logging process information. Click View Log to view the
log file.
Export Model
Exports the model as specified.

Common User's Guide 121

 File Menu

Export Settings
The File > Export > PDS Export > Export Settings command edits the [Product
Folder]\Smart3D\3DRefData\SharedContent\Data\Translators\S3DPDSExport\PDSExportTransl
ator.ini file. You can also edit the PDSExportTranslator.ini file directly with any ASCII file editor.

Global
The Global settings are used to define the MicroStation symbology for each Smart 3D display
aspect.
Aspect Symbology Name
Select the Smart 3D aspect for which to define MicroStation symbology.
Level
Enter the MicroStation level for the selected aspect. Valid levels are 1 to 63.
Color
Select a color for the selected aspect.
Weight
Enter the MicroStation line weight for the selected aspect. Valid weights are 0 to 31.
Style
Select the MicroStation line style for the selected aspect.

Equipment
Number of equipment per model
Enter the maximum number of equipment to put into a single MicroStation design file
(.DGN).

Piping
Number of pipelines per model
Enter the maximum number of pipelines to put into a single Alphanumeric Piping Language
(APL) file.

Structure
Number of structures per model
Enter the maximum number of structural objects (beams, columns, braces, and slabs) to put
into a single CIS/2 file.
Number of structural equipment per model
Enter the maximum number of walls, ladders, and stairs to put into a single equipment
MicroStation design file (.DGN).
Wall Level
Enter the MicroStation level for walls. Valid levels are 1 to 63.

Common User's Guide 122

 File Menu

Wall Color
Select a color for walls.
Wall Weight
Enter the MicroStation line weight for walls. Valid weights are 0 to 15.
Wall Style
Select the MicroStation line style for walls.
Wall Opening Level
Enter the MicroStation level for the wall openings. Valid levels are 1 to 63.
Wall Opening Color
Select a color for the wall openings.
Wall Opening Weight
Enter the MicroStation line weight for the wall openings. Valid weights are 0 to 15.
Wall Opening Style
Select the MicroStation line style for the wall openings.

HVAC
Number of HVAC ducts per model
Enter the maximum number of ducts per MicroStation design file (.DGN).
Duct Level
Enter the MicroStation level for ducts. Valid levels are 1 to 63.
Duct Color
Select a color for ducts.
Duct Weight
Enter the MicroStation line weight for ducts. Valid weights are 0 to 15.
Duct Style
Select the MicroStation line style for ducts.
Duct Component Level
Enter the MicroStation level for the duct component. Valid levels are 1 to 63.
Duct Component Color
Select a color for the duct component.
Duct Component Weight
Enter the MicroStation line weight for the duct component. Valid weights are 0 to 15.
Duct Component Style
Select the MicroStation line style for the duct component.

Common User's Guide 123

 File Menu

Print
Sends a copy of the active window to a specified plotter or printer. What you see in the active
window is what appears on the printed document.
The software uses the standard Microsoft Windows Print dialog box. To access additional
printer properties, click Properties. The settings that are available in the dialog box depend on
the type of printer that is currently selected in the Print dialog box.

 The software automatically produces the view snapshot on a white background, regardless
of the settings currently defined for the default background color.
 The shortcut key for the Print command is CTRL+P.
 You must install and select a printer or plotter before you use this command. For help on
installing a printer or plotter, see Windows Help.

Print the active window

1. Select the window you want to print.
2. Click File > Print, or press CTRL+P.
3. In the Name box, select the printer to use.
4. In the Number of copies box, type the number of copies that you want.

 You can set additional options for the printer by clicking Properties.
 Save your current session before you print. If a printer error or other problem occurs, you
will not lose any work completed since the last time you saved the session.
 What you see in the active window is what appears on the printed document. Be sure to
make any necessary changes to the view before printing, such as adjusting the orientation
of the view or the zoom.
 The software automatically produces the view snapshot on a white background, regardless
of the settings currently defined for the default background color.

Print Dialog Box

Sets options for printing the contents of the active window.
Name
Specifies the printer that you want to use. You can select from a list of all the configured
printers available for printing.
Properties
Opens the Printer Document Properties dialog box in which you can set properties for the
printer that you selected in the Name list. The settings available on this dialog box depend
on the type of printer that you have selected.

Common User's Guide 124

 File Menu

Status
Displays the current status of the selected printer. This area is read-only.
Type
Displays the type of printer currently selected. This area is read-only.
Where
Displays the printer path or location for the currently selected printer. This area is read-only.
Comment
Displays any comments you input during printer configuration. This area is read-only.
Print to file
Prints the document to a file instead of a printer. Specify the name of the file on the Print to
file dialog box after you select this check box, and click OK on the Print dialog box. Using
this option saves a document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer or plotter. You
can then print from a computer that does not have the application installed, or print to a
printer other than the one you have currently installed.
Print Range
Displays options for selecting the print range. The Pages and Selection options are not
supported by the software. The default option is All.
Number of copies
Specifies the number of copies you want to print.
Collate
Organizes sheets when you print multiple copies. This option is available only when
Number of copies exceeds 1.

Common User's Guide 125

 File Menu

Most Recently Used List

Opens a recently used session file. The last session you opened is at the top of the list. You can
have up to four sessions in the list.

Common User's Guide 126

 File Menu

Exit
Closes the open session and exits the software. If you have changed data since the session
was last saved, or if you have not saved a new session, the software prompts you to save your
changes.

Quit an editing session

Click File > Exit.
If you have changed the session since you last saved it, or if you have never saved the
session, the software prompts you to save your changes.

Common User's Guide 127

SECTION 5

Edit Menu
The Edit menu provides commands for undoing incorrect actions, copying and pasting,
modifying objects, and opening hyperlinks. Some of the commands on this menu might change
depending on the active task.

In This Section
Undo ............................................................................................. 128
Copy ............................................................................................. 131
Paste ............................................................................................ 132
Paste and Restore ........................................................................ 136
Copying and Pasting Using the Catalog ....................................... 140
Locate Filter .................................................................................. 148
Delete ........................................................................................... 150
Move ............................................................................................. 151
Rotate Object ................................................................................ 157
Mirror Copy ................................................................................... 169
Update Names .............................................................................. 176
Properties ..................................................................................... 176
Go to Hyperlink ............................................................................. 182

Common User's Guide 128

 Edit Menu

Undo
Reverses all changes of your transactions on information in the model database. This
command does not affect data stored in your session file. For example, it does not undo view
manipulation commands such a fit, zoom, or pan.
You can undo Reference 3D object Exclude and Include command operations. For more
information, see Exclude and Include Reference 3D Objects.
Actions you can undo fall into three categories:
 Modification - You do not want to keep the modifications you made.
 Entity Creation - You want to remove something you created. You can remove the object
with Delete or undo.
 Entity Deletion - You want to restore objects that you deleted.
The software creates a private undo list for you when you open a session. When you close the
session, the software deletes the undo list. Selecting Save or Save As has no effect on your
Undo list.
To prevent the Undo data from continually increasing, you have the option to limit the number of
transactions the software must remember by going to Tools > Options > General. You can
disable the Undo command is clearing the Make Undo available option. For more information,
see General Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 500).
You can use Undo by selecting Edit > Undo, by clicking Undo on the toolbar, or by using
the shortcut keys CTRL+Z.

 You cannot undo the Claim command. In addition, the Undo history is cleared after you run
Claim, meaning actions taken prior to claiming cannot be undone.
 Most dialog box actions cannot be undone. For example, if you delete a named view using
Views > Named Views, you cannot use Undo to recreate the named view.

What do you want to do?

 Cancel your last action (on page 129)
 Turn undo on or off (on page 130)

Cancel your last action

On the General tab, click Undo .

 You can use Undo by selecting Edit > Undo, by clicking Undo on the toolbar, or by
using the shortcut keys CTRL+Z.
 On the General tab of the Tools > Options dialog box, you can enable or disable Undo.
You can also specify how many previous actions can be canceled. For more information,
see Options Dialog Box (on page 500).

Common User's Guide 129

 Edit Menu

Turn undo on or off

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the General tab, select the Make Undo available check box to activate or deactivate
the feature. A check mark indicates that the Undo command is available.

 When you enable the Make Undo available feature, you can specify the number of
previous actions that can be cancelled in the Number of undo actions list.
 You can use Undo by selecting Edit > Undo, by clicking Undo on the toolbar, or by
using the shortcut keys CTRL+Z.

Common User's Guide 130

 Edit Menu

Copy
Copies selected objects and their associated relationships to the Clipboard. The Clipboard
retains the format of the copied objects and converts them to other formats as required when
you paste them using Paste (on page 132).
When you copy more than one object at a time, the software copies all relationships shared
among the objects. If there is a relationship between a selected object and an object that you did
not select, then the copied set of objects is expanded automatically to include the excluded
object. The Copy command also copies the current permission groups of the copied objects.
You can copy an object from one workspace and paste it into another. The workflow for the
Copy command is the same. However, you use Paste and Restore (on page 136) to paste into
the other workspace.

 The shortcut key for the Copy command is CTRL+C.

 When copying graphical objects, you click a reference point (From point) on an object in the
select set.
 You can view the selected objects count on the status bar just to the left of the To Do List
indicator.
 When copying a large data set, a progress bar is displayed. If the software determines that
the Copy operation might run out of virtual memory, the following message appears below
the progress bar:

If you cancel the operation, an entry is added to the error log.

Common User's Guide 131

 Edit Menu

Copying Large Areas of the Model

Copying large areas of the model can save you a great deal of time and design effort. More
information is provided in the Model Data Reuse (MDR) topic of the Project Management User's
Guide. However, to make the most effective use of your original design, keep the following in
mind:
 Use filters to select precisely the objects that you want to copy. Copy as much as possible in
a single operation so that you can take advantage of the existing relationships in your
model.
 When you create the filters, create an asking filter for the system. Also, create an asking
filter for the system and objects. Then, create a compound asking filter that combines the
two.
 Duplicate the system hierarchy for the paste operation. This hierarchy provides a destination
location for the copied objects and allows you to easily identify and delete any duplicates.
 For complex areas, it might be useful to copy and paste the structure first. Very large
structural areas might need to be broken down into smaller structural areas.
 When the software pastes the copied objects, it tries to maintain the original relationships.
Be careful to include all of the related objects in the copy set. For the same reason, include
all lines, reference planes, and so on that have relationships to the objects that you are
copying. If you have created objects with relationships to items that no longer exist in the
model, such as slabs related to reference planes that have been deleted, you might need to
leave those objects out of the copy set and recreate them in the new area of the model.
 It might be helpful to create breaks in the model to create logical areas to copy. Because the
software tries to maintain relationships, and those related objects might not be present in the
paste location, you might need to isolate the area that you want to copy from the connected
objects that are not in the copy set.
 Use naming rules whenever possible. Objects that are named with naming rules
automatically update when copied and pasted. Objects with user-defined names receive a
Copy of prefix.

Common User's Guide 132

 Edit Menu

Paste
Inserts the Clipboard contents in a selected document or a selected area of the model.
The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted into another document in several supported
formats. The supported formats are:
 Native to the three-dimensional software
 Picture/Enhanced Metafile (GDI)
 Text/OEM
 Text/RTF/Unicode (only the selected text)
The Paste command inserts an object as a new object. The name rule for the object also
updates, so the object has a new name. You can specify whether you want the software to place
the new object directly on top of the copied object, or if you want to define the new position for
the pasted objects.
You might need to copy an object from one workspace and paste it into another. Use Paste and
Restore (on page 136) to insert an object with the same identity and name.

 The shortcut key for the Paste command is CTRL+V.

 When pasting a large data set, a progress bar is displayed. If the software determines that
the Paste operation might run out of virtual memory, the following message appears below
the progress bar:

If you cancel the operation, an entry is added to the error log.

 Previous releases of the software required you to manage the GUID tabs on bulkload
workbooks in order to copy data across models that used different catalogs. This ensured
that identical definitions had the same GUIDs. In this release, the Paste command
automatically manages the GUIDs. You can now copy data across models without manually
ensuring that the GUIDs in the source and destination catalogs match.

Common User's Guide 133

 Edit Menu

Copy and paste an object

1. Select one or more objects.
You can view a count of the selected objects on the status bar just to the left of the
To Do List indicator. This count gives you an idea of how long the copy/paste operation
might take.
2. Right-click to select Copy or click Copy on the toolbar.
Press Ctrl+C or click Edit > Copy.
3. Click a reference point (From point) on an object in the select set.

 You can select any reference point to use to later position the pasted objects. For
example, you can click a coordinate system, control point on a piece of equipment or
use PinPoint to specify the coordinates.
 Some logical objects such as Systems and Pipelines, do not prompt you for a reference
point. In these cases, the Paste command only allows Paste in place.
4. Right-click to select Paste or click Paste on the toolbar.
Press Ctrl+V or click Edit > Paste.
5. On the Paste dialog box, assign target relationships, review the options, and adjust as
needed.
You can select options to keep the original permission groups and to paste the
objects in place. For example, you might want to keep the original permission groups when
pasting large data sets containing different types of objects (piping, equipment, and
structure).
6. Click OK, and click in the model to place the objects.

 The software displays a preview of the selected objects in a three-dimensional dark

green outline attached to the cursor.

 When copying across models or pasting modules from the catalog, the software
attaches a red outline of the select set to the cursor.

Common User's Guide 134

 Edit Menu

After you copy a large data set, the data remains in memory until you copy
another set of objects, copy data in another application, or exit Smart 3D. If you copy a large
data set and then continue working in Smart 3D, your computer's performance may be impacted
due to memory usage. Smart 3D displays the following warning message after you paste a large
data set:

Click Yes to keep clipboard data available, and click No to clear your clipboard.

Paste Dialog Box

The Paste command allows you to paste the objects as new objects with new names. In the
Paste dialog box, you can specify additional information for pasting objects or information into
the current model.
Description
Provides a description of the input object.
Selection
Shows the parent of object (named objects in WSE) or geometry constraining object (Assoc
Point) associated with the object (sometimes unnamed (Optional) relationships) highlighted
in yellow graphic view.
Delete Optional
Deletes all optional relationships in the Paste dialog box. This option is useful when you
want to delete all optional relationships in bulk mode.
If you use Delete Optional, the objects that you copy might create To Do
Record. You must go to the To Do List to review these objects and redefine any needed
relationships. Objects that are likely to have record created in To Do List when you use
Delete Optional include, but not limited to: stairs, ladders, slabs, and walls.
To delete the individually selected optional relationships, select the required optional
relationship, and then click Delete Optional or press the SPACEBAR or DELETE key.
Show Clipboard window
Opens a window that displays the Clipboard (copied physical objects), including the input
objects.

Common User's Guide 135

 Edit Menu

Keep original permission groups

Controls the permission group assignment for the pasted objects. This option is helpful
when you are pasting large data sets containing different types of objects (piping,
equipment, structure). Here are some important points to remember about this option.
 When this option is selected, the software assigns all pasted objects to the original
permission group, as long as you have write access to that permission group. If you do
not have write access or if the permission group does not exist, then the software
assigns the objects to the active permission group.
 When this option is not selected, the software assigns the objects to the active
permission group.
 When pasting objects from one database to another, permission groups are considered
identical if they have the same name.
Paste in place
Controls whether Paste inserts the Clipboard contents at the same coordinates as copied
objects, or whether Paste displays the selection in dynamics and waits for you to click and
define the position for the pasted graphics.
The software does not prompt for position of pasted objects when you use this option. When
this option is not selected, and if you click OK, the software requests for the position of
copied objects and displays a green outline/red box to help them in positioning.
Use PinPoint for precise input. You can use View commands to adjust the view to
be able to select the paste point.
Clearing this option is possible only if Reference Point is requested by Copy command.
See Also
Paste and Restore (on page 136)
Paste (on page 132)
Restore Model Objects from Backup (on page 138)

Common User's Guide 136

 Edit Menu

Paste and Restore

Performs a partial restore of plant mode objects from a backup, maintaining the identity, name,
location, and relationships of the copied objects. You can select and copy objects from a backup
model and paste them into the active model. The command is located on the Edit menu.
It is often helpful when using this command to verify which session is active. You can
view the name of the current session, task, model, and active filter on the title bar of the
application and on the Windows task bar.

Partial Restore
To use Paste and Restore for a partial restore, your project administrator must back up the
current model in the Project Management task. When you need to restore objects from a backup
of the model data, the project administrator makes the backup data available as an additional
model in the Project Management tree using the Restore model for selective recovery of
model objects option in the Restore Wizard. For more information, see Restore a Backup
Model for Selective Recovery in an Active Model in the Project Management User's Guide.
Paste and Restore does not support selective recovery of marine and material
handling model objects.
The process for restoring selected objects from a backup is a simple copy-and-paste from one
model to another. The behavior is as follows:

Property Values
All property values from the backup are restored to the object with the following exceptions:
Modified Date and Modified By, both of which reflect the current values when you use Paste
and Restore.

Permission Groups
To use Paste and Restore, you must have write access to the permission group for both the
active and the backup versions.
Paste and Restore uses the active permission group if the original permission group of the
object is not in the target model. The original permission group may have been deleted from the
target model or may never have been in the target model. This situation can arise when you are
importing objects from other models to reference.

Status
If an object in the backup version has an Approved status, the Paste and Restore command
sets the status back to Working in the active model. If any object selected for Paste and
Restore in the active model has an Approved status, you cannot use the Paste and Restore
command.

Common User's Guide 137

 Edit Menu

Restoring Copied Objects

When attempting to restore copied objects, the following error may occur: The copied object(s)
cannot be restored. Paste and Restore is unable to restore objects in the select set that have
been copied into the current model. After you click OK, the command cancels. If only one object
was in the select set when the error occurred, the object cannot be restored. If more than one
object was in the select set, you have the following options:
 You can copy a smaller set of objects and try the command again
 You can restore the whole model from backup and re-model the work done since the
backup.
 Objects that cannot be restored have to be remodeled. In some cases, this error may be
related to connections between objects (like structural members), where objects have been
moved or connections have changed since the backup.

Restoring Drawing Volumes

When a drawing volume is associated to a drawing document (that is, volume drawings or
drawings associated with spatial drawing components), copying the drawing volume results in
copying the drawing sheet objects as well. When you paste the drawing volume, you specify the
Space folder for the drawing volume. All other paste options are derived from the previous
parent object.

Design Basis
When you run Paste and Restore, the software sets the correlation relationship to the state
from the backup. If the object was not correlated, the relationship is removed.

 If problems occur when using Paste and Restore, refer to the Troubleshooting Reference
Guide accessed with Help > Printable Guides for additional information.
 When using Paste and Restore, the Selection column of the Paste dialog box displays the
original system associated with the object. You can change the association by selecting a
different system in the Workspace Explorer. If the original system associated with the
object has been deleted from the active model, then the Selection column of the Paste
dialog box is blank. You can create a new association by selecting a system in the
Workspace Explorer.

Common User's Guide 138

 Edit Menu

Restore model objects from backup

 You need write access to both the current and backup versions of the model to use Paste
and Restore.
 If any object selected for Paste and Restore in the current model has an Approved status,
you cannot use Paste and Restore.
1. Open a session in Smart 3D that points to a model restored from a backup of the current
model.
To use Paste and Restore for a partial restore, your project administrator must
back up the current model in the Project Management task. When you need to restore
objects from a backup of the model data, the project administrator makes the backup data
available as an additional model in the Project Management tree using the Restore model
for selective recovery of model objects option in the Restore Wizard. For more
information, see Restore a Backup Model for Selective Recovery in an Active Model in the
Project Management User's Guide.
2. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select objects in the backup model.
3. In the Common task, select Edit > Copy.
4. Click a reference point (From point) on an object in the select set.
You can click a From point in space, but it is more common to define the From point
on an object in the select set. For example, you can click a control point on a piece of
equipment.
5. Open another session in Smart 3D that points to your current model.
6. In the Common task, select Edit > Paste and Restore.
The Paste dialog box displays. The Selection column shows the original system and
relationships associated with the object.
7. Provide information as required to complete the paste operation, and then click OK.
Backup versions of the objects are restored to the current model. Relationships are
adjusted, depending on permissions. The To Do List is updated if necessary.
8. Delete any restored objects that are not needed.

Common User's Guide 139

 Edit Menu

Returning the current model to the state of the backup model

If you are returning everything in the current model to the state of the backup model, you must
delete any objects that were created after the restore date.
1. Use Tools > Select by Filter to create a filter to find any objects created after the creation
date of the backup database.
2. In the Locate Filter, click More and select your new filter.

3. Click Select and fence-select the entire model in a graphic view.

The objects with creation dates later than the filter highlight.
4. Click Delete .

 It is often helpful when using this command to verify which session is active. You can view
the name of the current session, task, Model, and filter on the title bar of the application and
on the Windows task bar.

 You can change the graphic display in the backup model graphic view to show a clear visual
difference between the two models by changing the background in Tools > Options.
 When using Paste and Restore, the Selection column of the Paste dialog box displays the
original system associated with the object. You can change the association by selecting a
different system in the Workspace Explorer. If the original system associated with the
object has been deleted from the active model, then the Selection column of the Paste
dialog box is blank. You can create a new association by selecting a system in the
Workspace Explorer.

Common User's Guide 140

 Edit Menu

Copying and Pasting Using the Catalog

The Copy to Catalog and Paste from Catalog commands take the functionality of the standard
Copy and Paste commands to a broader level while you work in an editing session in the
model. These commands allow you to copy a set of objects and then later paste the objects into
another model that uses the same catalog. The software does not require these objects to have
a functional relationship.
You must have write permission to the permission group of the catalog module folder
to which you are copying the objects.
After you start the Copy to Catalog command, you must identify the user type or module.
Module types are available in the reference data as the result of a previous bulkload. Delivered
module types reside in the ModuleTypes.xls workbook. The path on the administrator computer
is [Product Folder]\CatalogData\Bulkload\DataFiles. Also, you can access this folder by
selecting the Project Management option during workstation setup. For more information, see
the Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
Next, you identify a set of objects in the model that you want to copy for placement in the
Catalog. The software offers the option to include parent objects for the set you selected.
In effect, the Catalog is serving as a clipboard to store copied objects from the Copy to Catalog
command until you decide to place the objects with the Paste from Catalog command. You can
paste the objects by selecting the module in the Catalog, in the same manner that you select
equipment from the Catalog.
You can choose to paste the objects to another model or within the same model. The results of
the Paste from Catalog command match the functionality of the standard copy and paste
operation. After you finish the command, the software displays the ribbon associated with the
selected set of objects.
For example, you have copied associated graphics from multiple applications with the Copy to
Catalog command. When you paste the graphics with the Paste from Catalog command, the
software establishes the relationships to the required parents or inputs, similar to the standard
Paste command. As a result, you can save and re-use modules that contain application objects.
The Paste from Catalog command uses the standard paste functionality, in addition to special
prompts and the definition of the point that you used, to paste the saved graphics.

Topics
Copy to Catalog ............................................................................ 141
Paste from Catalog ....................................................................... 145

Common User's Guide 141

 Edit Menu

Copy to Catalog
Copies a set of objects to the Catalog in a module that you designate. After you complete the
command, the copied objects are available to all users to access as needed. The objects you
copy do not need to share any type of functional relationship. The type of module you select
determines the properties of the objects.
If the associated specification data, part data, symbols, or other reference data are
not also copied from the source catalog into the target catalog, an error message displays when
you use the Paste from Catalog command. Possible error messages are listed below:
 The PasteFromCatalog command succeeded. However some external objects
are missing and may impact the final result. For more information, please
refer to the ‘SP3D_Paste_MissingExternalObject.log’ file. Would you
like to view the file now?
 The catalog information required by this module is not found. The module
should be deleted and recreated using your current catalog data.
The modules exist in the reference data as defined by the bulkload of module types. The
reference data stores the following information for the module:
 Name, description, and type of module that stores the data in the Catalog
 Properties associated with the model type that allow you to search in the Catalog for a
select set
 The copied objects, which the software assigns to a common permission group for reference
data
 Identity of the input objects
 Parent objects of the copied objects
 Graphics for the inputs that display in the placement window
 List of permission groups to which each copied object belonged
 Stored object in the Catalog that controls all of this data as a row in a user folder
For more information about the modules that the Copy to Catalog command uses, refer to the
Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
You must have write permission to the permission group of the catalog module folder
to which you are copying the objects.

Copy to Catalog Ribbon

Provides options for copying a set of objects to the Catalog.
Properties
Displays the Module Properties dialog box so you can review or edit the properties. For
more information, see Module Properties Dialog Box (on page 144).

Select
Specifies the objects to copy.

Placement Point

Common User's Guide 142

 Edit Menu

Allows you to click in the model to locate the placement point.

Define Prompts
Changes the stored prompts during the copy operation.
Finish
Saves the copied objects to the database.
Cancel
Clears the selected objects.
Accept
Accepts the selected objects.
Name
Specifies a unique name for the set of objects.
Type
Specifies the module type for the copied objects.

Copy objects to the Catalog

1. Click Edit > Copy to Catalog.
2. Select a set of objects to copy to the Catalog.
3. Click Accept .
4. In the Name box, type a name for the set of objects.
The name you record must be unique from all other names in the Catalog.
5. In the Type box, check the module type and change it if necessary.
6. Click a location in the model to define the placement point of the module. This placement
point is used during the paste operation.
7. On the Define Prompts dialog box, confirm or change the values assigned to the
description and selection. These values describe the relationships of the objects.
8. Click Finish. The software adds the objects to the Catalog.

 You can select the objects before clicking Edit > Copy to Catalog.
 Before clicking Finish, you can click Properties on the ribbon to define values for the
properties of the module.

Common User's Guide 143

 Edit Menu

Define Prompts Dialog Box

Changes the stored prompts during the copy and paste operation. You can change the
description text in the left column on this dialog box.

Module Properties Dialog Box

Accesses the properties for the module used with the Copy to Catalog command. The
information in the Type box determines the properties of the module object in the Catalog. The
types in the list reside in the reference data after a bulkload has been completed.
See Also
General Tab (Module Properties Dialog Box) (on page 144)
Configuration Tab (on page 144)

General Tab (Module Properties Dialog Box)

Reviews and modifies descriptive information about the module you specify during the Copy to
Catalog command.
Name
Displays the name of the module.
Description
Provides a phrase to describe the module you selected.
See Also
Module Properties Dialog Box (on page 144)

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Common User's Guide 144

 Edit Menu

Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access
level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Paste from Catalog

Accesses a select set in the Catalog. This select set is the one that you processed with the
Copy to Catalog command. You can access the multiple, copied objects in the same way you
select equipment in the Catalog.

 Before selecting Edit > Paste from Catalog, select the destination system in the
Workspace Explorer.
 If the associated specification data, part data, symbols, or other reference data are not also
copied from the source catalog into the target catalog, an error message displays when you
use the Paste from Catalog command. Possible error messages are listed below:
 The PasteFromCatalog command succeeded. However some external
objects are missing and may impact the final result. For more
information, please refer to the
‘SP3D_Paste_MissingExternalObject.log’ file. Would you like to view
the file now?
 The catalog information required by this module is not found. The
module should be deleted and recreated using your current catalog
data.
When you select the Paste from Catalog command, the Catalog browser opens in the folder
you last accessed with the command. When you open a module in the Catalog, you use the
Paste dialog box to insert the module information in the target module. The software generates
the required part numbers and occurrence names for the individual objects.

Common User's Guide 145

 Edit Menu

The type of module you select determines the properties of the objects. The modules exist in the
reference data as defined by the bulkload of module types.
For more information about the modules that the Paste from Catalog command uses, refer to
the Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.

Paste objects from the Catalog

1. Use the Copy to Catalog command to create a set of objects to paste.
Copy objects to the Catalog (on page 143)
2. Select the necessary system in the Workspace Explorer.
3. Click Edit > Paste from Catalog.
4. On the Modules dialog box, browse to the folder under the type of module that contains the
copied objects.
If you do not select a module, the command stops and the software provides the
message No object selected to paste.
5. Click OK.
6. On the Place Macro dialog box, review the options, and adjust as needed.

 You can select an option to keep the original permission groups.

 You can resize the columns on this dialog box as well as resize the entire dialog box in
order to more fully view the information.
7. Click OK.
8. Click the location in the model where you want to paste the copied objects.
When you finish the paste operation, the objects are no longer organized as a module
and can be edited individually as needed.

Modules Dialog Box

Browses to and selects the module that contains the objects you copied to the Catalog.
Permission Group
Associates the selected object with a permission group. This drop-down box is available
only in the Catalog task.
Save
Saves the active row to the Catalog database. This command is available only in the
Catalog task.
Copy
Copies the selected object. This command is available only in the Catalog task.
Paste
Pastes a copied object. This command is available only in the Catalog task.

Common User's Guide 146

 Edit Menu

Delete
Deletes the selected object. This command is available only in the Catalog task.
Undo
Reverses the most recent operation. This command is available only in the Catalog task.

Insert Row
Inserts a blank row into the grid view. This command is available only in the Catalog task.

Move Up
Moves the select list entry up one row in the editable grid. This command is available only in
the Catalog task.
Move Down
Moves the select list entry down one row in the editable grid. This command is available
only in the Catalog task.
Properties
Displays the properties of the selected object. The properties on this dialog box are read-
only.
Preview
Opens a bitmap file that was assigned to a part or part class in the reference data.
Filter
Filters the data in the content view to quickly find what you are looking for. This command is
available only in the Catalog task.
Sort
Sorts data in the content view by multiple columns to quickly find what you are looking for.
This command is available only in the Catalog task.
Customize Current View
Controls which property columns display in the content view and in what order. This
command is available only in the Catalog task.
List View
Displays the information in the content view in a list format.
Grid View
Displays the information in the content view in a table format.
Check Data
Checks the consistency of the data in the grid against other data in the Catalog. This
command is available only in the Catalog task.
Address
Specifies your exact location within the displayed hierarchy.

Common User's Guide 147

 Edit Menu

Place Macro Dialog Box

Confirms the parent or associated objects of the pasted objects. You can change the selection
object in the right column.
This dialog box appears when you are pasting objects from the Catalog.
Description
Provides a description of the input object.
Selection
Shows the parent associated with the object.
You can resize the columns on this dialog box as well as resize the entire dialog
box in order to more fully view the information.
Delete Optional
Removes the text in the Selection column for rows in the grid that start with the word
"Optional." This button is useful in large copy-and-paste operations when the grid is filled
with many optional tasks, and you want to remove all these items at once.
Show Clipboard window
Creates a window that displays the Clipboard contents, including the input objects.
Keep original permission groups
Controls the permission group assignment for the pasted objects. This option is helpful
when you are pasting large data sets containing different types of objects (piping,
equipment, structure). Here are some important points to remember about this option.
 When this option is selected, the software assigns all pasted objects to the original
permission group, as long as you have write access to that permission group.
 When this option is selected, if you do not have write access or if the permission group
does not exist (such as in the case when pasting from one database to another), then
the software assigns the objects to the active permission group.
 When this option is not selected, the software assigns the objects to the active
permission group.
Paste in place
This option is not available when you are using the Paste from Catalog command.
See Also
Copy objects to the Catalog (on page 143)

Common User's Guide 148

 Edit Menu

Locate Filter
Changes the active Select command filter without clearing the select set. You can use locate
filters in the software to assist in selection of objects in the workspace. The Locate Filter box on
the main toolbar displays the active filter.

Each task provides a unique list of available filter options. You can use these filters to perform
the following:
 Control the selection of compound (or owner) objects versus selection of the constituent
components. For example, in the Piping task, you have the option to locate the run, the
parts, or the features of the run.
 Filter on any object independent of the current task.
You can apply locate filters to the highlighting and selection in both the graphic and Workspace
Explorer views.
Select the More... option at the bottom of the list to display the Select Filter dialog box. The
Select Filter dialog box displays all of the simple filters that are set up to accept object type or
system objects as discrimination data. You can then select additional filters to add them to this
list. Only the selection of filters is available; all other options are disabled. For more information,
see Select Filter Dialog Box (on page 369).
After you add filters to the list, you can use them just as you would any other filter. For example,
you could do the following:
 Select the objects in a 3D view.
 Select the name of the object in the Workspace Explorer.
 Fence and select the objects in a 3D view.
Any filters that you add from the Select Filter dialog box remain available even if you change
tasks. Filters that you add are available only in the active session. These filters are not saved in
the session file.
These options are also available when you use CTRL+E to display the Locate Filter dialog box
or by selecting Edit > Locate Filter.

 The objects in the Locate Filter list for the Select command are defined by the software.
They are not the user-defined filters that you can create through the Define Workspace or
Select by Filter commands.
 Another way to specify a locate filter is in the field on the Select (on page 347) command
ribbon.

Common User's Guide 149

 Edit Menu

Change the locate filter

1. While working in the model, click Edit > Locate Filter or use the CTRL+E shortcut key.
2. On the dialog box, select a different locate filter.

3. If necessary, change the fence behavior by clicking Inside Fence or Overlapping

Fence .

 When you use the Edit > Locate Filter command, the current command stays active, and
the software retains all selected objects.
 Another way to specify a locate filter is in the field on the Select (on page 347) command
ribbon.

Locate Filter Dialog Box

Specifies a locate filter to use to assist in selection of objects in the workspace. Select Edit >
Locate Filter to display this dialog box.
Select locate filter
Displays the currently active locate filter and provides a list of locate filters that can be
applied to the selected objects in the workspace.

Inside
Specifies that all objects located entirely inside the fence be selected. This setting is the
default for the Select command.

Inside/Overlapping
Specifies that all objects located entirely inside the fence and those outside the fence but
touching the fence at some point are selected.

Common User's Guide 150

 Edit Menu

Delete
Removes the selected object from the database, and deletes any relationships and notes
placed on the object.
Deleting objects can create inconsistencies in your design. However, you can retrieve the data
and reconcile the inconsistencies by immediately clicking the Undo command. You can refer to
the To Do List for a list of any inconsistencies created by deleting an object.
You can select and delete an object in any task if you have the appropriate permissions.
You can also restore deleted objects from backup using the Paste and Restore (on page 136)
command.
You can also press the DELETE key to delete objects.
See Also
Cancel Your Last Action (on page 129)
Undo (on page 128)

Common User's Guide 151

 Edit Menu

Move
Moves objects from one location to another. You specify the original location of the object
and then indicate the destination location. You can move one object or select multiple objects to
move simultaneously.
The software maintains persistent relationships that exist between objects during a move. For
example, if a pump has been mated to a surface that relationship continues to exist even after
the pump is moved to another location within the workspace. Remember that relationships may
prevent you from moving an object to where you want. For example, the pump cannot be moved
off the surface, only to another location on the surface. You may need to delete relationships to
move an object to its new location.

Move Ribbon
Provides commands and options for relocating any object that supports moving. This command
gives functionality for a generic move. You can move more than one object at the same time.
Move From
Identifies the starting point of the move. If you do not define a starting point, the current
location of the selected object is assumed to be the starting point.
Move To
Identifies the end point of the move. During the move operation, you can use PinPoint,
Point Along, and SmartSketch 3D relationship indicators. The SmartSketch indicators help
with moving parallel to other objects or along a major axis to offset from an object. If you do
not want the selected objects to move with the pointer during the Move To step, press F10.
Plane
Activates options for selecting a working plane for the move. The icon on the ribbon
changes depending on your selection. The default selection is No Plane. The options
include:
Plan Plane
Defines the work surface as the XY plane. You can also press CTRL+1 to select this
option.
Elevation Plane: East-West (Z Plane: X-Axis)
Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You can also press CTRL+2 to select this
option.
Section Plane: North-South (Z Plane: Y-Axis)
Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You can also press CTRL+3 to select this
option.
No Plane
Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you place to any
plane. You can also press CTRL+6 to select this option.

Common User's Guide 152

 Edit Menu

Lock Pinpoint
Locks object coordinates for the Move To point if the PinPoint ribbon bar is active when the
Move command is started. If PinPoint is not enabled when the Move command is
activated, the Lock PinPoint option is disabled. By default, Lock Pinpoint is not selected.
 If Rectangular Coordinates is selected on the PinPoint ribbon, the E, N, and El
values are locked.
 If Spherical Coordinates is selected on the PinPoint ribbon, the Distance,
Horizontal, and Vertical values are locked.

 If Cylindrical Coordinates is selected on the PinPoint ribbon, the Radius, Theta,

and Z values are locked.
Fast move
Displays a preview of the selected objects in a three-dimensional dark green outline
attached to the cursor. This option enhances performance when working with large select
sets.

 Smart 3D generates the move set based on the connections and relationships in the
model. The software automatically applies Fast move to a select set that contains:
 An object that does not support computed previews.
 More than one thousand objects.
 The Fast move check box remains clear when the software applies the mode
automatically.

What do you want to do?

 Move objects to a new location (on page 153)
 Move partially constrained objects by a relative distance (on page 155)
 Copy and paste an object (on page 133)

Common User's Guide 153

 Edit Menu

Move objects to a new location

1. Click Select .
2. Select the objects to move.

3. Click Move on the main toolbar, or select Edit > Move.

4. Click the location to which to move the objects. Use Tools > PinPoint to help you.

Common User's Guide 154

 Edit Menu

5. Right-click to end the command.

Move partially constrained objects by a relative distance

1. Select Tools > Pinpoint.
2. Turn on the Relative Tracking option on the PinPoint ribbon. For more information,
see PinPoint (on page 389).
3. Select the objects to move.

4. Click Move on the main toolbar, or select Edit > Move.

5. Click Move From .
6. Select the Lock Pinpoint option.

Common User's Guide 155

 Edit Menu

7. Select the point in the model to move from.

The X, Y, and Z boxes display 0.

8. Press F6, and type the X delta distance for the move.
9. Press F7, and type the Y delta distance for the move.
10. Press F8, and type the Z delta distance for the move.
The objects move to the new coordinates and display as a preview.

Common User's Guide 156

 Edit Menu

11. Left-click to accept the move.

Select System Dialog Box

Displays applicable systems so you can select the system you want.
Look in
Specifies where you want to look for the system. Select Workspace to look for the system
in your defined workspace only. Select Database to look for the system in the entire Model
database regardless of the workspace filter.
See Also
Move (on page 151)

Common User's Guide 157

 Edit Menu

Rotate Object
Rotates or turns the view so that you can see your model from a different perspective. If
you have objects selected, Smart 3D rotates about the center of those objects. If nothing is
selected, the software rotates about the center of the view.
To change the position of the rotation triad:

 Use Reposition rotation triad . For more information, see Advanced Rotation
Options.

 Use Set rotation triad to center of view . For more information, see Advanced
Rotation Options.
 Hover your cursor over the rotation triad until all of the axes turn green. Then, use the
left mouse button to drag and drop the triad at a new location.
 If you have SmartSketch Options turned on, you can use the location glyphs to help you
position the triad at a specific location. In dense areas of the model, these location
glyphs can provide more feedback than you need. Press and hold L to temporarily hide
the SmartSketch location glyphs. The glyphs redisplay when you stop pressing L.
For precision needs, you can define the angle and an incremental step value. To view objects
in the model from a different angle, use the Rotate View command instead.
To use this command, select an object, and click Rotate Object . Then, specify the axis of
rotation by a point (the axis position point) and a direction. You can also relocate the position
point for the axis of rotation, if necessary.
After defining the axis of rotation and position point, define the angle of rotation. One way to
define the angle is by moving the mouse in a drag-and-drop operation. Another way to define
the angle is to type a value in the Angle box. You can also specify a Step value that represents
an incremental angle value. A third way to define the angle is by comparing and changing the
angle between a reference plane or line on the rotation object with a reference plane or line on a
stationary object in the model. In this mode, you use the Reference on Rotation Object and
Reference on Stationary Object buttons on the ribbon.

 If the component has more than one constraint, you cannot rotate it. If the object is not fully
constrained, you can rotate it at any time.
 If the object has a mate relationship to a surface, you can only rotate the object about the
axis that is perpendicular to the surface, which the software selects by default. The default
point of rotation is the origin of the object.
 If you are rotating structural members, be sure to select all the members and the coordinate
system that you want to rotate. If you select just the coordinate system, the members will
rotate but the rotation angle of the members themselves will not change.

Common User's Guide 158

 Edit Menu

Rotate Object Ribbon

Sets options for rotating objects in the model. You cannot rotate objects with certain constraints.
For example, you cannot rotate a pump that is mated to a horizontal reference plane and
aligned with other pumps on either side. That rotation would violate at least one relationship.
Axis direction
Defines the direction of the axis of rotation. You can select one of the predefined axes or
specify a different direction. The following graphic shows the default rotation coordinate
system for an object. The axes are parallel to the axes of the active coordinate system. The
default origin of the coordinate system is the connect point of the object.

To choose a different axis direction, you can complete one of the following actions:
 Select one of the axis directions parallel with the active coordinate system (Up/Down,
N/S, or E/W) from the Axis direction box. Or, select an axis directly on the rotation triad
graphic in a graphic view.
 Select Perpendicular to both References to use the rotation axis direction
perpendicular to both a reference on the object and a reference in the model. This
allows a single rotation about the axis at the rotation point to make the two references
parallel. Generally, the Angle will be set to 0.
 Select Select Graphically, and then click the line or port about which to rotate the
object in the graphic view. You can also select a cylinder to define the axis of the
cylinder as the axis of rotation. If a line is selected, the line becomes the axis of rotation
for the object. If a port is selected, the axis position point changes to the coordinate
system origin of the port.

Common User's Guide 159

 Edit Menu

Bearing
Specifies the bearing angle for the object. The Bearing angle is measured between the
local x-axis of the object and the Y-axis (North) of the global coordinate system in the
XY-plane. The local x-axis is the default axis of primary symmetry for all symbols in the
catalog. The bearing measurement direction is clockwise from the active coordinate system
North looking in the negative active coordinate system direction; that is, down from 0 to 360
degrees. You can enter negative bearing angles, but the software automatically converts
them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to +/- 90 degrees, then the bearing
measure displays 0 degrees.

Pitch
Specifies the pitch angle for the object. The Pitch angle measures between the x-axis of the
object and the X-axis of the global coordinate system in the XZ-plane. This option sets the
reference in the model to a line that is the intersection of the vertical plane through the
X-axis of the local coordinate system and the active coordinate system horizontal plane. The
angle is measured in the positive direction from the horizontal plane in the active coordinate
system up direction regardless of the current bearing. Another way to describe pitch is the
rotation of the object about its y-axis. Pitch angles are limited to between -90 degrees and
+90 degrees, with 0 indicating horizontal.

Common User's Guide 160

 Edit Menu

Roll Angle
Specifies the roll angle for the object. The Roll angle measures between the local z-axis of
the object and the Z-axis of the global coordinate in the YZ-plane. Another way to describe
roll is the rotation of the object about its x-axis. This option sets the reference in the model to
a line that is perpendicular to the local coordinate system x-axis and in the horizontal plane.
Roll angles are measured clockwise from horizontal to the y-axis of the local coordinate
system. The roll angle is between 0 and 360 degrees. You can enter negative roll angles,
but the software automatically converts them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to
+/- 90 degrees, then the reference in the model is the North axis.

Axis Position Point

Defines the origin point for the axis of rotation. This point is stationary during the rotation, as
is any point on the axis of rotation. To move the axis of rotation to a different location in the
model, you can click Axis Position Point, and then click in the graphic view at the location
of the origin. The default is the object origin. If there is no defined origin, the origin is the
center of the range of the selected objects.
Reference on Rotation Object
Instructs the software to use the selected part face or edge as the rotation reference, and
sets the local coordinate system for the rotation of the object. The Angle box displays the
angle between the selected references as projected against the measurement plane.
Reference on Stationary Object
Defines a reference plane or line on another object in the model and selects the global
coordinate system for the rotation of the object. The Angle box displays the angle between
the rotation object and the stationary object as projected against the measurement plane.

Common User's Guide 161

 Edit Menu

Rotate by precision graphic input

Allows you to click a point in the model to graphically orient the object. You can use the
SmartSketch relationship indicators to locate the point.
The following picture shows a graphic input point (E) and reference lines (C) and (D).

(A) - Selected object

(B) - Rotation point
(C) - Reference line on selected object
(D) - Reference line on object in model
(E) - Graphic input point
(F) - Rotated position of reference line on
selected object

Angle
Allows you to type the number of degrees for the angle of rotation to apply to the object.
This option also dynamically displays the current angle during manual rotation. This option is
helpful if you need to have a precise value for the rotation angle.
When you use a reference plane or line on the rotation object and a reference plane or line
on a stationary object in the model, the Angle box shows the angle between these two
references.
Step
Defines an incremental or step value for dynamic rotation. When you rotate objects, the
object rotates to an angle equal to some multiple of the step value.

Common User's Guide 162

 Edit Menu

Close
Completes the command.
Fast rotate
Displays a range box around the objects that you are rotating instead of the wireframe
outline of each object. This option enhances performance when working with large select
sets.
If you do not want to view all of the objects in your workspace during rotation, you
can use Tools > Hide to remove unwanted objects from the view. To restore the objects to
the display, click Tools > Show.

What do you want to do?

 Rotate an object about an axis (on page 163)
 Rotate an object using perpendicular to references mode (on page 165)
 Rotate an object about a line or port (on page 167)
 Rotate an object using bearing, pitch, or roll (on page 169)

Common User's Guide 163

 Edit Menu

Rotate an object about an axis

1. Select the object to rotate.

2. Click Rotate Object on the main toolbar.

3. In the Axis direction box, select one of the axis directions parallel with the active coordinate
system: N/S-, E/W-, or the Up/Down-axis. Or, select an axis directly on the rotation triad
graphic in a graphic view.
4. If necessary, move the axis of rotation to a different location in the model by clicking Axis
Position Point , and then click in the graphic view at the location of the origin.

Common User's Guide 164

 Edit Menu

5. In the Angle box, define the degree of the angle of rotation by typing a value or by dragging
the object to define the angle.
As you drag the object, the software displays the rotation about the axis. The Angle
box dynamically displays the value of the angle.

6. In the Step box, you can type the increment value used for the dynamic rotation input. The
default value is blank.
7. Click Close.

Rotate an object using perpendicular to references mode

1. Select the object to rotate.

2. Click Rotate Object on the main toolbar.

Common User's Guide 165

 Edit Menu

3. Select Perpendicular to both References from Axis direction. This option uses the
rotation axis direction that is perpendicular to both a reference on the object and a reference
in the model.
A dashed line appears representing the rotation axis on the object.

4. If necessary, click Axis Position Point to move the axis of rotation.

5. If the reference is on the object, click Reference on Rotation Object , and select a line
or plane to use as a reference on the object being rotated.

6. Click Reference on Stationary Object , and select a line or plane to use as a reference
on another object in the model.
A second line appears and the angle between the two lines displays in the Angle field.

Common User's Guide 166

 Edit Menu

7. Click Rotate by precision graphic input on the ribbon. This option allows you to click a
point in the model to orient graphically the object using a reference on the object. You can
use the SmartSketch relationship indicators to locate the point.
-OR-
In the Angle box, type the angle that you want between the reference plane (dashed line)
on the rotation object and the reference plane (dashed line) on the stationary object.

8. Click Close.

Rotate an Object about a Line or Port

1. Select the object to rotate.

Common User's Guide 167

 Edit Menu

2. On the main toolbar, click Rotate Object .

3. In the Axis direction box, select the Select Graphically option, and then click a line or port
about which to rotate the object in the graphic view. For example, you can select a nozzle to
specify that the axis of the nozzle cylinder is the axis of rotation.

4. In the Angle box, define the rotation by typing a value or by dragging the object to define the
angle.

5. Click Close when you are finished rotating the object.

Common User's Guide 168

 Edit Menu

Rotate an object using bearing, pitch, or roll

1. Select the object that you want to rotate.
2. On the main toolbar, click Rotate Object .
3. In the Axis direction box, select the Bearing, Pitch, or Roll options for the direction of the
axis of rotation.

 The Bearing, Pitch, and Roll options set both the axis of rotation and default
measurement references.
 When the pitch is +/- 90 degrees, the bearing measure is indeterminate.
4. If necessary, move the axis of rotation to a different location in the model by clicking Axis
Position Point , and then click in the graphic view at the location of the origin.
5. For more precision in rotating, you can click Rotate by precision graphic input on the
ribbon.
This option allows you to click a point in the model to graphically orient the object
using a reference on the object. You can use the SmartSketch relationship indicators to
locate the point.
6. In the Angle box, define the rotation by typing a value or by dragging the object to define the
angle.
7. In the Step box, you can type the increment value used for the dynamic rotation input. The
default value is blank.
8. Click Close when you are finished rotating the object.

Common User's Guide 169

 Edit Menu

Mirror Copy
Produces a duplicate image of an object or a set of objects at a location you specify in the
model. The mirrored objects are identical in form, but the image is reversed and copied to the
selected destination. However, certain settings, particularly the properties for rotation and part
replacement, can cause differences between the original object and the mirrored object.
The command is especially useful when you need to copy multiple, connected objects to the
opposite side of a symmetrical configuration. For example, you can select an array of pipe runs
and generate mirrored images of all their components, geometrical structure, and properties
assigned to the pipe runs.
The direction of the mirrored objects is perpendicular from the mirror plane (the plane about
which the software flips the selected objects). The mirror plane and its location determine the
exact location of the objects. The software places the mirrored objects at a point that is an equal
distance from, and perpendicular to, the mirror plane.
You cannot use the Mirror Copy command on hangers and supports objects.
The command processing includes the following functions:
 Copy and flip the copy
 Flip in the direction that you specify
 Move or copy the flipped object to a position you specify
 Change or copy properties appropriately
The mirroring and flipping is based on settings in the reference data. The result is a mirrored
object that is identical to the object at the origin, but the mirrored object is reversed, moved, and
copied. The only exceptions can occur from restrictions that exist in reference data settings for
rotation or part replacement. The select list, Mirror Behavior Option, appears on the part class
sheets for reference data. The option has various settings:
 Component may be mirrored
 Component may be rotated 180 degrees, but not mirrored
 Component cannot be mirrored or rotated, but can be copied and translated
 Component must be replaced rather than mirroring, rotating, or copying

Understanding Mirroring and Copying Terminology

The Mirror Copy command performs various mathematical calculations to provide a mirrored
image of objects you select. Understanding the terminology used during these calculations can
help with your work in the model. Following the definitions, a picture explains the nature of the
processing by the software.
 Centerline - Centerline of the volume of an object. In the graphic, the centerline is labeled
(A).
 Centroid - Center point of the volume of an object. In the graphic, the centroid is labeled (B).
 Direction of flip - Vector perpendicular to the mirror plane. An arrow points in the direction
toward which the flip goes. In the graphic, the flip direction is labeled (C).
 Mirror destination - Corresponds to the Move To point you specify in the model. In the
picture, the mirror destination is labeled (E).

Common User's Guide 170

 Edit Menu

 Mirror origin - Corresponds to the Move From point, or the origin of the objects you want to
mirror. In the picture, the mirror origin is labeled (D).
 Mirror plane - Plane about which the software flips the selected objects. In the picture, the
mirror origin is labeled (F).
The following picture explains the nature of the processing by the software.

(A) - Centerline
(B) - Centroid
(C) - Direction of flip
(D) - Mirror origin (or Move From point)
(E) - Mirror destination (or Move To point)
(F) - Mirror plane

Common User's Guide 171

 Edit Menu

The command processing requires a series of steps. First, you identify one or more objects you
want to mirror and copy. Then you define the mirror plane, which is the plane about which the
software flips the objects you select. Also, the software prompts you to specify the starting point
(or move from) and the destination point (or move to). The following graphic summarizes the
processing:

(A) - Mirror plane

(B) - Mirror destination (or Move To point)
(C) - Pipe (typical)
(D) - Mirror origin (or Move From point)
(E) - Equipment (typical)
(F) - Direction of flip

Mirror Copy Ribbon

Sets options for mirrored and copied objects.

Select
Selects objects to mirror and copy.
From Point
Sets a starting point for the mirroring and copying operation. This point is also called the
from point.
To Point
Sets an end point for the mirroring and copying operation. This point is also called the to
point.

Parent or Related Object

Selects a parent for the mirrored and copied objects. For more information, see Parent or
Related Object Dialog Box (on page 175).
Finish
Mirrors and copies the objects using the defined options.

Common User's Guide 172

 Edit Menu

Direction
Selects the direction of the mirror plane.
Plane by From-To Vector
Defines the mirror plane as normal to a vector between the from point and the to point.
You can also press CTRL+6 to select this option.
Plan Plane
Defines the mirror plane as the XY plane. You can also press CTRL+1 to select this
option.
Elevation Plane: East-West (Z Plane: X-Axis)
Defines the mirror plane as the XZ plane. You can also press CTRL+2 to select this
option.
Elevation Plane: North-South (Z Plane: Y-Axis)
Defines the mirror plane as the YZ plane. You can also press CTRL+3 to select this
option.
Destination Mode
Specifies the destination, which can be the to point or a point to mirror about.

What do you want to do?

 Mirror and copy objects (on page 173)
 Construct symmetrical connections (on page 174)

Mirror and copy objects

1. Click Edit > Mirror Copy.
2. Select the objects in the model to mirror and copy.
3. Click Accept to confirm your selection.
4. Under Direction on the ribbon, specify the direction of the mirror plane. By default, the
direction of mirror plane is set to Plane by From-To Vector.
Shortcut keys for locking a plane are:
Plane by From-To Vector - CTRL+6,
Plan Plane - CTRL+1;
Elevation plane: East- West - CTRL+2
Z Plane: X-axis - CTRL+2;
Elevation plane: North-South - CTRL+3
Z Plane: Y- axis - CTRL+3.
5. Select a location for the From Point position (or origin).
6. Select a location for the To Point position (or destination).
7. On the Parent or Related Object dialog box, review the options, and adjust as needed.
You can select an option to keep the original permission groups.

Common User's Guide 173

 Edit Menu

8. Click OK on the dialog box, and then click Finish on the ribbon.

 You cannot use the Mirror Copy command on hangers and supports objects.
 To select objects for this command, you can use a filter, fence, or directly select the
object within a space. If objects already are selected and you select the Mirror Copy
command, the selected objects are the select set.
 If you set the destination mode to Point to Mirror About and the direction of the mirror
plane to an option other than Plane by From-To Vector, the software does not require
the From Point designation. The To Point command starts automatically.
 If errors occur, the software tracks these discrepancies and records them in the View >
To Do List. Possible errors concern flow direction and listing of left- and right-handed
parts. For example, if you mirrored a piping configuration and connected it to another
object with a different flow direction, the software would report an error. Also, left- and
right-handed parts must appear correctly on parts lists.
 Based on reference data settings (the option Component must be replaced rather
than mirroring, rotating, or copying is in the mirror behavior select list), you can
replace a part with another part listed in the part properties data. If the replacement part
is not available for the active specification, the command continues with the original part
rotated but not mirrored.
 Properties of the modified objects match the original objects with some exceptions.
Standard revision and status properties are updated. The software updates named
objects, based on the name rule (that is, the software does not update the named
object if you defined the name rule, while the software does update the named object
for system-defined name rules). The software automatically updates properties that
track location or orientation.
 If you select the same point for the Move From position (or origin) and the Move To
point, the software displays a message that prompts you to select a different Move To
point. However, if you must specify only one point, you can complete the Mirror Copy
command using the Point to Mirror About option in the Destination list and select a
plane in the Direction list.

Common User's Guide 174

 Edit Menu

Construct symmetrical connections

This procedure is available for the Plan Plane, Elevation plane: East- West, Z Plane: fore-aft,
Elevation plane: North- South, and Z Plane: port-stbd options in the Direction list on the
Mirror Copy ribbon. You cannot construct symmetrical connections for the Plane by From-To
Vector option.
1. Click Edit > Mirror Copy.
2. Place a temporary coordinate system at a point in the model.
3. Select the plane to mirror about. (Do not select the plane constructed using the From and
To Vectors).
4. Select the destination point as the point to mirror about.
5. Click the location you want in the model.
6. Click Finish.

 If errors occur, the software tracks these discrepancies and records them in the View > To
Do List. Possible errors concern flow direction and listing of left- and right-handed parts. For
example, if you mirrored a piping configuration and connected it to another object with a
different flow direction, the software would report an error. Also, left- and right-handed parts
must appear correctly on parts lists.
 Based on reference data settings (the option Component must be replaced rather than
mirroring, rotating, or copying is in the mirror behavior select list), you can replace a part
with another part listed in the part properties data. If the replacement part is not available for
the active specification, the command continues with the original part rotated but not
mirrored.

Parent or Related Object Dialog Box

Specifies parents for the newly copied and about-to-be mirrored objects. For example, you can
assign a parent system for a copied object. You can review the system hierarchy in the
Workspace Explorer on the System tab at the right of the display.
This dialog box also provides information about the objects related to your selection for the
Mirror Copy command. The related objects are listed on this dialog box even though you did
not specifically click these objects. You can click each row, and the object highlights in the
software. An example of related objects is the set of features associated with a pipe run.
Description
Provides a description of the input object.
Selection
Shows the parent associated with the object.
Delete Optional
Removes the text in the Selection column for rows in the grid that start with the word
"Optional." This button is useful in large copy-and-paste operations when the grid is filled
with many optional tasks, and you want to remove all these items at once.

Common User's Guide 175

 Edit Menu

Show Clipboard window

Creates a window that displays the Clipboard contents, including the input objects.
Keep original permission groups
Controls the permission group assignment for the pasted objects. This option is helpful
when you are pasting large data sets containing different types of objects (piping,
equipment, structure). Here are some important points to remember about this option.
 When this option is selected, the software assigns all copied objects to the original
permission group, as long as you have write access to that permission group.
 When this option is selected, if you do not have write access or if the permission group
does not exist (such as in the case when mirroring and copying from one database to
another), then the software assigns the objects to the active permission group.
 When this option is not selected, the software assigns the objects to the active
permission group.
 When pasting from one database to another, permission groups are considered
identical if they share the same name.
Paste in place
This option is checked but not available to change in the Mirror and Copy workflow.
See Also
Mirror Copy (on page 169)

Update Names
Updates objects with name rules that are not automatically updated. You use this command
when an object is moved to a different naming parent, causing a change in the relationship or
hierarchy within the model.
For example, a pipeline is the naming parent for a weld. The name of the weld is the same as
the pipeline it is in.
However, if the pipe run that holds the actual weld object in the system hierarchy is moved to a
different pipeline. The weld name does not know to update because it does not know the
change occurred.
You run Edit > Update Names to update the names automatically. The weld name updates to
reflect the new pipeline to which it is associated.

Update Names
1. Select objects that need to be updated.
2. Select Edit > Update Names.
The selected objects are updated according to their name rules.

Common User's Guide 176

 Edit Menu

Properties
Edits the properties of a selected object. If you select multiple objects, you can edit only the
properties shared by the group.
You can edit the properties of a selected object from any task. The occurrence and definition
properties of these objects are defined in the Catalog database and the specific values of these
properties, such as relationships, are stored in the Model database. The Properties dialog box
for each object type can be different, but most dialog boxes have the following in common:
 Grids with controls
 An OK, Cancel, and Apply button
 Notes, Relationship, and Configuration tabs
The grid controls typically display catalog-defined properties for the selected object. Most
information in the grids is read-only, but you can modify information in the grid on the
Occurrence tabs. While the Properties dialog box is open, you can select other objects in the
workspace. When you select another object, the edit ribbon for that object appears, and the
content of the Properties dialog box shows the values of the new selection.

Selecting Multiple Objects of the Same Type

When you select multiple objects of the same type, the Properties dialog box appearance does
not change. If the objects all have the same value, the Value column displays the value of the
property. If one or more properties are different, the Value column is blank.

Selecting Multiple Objects of Different Types

When you select multiple objects of different types, the Properties dialog box displays only
those tabs that these objects have in common. You can only edit the properties associated with
these tabs.

Common User's Guide 177

 Edit Menu

Transferring Ownership
In a global workshare configuration, you can re-assign ownership of model objects from their
current permission group to another satellite or host permission group using the Transfer button
on the Configuration tab.
The following rules exist for this functionality:
 Only the location that currently owns the object can transfer its ownership of the object to
another location. A location that does not have ownership of an object cannot directly take
ownership of an object from another location.
 To transfer ownership from one location to another, you must have physical write permission
on the current permission group and virtual write permission on the target permission group.
Virtual permission means that if location were not a factor, you would have write access to
that permission group. The host location must set up permissions for each of the satellite
locations ahead of time.

What do you want to do?

 Edit properties (on page 178)
 Transfer ownership of objects in the model (on page 178)

Edit Properties
1. Select one or more objects to edit.
2. Click Edit > Properties.
3. Select the tabs that contain the properties to edit.
4. Edit the properties as needed.
5. Click Apply.

 Different Properties dialog boxes appear for different objects.

 You can select multiple objects of the same type and change the properties as a group.
 If you select multiple objects of different types, only the tabs for the common properties
appear on the Properties dialog box.
 Some properties require write access before you can edit them. For example, you can
change the permission group listed in the Permission Group box on the Configuration tab
only if you have write access to that permission group and to the permission group in which
you plan to place the object.

Common User's Guide 178

 Edit Menu

Transfer ownership of objects in the model

1. Select one or more objects in the model.
2. Click Edit > Properties.
3. On the Configuration tab, click Transfer.
4. On the Transfer Ownership dialog box, specify the new location and permission group.
5. Click OK, and click Yes on the confirmation message.

 You must have physical write permission to the permission group where the objects
currently reside.
 You cannot undo the transfer of ownership.
 The other location receives the change when the database replication process for the
objects takes place.

Properties Dialog Box

Displays properties for review and editing. Some tabs are common across tasks, such as Notes
Tab (on page 179), Relationships Tab (on page 180), and Configuration Tab (on page 144).
Other tabs are specific to certain objects in the model.
The Properties dialog boxes display ToolTips when you pause the mouse over values in the
grid. Some property values can be very long, and the ToolTips allow you to see the entire value.
For example, one of the values for the Mirror Behavior Option property is "Component cannot
be mirrored or rotated, but can be copied and translated".
See Also
Properties (on page 176)

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The
notes provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in
downstream tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within
design review sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on
an object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point
Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name
Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date
Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.

Common User's Guide 179

 Edit Menu

Time
Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note
Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author
Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text
Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.
Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component.
It is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note
Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note
Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not available in
this version.
Highlight Note
Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and the object to
which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note
Deletes the currently displayed note.

Relationships Tab
Displays all objects related to the selected object for which you are viewing properties. For
example, if you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts,
associated control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS
assignments, including project relationships, appear on this tab.

Common User's Guide 180

 Edit Menu

Additional examples for marine relationships are as follows:

 For plate and profile system properties, the related bounded objects, bounding objects, and
connections are shown.
 For plate and profile system part properties, parent systems are shown.
 For assembly connection properties, all connected objects are shown.
 For the properties of a frame connection on a member, supported, supporting, and auxiliary
supporting parts are shown.
 For split connection properties, the parent and auxiliary supporting parts are shown.
Name
Specifies the name of the object.
Type
Specifies the type of object.
Go To
Displays the properties of the selected object.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access
level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.

Common User's Guide 181

 Edit Menu

Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Transfer Ownership Dialog Box

Allows you to specify a new location and permission group for the selected model objects.
Current location
Displays the name of the location with which the current permission group is associated. All
the objects in the select set must belong to the same location.
Current permission group
Displays the name of the permission group with which the selected objects are currently
associated. If all the objects in the select set do not belong to the same permission group,
this box appears blank.
New location
Specifies the name of the location to which you want to assign the objects. In a global
workshare configuration, this box lists all the locations in which you have write access to one
or more permission groups. The selection in this box filters the entries in the New
permission group box.
New permission group
Specifies the new permission group to which to assign the selected objects. If you specify a
value in the New location box, this list displays all permission groups to which you have
write access in the selected location. If you do not specify a value in the New location box,
this list includes all permission groups to which you have write access in all locations except
the current location. This box is blank if you do not have write access to any permission
groups at any locations other than the current one.
We strongly recommend that administrators follow naming convention rules that
include the location as a prefix in the permission group name.

Common User's Guide 182

 Edit Menu

Go to Hyperlink
Displays a file or a web page associated with an object in your model. This command opens the
appropriate software for viewing the file or web page. For example, if the hyperlink is
file://computer/folder/file.bmp, this command launches the software your system associates
with the .bmp file extension. If your computer does not have the necessary software to open the
target file of the hyperlink, you are prompted to select an application in which to open it. If you
select an object that does not have a hyperlink associated with it, the Go to Hyperlink
command is not available.
You can use the Insert > Hyperlink command to create, edit, and unlink hyperlink addresses
attached to objects in a workspace. Hyperlinks are stored in the Site database so that any user
working with that object can access them.

Follow a hyperlink
1. Select an object in your workspace.
2. Click Edit > Go to Hyperlink.

 The shortcut key for the Hyperlink command is CTRL+K.

 You can right-click an object to access the Go to Hyperlink command on the shortcut
menu.

Common User's Guide 183

SECTION 6

View Menu
The View menu provides commands for clipping views, managing views, applying view styles,
and displaying viewing tools. Some of the commands on this menu might change depending on
the active task.
You can manipulate the windows and views in the software to affect the way you see the model.
For example, you can compare a window to a camera. When you look through the camera lens,
you see a real-world view of the objects in the database. You can change the view by zooming
in and out, and focusing on different parts of the model. You can also zoom or pan views.
With the commands on the Window menu, you can create and arrange new windows that allow
you to see more than one section of a model. You can minimize and maximize open windows in
the software.
A view consists of the contents of a window in the software. Using the commands on the View
menu, you can quickly manipulate the views of the model.

In This Section
Clipping ......................................................................................... 184
Active View Control ....................................................................... 196
Previous View ............................................................................... 200
Next View...................................................................................... 200
Named Views................................................................................ 201
Common Views ............................................................................. 203
View by Points .............................................................................. 205
Rotate View .................................................................................. 209
Look at Surface............................................................................. 214
Viewing Your Work ....................................................................... 215
Workspace Explorer ..................................................................... 243
Rulers ........................................................................................... 264
To Do List ..................................................................................... 264

Common User's Guide 184

 View Menu

Clipping
The Clip by Object and Clip by Volume or Plane commands isolate objects or
portions of objects you need for more detailed modeling or viewing. When you use the clipping
commands, the software displays only the identified volume or objects in the active view.
However, you can also display the clipped volume or objects in additional views.
Objects connected to a rotated coordinate system are clipped according to the global
coordinate system.
Clip by Object (on page 185) fits the active view to selected objects while hiding all
non-selected objects or to objects bounded by selected objects. For example, if you select a
valve and a pump, the Clip by Object command also includes the pipe that connects the pump
and valve in the active view.
Clip by Volume or Plane (on page 187) sets the view clipping volume by entering two area
definition points (the cross section of the volume) and two depth points (the extent of the
volume). The Clip by Volume or Plane command also lets you edit the clipped volume by
dragging clipping planes.
Clear Clipping (on page 195) restores all hidden objects to the view in the active window.
You must use Clear Clipping before you can isolate another object or volume by clipping.

Clip by Object
Isolates an object or group of objects in your model for closer viewing or more detailed work.
If you have already selected the objects when you click Clip by Object , the clipped objects
immediately appear in the active view. The clipping planes are positioned according to the active
coordinate system, rather than the global coordinate system. Objects connected to a rotated
coordinate system are clipped according to the global coordinate system. To restore the view,
click Clear Clipping (on page 195) .
Below is a selected pump before clipping.

Common User's Guide 185

 View Menu

After clipping, only object bounded by the selected objects, in this case the pump, display in the
active view. You can click Select View on the Clip by Object ribbon to apply the clipping to
additional views.

Clip by Object Ribbon

Provides options for clipping the active view by selected objects.

Select Objects
Specifies the objects to clip such as pipes, equipment, duct, and so forth. The objects define
the clipping boundaries. If you have already selected objects before selecting the Clip by
Object command, you can proceed by accepting the selected objects or add more
objects to the select list.
Select View
Selects and applies the clipping to windows other than your active window. The clipping
boundary based on the selected objects is applied to each view you select.
Reject
Clears the objects you select with the Select Objects command. Use this command when
you want to start over. This button is not available when the Select View button is active.
Accept
Hides all objects except the selected objects in the active view. This button is not available
when the Select View button is active.
Close
Displays the clipping in the active view, completes the Clip by Object command, and
returns you to the last command you used before you selected Clip by Object .

Common User's Guide 186

 View Menu

Fit View
Controls whether to fit the view to the graphics when you run the Clip by Object command.
By default, the Fit View option is checked, and the command clips the view and fits the view
to the graphics. If the option is off, the command only clips the view but does not fit the view
to the graphics. A change to the option setting takes effect the next time you run the
command.
Objects connected to a rotated coordinate system will be clipped according to the
global coordinate system.

Clip by object
1. Click View > Clip by Object.
2. Click the object you want to clip.
You can also drag a fence around a group of objects or press CTRL as you click
multiple objects you want to clip in the view.
3. Click Accept .
4. Click Close.

Clip by Volume or Plane

Sets the view clipping volume. The software hides all objects not inside the clipped area.
This command also lets you edit the clipped volume by dragging clipping planes in a graphic
view.
There are two modes for using this command: Clip by Volume or Clip by Plane. If you choose
Clip by Volume, you specify that volume by placing two area definition points (the cross section
of the volume) and two depth points (the extent of the volume). If you choose Clip by Plane,
you specify the near and far clipping planes.

Clip by Volume or Plane Ribbon

Clip by Volume
Specifies that the command uses volume to limit the display. You specify this volume by
placing two area definition points (the cross section of the volume) and two depth points (the
extent of the volume). This is the default mode for this ribbon.
Clip by Plane
Specifies that the command uses near and far clipping planes to limit the display.
First Area Point
Specifies the first point of the volume. You can specify this point by using the Tools >
PinPoint command or QuickPick.
Second Area Point
Defines a rectangular face of the clipping volume. You must specify this point in the same
plane as the first area point. As you move the pointer to define this point, the software
displays a rectangular outline shape to indicate the size of the face. You can specify this
point by using PinPoint or QuickPick.

Common User's Guide 187

 View Menu

First Depth Point

Specifies the initial point that defines the extent of the volume. You can specify this point by
using PinPoint or QuickPick.
Second Depth Point
Defines the second depth point to complete the clipping volume. You can specify this point
in any view by using PinPoint or QuickPick.
Select View
Defines additional windows for displaying the clipped volume. The selected volume appears
in the active window. This step lets you select additional windows to display the volume.
Drag Clipping Planes
Allows you to drag the clipping volume to define a new view. This step is optional. The
software applies the new clipping volume to the active window when you release the volume
edge.
Finish
Displays the clipping in the active window and returns control to the last active command.
For example, if you are routing pipe and want to clip some objects, you can click Clip by
Volume , step through the command, then click Finish, and the software returns you to
the Route Pipe command.
Fit View
Controls whether to fit the view to the graphics when you run the Clip by Volume
command. By default, the Fit View option is checked, and the command clips the view and
fits the view to the graphics. If the option is off, the command only clips the view but does
not fit the view to the graphics. A change to the option setting takes effect the next time you
run the command.

Clip by volume
1. Click View > Clip by Volume or Plane.
2. Click Clip by Volume .

Common User's Guide 188

 View Menu

3. Select the first area point in the view.

4. Select the second area point in the view.

Common User's Guide 189

 View Menu

5. Select the first depth point to define the extent of the volume. You can see depth points best
in an isometric view.

6. Select the second depth point to define the extent of the volume. You cannot clip objects to
a zero depth.

Common User's Guide 190

 View Menu

7. Select the window where to use the volume clipping.

8. Click Finish.

 You can modify the view volume of all selected windows by dragging the clipping planes.
The movement is normal to the plane. The software assigns the edited clipping volume to
the active view and to all views selected after you start the command.
 To restore the view, click Clear Clipping .
 The clipping planes are positioned according to the active coordinate system, rather than
the global coordinate system.

Common User's Guide 191

 View Menu

Clip by plane

1. Click View > Clip by Volume or Plane.

2. Click Clip by Plane .
3. Select the near point of the clipping plane in the view.
The software displays a cross hair at the selected point.

Common User's Guide 192

 View Menu

4. Select the far point of the clipping plane in the view.

The software displays a second cross hair at the selected point.

Common User's Guide 193

 View Menu

5. Select the view to apply the volume clipping.

Clip by Plane is useful only in orthographic views.

6. Click Finish.

 You can modify the view volume of all selected windows by dragging the clipping planes.
The movement is normal to the plane. The software assigns the edited clipping volume to
the active view and to all views selected after you start the command.
 To restore the view, click Clear Clipping .
 The clipping planes are positioned according to the active coordinate system, rather than
the global coordinate system.

Common User's Guide 194

 View Menu

Clear Clipping
Restores the view to its original state by displaying any objects in the view that were hidden
by the Clip by Volume or Plane (on page 187) or Clip by Object commands. Use this
command to restore the view before you define a new clipping volume or object.
Below shows a pump that was clipped using Clip by Object (on page 185).

Below shows the same pump after using the Clear Clipping command.

Common User's Guide 195

 View Menu

Display hidden objects

Click View > Clear Clipping.

 To display objects hidden by clipping in other windows, click the additional windows. To end
the Clear Clipping command, right-click a view, press ESC, or click another command.
 You can also click Clear Clipping on the main toolbar.

Common User's Guide 196

 View Menu

Active View Control

Provides a separate graphic view and methods to control the camera/eye point position and
the clipping of the active graphic view window. After you select the command, the Active View
Control dialog box appears with the available options.
The Active View Control is an alternative to and supplements other view commands. It lets you
see the settings of the graphic view window and adjust those settings. The dialog box provides a
view of the camera/eye point position, the target/focus point position, and the clipping box of the
active graphic view. Changes made in the Active View Control dialog box are reflected in the
graphic view window.

Manipulate the active view

1. Select a graphic view window.
2. Click View > Active View Control.
The Active View Control dialog box opens.
3. Use the commands on the ribbon to manipulate the dialog box view.

 Top View , Side View , and Front View change the vantage point.
 The Pan , Zoom Tool , and Zoom Area buttons allow you to move to another
part of the view or enlarge certain parts of the model.

4. Drag the Target / Focus Point in the dialog box view to change the camera angle and
the clipping orientation in the active graphic view.
5. Drag clipping boundaries to change the clipping in the active graphic view.

Common User's Guide 197

 View Menu

Active View Control Dialog Box

Provides a separate graphic view of the camera and clipping settings for the active graphic view.
You can change the target (that is, the focus point) of the camera and the view clipping using
the tools on this ribbon.

Ribbon Commands
The following commands control display of objects in the Active View Control dialog box, but
do not affect the active graphic view.

Top View
Displays objects in the dialog box from above. When selected, Top is displayed in the dialog
box title.

Side View
Displays objects in the dialog box from the side. When selected, Side is displayed in the
dialog box title.

Front View
Displays objects in the dialog box from the front. When selected, Front is displayed in the
dialog box title.
Pan
Moves objects in the dialog box up, down, left, or right so you can see other areas of the
model. The pointer appears as a hand when this command is active.
Zoom Tool
Changes the display size of objects in the dialog box. The pointer appears as a magnifying
glass when this command is active. Move the pointer up to zoom in, and down to zoom out.
Zoom Area
Increases the display size of objects in the dialog box. Click and hold the left mouse button
to drag a fence around an area. The dialog box view zooms in to that area.
Fit
Fits all visible objects in the dialog box. The clipping box and the camera location are
ignored.

Fit to Camera
Fits all visible objects, the clipping box, and the camera location in the dialog box.
Always on Top
Keeps the Active View Control window on top of all other windows.
/ Shade/Wireframe Mode
Toggles object display in the dialog box between solid shaded objects and wireframe
outlines of the objects. Wireframe is the default display.

Common User's Guide 198

 View Menu

/ Lock/Unlock Camera Target

Locks or unlocks the camera location. When you unlock, you can move both the camera
and the target point as you want.

Graphic Icons
The following icons appear in the Active View Control dialog box and control display of the
active graphic view.
Camera / Eye Point
Position of the camera or eye point in the active graphic view. You usually do not move the
camera.

Target / Focus Point

Position of the target or focus point of the camera. The camera points to the target. You can
drag the target around the dialog box to change the camera angle.
Clipping
Shows the clipping boundaries in the active graphic view.
If the active graphic view is orthographic, then the clipping box is a rectangle:

If the active graphic view is isometric, then the clipping box is a cube:

You can drag the clipping boundaries to change clipping in the active graphic view.
The clipping boundary orientation changes as you move the Target / Focus Point
.
See Also
Active View Control (on page 196)

Common User's Guide 199

 View Menu

Previous View
Replaces the current view with the previous view, similar to the back command in your internet
browser. Smart 3D remembers up to 10 previous or next views for every graphic window. This
command can restore only view properties for scale and orientation. This command has no
effect on display operations (such as the Show and Hide commands), styles, or other view
properties. The shortcut key for Previous View is ALT+F5.
When 10 view modifications have been made, any subsequent view modifications result in the
oldest view modification step being erased to make room for the newest modification.
When you use the View > Named Views command, you are recalling a saved view and
applying it to the active window. This action differs from restoring a view using the View >
Previous View command because the previous view does not have to be a saved view. If you
exit a session file and then open it again, the previous view is unavailable unless it was saved.
When you use the View > Navigate View command, any view modifications that occur are
captured as a single view modification step. For example, if you click View > Previous View
after exiting the Navigate View command, the last view prior to the Navigate View changes is
restored.

Restore the previous view

Click View > Previous View or use the ALT+F5 shortcut key. The command restores only view
properties for scale and orientation. To restore earlier views, repeat this workflow until the
correct view is restored.
See Also
Viewing Your Work (on page 215)

Common User's Guide 200

 View Menu

Next View
Replaces the current view with the next view. This command is unavailable until you use
Previous View at least once and works similarly to the forward command in your internet
browser. Smart 3D remembers up to ten previous or next views for every graphic window. Next
views are abandoned when a change is made to the view. For example, if you click Previous
View four times, there are four Next views available until you edit the view. This edit erases all
the saved Next views. This command can restore only view properties for scale and orientation.
It has no effect on display operations (such as the Show and Hide commands), styles, or other
view properties. The shortcut key for Next View is ALT+SHIFT+F5.
When ten view modification steps have been made, any subsequent view modifications result in
the oldest view modification step being erased to make room for the newest step.
When you use the View > Named Views command, you are recalling a saved view and
applying it to the active window. This action differs from restoring a view using the View >
Previous View command because the previous view does not have to be a saved view. If you
exit a session file and then open it again, the previous view is unavailable unless it was saved.
When you use the View > Navigate View command, any view modifications that occur are
captured as a single view modification step. For example, if you click View > Previous View
after exiting the Navigate View command, the last view prior to the Navigate View changes is
restored.

Restore the next view

Click View > Next View or use the ALT+SHIFT+F5 shortcut key. The command restores only
view properties for scale and orientation. To restore later views, repeat this workflow until the
correct view is restored.
See Also
Viewing Your Work (on page 215)

Common User's Guide 201

 View Menu

Named Views
Assigns a name and description to a view so you can apply the settings later to the active
window. A saved view contains all view information required to restore the view volume, eye
point, and target point. However, a saved view does not define the perspective angle of the view
or its rendering characteristics. Additionally, if you want to rename a view, change the
description, delete the view, or even change the settings that make up a view, those tasks can
be accomplished from the Named Views Dialog Box (on page 203).
Default views include Top, Front, Right, and Isometric. You can access these views by
clicking the down arrow beside the Named Views button on the main toolbar.

What do you want to do?

 Save a view (on page 202)
 Edit a saved view (on page 202)
 Recall a saved view (on page 202)
 Delete a saved view (on page 203)

Save a view
1. Click a view to make it active.
2. Click View > Named Views.
3. In the blank line indicated by an asterisk, type a name and description for the saved view.

 Named views are useful for resetting the view after you have used other commands to
change the way you see the area. For example, if you change the angle from which you are
viewing an area, or change the magnification to see a particular object more clearly, you can
then select a named view to quickly return to a standard set of view settings without
changing each setting one at a time.

Edit a saved view

1. Click View > Named Views.
2. To edit the name or description of the view, type the change in the appropriate row.
3. To replace the content of a named view with the view in the current window, select a saved
view, and click Redefine.

Recall a saved view

1. Click any view.
2. Click View > Named Views.
3. Click a saved view to recall.
4. Click Apply.

Common User's Guide 202

 View Menu

Delete a saved view

1. Click View > Named Views.
2. Click a saved view to delete.
3. Click Delete .

Named Views Dialog Box

Adds, edits, or deletes saved views, or applies saved views to an active window.
Name
Specifies the name of the view in this column. You can edit this name later by clicking this
cell.
Description
Specifies a description of the view in this column. You can edit this name later by clicking
this cell.
Redefine
Overrides the settings of the selected view with the settings of the active view. When you
click this button, a confirmation dialog box informs you that you are about to delete the
saved view and replace it with new settings.
Delete
Removes the selected view from the list and the database.
After you have deleted a named view, you have to redefine it. The Undo
command cannot be used to undo the delete operation.
See Also
Named Views (on page 201)

Common User's Guide 203

 View Menu

Common Views
Displays a two-dimensional or isometric orientation of objects in the active view. The
command opens the Views dialog box, which displays a three-dimensional outline box. This box
consists of white circles on each corner and three white arrows that point to the faces. Each
corner circle, arrow, or face of the box highlights in yellow as you pause the pointer over it. You
can select one of the six faces of the 3D box to change your view to a 2D view, or you can
select one of the eight corner circles to change your view to an isometric view. A message at the
bottom of the dialog box indicates the direction or type of your selection, such as Plan,
Isometric, and so forth.

Select a standard isometric or orthographic view

1. Select the view that you want to modify.
2. Click View > Common Views.
3. To select an isometric view, click one of the eight circles.
4. To select an orthographic view, click a white arrow or one of the six sides of the box.
You can also access this command by clicking Common Views on the main
toolbar.

Common Views Dialog Box

Provides a graphical display used to select the angle from which you view the workspace. Select
a face of the displayed box to view the area two-dimensionally from the specified side, or select
a corner of the box to open an isometric view of the area.

Click one of the eight corner

circles to change your view to
an isometric view.

Click one of the six faces of the

3D box to change your view to
a 2D view.

Common User's Guide 204

 View Menu

Click one of the three white

arrows that point to a face to
see that view.

The text at the bottom of the Common Views dialog box provides a description of the view that
you select.

Common User's Guide 205

 View Menu

View by Points
Provides options for specifying the view plane by three points or along a line. When you
select View > View by Points, a ribbon with two options appears.

View by 3 Points
Creates a plane based on three points you choose. This plane is parallel to the view plane,
which can be thought of as the computer screen. This is the default option.

View along Line

Creates a vector based on two points (a From point and a To point). This vector is
perpendicular or normal to the view plane.

What do you want to do?

 Adjust a view by points (on page 206)
 Adjust a view along a line (on page 207)

Adjust a view by points

1. Click View > View by Points.

2. Click View by 3 Points if it is not already selected.

3. Click to designate point 1.

Common User's Guide 206

 View Menu

4. Click to designate point 2. Points 1 and 2 form a vector in the view plane.

5. Click to designate point 3.

The three points form a plane that is parallel to the view plane.

Common User's Guide 207

 View Menu

Adjust a view along a line

1. Click View > View by Points.

2. Click View along Line on the ribbon if it is not already selected.

3. Click to designate point 1. This point is the From point.

4. Click to designate point 2. This point is the To point, and it forms a vector with point 1.

After you place point 2, the software adjusts your line of sight into the model to go through
the two points you placed.

Common User's Guide 208

 View Menu

Rotate View
Rotates or turns a view freely about a point or about an axis parallel to one of the axes in the
global coordinate system. Unlike Common Views (on page 203) that only allows you to
rotate a view by a predefined set of points, this command allows you to rotate the view in any
direction. The rotation graphic is shown as a dashed green triad in the view with the selected
rotation axis in red (the default highlight color).

Angle
Specifies the degrees about the selected axis to rotate the view. Type the value in the box,
and press ENTER. When you rotate a view with the mouse, you can use the Angle box to
monitor the current angle of rotation. Positive rotation is clockwise, and negative rotation is
counter-clockwise.

Locate Objects
Locates the graphic objects in the view. When Locate Objects is ON, the view rotates
around a selected object. When Locate Objects is OFF, the view rotates around the
selected axis line.
Move Point of Rotation
Allows you to select a point or a line of rotation. Click Move Point of Rotation, and then
select any point or line in the view about which to rotate.
Close
Closes the Rotate View command and the ribbon. If another command was active when
you clicked Rotate View, that command resumes.

Common User's Guide 209

 View Menu

You can rotate a view at any time, even when you are using another command.

What do you want to do?

 Rotate a view around an axis (on page 210)
 Rotate a view around a new center point (on page 212)
 Rotate a view around a linear object (on page 213)

Rotate a view around an axis

1. Click View > Rotate View.
The rotation graphic appears at the view origin.

Common User's Guide 210

 View Menu

2. Define a focus of rotation by pausing the pointer over one of the axes on the rotation graphic
to highlight and accept it as shown in the graphic.

3. Drag the selected focus of rotation to rotate the view.

4. If you want a specific degree of rotation, type a value in the Angle box on the Rotate ribbon,
and press ENTER.
5. Right-click to end the command, or click Close on the ribbon.

When you end the Rotate View command, the previous command and its ribbon,
if any, resumes.

Common User's Guide 211

 View Menu

Rotate a view around a new center point

1. Click View > Rotate View.
The rotation graphic appears at the view origin.

2. Click Move Point of Rotation .

3. Drag the origin point of the rotation graphic to define the new origin point.

4. Drag over the axes of the rotation graphic to rotate the view about the new center point.
When you end the Rotate View command, the previous command and its ribbon,
if any, resumes.

Common User's Guide 212

 View Menu

Rotate a view around a linear object

1. Click View > Rotate View.
The rotation graphic appears at the view origin.

2. Select a linear object in the model and drag your cursor to start the rotation.
The linear object that you rotate around can be a pipe run, duct run, or cableway
run, or a grid line or structural member, for example.

3. If you want a specific degree of rotation, type a value in the Angle box on the Rotate ribbon,
and press ENTER.

Common User's Guide 213

 View Menu

4. Right-click to end the command, or click Close on the ribbon.

When you end the Rotate View command, the previous command and its ribbon,
if any, resumes.

Common User's Guide 214

 View Menu

Look at Surface
Defines a view of any surface in the model. When you select a surface or reference plane, the
selected surface appears in the front and is displayed as two-dimensional. The E-axis (X-axis)
and N-axis (Y-axis) maintain an orientation that is related to the active coordinate system. This
command allows you to bring a selected surface to the front.

Look at a surface
1. Click View > Look at Surface.
2. Select a surface or reference plane in a view.

Common User's Guide 215

 View Menu

Viewing Your Work

You can manipulate the windows and views in the software to affect the way you see the model.
For example, you can compare a window to a camera. When you look through the camera lens,
you see a real-world view of the objects in the database. You can change the view by zooming
in and out, and focusing on different parts of the model. You can also zoom or pan views.
With the commands on the Window menu, you can create and arrange new windows that allow
you to see more than one section of a model. You can minimize and maximize open windows in
the software.
A view consists of the contents of a window in the software. Using the commands on the View
menu, you can quickly manipulate the views of the model.
 Use the Navigate View command to enable 3D model navigation, which provides
game-style controls for using your mouse, keyboard, or the 3D Navigator to move around
through the 3D model.
 Use the Zoom Area command to see more detail in the model.
 Use the Zoom Tool command to zoom in and enlarge the display of objects around a
specified point in the model.
 Use the Pan command to position another part of the model in the center of a view or
identify the area of the model you want to see.
 Use the Fit command to display the entire contents of the model in the view.
 Use the View > Previous View command to restore the previous view.
 Use the View by Points command to adjust the view to look perpendicular or parallel to
an object in the model.
 Use the Center View by Object command to center a view based on a point or an
object.
See Also
Clip by Object (on page 187)
Clip by Volume (on page 188)
Delete a Saved View (on page 203)
Edit a Saved View (on page 202)
Fit All Objects in the Active View (on page 240)
Magnify an Area (on page 239)
Pan Views (on page 240)
Previous View (on page 200)
Recall a Saved View (on page 202)
Restore the Previous View (on page 200)
Save a View (on page 202)
Select a Standard Isometric or Orthographic View (on page 204)
Zoom In (on page 236)
Zoom Out (on page 237)
Center View by Object (on page 241)

Common User's Guide 216

 View Menu

Navigate View
Starts 3D navigation in the active window. Smart 3D provides several ways to navigate
through your 3D model data so that you can pick a scheme that is most comfortable or familiar
to you. There is a fly mode navigation that provides a fluid, multi-directional motion for moving
and looking around the model.

 When you enter 3D navigation, the current model view (defined in the Format View
settings) automatically changes to a Perspective projection mode with a Smooth Shaded
render mode. The current aspect setting does not change. For 3D navigation, a perspective
view shows the three dimensions of an object and provides a more real-life representation of
objects because it conveys depth. The further the object surface is from the eye, the smaller
it appears in the view. When you exit 3D navigation, the view switches back to the original
Format View settings.
 The camera focal point is determined by the view depth of the object closest to the screen
center point when entering or exiting 3D navigation. The focal point of 3D navigation is the
center point of the display window. When you enter and exit 3D navigation and the view
transitions to and from perspective projection mode, the center focal point stays in the same
location. However, objects that were not at the center of the window could display closer or
further away. To make the projection mode transitions appear smoother, you can modify the
view so the object of interest is at or near the center focal point when entering and/or exiting
3D navigation.
 When you use 3D navigation, the Next View and Previous View commands do not record
the view changes. The Next View and Previous View commands only remember the state
of the view before and after the 3D navigation changes.
 You can enable 3D navigation in each window you have open. After you click Navigate
View, the 3D Navigator displays in the active window. When you click on another window
with 3D navigation still enabled, the 3D Navigator moves from the previous window to the
currently-selected window.

Common User's Guide 217

 View Menu

The Navigate View command always sets the current tilt angle to 0 when it is enabled. The
system does not restore the previous tilt angle when 3D navigation is turned off. To get back to
the rotated view you were using before entering 3D navigation, select View > Previous View.

3D Navigation Controls
Select navigation controls that are most comfortable or familiar to you. To access
navigation-specific help at any time, press Q or click Help in the 3D Navigator. To access
additional product help, press F1 or go to the Help menu.

Use the 3D Navigator (on page 224)

Use Keyboard Controls

Arrow keys as well as the gaming standard W (Move In), A (Left), S (Move Out) and D (Right)
are supported.

Common User's Guide 218

 View Menu

Use Mouse Controls (Fly Mode)

Press F to enable Fly mode. You have the option to use only your mouse for navigation or to
use keyboard + mouse combinations.

Application-Specific Information
The 3D Navigator component is integrated into the following Intergraph Process, Power &
Marine applications:
 Intergraph Smart™ 3D
 SmartPlant Review
 SmartPlant Construction
 SmartPlant Markup Plus
Any information or behavior that is specific to an application is noted. If your application is not
listed, then there is no additional information.

 See Graphics Card Information (on page 230) for the basic requirements needed for 3D
navigation.
 You can press and hold the 3D Navigator Look and Move controls for continuous motion.

 Press and hold the center Move control to drag the 3D Navigator to a different location
on/off the view window.

Common User's Guide 219

 View Menu

Use Keyboard-Only 3D Navigation

You can use the keys below for 3D navigation. The keyboard can be used at all times to move
through the model data set.
The use of WASD keys offers an ergonomic solution when used in conjunction with a
right-handed mouse.

To... Use...

Open quick-help to get Q

information on 3D navigation
controls

Move in W

Move Left A

Move out S

Move right D

Move up E

Move down C

To move or walk through your model in a first-person perspective. Press and hold the
designated direction key. Move left and right is a sidestepping motion.

To... Use...

Move forward and left. W+A

Move forward and right W+D

Move backward and left S+A

Move backward and right S+D

Walk at various angles through your model. Hold down the needed two direction keys
simultaneously.

To... Use...

Look up I

Look left J

Look down K

Common User's Guide 220

 View Menu

To... Use...

Look right L

Look around the model as if you were turning your head. Simply move the mouse
up/down, left/right from the crosshair point.

To... Use...

Return to the default, H

isometric home view of your
model

Create your own custom CTRL+H

home view

Reset a customized home CTRL+SHIF

view back to the original T+H
default home view

Press the H key if you are 'lost' in the model or need to return to the default model view.

Use Mouse Only or Mouse + Keyboard Combinations (Fly Mode)

Fly mode offers a fluid, first-person movement in any direction within your model. In Fly mode
operation, use your mouse to look around as well as work in conjunction with your keyboard for
motion in all directions. You change the viewing direction with the mouse and move around with
the keyboard.
By using mouse-only or mouse + keyboard controls, you can:
 Look 360 degrees around from a stationary point.
 Travel through your model and move up/down stairs and ramps
 Move sideways in a sidestepping motion.
 Move up and down to change your elevation.
When you are in Fly mode, your cursor changes to a crosshair that is located at the
center of your view window. When you exit Fly mode, the cursor changes back to its original
pointer.

Application-Specific Information
Smart 3D Fly Mode Information
 When you exit Fly mode, right-click or press ESC twice to exit 3D navigation.
SmartPlant Construction Fly Mode Information
 To encircle or rotate around a selected object, use the SmartPlant Construction Encircle
Model command in the Toolbox. In SmartPlant Construction, you will not be able to use the
left-mouse drag operation to encircle objects.

Common User's Guide 221

 View Menu

Fly mode actions:

To... Use...

Open quick-help to get Q

information on 3D
navigation

Enter/Exit Fly mode F (Toggle to enter/exit)

Exit fly mode, cancel all fly F again (Toggle on/off), ESC or
mode operations right-click

Turn on/off crosshair X (Toggle on/off)

Enter and exit fly mode to use mouse and keyboard combination navigation controls.

To... Use...

Move in Mouse Wheel Forward -or- W

Move in (factor of 2) Middle Mouse Button/Wheel Click

Move left A

Move out Mouse Wheel Backward -or- S

Move out (factor of 2) SHIFT + Middle Mouse Button/Wheel

Click

Move right D

Move up E

Move down C

 Walk through your model in the direction of the crosshair. Roll the middle mouse wheel
forward and back, or press and hold the designated WASD key. A left or right move is a
sidestepping motion.
 A middle mouse click moves you halfway in to your target point. Use SHIFT + middle mouse
click to move back out the distance of the eye point from the target. The perspective angle
does not change.

To... Use...

Move in and left. W + A -or- Mouse Wheel Forward + A

Move in and right W + D -or- Mouse Wheel Forward + D

Move out and left S + A -or- Mouse Wheel Backward + A

Common User's Guide 222

 View Menu

To... Use...

Move out and right S + D -or- Mouse Wheel Backward + D

Move left/right/up/down Middle Mouse Drag

 Walk at various angles through your model. Roll the mouse wheel forward and backward
while holding down the designated direction key. Or, hold down the needed two direction
keys simultaneously.
In a key combination move, if you release one directional key, you still continue
moving in the direction of the other key.
 Press and hold the middle mouse button to side-step left or right. This enables you to move
the model without changing the direction in which you are looking.

To... Use...

Look up I -or- Mouse Move Forward

Look left J -or- Mouse Move Left

Look down K -or- Mouse Move Backward

Look right L -or- Mouse Move Right

Look around the model as if you were turning your head. Simply move the mouse up/down,
left/right from the crosshair point.

To... Use...

Return to the default view H

of your model

Create your own custom CTRL+H

home view

Reset a customized home CTRL+SHIFT+H

view back to the original
default home view

Press the H key if you are 'lost' in the model or need to get back to a known view.

To... Use...

Encircle or rotate around Left mouse - press and hold

an object

When rotating around an object, the encircle point is the current center point; not the center of
the selected object.

Common User's Guide 223

 View Menu

Use the 3D Navigator

The 3D Navigator tool supports the common navigation movements you can perform with the
mouse and keyboard, such as look and move.

Application-Specific Information
Smart 3D Navigator Information
 To start 3D navigation in Smart 3D applications, press CTRL+SHIFT+F, or click Navigate
View on the main toolbar.

 Select on the 3D Navigator is not available. To select an object, navigate to the required
location in your model and click Navigate View to disable the 3D Navigator. Click Select on
the Smart 3D toolbar to select objects. Use Smart 3D commands to perform required
operations.
 When you right-click to end fly mode, right-click again to exit 3D navigation.
 The Close button on the 3D Navigator removes it from the display. You can still use the
keyboard for navigation.

Common User's Guide 224

 View Menu

3D Navigator Controls
 Quick Help - Displays help specific to 3D navigation.
 Home (Default View) - Returns to the startup view of the model. You can also create your
own home view.
 Fly Mode - Enters Fly mode where you use the mouse and/or keyboard to interactively
move and look through the model. When you are in Fly mode, the 3D Navigator does not
display, and your cursor changes to a crosshair located at the center of your view. You can
press F or ESC to exit Fly mode. The 3D Navigator then displays at its last position.
 Look - Changes your view direction as if you were turning your head. You can look around
in all directions.
 Move In/Out - Takes you closer to or further away from model objects.
 Move (Up/Down/Left/Right) - Changes your position in the model at the crosshair cursor
level as if you are 'walking' around in the model. You can move in any direction.
 Fit - Places all visible elements in the view window if no objects are currently selected. If any
objects are selected, the control zooms to the selected objects.
 Select - Turns Select mode on and off (not available in the Smart 3D applications).
After you move your cursor off of the 3D Navigator, it fades into a transparent shadow so that it
does not distract from the current view. The 3D Navigator reappears when you move the cursor
back over it. You can select and move the 3D Navigator to place it wherever you want in or out
of your view window. To use the 3D Navigator, just click on the needed action. A single click
causes short movements while a click + hold action on the look and move controls enables you
to move continuously.
While you are using 3D Navigator controls, you can use the following mouse operations:
 Mouse wheel forward/backward
 Middle-mouse drag to move sideways and up/down in the model.
You can also use the keyboard in conjunction with the 3D Navigator to move in one direction
while looking in another. This can simulate walking through the plant as you are looking on
either side.

 The 3D Navigator controls are synchronized with the mouse and keyboard movements to
display the current move or look action. For example, if you are pressing W to move in, the
Move In button in the 3D Navigator is highlighted.
 When you are in Fly mode, the 3D Navigator does not display.

Common User's Guide 225

 View Menu

Return to Default View

Click the Default View or Home control at any time to return to the default top-right isometric
view of your model.

Enter Fly Mode

You can start Fly mode from the 3D Navigator by clicking the Fly Mode control .

Application-Specific Information
Smart 3D Fly Mode Information
 When you exit Fly mode, right-click or press ESC twice to exit 3D navigation.

 You can also press the F key to start fly mode.

 After you enter Fly mode, the 3D Navigator no longer displays. Use your mouse and
keyboard to move around through the model.
 To exit Fly mode, right-click, press F again or press ESC. The cursor changes back to its
original icon and the 3D Navigator displays.
 In Fly mode, your cursor changes to a crosshair that is located at the center of your view
window.

Look Around
Press and hold any of the four Look controls to continuously look or turn in that direction as if
you were turning your head. Use the Look control in the 3D Navigator to look around from your
current position in the model.

Common User's Guide 226

 View Menu

Move
Move vs. Zoom: a Move operation changes the eye point as you get closer or further from the
target. A Zoom operation is a perspective angle change.
 Use the Move controls in the 3D Navigator to walk smoothly in left/right/up/down directions.
 Use Move In/Out controls to get closer to or further away from model objects. The
perspective angle does not change during a move operation.

 Press and hold any of the Move controls to continuously move in that direction.
 As you move through the model, the closer you get to your target, the slower the movement
rate becomes. The further away from the target, the faster the movement rate.
 The Move operations enable you to move through solid objects such as walls, doors and
slabs.

Fit to Object(s)
The Fit tool places all visible objects in the active view if no objects are currently selected. If any
objects are selected, the command zooms to the selected elements. Because the display is
adjusted independently of the current view orientation, the objects in that display area are not
clipped when performing rotate operations.
In addition, the Fit tool zooms or fits to any objects that were selected before running
3D navigation.

Common User's Guide 227

 View Menu

Application-Specific Information
SmartPlant Review Fit Behavior
In SmartPlant Review, the Navigator Fit command is a conditional fit. It performs a fit based on
the objects that are selected.
 Fits to the selected object.
 Fits to selected item(s) in the SmartPlant Review Project Manager.
 Fits to the whole model and any visible objects.
1. Select one or more objects in the current view.

2. Click Fit on the 3D Navigator.

The system flies to the selected objects.

 If no objects are selected, the system fits all objects into the current view.
 You can also perform a SHIFT + Fit operation that enables you to view the entire
selected object within the current window size. Any rotation operations later performed
in that view do not clip the selected object.
3. When you perform a Fit operation, you can continue selecting other objects as well as
moving from the fitted location.

3D Navigation Tips
Motion Tips
 As you move through the model, the closer you get to your target, the slower the movement
rate becomes. The further away from the target, the faster the movement rate.
 The Move operations enable you to move through solid objects such as walls, doors and
slabs.
 Press ESC to end a navigation operation.
 To make small left/right/up/down movements, click and hold the middle mouse button as
you move in the needed direction. It can sometimes be difficult to make small movements
with the mouse and keyboard because the distance of motion for each key press is greater
than what is needed. This is especially true when you are close to objects within the 3D
model.

Common User's Guide 228

 View Menu

Application-Specific Information
Smart 3D Navigation Tips
The Navigate View command always sets the current tilt angle to 0 when it is enabled. The
system does not restore the previous tilt angle when 3D navigation is turned off. To get back to
the rotated view you were using before entering 3D navigation, select View menu > Previous
View.

Fine Tuning/Customization
 You can change the Repeat Delay and Repeat Rate keyboard settings to fine-tune your
keyboard motion during navigation. For more information, refer to your operating system's
documentation on setting keyboard properties.

Messages
The color scheme has been changed to [Windows 7]. A running program isn't compatible
with certain visual elements of windows.
 Meaning: This message may display when you open a 3D model. To correctly display the
cross hair (in fly mode) as well as support all capabilities of this operating system, the
application automatically unchecks the Enable desktop composition setting. This setting is
in Control Panel > System > Advanced system settings > Advanced tab > Performance
Settings > Visual Effects.
 Recovery: If you click to see more information on the message, the Windows information
dialog box displays. Check the Don't show me this again option if you do not want the
above message to display each time a 3D model is opened.

Common User's Guide 229

 View Menu

Graphics Card Information

To take advantage of the performance enhancements available for viewing 3D models, your
graphics card needs to have at least the minimum requirements listed below. Cards with less
than the minimum requirements are supported; however, they might not be able to successfully
use all the performance enhancements.

Minimum Recommended
(for systems with large
models)

OpenGL 2.0 OpenGL 2.1 or later

128 MB RAM 512 or more MB RAM

Additional requirements and/or recommendations for cards include:

 In general, workstation-level graphics cards provide better overall performance with 3D
model files than desktop graphics cards.
 The card must be manufactured within the last three years.
 Use updated drivers (at least within the last 6 months).
Systems running Citrix and remote desktop applications currently do not
support the hardware acceleration performance enhancements.

Troubleshoot 3D Navigation
Graphics Card Troubleshooting
You do not see graphics in the window display of a dual-monitor setup when using an
ATI V3600 FireGL (driver ver. 8.62 released on 7/21/2009) card.
Follow the steps below to configure graphics card.
1. Select Start > Catalyst Control Center.
2. Select Workstations > Settings.
3. Click Shared Front/Back/Z Dual Screen Mode.
4. Click OK and then exit the application.
5. Reboot your system.

Common User's Guide 230

 View Menu

The 3D Navigator is flickering.

Check your card properties and make sure you have Hardware Acceleration enabled.
 Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings - Microsoft Windows 7 Instructions (on page 233)
For NVIDIA Quadro cards, you can turn off the Overlay setting in the NVIDIA control panel.
1. Open the NVIDIA Control Panel application.
2. Go to 3D Settings > Manage 3D Settings.
3. Select Off for the Enable Overlay setting.
4. Save your change and close the application.

General Display Issues

The 3D Navigator tooltips are flickering.
Set the transition effect for menus and tooltips to the Scroll Effect:
1. From your desktop, right-click and select Properties to open the Display Properties dialog
box.

2. Click the Appearance tab.

Common User's Guide 231

 View Menu

3. Click Effects and select Scroll Effect under the Use the following transition effect for
menus and tooltips setting.

4. Click OK to save your change.

5. Click OK to close the Display Properties dialog box.

General Messages
The color scheme has been changed to [Windows 7]. A running program isn't compatible
with certain visual elements of windows.
 Meaning: This message may display when you open a 3D model. To correctly display the
cross hair (in fly mode) as well as support all capabilities of this operating system, the
application automatically unchecks the Enable desktop composition setting. This setting is
in Control Panel > System > Advanced system settings > Advanced tab > Performance
Settings > Visual Effects.
 Recovery: If you click to see more information on the message, the Windows information
dialog box displays. Check the Don't show me this again option if you do not want the
above message to display each time a 3D model is opened.

Common User's Guide 232

 View Menu

Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings - Microsoft Windows 7

Instructions
The images used in the steps below show NVIDIA card settings, which represent just
one type of card that can be used. These images are intended to be used only as examples.
The settings for your graphics card may differ from those shown in the steps below.
1. Select Start > Control Panel.
2. Select Appearance and Personalization > Display Settings.
3. Click Advanced Settings.

Common User's Guide 233

 View Menu

4. Click the Troubleshoot tab.

If your driver does not allow changes (as shown in the above image), you may
have to contact your video card manufacturer for instructions on turning on/off hardware
acceleration.

Common User's Guide 234

 View Menu

5. If available, click Change settings.

6. Move the Hardware acceleration slider bar to Full.

7. Click OK to save edits and exit the dialog box. Click OK again to exit the Display Settings
dialog box.

Common User's Guide 235

 View Menu

Zoom Tool
Increases or decreases the display size of objects in the model. You can zoom in to get a
closer view of an object or zoom out to see more of the model at a reduced size. Click the left
mouse button and drag the pointer upward in the window to increase the view of an object as
though you were moving closer to it. Drag the pointer downward in the window to reduce the
view as though you were moving farther away from the object.
When you use the Microsoft IntelliMouse® pointing device with the Zoom Tool, you can zoom in,
zoom out, zoom area, and pan, all with a click of the mouse.
In the table below, "middle" can mean either the middle mouse button or the wheel
button.

When you do this while Zoom Tool The view does this:
is active:

Left-click twice to fence an area Zooms area

Left-drag Zooms in or out dynamically

SHIFT + middle-click Zooms out 2x

Middle-drag Pans from one location to another

Middle-click Zooms in 2x

SHIFT + middle-drag Pans dynamically

Rotate wheel forward or backward Zooms in or out at the current pointer location

Right-click Ends the Zoom Tool command

What do you want to do?

 Zoom in (on page 236)
 Zoom out (on page 237)

Common User's Guide 236

 View Menu

Zoom in
1. Click View > Zoom Tool, or click Zoom Tool on the main toolbar.
2. Click a starting point and drag upward in the window to increase the view size of an object in
the active window.

 The shortcut key for the Zoom Tool command is CTRL+SHIFT+Z. The shortcut key for the
Pan command is CTRL+SHIFT+P.
 Click View > Previous View to return the screen to its original view. The shortcut key for the
Previous View command is ALT+F5.

Zoom out
1. Click View > Zoom Tool, or click Zoom Tool on the main toolbar.
2. Click a starting point and drag downward in the window to reduce the view size of an object
in the active window.

 The shortcut key for the Zoom Tool command is CTRL+SHIFT+Z. The shortcut key for the
Pan command is CTRL+SHIFT+P.
 Click View > Previous View to return the screen to its original view. The shortcut key for the
Previous View command is ALT+F5.

Common User's Guide 237

 View Menu

Zoom Area
Magnifies an area of the model. Click and drag to create a fence around an object or area of
the model that you want to enlarge.

Common User's Guide 238

 View Menu

Magnify an area
1. Click View > Zoom Area. The pointer changes to a crosshair in the graphic view.
2. Click a start point and drag to an end point in the active view to fence the area to enlarge.
You can also click two separate points to fence an area.

When you release on the end point, the graphic view updates to show the selected area.

 You can also activate this command by clicking Zoom Area on the main toolbar.
 Click View > Fit to see all objects in the active workspace again.
 Click View > Previous View to return to the previous view. The shortcut key for the
Previous View command is ALT+F5.
 You can also click Zoom Tool and then click (not drag) to enter two points to zoom an
area. A dynamic fence appears after you click the first point. Used this way, the Zoom Tool
command operates the same as the Zoom Area command.

Common User's Guide 239

 View Menu

Fit
Fits the selected objects in the active view. If there are no selected objects, this
command works like SHIFT + Fit and fits all visible objects in the workspace in the
active view.
If you select any objects before clicking Fit , the software fits only the selected objects in
the view. In this situation, the software fits all objects, including those marked as Hidden in
the Workspace Explorer, or those clipped from the view.
Press CTRL + Fit to display the selected objects in all open graphic views.
 Click Fit to display all of your selected objects in the active view.
 Press SHIFT and click Fit to display the visible objects in the active view.
 Press CTRL and click Fit to display the selected objects in all views.
 Press SHIFT + CTRL and click Fit to display all visible objects in all views.
None of these combinations cancels any previous command. When the software finishes
the fit, it returns to the previously active command.
Press ALT + F5 to return to the previous active view.

Fit all objects in the active view

1. Click a view to make it active.
2. Click View > Fit, or click Fit on the main toolbar.

Pan
Moves the view up, down, left, or right to let you see other areas of the model. The pointer
displays as a hand when this command is active.

Pan views
1. Click View > Pan, or click Pan on the main toolbar.
2. Click and drag a point in the view to a different position.

 The shortcut key for the Pan command is CTRL+SHIFT+P. The shortcut key for the Zoom
Tool command is CTRL+SHIFT+Z.
 You can also use this feature without dragging by clicking on a point in the window, and then
clicking again where you would like to place the first point that you clicked.
 To stop the repainting of objects in the window, right-click or press ESC. This option is
convenient if you are working with a large workspace. To refresh the window, press F5.
 To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.

Common User's Guide 240

 View Menu

Center View by Object

Centers a view based on a given point or object by panning the view such that the selected
point is the center of the view. The zoom and clipping level is not affected by using this
command.

Select Object or Point

Allows you to select a point or object.
Select View
Allows you to select a view where you want the point or object to be centered.
1. Click View > Center View by Object .

2. Click Select Object or Point to select a point or an object.

The selected point is now the center of the view.
3. Click Select View to select a view to be centered.

Apply View Style

Applies a selected style to the active view or to all views.
If you want objects of the same type to look alike, you can use styles, which are collections of
formats you can apply to views and the objects in the views. You can define styles using the
Format > Style command. Then, you can select a style and apply it to the active view or to all
views.
Using styles ensures consistency. If you place one or more objects, the formats in the style
apply directly to the objects. You do not have to spend time formatting them by setting several
options on a ribbon or dialog box. Therefore, you can apply the formats in each style again and
again.

Applying Styles
The style type determines the type of object to which you can apply a style. The software
applies styles automatically, and you can change the styles that apply to objects.
In the Drawings and Reports task, you can apply a text style to text. You can apply a fill style to
a fill and a line style to lines, arcs, circles, and ellipses. You can apply a dimension style to
dimensions or text balloons.
In the design tasks, you can apply view styles to three-dimensional views of a model. You can
also apply surface styles to the faces of objects.

Common User's Guide 241

 View Menu

Applying Styles to Multiple Objects

Selecting multiple objects and then applying the same style removes any previous formats. The
objects now all have the formats from the style you applied. To apply this method, you must
select objects that are in the same style type, such as dimension or text. For example, in the
Drawings and Reports task, you cannot apply a line style to a dimension.
In the design tasks, you can apply the same view style to multiple views with the Apply View
Styles command on the View menu.
To define viewing properties for curves and surfaces, you can use surface style rules, which
define a style for a set of objects in the workspace.

Apply a Style to a View

1. Click View > Apply View Style.
2. Select a view style from the list on the Apply View Style dialog box.
3. Click Apply to apply the style to the active window.
4. Click Apply All to apply the style to all open windows.

 To define a view style, click Format > Style, and then click New on the 3D View tab. To
modify an existing style, select it on the 3D View tab, and click Modify. For more
information, see Format View (on page 307).
 You can also apply a style to the active view by clicking Format > Style and then clicking
Apply on the 3D View tab.

Apply View Style Dialog Box

Sets options for applying new view styles to the workspace.
View Styles
Lists all the currently available view styles you can apply to the active view.
Apply
Applies the selected style to the active view.
Apply All
Applies the selected style to all views.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without any changes.
See Also
Apply a 3D View Style (on page 327)
Apply a Style to a View (on page 242)
Apply a Surface Style (on page 325)
Create a 3D View Style (on page 326)
Delete a Surface Style (on page 325)
Delete a View Style (on page 327)

Common User's Guide 242

 View Menu

Workspace Explorer
Displays and hides the Workspace Explorer window. The Workspace Explorer displays the
contents of the workspace in a classification hierarchy that reflects the various relationships
defined for the design objects. The content represents the current objects loaded from the
database into the active workspace.

System tab
Displays all the objects in the workspace according to the hierarchy of the system. Usually,
the model is the first system and subordinate systems can include anything that is in your
workspace definition, such as piping or equipment. You can change the owning object for a
System object by selecting More in the System box on the ribbon that appears when you
select an object.
Assembly tab
Displays all the objects in the workspace, grouped by assemblies.
Space tab
Displays all the volumes in the workspace.
Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) tab
Shows the objects in the workspace grouped by project, contract, area, and so forth.
Analysis tab
Displays the structural analysis models in the workspace. An analysis model is a
non-graphical and logical grouping of member systems that can be sent to a third- party
analysis and design solver package.
Reference tab
Displays the files attached in the workspace. This tab appears after you attach a file by
clicking Insert > File. For more information, see Insert File (on page 273).
PDS tab
®
Displays the PDS (Plant Design System) data in the workspace. This tab appears on client
machines that have a PDS Data Access component installed, and after the administrator
attaches a PDS Project using New PDS Model Reference command in Project
Management.
Reference 3D tab
Displays hierarchy of Reference 3D projects and files attached as well as their objects in the
workspace. This tab appears after administrator attached a R3D Model by using New R3D
Reference command in Project Management.

Common User's Guide 243

 View Menu

Drawings tab
Displays the drawings related to the workspace. For more information, see Drawing Console
(on page 441)..
The Workspace Explorer view allows you to identify or select objects or sets of objects by
name. Icons appear at the left of the window objects to indicate the type of the object. For
example, a file folder icon represents a system, an equipment icon represents equipment, an
I-beam icon represents a structural system, and so forth. Point to objects in the Workspace
Explorer to highlight them, and click objects to select them. If you hide objects using the Tools
> Hide command, the object names appear in italics. For more information on hiding objects,
see Hide (on page 386).
If you are in the Drawings tab, and you select objects in the Workspace Explorer,
the objects are not highlighted in the model. To find an object in the model, select an object and
press ENTER.
If you pause the pointer over an object in the Workspace Explorer, the object is highlighted
with the highlight color in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer. If you pause the
pointer over an object in a graphic view or in the To Do List dialog box, the object is highlighted
with the highlight color in the Workspace Explorer. However, if you select certain objects such
as features in a graphic view, they do not highlight in the Workspace Explorer (because
features do not appear in the Workspace Explorer). Foundation ports also do not appear in the
Workspace Explorer, but nozzles do.
If you select an object in the Workspace Explorer, it appears highlighted with the select color in
the graphic view. However, if you are in the Drawings tab and you select a drawing, no objects
are highlighted in the graphic view. If you select an object in a graphic view, it is highlighted with
a gray background in the Workspace Explorer. The Workspace Explorer automatically scrolls
when objects are highlighted if the object is outside the Workspace Explorer window.
Automatic scroll is not available if the object is already in the Workspace Explorer window.
If you select a set of objects, but the set contains objects you do not want, press CTRL and click
to cancel the selection of unwanted objects. For multiple selections, press CTRL+SHIFT. If you
select a parent object and then press SHIFT and click the last listed child of the parent, you get
the parent and immediate child objects belonging of the parent. A right-click allows you to select
the parent and all nested children of the parent.
If you are currently working in a command, you can select multiple objects in the Workspace
Explorer without holding CTRL or SHIFT.

Common User's Guide 244

 View Menu

In the Workspace Explorer, you can select or type a name in the box at the top of the view.
The list displays the last 15 objects you selected that satisfy the current select filter. Also, you
can use the wildcard * (asterisk character) when typing the name in the box at the top of the
view. If you are in the Drawings tab, the search results display one at a time. Press ENTER to
navigate through these search results.

 You can widen or narrow the Workspace Explorer window for better viewing.
 You can also display or hide the window by selecting the Workspace Explorer command
on the View menu.
 If you choose to close the window, when you reopen it, the window displays identically as
when you closed it.
 You can complete basic command functions, such as copy, paste, and delete in the
Workspace Explorer window. Drag and drop is not currently supported by the Workspace
Explorer.
 You can create a new system in the Workspace Explorer by right-clicking an existing
system on the System tab.
 If you select an object in the Workspace Explorer that another user has deleted, the
following message appears in the graphic view: Removing the object from working set
because it was not located in the database. Please refresh data.
 The list of child objects under the Assembly hierarchy root appear sorted when a workspace
is defined, but can become unsorted during modeling. To sort this list, use the Refresh
Workspace Explorer command from the Workspace Explorer shortcut menu. To display
this menu, right-click in the Workspace Explorer white space area. This behavior applies
only to child objects of the Assembly hierarchy root. All other hierarchies and nodes in the
Assembly hierarchy are not affected by this change.

Common User's Guide 245

 View Menu

Icons in the Workspace Explorer

Smart 3D uses the following icons in the Workspace Explorer:

Analysis Folder

Analysis Model

Assembly

Assembly Connection

Beam Part - undetailed

Beam Part - detailed

Beam Part - detailed, manufactured

Bearing Plate - undetailed

Bearing Plate - detailed

Bearing Plate - detailed, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group member

Bearing Plate - group member, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group master

Bearing Plate - group master, manufactured

Block

Boundary Condition

Bracket System or Leaf System

Bracket Part - undetailed

Bracket Part - detailed

Bracket Part - detailed, manufactured

Bracket Part - group member

Common User's Guide 246

 View Menu

Bracket Part - group member, manufactured

Bracket Part - group master

Bracket Part - group master, manufactured

Cable Nozzle on Equipment

Cabletray Nozzle on Equipment

Collar Plate - undetailed

Collar Plate - detailed

Collar Plate - detailed, manufactured

Collar Plate - group member

Collar Plate - group member, manufactured

Collar Plate - group master

Collar Plate - group master, manufactured

Common Part Manager

Conduit Nozzle on Equipment

Coordinate System

Coordinate System Axis

Coordinate System Grid Plane

Coordinate System Elevation Plane

Coordinate System Radial Plane

Coordinate System Radial Cylinder

Curved Member Part - undetailed

Curved Member Part - light

Curved Member Part - light, manufactured

Common User's Guide 247

 View Menu

Curved Member Part - detailed

Curved Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group member

Curved Member Part - group member, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group master

Curved Member Part - group master, manufactured

Designed Equipment Component

Designed Equipment

Designed Handrail

Designed Member - undetailed

Designed Member - light

Designed Member - light, manufactured

Designed Member - detailed

Designed Member - detailed, manufactured

Designed Member - group member

Designed Member - group member, manufactured

Designed Member - group master

Designed Member - group master, manufactured

Edge Treatment

Equipment

Equipment Component

Equipment Foundation

Equipment Shape

Common User's Guide 248

 View Menu

Equipment Solid

Equipment Solid - Added

Equipment Solid - Subtracted

Equipment Solid - Suppressed

Feature (includes corner feature, edge feature, face feature, slot, and so on)

Footing

Footing Components

Foundation Port

Frame Connection

Handrail

HVAC Nozzle on equipment

Insert Plate - undetailed

Insert Plate - detailed

Insert Plate - detailed, manufactured

Insert Plate - group member

Insert Plate - group member, manufactured

Insert Plate - group master

Insert Plate - group master, manufactured

Ladder

Linear Member Part - undetailed

Linear Member Part - light

Linear Member Part - light, manufactured

Linear Member Part - detailed

Linear Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Common User's Guide 249

 View Menu

Linear Member Part - group member

Linear Member Part - group member, manufactured

Linear Member Part - group master

Linear Member Part - group master, manufactured

Load Case

Load Combination

Member Assembly Connection Cutback Feature

Member Assembly Connection Plate Part

Member Assembly Connection

Member Fireproofing

Member Part

Member Split Connection

Member System

Opening

Panel - manufactured

Physical Connection

Pipe Nozzle on Equipment

Planning Joint

Planning Joint Folder

Plate - light

Plate Part - undetailed

Plate Part - light

Plate Part - light, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed

Common User's Guide 250

 View Menu

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured, with manufacturing part assembly child

Plate Part - group member

Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Plate Part - group master

Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Plate System or leaf system

Profile Edge Reinforcement System or Leaf System

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part detailed, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Seam - Design

Seam - Intersection

Seam - Planning

Seam - Straking

Slab Assembly Connection

Slab

Common User's Guide 251

 View Menu

Stair

Standalone Beam Part - undetailed

Standalone Beam Part - detailed

Standalone Beam Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - undetailed

Standalone Plate Part - detailed

Standalone Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group member

Standalone Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group master

Standalone Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - undetailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - undetailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member

Common User's Guide 252

 View Menu

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener Part - undetailed

Stiffener Part - light

Stiffener Part - light, manufactured

Stiffener Part - detailed

Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group member

Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group master

Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener System or Leaf System

Wall Assembly Connection

Wall Part

Wall Run

Wall System

Common User's Guide 253

 View Menu

Icon Relationships
The following table describes the relationships indicated by the icons in the Workspace Explorer.
In general, there is a base icon for each type of entity. This base icon is then embellished
depending upon the role that entity plays in the model. Using the system plate part as an
example:

- Base icon for plate parts. Base parts use blue icons

- Light (not detailed) plate part. Light parts use white icons. Not all entities have this version.

- Light plate part that has been manufactured. The plus symbol indicates that the part has
manufacturing data. This only occurs if the detail part is deleted after manufacturing has been
done.

- Detailed plate part without manufacturing data. Detailed parts use red icons.

- Detailed plate part with manufacturing data. The plus symbol indicates that the part has
manufacturing data.
Common part grouping is also indicated by the icons. Under common part grouping, a master
part is used as the basis for deciding commonality. Other parts that compare themselves to the
master part are part of that common part group.
Selecting a grouped part for manufacturing automatically transfers the selection to the master
part. When you manufacture the master part, all corresponding parts in the group are also
manufactured. However, only the master part contains the manufacturing object.

- Detailed member of the common group. Member entities display a blue background.

- Detailed and manufactured member of the common group.

- Detailed master part of the common group. Master entities display a yellow background.

- Detailed and manufactured master part of the common group.

GPartAsAssembly

Group Member,
Group Member
manufactured,

Group master,
manufactured

manufactured

manufactured

manufactured
Group master
HasMFBearin
Detailed,
Detailed,
Detailed
Light,

Child
Light
Base

Bearing Plate

N/A N/A N/A

Bracket Part

N/A N/A N/A

Common User's Guide 254

 View Menu

GPartAsAssembly

Group Member,
Group Member
manufactured,

Group master,
manufactured

manufactured

manufactured

manufactured
Group master
HasMFBearin
Detailed,
Detailed,
Detailed
Light,

Child
Light
Base

Bearing Plate

Collar Plate

N/A N/A N/A

Insert Plate

N/A N/A N/A

Standalone Plate Part

N/A N/A N/A

System Plate Part

Standalone Stiffener Part

N/A N/A N/A

System Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

N/A

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

N/A N/A N/A

System Stiffener Part

N/A

Linear Member Part

N/A

Curved Member Part

N/A

Common User's Guide 255

 Base

Bearing Plate

Designed Member

Common User's Guide

Light

Light,
manufactured

Detailed

Detailed,
manufactured
Detailed,
manufactured,
N/A

HasMFBearin
GPartAsAssembly
Child

Group Member

Group Member,
manufactured

Group master

Group master,
manufactured
View Menu

256
 View Menu

Workspace Explorer
Displays and hides the Workspace Explorer window. The Workspace Explorer displays the
contents of the workspace in a classification hierarchy that reflects the various relationships
defined for the design objects. The content represents the current objects loaded from the
database into the active workspace. The names of objects appear in alphabetical order within
the hierarchy.
The Workspace Explorer window allows you to identify or select objects or sets of objects by
name. Icons appear at the left of the objects to indicate the type of object. For example, a file
folder icon represents a system, an equipment icon represents equipment, and so forth. Move
the mouse over objects in the Workspace Explorer to highlight, and click objects to select
them. If you hide objects using the Tools > Hide (on page 386) command, the object names
appear in italics.

Show or Hide Workspace Explorer

Click View > Workspace Explorer.
A check mark appears beside the Workspace Explorer command on the View menu
when the Workspace Explorer window is visible.

 You can narrow or widen the Workspace Explorer window for better viewing. When you
place the pointer on the line that divides the Workspace Explorer from the graphical
windows, it becomes an arrow that you can use to drag the dividing line to the left or right.
 When you select objects in a graphical view, the software also selects the objects in
Workspace Explorer. To cancel selection of objects in the Workspace Explorer window,
select the object again while holding CTRL.
 If you select an object in the Workspace Explorer that another user has deleted, the
following message appears in the graphic view: Removing the object from working set
because it was not located in the database. Please refresh data.
 You can complete basic command functions, such as copy, paste, and delete in the
Workspace Explorer window. The shortcut keys for the Copy command are CTRL+C and
for the Paste command are CTRL+V.
 You can create a new system in the Workspace Explorer by right-clicking an existing
system on the System tab.
 You can create a new WBS item in the Workspace Explorer by right-clicking on the WBS
tab.
 The drop-down list in the Workspace Explorer window has a shortcut menu. Depending on
the commands that you have completed, the menu includes the Undo, Copy, Paste,
Delete, and Select All commands. To open the shortcut menu, right-click the dropdown list.
 To select several objects at once, press CTRL or SHIFT while you click. If you are currently
working in a command, you can select multiple objects in the Workspace Explorer without
holding CTRL or SHIFT.
 If you close the window, when you reopen it, the window appears at the same width as
when you closed it.

Common User's Guide 257

 View Menu

See Also
Define a workspace using a new filter (on page 63)
Define a workspace using an available filter (on page 63)

Select Active Project Dialog Box

Displays the existing WBS hierarchy, which you can use to specify the active project. You can
access the Select Active Project dialog box by clicking More in the Active Project box.
The Active Project box is right next to the Permission Group box on the main toolbar.

Workspace
Displays WBS projects and items retrieved to the workspace based on the current Define
Workspace filter.
Database
Displays WBS projects and items that are in the current active database.
See Also
Workspace Explorer (on page 243)

Reference 3D Model Properties Dialog Box

Defines properties for reference 3D models from the Reference 3D tab on the Workspace
Explorer.

Topics
General Tab (Reference 3D Model Properties Dialog Box) .......... 258
Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 259
Levels and Layers Tab ................................................................. 260

Common User's Guide 258

 View Menu

General Tab (Reference 3D Model Properties Dialog Box)

Defines properties associated with the 3D model that you are modifying.
Model Name
Specifies a model name.
Description
Specifies a description of the model.
Model Type
Indicates any authoring tools used to create a referenced model. For more information, see
New Reference 3D Model Dialog Box.
Interference Detection
Indicates whether the reference 3D model participates in interference detection.
File Path
Specifies the path or location of the reference 3D folder. Currently, only .ZVF graphic files
with corresponding data in .XML or .DRV files are supported. Files located in subfolders are
supported and allow additional levels of filtering and Level/Layer control. Other formats are
not supported.
Improve database load time
Reduces the time to insert the Reference 3D data into the database; however, the overall
performance can vary depending on several factors. This option applies only to SQL Server
databases and increases the size of the generated SQL Server log file. By default, this
option is not enabled.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in the Project Management
task.
Approval State
Indicates the approval state of the object.
Status
Specifies the current status of the selected object or filter. Depending on your access level,
you may not be able to change the status of the object.
Date Created
Displays the date and time that the object was created.

Common User's Guide 259

 View Menu

Created by
Displays the user name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Displays the date and time when the object was modified.
Last Modified by
Displays the user name of the person who modified the object.

Levels and Layers Tab

Controls parameters for displaying levels and layers in the model. These parameters are saved
in the session file.
All Levels
Turns on or off display of all layers.
Display
Indicates that the layer or level displays in the graphic view.
Hide
Indicates that the layer or level does not display in the graphic view.
Mixed
Indicates a combination of displayed and hidden layers or levels. This setting has no effect
on the graphic display.

Reference 3D Folder Properties Dialog Box

Defines properties for reference 3D folders from the Reference 3D tab on the Workspace
Explorer.
General Tab (Reference 3D Folder Properties Dialog Box) (on page 260)
Configuration Tab (on page 259)
Levels and Layers Tab (on page 260)

General Tab (Reference 3D Folder Properties Dialog Box)

Controls general properties for reference 3D folders from the Reference 3D tab on the
Workspace Explorer.
Name
Specifies the name of the reference 3D folder.

Common User's Guide 260

 View Menu

Reference 3D Attach Properties Dialog Box

Defines properties for reference 3D attachments from the Reference 3D tab on the Workspace
Explorer.
General Tab (Reference 3D Attach Properties Dialog Box) (on page 261)
Configuration Tab (on page 259)
Levels and Layers Tab (on page 260)

General Tab (Reference 3D Attach Properties Dialog Box)

Controls general properties for reference 3D attachments from the Reference 3D tab on the
Workspace Explorer.
File Name
Specifies the name of the reference 3D attach file.
Data File Name
Specifies the name of the reference 3D data file.

Reference 3D Generic Element Properties Dialog Box

Defines properties for reference 3D objects selected from the model.
General Tab (Reference 3D Generic Element Properties Dialog Box) (on page 261)
Configuration Tab (Reference 3D Generic Element Properties Dialog Box) (on page 262)

General Tab (Reference 3D Generic Element Properties Dialog Box)

Defines properties associated with the reference 3D object that you have selected from the
model. These properties are read-only.
Name
Displays the object name.
Layer
Displays the layer upon which the object resides.
Level
Displays the level upon which the object resides.
Source object type
Displays the source object type for the object.
Type
Displays the type for the object.
Space
Displays the space in which the object resides.

Common User's Guide 261

 View Menu

Configuration Tab (Reference 3D Generic Element Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the creation, modification, and status information about a reference 3D object that you
have selected in the model. These properties are read-only.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in the Project Management
task.
Approval State
Displays the approval state of the object.
Status
Specifies the current status of the selected object or filter. Depending on your access level,
you may not be able to change the status of the object.
Date Created
Displays the date and time that the object was created.
Created by
Displays the user name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Displays the date and time when the object was modified.
Model Name
Displays the name of the object.
File Name
Displays the model name of the object.

New System
Creates new systems in the Workspace Explorer without switching to the Systems and
Specifications task. You can access this command by right-clicking a system on the System tab
of the Workspace Explorer.
The system you are creating inherits specifications from the parent system. To remove or add
specifications, you must switch to the Systems and Specifications task.

What do you want to do?

 Change a system owner (on page 263)
 Create a new system in the Workspace Explorer (on page 263)

Common User's Guide 262

 View Menu

Create a New System in the Workspace Explorer

1. Right-click a system in the Workspace Explorer. This system will be the parent of the
system you are creating.
2. Click New System on the shortcut menu.
3. Select the type of system you want to create. For example, you can create a conduit
system, an HVAC system, a piping system, and so forth.
The system you are creating inherits specifications from its parent. To remove or add
specifications, you must switch to the Systems and Specifications task.

Change a system owner

1. Select the System tab on the Workspace Explorer.
2. Select an object for which you want to change the owning system.
3. In the System box on the ribbon, select More. The Select System dialog box appears.
4. Specify whether the system is in the Workspace or the Database.
5. Select an owning system on the tree and click OK. The selected owning system of the
object is changed as specified.

 You can narrow or widen the Workspace Explorer window for better viewing. When you
place the pointer on the line that divides the Workspace Explorer from the graphical
windows, it becomes an arrow that you can use to drag the dividing line to the left or right.
 You can create a new system in the Workspace Explorer by right-clicking an existing
system on the System tab.

Select System Dialog Box

Displays applicable systems so you can select the system you want.
Look in
Specifies where you want to look for the system. Select Workspace to look for the system
in your defined workspace only. Select Database to look for the system in the entire Model
database regardless of the workspace filter.
See Also
Move (on page 151)

Common User's Guide 263

 View Menu

Rulers
Turns the display of rulers on and off. Rulers control the display of coordinate systems loaded in
the workspace. Using rulers is helpful in locating a reference plane, or a point on a plane, when
you place objects in the model. When you place objects in the model, you can use rulers to help
you locate the exact point along a plane.

Display rulers
1. Click View > Rulers.
2. Select a coordinate system or axis from the Coordinate systems box.

 You can select multiple coordinate systems or axes by holding CTRL or SHIFT.
 To turn the display of rulers off, hold CTRL and click a coordinate system or axis in the
Coordinate systems box.

Rulers Dialog Box

Displays the coordinate systems for which you can activate rulers. This dialog box appears
when you click View > Rulers.
Coordinate systems
Displays all the coordinate systems defined for the model. The systems appear in a
standard hierarchy according to the grid system to which they belong. Select the system or
axes for which you want to display rulers. If this list is empty, you must define coordinate
systems in the Grids task.

Common User's Guide 264

 View Menu

To Do List
Provides a list of objects in the workspace that include inconsistent data. To open the To Do
List, click View > To Do List, or you can use the shortcut keys, which are CTRL+T.
The To Do List allows you to view, edit, and set review status for inconsistent data objects from
the To Do List dialog box.
You must activate the native task for the object. Otherwise, if you are working
outside the native task for the object, a generic ribbon appears and you cannot edit the object in
error. For example, if the object is an HVAC feature, click Tasks > HVAC to open the HVAC
task to correct inconsistencies.
After you open the appropriate task, you can select the row with the object you want to edit. This
action causes the appropriate Edit ribbon to appear above the active window and lets you
change the data required to fix the errors. If you have write permission to an object, you can
simply direct an Out-of-date object to update itself using its current input. Object that you
cannot edit display in gray.
When you completely correct an Out-of-date object, the software updates all other dependent
objects. You can select multiple objects from the list when you correct Out-of-date objects.
Objects in an Error state are usually selected individually and corrected. After you successfully
update an object, the software removes the object from the list.

If the list on the To Do List dialog box is long, you can click Filter To Do List by Select Set
on the To Do List dialog box to only list the items related to currently selected objects in the
workspace.
You can continue to display the To Do List as you complete other commands.

Why do objects go to the To Do List?

The software automatically places objects on the To Do List when one of the following
situations occurs:
 Error - An object loses a relationship with another, required object. For example, the
definition for a piece of equipment is deleted from the Catalog, but instances of that
equipment remain in the model.
 Warning - An object retains all of its required relationships, but there is a problem with the
relationship.
 Out-of-date - When changing a relationship between two objects, you modify the
relationship but only have write permission to update one of the objects. For example, you
move a tank to the left 5 meters, but you do not have write permission to modify the pipe
that is routed to that tank. The piping appears in the To Do List.
If you change the catalog data for any object in the model, the software puts that object in
the To Do List as Out of date after you run Synchronize Model with Catalog using the
Mark Out of date option. For more information, see Synchronize Model with Catalog in the
Project Management User's Guide.
If you add new data for piping material class rules, the software does not mark
pipe runs as Out of date on the To Do List.

Common User's Guide 265

 View Menu

Two methods are available to change a write permission relationship between user and object.
The first method is assigning each object to a group that defines a list of users; for each user,
that list specifies the level of access for the objects. Your administrator sets these permissions in
the Project Management task.
The choices for access permissions include:
 Read - The user can read only.
 Write - The user can read, create, change, and delete.
 Full Access - The user can read, write, and assign approval (move status as defined
below).
This method allows users with Write and Full Access permissions to write to the object. Users
with Read cannot.
The second method for changing the relationship is assigning each object with a status of work
progress. You can view or change these statuses on Properties dialog boxes. The possible
statuses include:
 Working
 In Review
 Rejected
 Approved
For Working status, all access permissions listed earlier might apply (Read, Write, or Full
Access). However, other work statuses block even a user with Write access permission.
For example, Approved status blocks a user with Write access from changing the relationship
(except for the user designated as an approver). Therefore, the processing stops, and the
software lists the object on the To Do List as Out-of-date.
Working is the only status that is not read-only. You cannot add a new status or revise its
characteristics. For example, a designer, who has write access, changes the status from
Working to In Review. An administrator, who has full control access, can change the status
from In Review to either Approved or Rejected.

To Do List Dialog Box (on page 269)

To Do Record Meter (on page 272)

What do you want to do?

 Fix objects with errors (on page 266)
 Update out-of-date objects (on page 267)
 Display objects on the To Do List (on page 267)

Common User's Guide 266

 View Menu

Fix objects with errors

1. Click View > To Do List.
2. On the To Do List dialog box, review the listed objects, and decide which one you want to
correct.
3. Switch to the task associated with the object. Click the Tasks menu and then select the
appropriate task. For example, if you want to first correct a piping problem, click Tasks >
Piping.
You must activate the native task for the object. Otherwise, if you are
working outside the native task for the object, a generic ribbon appears and you cannot edit
the object in error.
4. Select a row with the object for which you want to show related objects in an Error state.
5. Edit the object using the appropriate tools on the Edit ribbon at the top of the active window.

 Error objects are usually edited one at a time. However, you can also select more than one
Error object if an Edit command supports multiple objects.
 If a constraint system fails and objects enter the Error state and are not recomputed, the
objects of the constraint system are displayed in nested order on the To Do List. Each
nested object displays values for its properties.

Update out-of-date objects

1. Click View > To Do List.
2. Select the row containing the object you want and show the related objects in an
Out-of-date state.

3. On the To Do List dialog box, update the data by clicking Update .

A progress bar appears as objects are updated.

 When you update an object in the Out-of-date state, the software refreshes the object using
its current input. In addition, the software updates all objects that depend on the object.
 You can select more than one Out-of-date object at the same time, and then update by
clicking Update .

Common User's Guide 267

 View Menu

Display objects on the To Do List

You can control what objects are displayed and what columns of information are shown on the
To Do List.
1. Open the To Do List by clicking View > To Do List or by pressing CTRL+T.

2. Click Properties to open the To Do List Properties dialog box (on page 270).
You can also open the To Do List Properties dialog box by right-clicking outside
the grid area on the To Do List dialog box and selecting Properties on the shortcut menu.
3. In the Display field, select the types of objects that you want to display on the To Do List.
For example, you can isolate objects that exist in a permission group in which the user has a
minimum of Write access permission (Write or Full Control) by selecting the option labeled
Only objects which the user has permission to resolve. You can filter the To Do List by
user by selecting the Only objects last changed by option and then specifying a user. In
addition, you can determine whether ignored objects are displayed in the To Do List by
checking or clearing the Ignored items option.
4. In the List field, select the columns that you want to display on the To Do List.
5. Click OK.

If the list on the To Do List dialog box is long, you can click Filter To Do List by Select Set
on the To Do List dialog box to only list the items related to currently selected objects in the
workspace.

You can use Auto Fit to view objects on the list in the active graphic view.

Common User's Guide 268

 View Menu

To Do List Dialog Box

View > To Do List displays objects in the workspace that have inconsistent data. The To Do
List dialog box allows you to edit these objects from a single location. To correct errors, select
objects from the list and modify them using the appropriate commands on the Edit ribbon.
Check your selection filter setting if you are having trouble selecting a To Do List entry. The To
Do List displays objects in gray that you cannot update.
You can change the sort order of items in the To Do List by clicking column headings. The
default sorting is alphabetical with Error objects listed and then the Out-of-date objects.

Properties
Opens the To Do List Properties dialog box, which allows you to choose the objects that
appear in the To Do List, as well as choosing display options. For more information, see To
Do List Properties Dialog Box (on page 270).

Update
Updates the selected out-of-date objects. This option is disabled if:
 The object has a non-working approval status. Working status is set on the
Configuration Tab (on page 144) of the object's properties.
 The object belongs to another global workshare site.
 You do not have sufficient permissions to edit the object.

Filter To Do List by Select Set

Shows only those To Do List entries that are related to the selected objects in the graphical
views or Workspace Explorer. When the To Do List contains hundreds or thousands of
records, this option can be useful for filtering the To Do List.
If no objects exist in the select set when this option is checked, the To Do List appears
empty. This option works in conjunction with the other check boxes under List on the To Do
List Properties dialog box. For example, if the Only objects which the user has
permission to resolve box is checked, then nothing shows in the To Do List if you select
an out-of-date object that you do not have permission to resolve.
Clear Filter
Removes the select set filter from the To Do List and displays all records for the workspace.
Review Status
Changes the Review status of the selected To Do List entry. The Review status is either
blank or Ignored.
Help
Opens the Troubleshooting help file, which contains information about To Do List
messages. To go directly to information about a message, select the message from the list,
and then click Help .

Auto Fit
Automatically fits in a graphic view the object associated with the To Do List entry that you
selected in the listing.

Common User's Guide 269

 View Menu

Note
Provides an expanded description of the problem. Point to the text in this field to display the
informational note as a ToolTip. The software automatically creates the note and its
contents.
Object name
Lists the name of an object, if assigned (for example, Pump No. 42). For an entry in a
nested constraint system, Constraint Set is displayed.
State
Specifies if the objects on the list are in an Out of date or Error state.
Changed by
Lists the user name of the person who changed the object that caused the Out of date or
Error state.
Date modified
Displays the date and local time when the object was modified, which resulted in a failure to
recompute.
Discipline
Displays the discipline of the object with the To Do List entry.
Review status
Displays the review status of the To Do List entry. The status is either blank or Ignored. By
default, this field is blank. To change the Review status of an entry, select the entry and
click the Review Status button .

To Do List Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for the information that appears on the To Do List dialog box. You can filter the
objects you want to list, based on the state and user permission. Also, you can select the
columns that display in the To Do List grid.

Display
Designates the contents in the To Do List dialog box.
Error objects
Occurs when relationships between two objects are discrepant. The computation process
for the objects does not complete.
Out-of-date objects
Occurs when you have write permission to edit an object but do not have write permission to
edit associated objects. If you select both the Error objects and Out-of-date objects
boxes, all objects appear in the To Do List dialog box.
Warning objects
Occurs when relationships between two objects are discrepant, but the computation process
for the objects is complete. You must check the objects and correct any discrepancies.

Common User's Guide 270

 View Menu

Ignored items
Determines whether to display To Do List entries that have a Review status of Ignored. By
default, this option is not selected.
Only objects which the user has permission to resolve
Includes only those To Do List objects to which the user has write access.
Only objects last changed by
Allows you to filter the To Do List by the user who last modified objects. You can choose
from the "modified by" users who have a To Do List record within the collection. This option
is useful when the To Do List is very long, and you want to see your own entries only (not
necessarily all entries you can fix). The default setting for this option is unchecked.
Discipline Information
Determines whether to display To Do List entries based on which disciplines that you select
in the drop-down menu. This option is useful when you want to only see entries from a
particular discipline or if you want to exclude entries from a particular discipline.

List
Specifies the columns of information to include on the To Do List dialog box. You must select at
least one option listed in the Display section.
Note
Provides an expanded description of the problem. Point to the text in this field to display the
informational note as a ToolTip. The software automatically creates the note and its
contents.
Object name
Lists the name of an object (for example, PUMP001A_IMP_Asm-1-0001).
State
Identifies if the objects on the list are Out of Date or in an Error state.
Changed by
Lists the user name of the person who changed the object that caused the Error or Out of
Date state.
Date modified
Displays the date the change occurred.
Discipline
Displays the discipline of the object with the To Do List entry.
Review status
Displays the review status of To Do List entries.

Common User's Guide 271

 View Menu

To Do Record Meter
The To Do Record Meter appears in the status bar of the software. The meter gives quick
feedback on the number of new records created on the To Do List in the current session.

The meter uses a rate of to do record (TDR) generation based on total TDRs created in the
session per total number of objects modified in the session. Error and Warning records are
included in the TDR count, but Out-of-date records are not included. By default, Warnings are
weighted less heavily than Errors; two Warnings count as one. The following equation is used:
TDR rate = ((0.5*Warnings + Errors)/Activity)*100
The To Do Record Meter has the following components:
Meter
Graphically displays the TDR rate. The pointer starts on the left at the start of a new
session, and moves to the right — from green to red — as new TDRs are generated.
Tooltip
Appears when you pause the cursor over the meter. The tooltip displays:
 To Do Records - The total number of Error and Warning to do records created in the
session.
 Activity - The total number of objects modified in the session.
 Rate - The TDR rate expressed as a percentage.
Message
Shows the number of TDRs created by the last completed command.

Common User's Guide 272

SECTION 7

Insert Menu
The Insert menu provides commands for adding additional information to the workspace, such
as reference files, control points, hyperlinks, and construction graphics. Some of the commands
on this menu may change depending on the active task.

In This Section
Insert File ...................................................................................... 273
Hyperlink ....................................................................................... 282
Note .............................................................................................. 286
Control Point ................................................................................. 289

Common User's Guide 273

 Insert Menu

Insert File
Use the Insert > File command to add reference files (objects) to the Workspace Explorer.
After these objects are added to the Workspace Explorer, you can include them in your model.
Although these reference files can be located anywhere that is accessible from the network, we
recommend that you add them into the SharedContent folder for a Global Workshare
environment. The reference files can only be of the following types:
 Non-PDS (Plant Design System) MicroStation V7-format files (.dgn)
 AutoCAD 2D and 3D files (.dxf and .dwg)
 Smart 3D versions before V2009 only support 2D AutoCAD files.
 Smart 3D version V2009 and V2009.1 support 2D and 3D files of AutoCAD version
2008 or earlier.
 Smart 3D Version V2011 supports 2D and 3D files of AutoCAD version 2009 or earlier.
After inserting the reference files, the Workspace Explorer displays a Reference tab that
shows the hierarchy of the referenced data. If you do not have the Reference tab in your
Workspace Explorer, see Change the displayed Workspace Explorer tabs (on page 497).
A Reference tab also appears on the Filter Properties dialog box.

MicroStation Units
MicroStation design files use the concept of MU:SU:PU (master units:sub-units:positional units)
to express distances and to define the precision of operations. All distances in Smart 3D are
stored in terms of meters. When you insert a reference file into Smart 3D, the MU:SU:PU
working units are used in the unit conversion. If the MU:SU:PU are not defined within the
MicroStation file, an error appears. The recommended working units in a reference file are
1:1000:80 for the metric system (m:mm) and 1:12:2032 (ft:in) for the English system.

 Reference file objects are supported in interference checking. For more information, see
Checking Interferences (on page 426).
 MicroStation SmartSolids are not rendered when they are included in a reference file.
 When troubleshooting reference files, check that the file or folder is shared with the proper
permissions. Also, be sure the working units are supported; that is, the file must have units
that the software can read and convert.
 To detach a reference file, select it in the Workspace Explorer, delete it, and then refresh
the workspace.

Common User's Guide 274

 Insert Menu

AutoCAD Units
Units for the 3D AutoCAD files are defined in Smart3D\Core\Runtime\SPFSPRB\Translator.ini.
For more information, see Translator.ini File Options (on page 277).

What do you want to do?

 Insert a reference file (on page 275)
 Delete a reference file (on page 275)

Insert a reference file

1. Click Insert > File.
The Insert File dialog box appears.
2. Browse to select a reference file. The file must be located in the SharedContent folder.

 You can insert non-PDS (Plant Design System) MicroStation V7-format files (.dgn),
which can be saved from MicroStation V7 and V8. You can also insert 2D and 3D
AutoCAD files (.dxf and .dwg).
 You can insert multiple files by holding CTRL or SHIFT while selecting the files.
3. Click Open to insert the reference file.

 The location and orientation of the inserted files match the currently active coordinate
system.
 After you insert the files, a Reference tab appears in the Workspace Explorer to display
the hierarchy of the referenced data. A Reference tab also appears on the Filter Properties
dialog box.
 You can define your workspace to include the reference file objects.
 Reference file objects are supported in interference checking. For more information, see
Checking Interferences (on page 426).
 MicroStation SmartSolids are not rendered when they are included in a reference file.
 To detach a reference file, select it in the Workspace Explorer, delete it, and then refresh
the workspace.
 When troubleshooting reference files, check that the file or folder is shared with the proper
permissions. Also, be sure the working units are supported. The file must have units that the
software can read and convert.

Common User's Guide 275

 Insert Menu

Delete a reference file

Before you can delete a reference file, it must be added to the workspace. To add a
reference file to the workspace, select it on the Reference tab of the filter being used to define
the workspace.

From the Workspace Explorer Reference Tab

1. In the Workspace Explorer Reference tab, right-click the item to delete.
2. Select Delete.

Using the Coordinate System

1. Select the coordinate system for the reference file that shows up in graphics.
2. Delete that coordinate system.
Using the coordinate system removal process removes the reference file from the
database.

Reference Attachment File Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for an attached reference file you select in the Workspace Explorer.
See Also
Configuration Tab (on page 144)
General Tab (Reference Attachment File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 276)
Insert File (on page 273)

General Tab (Reference Attachment File Properties Dialog Box)

Reviews and modifies high-level properties that identify a reference attachment file.
See Also
Reference Attachment File Properties Dialog Box (on page 276)

Reference Element Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for an element you have selected in a reference file.
See Also
Configuration Tab (on page 144)
General Tab (Reference Element Properties Dialog Box) (on page 277)
Insert File (on page 273)

Common User's Guide 276

 Insert Menu

General Tab (Reference Element Properties Dialog Box)

Reviews and modifies high-level properties that identify an element in a reference file.
See Also
Reference Attachment File Properties Dialog Box (on page 276)

Translator.ini File Options

The Translator.ini file provides Smart 3D the measurement units to use when translating files.
Translator.ini is divided into the supported graphics file types. Each type section defines
separate working units. If you do not modify the units setting in this file, the default output is in
meters. After making the necessary changes in the Translator.ini file, save it and republish the
project file to observe the log setting changes.
Translator.ini is located in [Product Folder]\Core\Runtime\SPFSPRB folder.
The main options provided in the Translator.ini file are described below.
For help in translating AutoCAD files, see Suggested Conversion Factors for
AutoCAD (on page 279) for recommendations.

Master Units
Possible values for the Master Units field:

Metric Values Units Denoted

59 = meters

61 = millimeters

62 = centimeters

63 = kilometers

Imperial Values Units Denoted

64 = inches

65 = feet

66 = yards

67 = miles

Common User's Guide 277

 Insert Menu

Sub Units
Possible values for the Sub Units field are the same as those for the Master Units. The Sub
Units should be defined the same as the Master Units unless the Positional Units Per Master
Unit are greater than the conversion factor between the defined Master Unit and the defined
Sub Unit. For example, if the Master Units are in meters, then the Sub Units should also be in
meters. If the number of Positional Units Per Master Unit is 100, then the Sub Units should
be defined as centimeters. If the number of positional units per master unit is 1000, then the
Sub Units should be defined as millimeters.
For most situations, the Sub Units can be set equal to the Master Units to simplify
the equation.

Sub Units Per Master Units

Defines the actual conversion factor between the defined Sub Units and Master Units. For
example, if the Master Unit is defined as meters and the Sub Unit is defined as centimeters,
then this field MUST be defined as 100. If the Master Units and Sub Units are set to the same
unit type, then the Sub Units Per Master Units must be set to 1.

 To simplify, the Sub Units can be set equal to the Master Units, and Sub Units Per
Master Units set to 1.
 The Sub Units Per Master Units field can only have whole integer values (no decimals) of
1 or larger.

Positional Units Per Sub Unit

Defines the number of positional units in the model dataset that equals a single Sub Unit. A
positional unit is the smallest whole number (unit of resolution) used to represent model
coordinates in the dataset. Modify this value to scale your data as required.
Increase this value to scale your model data to be smaller in terms of the defined Master Units.
Decrease this value to scale your model data to be larger in terms of the Master Units. This
field can only have whole integer values (no decimals) of 1 or larger.

Display Proxy
In AutoCAD, to cancel the proxy translation, add the option below to the AutoCAD section:
Display Proxy Entities = 0
AutoCAD applications that create proxy objects must be able to export their graphics
into a standard AutoCAD file, or into another format that can be read by SmartPlant Review
Publisher. Otherwise, the converters cannot read the graphics for display in SmartPlant
Review. An example of this is if graphic entities are generated using object enablers. If you have
AutoCAD formats that cannot be converted, please contact the application provider for a
solution to export the graphics into a readable format.

Common User's Guide 278

 Insert Menu

Client
Use the setting in this section to support multiple clients. Set the Client Code as SP3D or
SPRPub (SmartPlant Review Publisher).

Global Options
Enable Logging
If this option is set to 1, the software generates the log file in the Temp folder with the name
ReaderLogFile.txt. If the option is set to zero (0), then no log file is generated.
LogSetting
If this option is set to 1, the software generates a detailed log with the detailed information of
all the graphic objects in the file, such as handle information, color, and layer. If the option is
set to 0, the software only generates a summary of all the graphic objects, such as the
number of graphic objects that passed or failed.

Suggested Conversion Factors for AutoCAD

The information below provides suggested metric and imperial conversion factors when using
AutoCAD or MicroStation data files. The conversion factor has been commented out.
You can clear the Acis Conversion Factor and assign any factor (such as 1.0, or 25.4, or
1000.0)

AutoCAD Conversions

AutoCAD source file scaled for kilometers

[AutoCAD Options]
Master Units = 63
Sub Units = 63
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1
;Acis Conversion Factor = 1.0 // or 25.4 or 1000.0
AutoCAD source file scaled for centimeters
[AutoCAD Options]
Master Units = 62
Sub Units = 62
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1
;Acis Conversion Factor = 1.0 // or 25.4 or 1000.0
AutoCAD source file scaled for meters
[AutoCAD Options]
Master Units = 59
Sub Units = 59
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1
;Acis Conversion Factor = 1.0 // or 25.4 or 1000.0

Common User's Guide 279

 Insert Menu

AutoCAD source file scaled for millimeters

[AutoCAD Options]
Master Units = 61
Sub Units = 61
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1
;Acis Conversion Factor = 1.0 // or 25.4 or 1000.0
AutoCAD source file scaled for Feet
[AutoCAD Options]
Master Units = 65
Sub Units = 65
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1
;Acis Conversion Factor = 1.0 // or 25.4 or 1000.0
AutoCAD source file scaled for Inches
[AutoCAD Options]
Master Units = 64
Sub Units = 64
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1
;Acis Conversion Factor = 1.0 // or 25.4 or 1000.0

Scaling Data Examples

This section lists some examples in setting up the working units and data scaling using the
Translator.ini file. See Translator.ini File Options (on page 277) for a description of the main
conversion options provided by the Translator.ini file.

No Scaling Required
If the source data is in known working units, then set up the working units to match those used
in the source data.
Source Data: 1 positional unit = 1 mm
Output: 1 positional unit = 1 mm
Settings:
Master Units = 61 (mm)
Sub Units = 61 (mm)
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1

Common User's Guide 280

 Insert Menu

Keep the Same Working Units But Scale Model Up

You have an AutoCAD file that was originally designed in millimeters, but Smart 3D sees all
distances scaled to meters. To remedy this, you can modify the AutoCAD section in the
translator.ini file as shown below:
[AutoCAD Options]
Master Units = 61
Sub Units = 61
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1
The number 61 corresponds to millimeters. This tells Smart 3D that all AutoCAD files were
originally designed in millimeters and should be converted using the same value.

Conversion Between Imperial and Metric Unit Systems

The settings below are used by Smart 3D to perform limited conversions between systems. If
scaling other than the system conversion is needed, then you can adjust either the assumed
source unit or adjust the positional units per sub unit (before rounding), as appropriate.
METRIC TO IMPERIAL
Convert from metric to miles to minimize round-off error.
 Source Data: 1 positional unit = 1 m
Settings:
Master Units = 67 (mile)
Sub Units = 67 (mile)
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1609 (1609.344 m per mi)
Source Data: 1 positional unit = 1 mm
Settings:
Master Units = 67 (mile)
Sub Units = 67 (mile)
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 1609344 (1609344 mm per mi)
IMPERIAL TO METRIC
Convert from imperial to kilometers to minimize round-off errors.
 Source Data: 1 positional unit = 1 ft
Settings:
Master Units = 63 (km)
Sub Units = 63 (km)
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 3281 (3280.839895 ft per km)
 Source Data: 1 positional unit = 1 in

Common User's Guide 281

 Insert Menu

Settings:
Master Units = 63 (km)
Sub Units = 63 (km)
Sub Units Per Master Units = 1
Positional Units Per Sub Unit = 39370 (39370.07874 in per km)

Common User's Guide 282

 Insert Menu

Hyperlink
Adds hyperlinks to selected objects, such as equipment and pipe runs. You can type a link to a
file or a web page. Use Edit > Go to Hyperlink to follow the hyperlink. If you select an object
that does not have a hyperlink associated with it, the Go to Hyperlink command is not
available.
Hyperlinks are stored in the Site database so that any user working with that object can access
them.

What do you want to do?

 Insert a hyperlink (on page 283)
 Remove a Hyperlink (on page 283)

Insert a hyperlink
1. Click the objects that needs a hyperlink.
2. Click Insert > Hyperlink.
3. Type the description and URL of the hyperlink.
4. Click OK.

 If you are unsure about the URL, click Browse to open the Browse to Address dialog box.

Remove a hyperlink
1. Select the object from which you want to remove the hyperlink.
2. Click Insert > Hyperlink.
3. Click Unlink.

Common User's Guide 283

 Insert Menu

Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box

Associates a file or Web page with an object in your model. This file or Web page appears when
you select the object and click Edit > Go to Hyperlink.
Description
Provides a brief description of the file or Web page associated with the selected object. If
the description is longer than the box, you can use the arrow keys to scroll through the text.
URL
Displays the address of the file or Web page associated with the selected object. You must
use the standard http://, file://, or www syntax when defining an address.
Browse
Searches for and selects the file or Web page you want to associate with the object using
the Browse to Address dialog box.
Unlink
Removes the displayed URL from the selected object. This command is not available when
the URL box is blank.
When you select a URL using the Browse to Address dialog box, the software
automatically populates the Description box with a default description of the file or Web
page. You can keep this default description or type your own.
See Also
Browse to Address Dialog Box (on page 285)
Insert a hyperlink (on page 283)

Common User's Guide 284

 Insert Menu

Browse to Address Dialog Box

Searches for and selects the file or Web page you want to associate to an object in your model
using a hyperlink. This dialog box is very similar in use and appearance to a standard web
browser application.
Address List
Specifies the address of a particular web page or file. You can also select a previously
entered address and move directly to that address. When you type an address in this box,
you must use the standard http://, file://, or www syntax. For example, type
file://computer/folder/file.txt. Press ENTER to go to the address you typed into this box.
Back
Returns to the last page you viewed. This button is not active when you first open the dialog
box or if no previous addresses are saved in the browser.
Forward
Moves forward to a page you viewed before you clicked Back. This button is not available
unless your last command was clicking the Back button.

Stop
Ends any command the software is performing. Click this button if a page is taking too long
to load.

Refresh
Displays the latest version of a page.

Home
Opens the Web page defined as the starting page of your browser.

Search
Opens a standard search tool to help you find the page you want.

Favorites
Adds a location to saved list of pages, views your list of saved pages, or opens a saved
page from that list.
Select
Associates the displayed location with the object selected in your model.
See Also
Insert a hyperlink (on page 283)
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box (on page 283)

Common User's Guide 285

 Insert Menu

Note
Adds notes to objects, such as equipment and pipe parts. You can type special instructions or
requirements related to a given component for the fabricator.
When you select the Note command, you are prompted to select a key-point, insertion point, tap
point, or control point. Notes are associated with individual component key points and can be
used with many objects in the software, including instruments, pipe, piping components,
specialty items, pipe support assemblies, HVAC fittings, and cableway fittings. The software
associates notes with parts, not features.
Notes contain user-definable text that provides special instructions or requirements for a given
component. Notes are a form of communication with the fabricator of the system.
The software associates notes with parts, not features. To view the properties of notes, select
an object with corresponding notes and use the Properties command on the Edit menu. When
you create a note, you can include a hyperlink in the Note text box. The Edit Properties dialog
box includes a Notes tab after you have added a note. For more information, see Notes Tab (on
page 179).

What do you want to do?

 Insert a note (on page 286)
 Follow a note (on page 287)
 Insert a note at a precise place on an isometric drawing (on page 287)

Insert a note
1. Click the object that needs a note.
2. Click Insert > Note.
3. Select a key point, insertion point, tap point, or control point for associating the note.
4. In the Key point box, select a point to which to attach the note.
5. In the Note name box, type or select a name.
6. In the Purpose of note box, select a purpose.
7. In the Note text box, type descriptive text about the note.
Notes are stored in the Site database so any user working with that object can access
them.

Common User's Guide 286

 Insert Menu

Follow a note
1. Select an object with an associated note.
2. Click Edit > Properties to access the Properties dialog box for the object.
3. Change to the Note tab to view the note text and other properties on the Notes tab.
You can add or delete notes using the buttons on the Notes tab.

Insert a note at a precise place on an isometric drawing

1. Select Insert > Control Point.
2. Select the pipe part in the model that needs a note.
Use the quick pick tool to make the correct selection.

3. Position the control point on the centerline of the pipe part. For precision placement, use
commands like Measure , PinPoint , or Point Along.
4. In the Type box, verify that Control Point is selected.
5. Confirm or change the option in the Subtype box on the ribbon.
6. In the Name box, define a name for the control point.
7. Click Properties .
8. Under the Notes tab, click New Note.
9. In the Key point box, select the control point to which to attach the note.
10. In the Notes at this location, listed by name box, type or select a name.
11. In the Purpose of note box, select Fabrication so that the note is picked up for inclusion in
the drawing.
12. In the Note text box, type descriptive text for the note.

Common User's Guide 287

 Insert Menu

13. Check the Show dimension box if you want a dimension to appear on the drawing.

14. Click OK.

15. In the Drawings and Reports task, use the Update Now or Batch > Update commands to
update the drawing that includes the pipe part with the associated control point.
The note appears where it was placed in the model.

Common User's Guide 288

 Insert Menu

Insert Note Dialog Box

Associates a note with a selected object.
Key point
Indicates the specific location on a component to which the note is associated. The list lets
you select up to three key points.
Note name
Displays the name of the note to associate with the selected object.
Purpose of note
Describes the reason you want to associate a note with the selected object. A list provides a
variety of purposes you can choose for your note.
Note text
Specifies a text message for the note. You can use this space to provide special instructions
or requirements related to the given component for the fabricator. You can also use this
space to make comments.
Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component.
It is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.
See Also
Insert a note at a precise place on an isometric drawing (on page 287)
Insert a note (on page 286)
Note (on page 286)

Common User's Guide 289

 Insert Menu

Control Point
Places a control point on an object in the model. The software translates the control point on
volume and composed drawings and depicts its own symbol and coordinate callout. If part of an
assembly, the control point controls the location of the drawing leader line for that assembly.
When a control point is inserted, it is added to the System hierarchy in the Workspace
Explorer beneath the system and object to which it is associated.
The Drawings and Reports task uses control points for the following reasons:
 To drive coordinate and label locations.
 To generate notes on volume and composed drawings, isometric drawings, and reports.
 To use as a reference for dimensioning schemes based on a monument, or coordinate
system, and to give directions for the dimensions. You can define coordinate systems and
monuments in the Grids task.
You define the location of a control point with the Insert > Control Point command. You
designate the control point relative to a parent object, such as along a centerline or on a surface.
Examples of parent objects are route objects, equipment, structures, grids, and coordinate
systems. If you delete the parent object, the software also deletes the control point.
The parent object drives the relationship of the control point as part of an assembly. That is, the
control point and its parent object share the same relationships. The control point and parent
object also are in the same permission group and have the same approval status. While you can
assign multiple control points to a parent object, each control point has only one parent object.
You can use the SmartSketch relationship indicators or commands like Measure , PinPoint
, and Point Along to define an associative position, setting the control point as a child object
to the associative point constraint that locates the exact position. For example, you can place a
control point two meters from a key point along a pipe. During a move or modification, the
software maintains the control point location at the same distance from the key point. Therefore,
if you modify the pipe length, the control point remains at two meters from the key point. If you
modify the pipe length to equal less than two meters, the software automatically deletes the
point.
The software does not contain a filter for control points; however, you can select a control point
in the model by applying the All locate filter and then clicking the Select command. You can
also select a control point from the Workspace Explorer if the filter is set to All.
Definitions for drawing filters and rules control the symbolization of control points. The location
of the control point symbol corresponds to the 3D control point.

Common User's Guide 290

 Insert Menu

The following graphic depicts five control points that are positioned near labels in a P&ID:

 The control point is not a physical object and does not support interference checking.
 A control point is a 3D graphic object with properties that represents a point in the model.
The software translates the object on volume and composed drawings and depicts its own
symbol and coordinate callout. If part of an assembly, the control point controls the location
of the drawing leader line for that assembly.
 A monument is an object, such as a post or stone, fixed in the ground to mark a boundary or
position. A coordinate system defines a monument to provide measurement directions.
 A key point is any point that you can locate on a symbol or an object.
 If a control point is not defined for a symbol, the default control point is the center of the
symbol.
 Each piece of equipment must have at least one control point.
 When you place a control point, you can specify a control point subtype to provide a further
breakdown for the type of control point. To customize subtypes, you can use the
functionality in the Catalog task. Possible subtypes are Process Equipment, Mechanical
Equipment, Foundation, Structure, Pipe Mfg Limit Point, Spool Break, Duct Break
Point, WBS Pipe Break - Fabrication, WBS Break Point Type 1, WBS Break Point Type
2, WBS Break Point Type 3, WBS Break Point Type 4, WBS Pipe Break - Stress, WBS
Break Point Type 5, WBS Pipe Break - Tracing, WBS Pipe Break - Generic, WBS Pipe
Break - System, Elevation Callout, Ad Hoc Note, CAD Detail, Key Plan Callout,
Support Notes, Isometric Reference Dimension, Isometric Start Point, and Pipe Stress
Delimiter. You can use the control point subtypes to classify the control point for use in the
Drawings and Reports task. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the
Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.

Common User's Guide 291

 Insert Menu

Control Point Ribbon (Placement)

Provides options to identify a parent object and precisely place a control point in the model. Use
the Measure , PinPoint , and Point Along commands to help locate the point or surface.
Properties
Displays the control point properties.

Select Parent Object

Selects an object associated with the control point.

Select Point Location

Allows you to click in the model to specify the location of the control point.
Type
Specifies the appropriate category of point. You choose an option from a select list. The
Catalog task is the primary tool for defining select lists. For more information, see the
Catalog User's Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
Subtype
Provides a further breakdown for the type of control point. As in the Type box, you choose
an option from a select list. Possible subtypes are Process Equipment, Mechanical
Equipment, Foundation, Structure, Pipe Mfg Limit Point, Spool Break, Duct Break
Point, WBS Pipe Break - Fabrication, WBS Break Point Type 1, WBS Break Point Type
2, WBS Break Point Type 3, WBS Break Point Type 4, WBS Pipe Break - Stress, WBS
Break Point Type 5, WBS Pipe Break - Tracing, WBS Pipe Break - Generic, WBS Pipe
Break - System, Elevation Callout, Ad Hoc Note, CAD Detail, Key Plan Callout,
Support Notes, Isometric Reference Dimension, Isometric Start Point, and Pipe Stress
Delimiter.

 You can use control point subtypes to classify the control point for use in drawings and
reports. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the Reference Data
Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
 Control point subtypes are used in drawings in several ways. They can indicate a point
on a piece of equipment or a structure to be used in dimensioning. The subtype can
indicate the position of a grating symbol on a structure planning drawing. Another way
the subtype is used is to place notes at a very specific point on an object, making the
control point drawable so it can be labeled.
 You can use the CAD Detail control point subtype to classify the control point for use in
the HgrSup3View package in drawings and reports. For more information, see the
Smart 3D Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.
Name
Identifies the control point with a name, which you can define, or use the selection that a
rule defines. The GenericNamingRules.xls workbook lists the naming rules used in the
software. For more information about naming rules, see the Reference Data Guide available
from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

Common User's Guide 292

 Insert Menu

Control Point Ribbon (Edit)

Provides options to view and edit a control point in the model.
Properties
Displays the control point properties.
Parent object
Specifies an object associated with the control point. You can select from the last five parent
objects. You can also click Select Graphically to select an object in a graphic view, or click
More to select an object from a tree view.
Type
Specifies the appropriate category of point. You choose an option from a select list. The
Catalog task is the primary tool for defining select lists. For more information, see the
Catalog User's Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
Subtype
Provides a further breakdown for the type of control point. As in the Type box, you choose
an option from a select list. Possible subtypes are Process Equipment, Mechanical
Equipment, Foundation, Structure, Pipe Mfg Limit Point, Spool Break, Duct Break
Point, WBS Pipe Break - Fabrication, WBS Break Point Type 1, WBS Break Point Type
2, WBS Break Point Type 3, WBS Break Point Type 4, WBS Pipe Break - Stress, WBS
Break Point Type 5, WBS Pipe Break - Tracing, WBS Pipe Break - Generic, WBS Pipe
Break - System, Elevation Callout, Ad Hoc Note, CAD Detail, Key Plan Callout,
Support Notes, Isometric Reference Dimension, Isometric Start Point, and Pipe Stress
Delimiter.

 You can use control point subtypes to classify the control point for use in drawings and
reports. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the Reference Data
Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
 Control point subtypes are used in drawings in several ways. They can indicate a point
on a piece of equipment or a structure to be used in dimensioning. The subtype can
indicate the position of a grating symbol on a structure planning drawing. Another way
the subtype is used is to place notes at a very specific point on an object, making the
control point drawable so it can be labeled.
Name
Identifies the control point with a name, which you can define, or use the selection that a
rule defines. The GenericNamingRules.xls workbook lists the naming rules used in the
software. For more information about naming rules, see the Reference Data Guide available
from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
E
Displays the coordinate of the control point along the E-axis (East).
N
Displays the coordinate of the control point along the N-axis (North).

Common User's Guide 293

 Insert Menu

EL
Displays the coordinate of the control point along the EL-axis (Elevation).

What do you want to do?

 Add control points (on page 294)
 Edit control points (on page 294)
 Set isometric break control points for drawings (on page 295)
 Add location point coordinates to PCF (on page 295)
 Indicate elevation on drawings (on page 296)
 Add Ad Hoc Note to control points for drawings (on page 299)
 Add CAD details of a support component in the drawings (on page 300)
 Add the location coordinates of the key plan to drawings (on page 302)

Add control points

1. Select Insert > Control Point.
2. To set an association, designate the parent object for the control point or identify a location
in the model. To identify a precise location in the model, use commands like Measure ,
PinPoint , and Point Along.
3. Confirm or change the option in the Type box on the ribbon.
4. Confirm or change the option in the Subtype box on the ribbon.
5. Confirm or change the assigned phrase in the Name box on the ribbon. If you have defined
a naming rule to assign the name for the control point, you can use that selection.
Using the Format View dialog box, you can see the control point placed in the model
by selecting Reference Geometry from the Render Selected Aspects list.

Edit control points

1. Select a control point in the model.

 Using the Format View dialog box, you can see the control point in the model by
selecting Reference Geometry from the Render Selected Aspects list.
 You can use QuickPick and a locate filter to assist in selection of control points.
2. On the ribbon, specify a parent in the Parent Object box. You can choose from the last five
parent objects, or you can select an object graphically in the model or from a tree view.
3. Confirm or change the option in the Type box on the ribbon.
4. Confirm or change the option in the Subtype box on the ribbon.

Common User's Guide 294

 Insert Menu

5. Confirm or change the assigned phrase in the Name box on the ribbon.

 Click Properties on the ribbon to view or edit additional properties of the control point.
 You can view the coordinates of the control point in the boxes on the ribbon. However, you
cannot edit these coordinates.

Set isometric break control points for drawings

The following procedure provides an example for setting an isometric break control points so
that a drawing is split according to the break points.
1. In the Piping task, place a flange on a pipeline.
2. Select Insert > Control Point.
3. Set the subtype for the control point to PipingMfg Limit Point.
Make sure the parent of the control point is a Route Connection object.
4. Go to the Drawings and Reports task and update the drawing for the pipeline.
The updated drawing should have two sheets. The Piping Component File (PCF) should have
the line ISO-SPLIT- POINT followed by the x, y, and z coordinates of the isometric break control
point.
You can create rules to use the control point subtypes to classify the control point for
use in drawings and reports. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the
Smart 3D Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.

Add location point coordinates to PCF

This procedure provides an example for setting a control point so that a drawing Piping
Component File (PCF) includes location point coordinates (units in millimeters).
1. Go to the Piping task.
2. Select Insert > Control Point.
3. Select the Distribution Connection as the parent for the control point.

Common User's Guide 295

 Insert Menu

4. Select WBS Break point Type 1 from the Subtype list.

5. Place the control point as a location point for the drawing and PCF. For example, you might
want to place it on a weld.
6. Update the drawing for the pipeline.
The updated drawing shows a label for the Location Point that has a label pointing to the
Distribution Connection.

The Piping Component File (PCF) includes the line LOCATION-POINT followed by the x, y, and
z coordinates (units in millimeters) of the control point.

You can create rules to use the control point subtypes to classify the control point for
use in drawings and reports. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the
Smart 3D Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.

Common User's Guide 296

 Insert Menu

Indicate elevation on drawings

The following procedure provides an example for setting a control point to indicate the elevation
of the control point labeled on the drawings.
1. In the Hangers and Supports task, place a control point on the support. Select Insert >
Control Point.

2. Select the parent object for the control point.

3. Set the Subtype for the control point to Elevation Callout.

4. Create a note associated with the control point. The text of the note is appended to the label
before the elevation.
a. Open the Control Point Properties dialog box for the control point.
b. Click the Notes tab.
c. Click New Note.

Common User's Guide 297

 Insert Menu

d. Specify the Key Point, in this example ControlPoint1, to add the note, specify Elevation
Callout for Notes at this location, listed by name, select Fabrication for Purpose of
Note, and specify EL for Note Text.

5. Go to the Drawings and Reports task and update the drawing for the structure.
The updated drawing shows a label that has the elevation value of the control point location
and the note added.

You can create rules to use the control point subtypes to classify the control point for
use in drawings and reports. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the
Smart 3D Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.

Common User's Guide 298

 Insert Menu

Add Ad Hoc Note to control points for drawings

The following procedure provides an example for setting a control point to have an ad hoc note
on the drawings.
1. In the Hangers and Supports task, place a control point on the support. Select Insert >
Control Point.

2. Select the parent object for the control point.

3. Set the Subtype for the control point to Ad Hoc Note.

4. Create a note associated with the control point.

a. Open the Control Point Properties dialog box for the control point.
b. Click the Notes tab.
c. Click New Note.
d. Specify the Key Point, in this example Control Point2, to add the note, specify Ad Hoc
Note for Notes at this location, listed by name, select Fabrication for Purpose of
Note, and specify Paint member yellow for Note Text.

Common User's Guide 299

 Insert Menu

5. Go to the Drawings and Reports task and update the drawing for the structure.
The updated drawing shows a label with the note added at the control point location.

You can create rules to use the control point subtypes to classify the control point for
use in drawings and reports. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the
Smart 3D Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.

Add CAD details of a support component in the drawings

When using the HngSup-CAD Details view style, you can place the CAD details (.sym file) in
the drawings. You must specify the location of the .sym file in the Note Text field in the Notes
tab of the Control Point Properties dialog box for the control point.
The following procedure provides an example for setting a control point to place the CAD details
on the drawings.
1. In the Hangers and Supports task, place a control point on a support component. Select
Insert > Control Point.

2. Select the parent object for the control point.

Common User's Guide 300

 Insert Menu

3. Set the Subtype for the control point to CAD Detail.

4. Create a note associated with the control point, specifying the location of the .sym file.
a. Open the Control Point Properties dialog box for the control point.
b. Click the Notes tab.
c. Click New Note.
d. Specify the Key Point, in this example Control Point3, to add the note, specify CAD
Detail for Notes at this location, listed by name, select Fabrication for Purpose of
Note, and specify \HangersAndSupports\CAD Details\Utility four hole plate.sym for Note
Text.

Common User's Guide 301

 Insert Menu

5. Go to the Drawings and Reports task and update the drawing for the support component.
The updated drawing shows the graphic detail of the associated control point note text in the
view, where the HngSup – CAD Details view style is activated.

You can create rules to use the control point subtypes to classify the control point for
use in drawings and reports. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the
Smart 3D Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.

Common User's Guide 302

 Insert Menu

Add the location coordinates of the key plan to drawings

You can indicate the location coordinate of the key plan on the drawings. By default, the location
coordinate of the key plan refers to the primary pipe centerline. You can change it by specifying
a Key Plan Callout subtype for the control point.
The following procedure provides an example for setting a control point to add the key plan
coordinates on the drawings.
1. In the Hangers and Supports task, place a control point on a support component. Select
Insert > Control Point.

2. Select the parent object for the control point.

3. Set the Subtype for the control point to Key Plan Callout.

Common User's Guide 303

 Insert Menu

4. Create a note associated with the control point.

a. Open the Control Point Properties dialog box for the control point.
b. Click the Notes tab.
c. Click New Note.
d. Specify the Key Point, in this example Control Point4, to add the note, specify Key Plan
Callout for Notes at this location, listed by name, select Fabrication for Purpose of
Note, and specify KP for Note Text.

5. Go to the Drawings and Reports task and update the drawing for the support component.
The updated drawing shows the Key Plan coordinate label at the specified control point
location in the drawing.

You can create rules to use the control point subtypes to classify the control point for
use in drawings and reports. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the
Smart 3D Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.

Common User's Guide 304

 Insert Menu

Control Point Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for a selected control point.
When you open the Control Point Properties dialog box during the initial placement
of a control point, only the General tab is visible. The remaining tabs display only when you are
editing an existing control point.
General Tab (Control Point Properties Dialog Box)
Relationships Tab (on page 180)
Configuration Tab (on page 144)
Notes Tab (on page 179)

General Tab (Control Point Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general properties of the selected control point.
Category
Select the type of properties that you want to view for the selected control point. Control
point properties have only one category: Standard.
Control Point Type
Specifies the appropriate category of point. You select an option from the list. Catalog is the
primary tool for defining select lists. For more information, see the Catalog User's Guide
available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Control Point Subtype
Provides a further breakdown for the type of control point. As in the Type box, you choose
an option from a select list. Possible subtypes are Process Equipment, Mechanical
Equipment, Foundation, Structure, Pipe Mfg Limit Point, Spool Break, Duct Break
Point, WBS Pipe Break - Fabrication, WBS Break Point Type 1, WBS Break Point Type
2, WBS Break Point Type 3, WBS Break Point Type 4, WBS Pipe Break - Stress, WBS
Break Point Type 5, WBS Pipe Break - Tracing, WBS Pipe Break - Generic, WBS Pipe
Break - System, Elevation Callout, Ad Hoc Note, CAD Detail, Key Plan Callout,
Support Notes, Isometric Reference Dimension, Isometric Start Point, and Pipe Stress
Delimiter.
You can use the control point subtypes to classify the control point for use in
drawings and reports. For more information, see Control Point Subtype Sheet in the Smart
3D Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
Name
Displays the name of the selected object. If the name is too long to entirely display in the
box, hover the cursor over the box to display the complete name as a tool tip. If the name is
not defined by a rule, User Defined displays. If this name is generated by a naming
rule, Naming Rule displays. If you type a name in this box, Smart 3D automatically
changes the naming rule to User Defined. The GenericNamingRules.xls workbook lists
the naming rules used in the software. For more information about naming rules, see the
Smart 3D Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in
the software.

Common User's Guide 305

 Insert Menu

Naming Rule
Displays the available name rules for the selected object. Specify the naming rule to use to
name the object. You can select one of the listed rules, or you can select User Defined to
specify a custom name in the (Name) box.

Diameter
Displays the diameter of the object.

Parent Object
Specifies the object to which the control point is associated.
Associativity
Sets the associativity of the control point. You can select True or False.
E
Displays the coordinate of the control point along the E-axis (East).
N
Displays the coordinate of the control point along the N-axis (North).
EL
Displays the coordinate of the control point along the EL-axis (Elevation).

Common User's Guide 306

SECTION 8

Format Menu
The Format menu provides commands for formatting views and styles and maintaining surface
style rules. Some of the commands on this menu may change depending on the active task.

In This Section
Format View.................................................................................. 307
Format Style ................................................................................. 321
Surface Style Rules ...................................................................... 338

Common User's Guide 307

 Format Menu

Format View
Formats a view according to settings on the Format View dialog box. You access this command
by selecting Format > View.
When you define three-dimensional views, you can format the views with effects. You can use
several techniques, such as rendering, to enhance model views. You can apply these settings to
more than one view using a view style, or you can format a single view.

Setting Projection
The projection of a view determines how close and at what angle objects appear in the
workspace.

Specifying Rendering
Rendering provides a more realistic view of a model. You can apply different rendering methods
to the model such as smooth shading or outline images.

Enabling View Axis

Indicates which direction is E (East), N (North), and El (Elevation). N arrow points in the
direction of the active coordinate system North in the model relative to the current view.
Indicates the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the ship. Y arrow points in the direction of the active
coordinate system port in the model relative to the current view.

Applying Formats
When you format a view, you can easily control what objects look like in a view. You can format
views in the following ways:
 To apply unique settings to a view, you use the Format > View command. The formats you
apply with this command override the view style of the active window.
 If you select one of the shaded edges rendering options (Shaded with Enhanced Edges or
Shaded with Hardware Enhanced Edges), you can set the edge colors for objects in the
current view in the Enhanced Edges tab of the Format View dialog box.
 To apply the same settings to more than one view quickly and efficiently, you can apply a
view style with the Apply View Style command on the View menu. For more information,
see Apply View Style (on page 241).
 You can also format the styles used within each view using the Format > Style command.
For more information, see Format Style (on page 321).

Common User's Guide 308

 Format Menu

Format a view
1. Click Format > View. For more information on the dialog box, see Format View Dialog Box
(on page 311).

2. Set the Projection Mode to specify the projection style to use in the graphic window. Select
Orthographic to produce a parallel projection. Select Perspective to give the displayed
objects a vanishing point in the graphic window.
3. Select a Render Mode for the physical appearance of three-dimensional objects in the
workspace.
If you select Shaded with Enhanced Edges or Shaded with Hardware Enhanced
Edges as the Render Mode, the Enhanced Edges tab displays so that you can select the
edge color. For more information, see Set enhanced edge color (on page 310).
4. Select the View Axis to display the coordinate triad in the workspace, with respect to the
active coordinate system. By default this option is set to None.
5. Select the Aspects you want applied to the view formatting.
6. To define custom lighting, clear the Use default lights check box, and select the Lights
tab. For more information, see Lights Tab (Format View Dialog Box) (on page 318).
To display the Lights tab, clear the Use default lights box on the Display tab.

Common User's Guide 309

 Format Menu

7. Click OK to apply the changes and dismiss the dialog box, or click Cancel to dismiss
without making the changes.
The Preview area shows graphically the options you select on this dialog box.
When there are 500 or more objects from the selected aspects, Smart 3D displays a
message box similar to the one below. This message box shows the progress of the objects
as they are being loaded.

 To define or modify a view style, you can click Format > Style. This command allows you to
apply the same view settings to more than one view easily. For example, if you wanted to
shade a model, you can save a view style with the shading options you want. Then, you can
apply the view style to more than one view of the model. For more information, see Format
Style (on page 321).
 To change the view style of a window, you can click View > Apply View Style. You can
apply a view style to several views with this command. For more information, see Apply
View Style (on page 241).

Set enhanced edge color

If you select either the hardware or software enhanced edges rendering options as the render
mode, you can set the edge color for objects in the current view.
In previous versions of Smart 3D, the enhanced edge color (hardware and software)
could be changed per system through the CoreDisplaySettings.ini file in the [Product
Folder]/Core/Shared/bin folder. If you have edited this file to set the enhanced edge color, your
settings are now ignored. Follow the steps below to set color options for enhanced edges, and
then save them to your current session file.
1. Click Format > View.
The Format View dialog box appears. For more information on the dialog box, see Format
View Dialog Box (on page 311).
2. On the Display tab, select either the Shaded with Enhanced Edges or Shaded with
Hardware Enhanced Edges as the Render Mode for the physical appearance of
three-dimensional objects in the workspace.
The Shaded with Hardware Enhanced Edges is an alternate display option to
Shaded with Enhanced Edges in that it uses the graphics card to draw the enhanced
edges faster than the traditional enhanced edge mode. However, this option may not be
supported by your graphics driver or graphics card. Smart 3D checks your system
information and does not display this option if it is not supported.

Common User's Guide 310

 Format Menu

3. Click the Enhanced Edges tab. For more information on color options provided in the tab,
see the Enhanced Edges Tab (Format View Dialog Box) (on page 320).
4. Select the color option to use. If you select Use a single Specified Outline Color, click
Edit, and then set the color.
5. Use the Contrast slider to lighten or darken the edges of objects. Move the slider to the left
to make the edges lighter or to the right to make them darker.
The Preview window dynamically displays your settings on example objects. The text
description shows the selected rendering mode and other display options.
The Edit button applies only to the Use a single Specified Outline Color option. If
you click the Edit button and select a color, the Use a single Specified Outline Color
option is automatically selected.
6. Click OK to apply the changes and dismiss the dialog box, or click Cancel to dismiss
without making the changes.
Your settings are saved in the session file.

Common User's Guide 311

 Format Menu

Format View Dialog Box

Accesses the format override settings for a view. You can override any aspect of a view style for
the active window without actually modifying the underlying view style definition. From the
Display tab, you can determine the appearance of the view using the following settings:
Projection Mode
Specifies how close and at what angle objects appear in the workspace. The options
available are as follows:
 Orthographic - Select this option if you want the display to use a parallel projection.

 Perspective - Select this option if you want the display to include a vanishing point.

Common User's Guide 312

 Format Menu

Render Mode
Determines the physical appearance of 3D objects in the workspace. The available options
are described below.
When you select the Smooth Shaded or Shaded with Hardware Enhanced
Edges rendering option in Orthographic mode, you may encounter an issue in which not all
objects are visible. To correct this, you can add the line DisplayEdgeOnGraphics = 1
under the [ViewSettings] section in the product-specific display configuration file located
in [Product Folder]/Core/Shared/bin. The value "1" turns on the option; a "0" value turns the
option off. When enabled, this configuration setting can affect the overall display
performance. Smart 3D delivers three product-specific configuration files:
CoreDisplaySettings.ini (plant), S3D-MarineCoreDisplaySettings.ini (Marine), and
S3D-MHECoreDisplaySettings.ini (Mining). Edit the configuration file for your Intergraph
product. For more information, we recommend that you contact customer support.
 Outline - Displays objects with edges as a single line and the surfaces solid. Edge lines
and faces not within the normal view are hidden. This setting provides a fast and simple
way to review spacing relationships between objects. Because this view involves hidden
lines, the display is less cluttered.

Common User's Guide 313

 Format Menu

 Smooth Shaded - Displays objects in a solid format with smooth shaded surfaces.

 Smooth Shaded with Enhanced Edges - Displays objects the same as the Smooth
Shaded option but with a dark line emphasizing the edges of the objects.

 Smooth Shaded with Hardware Enhanced Edges - Provides a faster solution for
displaying enhanced edges. This option is an alternate display option to Smooth
Shaded with Enhanced Edges in that it uses the software running on your system's
video card.

 The Smooth Shaded with Hardware Enhanced Edges mode does not support the
high quality, anti-alias smooth edge display.

Common User's Guide 314

 Format Menu

 This option may not be supported by your graphics driver and/or graphics card.
Smart 3D checks your system information and does not display this option if it is not
supported. Loading a new graphics driver could make this option available.

View Axis
Indicates the orientation of active view. Following are the positions available:
 None - View axis is not visible in the active view (default option).
 Lower Left - Select this option to position view axis in lower left corner of the active
view.
 Upper Left - Select this option to position view axis in upper left corner of the active
view.
 Lower Right - Select this option to position view axis in lower right corner of the active
view.
 Upper Right - Select this option to position view axis in upper right corner of the active
view.
The view axis can be enabled and positioned independently for each view. Because the
active coordinate system is a global setting, every view has the same active coordinate
system.

If view axis is set to None, then there is no indication shown for Preview and
Description.

Common User's Guide 315

 Format Menu

Selected aspects
Provides a list of available aspects to which you can apply the view formatting. Aspects are
parameters that represent additional information needed for placement, such as safety or
maintenance clearances.
An aspect is a geometric area or space related to an object. The aspect represents
information about the object, such as its physical shape or the space required around the
object. Aspects are associated parameters for an object, representing additional information
needed for placement. Aspects can represent clearances for safety or maintenance,
additional space required during operation, or simple and detailed representations of the
object. You define aspects when you model a part class for the reference data.
 Simple physical - Includes primitive shapes. This aspect creates a less cluttered view
of the object, showing only the body of equipment or a simplified cross-section for
structure, as shown below.

 Detailed physical - Provides a more detailed view of an object. This aspect shows all
the graphical details associated with the equipment or structure. For example, certain
types of equipment may include legs and lugs. For marine structure, this aspect uses all
geometry in the cross-section, as shown below.

 Insulation - Shows an area around a piece of equipment indicating the presence of

insulation. This aspect is also used to display structural fireproofing insulation. For
example, a 4-inch pipe with insulation might look like an 8-inch pipe when this aspect is
used.

Common User's Guide 316

 Format Menu

 Operation - Includes the area or space around the object required for operation of the
object. This space shows in the model but not in drawings. For example, this aspect
leaves enough space around a motor for a person to operate the motor or the overhead
space needed for someone to walk up a stairway.

 Maintenance - Includes the area or space around the object required to perform
maintenance on the object. This space may appear in the model but not in drawings.
For example, this aspect leaves enough space around a motor to perform maintenance
on a motor, including space to remove the motor.

 Reference Geometry - Allows you to construct or add graphical objects that do not
participate in interference checking. For example, a reference geometry object could be
a spherical control or the obstruction volume for a door. For marine structure, this
aspect allows you to control the display of landing curves for design seams, profile
systems, reference curves, and knuckle curves.
 Centerline - Displays objects as a single line representation. For example, this aspect is
useful for when you want to display handrails or structural members as a single-line on
drawings. For structure, the centerline is determined from the cardinal point used to
place the member. That cardinal point is not always the center of the object.

Common User's Guide 317

 Format Menu

 Molded Forms - Displays plate, profile, and beam systems for marine structure.
 Equipment Hole - Displays holes for marine structure created in the Hole Management
task.
 * - Matches all cross-sections.
For piping and equipment objects in plant mode, Insulation, Equipment Hole,
Maintenance, and Operation aspects displaying in the 3D graphic view also display in the
Sketch 2D environment.
Preview
Previews graphically the options you select on this dialog box.
Description
Provides a text description of the specified rendering style.
Use default lights
Specifies whether you want to use the default lights in the model, or use the Lights tab to
define custom lighting. The Lights tab is hidden when this box is checked.
Point Grid Display
Allows you to select or clear the Point Grid display option for styles and views or both.
See Also
Format View (on page 307)
Lights Tab (Format View Dialog Box) (on page 318)
Enhanced Edges Tab (Format View Dialog Box) (on page 320)

Common User's Guide 318

 Format Menu

Lights Tab (Format View Dialog Box)

Provides options for selecting a light source, light color, and light angle for illuminating the
objects in the workspace.
The software provides you with a graphical method for selecting a light source. There are seven
black light bulb icons and one gray light bulb icon arranged in 45-degree increments around a
circle. The center of the circle is the area to which the light is directed. The light bulb icon that
you select determines the angle of the light source. The gray light bulb icon is the 45-degree
default. In the illustration below, the circled bulb represents the selected bulb.
The box beside the icon of the seated user at the monitor allows you to select the plane of
projection for the light by selecting a number from the list. Therefore, if you first select the
45-degree default bulb and then select 60 from the list, the workspace is illuminated at a
45-degree angle on a 60-degree plane.

Ambient
Controls the ambient reflectivity of a material, that is, the degree to which the ambient
lighting in the overall model is reflected by the surface of the material. The total ambient light
value of a surface is calculated by multiplying the ambient reflectivity value by the model
ambient light setting. The ambient reflectivity value can range from 0 to 1, where 0 is no
ambient light reflected and 1 is full ambient reflectivity.
For example, if the overall ambient light setting for the model is set to 1.0, and a material
has an ambient reflectivity value of 0.10, model elements using that material have an
effective ambient lighting value of 10%. A lower ambient light value causes the shadows that
fall on the material to be dark, with a high contrast between the directly and indirectly lit
areas. A higher ambient light value results in a more uniformly lit surface, fainter shadows,
and less overall contrast in lighting. This setting would be desirable, for example, if you
wished to create a bright, uniformly lit ceiling in a room.
You can use the color mixer to select the color of the ambient light.
Light
Provides eight parallel light sources with a predefined angular position around the view
vector. You can select each light and then define its color using the color mixer. The color of
each light bulb represents its true color, which is user-definable.

Common User's Guide 319

 Format Menu

Light angle
Defines the angle of light to the view vector for a selected light. The default value is 30.
Red, Green, Blue
Adjusts the amount of red, green, and blue by typing values in the value box or using the
sliders.
Hue, Saturation, Intensity
Adjusts the amount of color saturation and intensity to apply by typing values in the value
box or using the sliders.
This tab is only shown when the Use default lights check box on the Rendering
tab is cleared in the Format View dialog box.
See Also
Format View Dialog Box (on page 311)
New View Style Dialog Box (on page 336)

Enhanced Edges Tab (Format View Dialog Box)

Sets the color of enhanced edges when you set Render Mode to Shaded with Enhanced
Edges or Shaded with Hardware Enhanced Edges. Otherwise, this tab is not displayed.
Use the Colors of the Objects
Outlines each object using a slightly darker version of its own color. This option makes the
outline less obvious, but slightly enhances the edges of the objects.
Use a single Default Outline Color
Displays all object edges using the default color, which is a white-on-dark background or a
black-on-light background. The outline default is based on the current combined color
intensity of the background color.
Use a single Specified Outline Color
Displays all object edges in the color you select with the Edit command.
Edit Color
Works in conjunction with the Use a single Specified Outline Color option and displays
the Colors dialog box. You can select or create an edge color.
Preview
Reflects the color options you select in this tab.
Description
Provides a text description of the rendering style and edge colors.
See Also
Format View Dialog Box (on page 311)

Common User's Guide 320

 Format Menu

Aspect Refresh in Progress Message Box

Displays when there are 500 or more objects from the selected aspects being loaded. This
message box shows the progress of the objects as they are being loaded.

You can minimize, maximize, or close the message box. The message box automatically closes
when the process is completed.
When you close the message box, you cannot re-open it.

Common User's Guide 321

 Format Menu

Format Style
Creates, modifies, and applies styles to views or selected objects to make them appear the way
you want if you have the permission to do so. You can also define or modify the style override
for currently selected objects.
The software incorporates two types of styles: view styles and surface styles. View styles affect
the way that all objects appear in the active view, such as whether they appear in solid or outline
mode. When you apply a view style, all objects in the active view change. For example, when
you set the rendering mode to outline for a view, all objects in that view are shown in outline
form.
Surface styles impact the appearance of specific objects in your workspace. If you want a
filtered group of objects to appear consistently in certain colors, textures, and other formats in
your workspace, you can define their appearance by applying surface style rules. These rules
apply to all existing objects in your workspace that meet the filter requirements and to any new
objects you place in the workspace that meet the rules filter.
The appearance properties of three-dimensional elements include curves, surfaces, and groups
of surfaces. The properties of a curve include color and line style. The properties of a surface
include specular and diffuse color and rendering mode. The software treats the edges of a
surface as curves, and these curves can have appearance properties that are different from
their parent surface. You can define the appearance properties of curves and surfaces using
surface style rules.

Creating and Managing Styles

Using the Style command on the Format menu, you can create several styles so objects in a
view appear the way you want. You can copy or modify the styles delivered with the software, or
you can set up new ones that conform to your unique requirements. The software stores both
the view style and surface style definitions in the workspace. The software stores the surface
style rules in the Model database.
The software supports two types of styles: Surface and 3D View. A style type contains one or
more styles. You can create styles for each style type.
The software manages the surface style rules on the basis of each Model database in a Site.
You can immediately apply a style rule to your workspace when you create it, or you can save
the rule and apply it later through a surface style rule. Each workspace contains a list of the
surface style rules you can apply to objects in the workspace. A default style rule in the
workspace defines the style for all objects that do not have a style defined by another rule.
The software provides a set of surface styles for your application in the workspace. You can use
these surface styles to tailor the rules as needed to accomplish your functional task.

Common User's Guide 322

 Format Menu

Guidelines for Creating Surface Style Colors and Lighting

You can create new surface style colors and lighting when you create a new or modify an
existing surface style. Use the guidelines below to assist you in creating surface styles. For
more information on creating new surface styles or modifying existing surface styles, see Format
Style (on page 321).
 Set Ambient to the base color of the style.
 Set Diffuse to approximately eighty percent of the Ambient color setting. You can achieve
different shades by adjusting both Ambient and Diffuse color settings.
 Set Emission to approximately fifty percent of the Ambient color setting. This color can be
used for highlighting.
 Set Specular to a non-zero number. Lower values avoid the "white-hot" appearance.

 Each of the color settings in the style responds to the corresponding component in light. It is
very important to balance the style colors with the light settings.
 We recommend that you use lighter colors for the Ambient color setting. Black or dark
Ambient color settings can distort the lighting model with dark areas.
 We recommend that you use Specular settings sparingly. Specular causes "white-hot"
areas on surfaces. The larger the specular areas are, the brighter and stronger the specular
response to light is.

Applying Styles to Views

After you create a view style on the Style dialog box, you can apply it to any view by selecting
the style in the list and clicking Apply. You can also apply a view style to any view by clicking
View > Apply View Style. The view style only applies to the selected view. You can make the
style apply to all views by selecting the Apply All option on the Apply View Style dialog box.
Like view style definitions, the software stores the applied view styles in the workspace.

Applying Styles to Selected Objects

After you create a surface style on the Style dialog box, you can apply it to selected objects in
the workspace by selecting the style in the list and clicking Apply. If you have not selected any
objects, then this command is unavailable.
You can select multiple objects and apply the same style to the entire selection. This action
removes any previous formats and applies the formats of the new style. You can apply styles to
selected objects interactively or with a filter.

Applying Styles to Parts

For routing tasks, you should apply style rules to parts - not to runs or features. During
processing by the software, parts of a run correspond most closely to stock parts. Therefore, for
the filter for the run, you need to select Pipes, instead of Piping Parts for the basis object.
Rules for piping components and instruments require several object types. The basis objects
use two possible classes, Piping Components and Piping Instruments. For the related object
type, the three possible classes are Piping Along Leg, Piping End, and Piping Turn. You
must create a rule for each combination, which results in six separate rules for features.

Common User's Guide 323

 Format Menu

What do you want to do?

 Create a surface style (on page 324)
 Apply a surface style (on page 325)
 Modify a surface style (on page 325)
 Delete a surface style (on page 325)
 Apply a permission group to styles (on page 326)
 Create a 3D view style (on page 326)
 Apply a 3D view style (on page 327)
 Modify a view style (on page 327)
 Delete a view style (on page 327)

Create a surface style

1. Click Format > Style.
2. Click New on the Surface tab.
3. Type a name for the style in the Name box on the General tab of the New Style dialog box.
4. Complete one of the following actions: (1) Select a current style from the Base on list on
which to base the new style; or (2) Select (no style) from the Base on list to make the new
style unique.
5. Select a render mode from the Render mode list
6. On the Edges tab, select the edge color and line pattern, width, and height.
7. On the Faces tab, select the face color, shininess, and opacity.
8. Click Apply.
To see how your style affects the appearance of objects, select one or more of the
objects on the Preview object list.

Common User's Guide 324

 Format Menu

Apply a surface style

1. Select one or more objects to which you want to apply a surface style.
2. Click Format > Style.
3. Select a style from the Styles list on the Surface tab.
4. Click Apply to change the objects you selected.

 You can apply a surface style to multiple objects at once by using the Tools > Select by
Filter command.
 If you do not select an object in the workspace, the Apply button on the Modify Style dialog
box is not available.
 If you select several objects from different style types, the Styles list is blank.
 To add additional styles to your workspace, click Format > Style, and then click New.

Modify a surface style

1. Click Format > Style.
2. Select the style to modify from the Styles list on the Surface tab.
3. Click Modify.
4. If you want to rename the style, type a name for the style in the Name box on the General
tab of the Modify Style dialog box.
5. Change the style properties on the Edges and Faces tabs as needed.
6. Click Apply.

 You can rename styles only if you have the appropriate permissions. See your system
administrator or site manager to grant the appropriate permissions for renaming styles.
 You can see how the style changes affect the appearance of an object by checking the
picture under Preview.

Delete a surface style

1. Click Format > Style.
2. Select the style to delete from the Styles list on the Surface tab.
3. Click Delete.
The surface style applies to an object even after you delete the style. For example, if
you make a boiler surface copper and then delete copper, the boiler still appears copper even
though you deleted that style from the list.

Common User's Guide 325

 Format Menu

Apply a permission group to styles

1. Click Select.
2. Click Format > Style.
3. Select a permission group in the Permission Group for Styles drop-down menu.
4. Click Apply.

 Style permissions are controlled by the model administrator by default.

 This permission group setting applies to all styles in the Styles list.
 Users without permissions can apply surface styles, but cannot modify or create styles.

Create a 3D view style

1. Click Format > Style.
2. On the Style dialog box, click 3D View.
3. Click New.
4. On the New View Style dialog box, type a name for the new style in the Name box.
5. Complete one of the following actions: (1) Select a style in the Based On list to base the
new style on an existing style; or (2) Select (no style) to create a totally new style that is not
based on another style.
6. On the Rendering tab, select the projection, render mode, and aspects that you want
rendered.
7. On the Lights tab, specify custom lighting, if necessary.
To display the Lights tab, clear the Use default lights box on the Rendering tab.
8. Click Apply.

 You can see how the style affects the way an object looks by checking the picture under
Preview.
 If you do not want any of the perspective views listed in the Perspective box on the
Rendering tab, you can select None (Orthogonal) in the Perspective box.
 After you create a new view style, you can apply the style to the active view. Click the view
style name in the list, and then click Apply.

Common User's Guide 326

 Format Menu

Apply a 3D view style

1. Select the view to which you want to apply the style.
2. Click Format > Style.
3. Click the 3D View tab.
4. Select the style to apply from the Styles list.
5. Click Apply.
You can also apply the view style to multiple views with the View > Apply View Style
command. Click Apply All on the Apply View Style dialog box.

Modify a view style

1. Click Format > Style.
2. Click the 3D View tab.
3. Select the view style to modify from the Styles list.
4. Click Modify.
5. If you want to rename the view style, type a name for the style on the Name tab of the
Modify View Style dialog box.
6. Change other view style settings on the Name, Rendering, and Lights tabs as needed.
To display the Lights tab, clear the Use default lights box on the General tab.
7. Click Apply.

 The software saves view styles in the session file.

 You can see how the view style changes affect the appearance of objects by checking the
picture under Preview.
 If you do not want any of the projection views listed in the Projection mode box on the
Rendering tab, you can select None (Orthogonal) in the Perspective box.

Delete a view style

1. Click Format > Style.
2. Click the 3D View tab.
3. Select the style to delete from the Styles list.
4. Click Delete.
A view style remains applied even after you remove the style from the Styles list.

Common User's Guide 327

 Format Menu

Style Dialog Box

Sets options for manipulating surface and 3D view styles.

Topics
Surface Tab (Style Dialog Box)..................................................... 328
3D View Tab (Style Dialog Box) .................................................... 329

Surface Tab (Style Dialog Box)

Styles
Lists all the currently available surface styles.
List
Controls the contents of the list in the Styles box. You can select either All Styles or Styles
Used in Workspace in the list box.
Permission Group for Styles
Controls write privileges for styles. You can select a permission group from the list to
override the default model administrator permissions.
Description
Shows a text description of the selected style.
Apply
Applies the selected style to the active view.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without saving changes or applying them to the active view.
New
Displays the New Style dialog box.
Modify
Displays the Modify Style dialog box.
Delete
Removes the selected style for the list and the database. This option is disabled for default
surface styles to prevent them from being deleted.
For more information on creating a new style or modifying an existing style.
See Also
New/Modify Style Dialog Box (on page 329)
Style Dialog Box (on page 328)

Common User's Guide 328

 Format Menu

3D View Tab (Style Dialog Box)

Styles
Lists all the currently available view styles.
Description
Shows a text description of the selected 3D view style.
Apply
Applies the selected style to the active view.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without saving changes or applying them to the active view.
New
Displays the New View Style dialog box.
Modify
Displays the Modify View Style dialog box.
Delete
Removes the selected style from the list and the database. You cannot delete the default
style.
For more information on creating a new 3D view style or modifying an existing
style, see New View Style Dialog Box (on page 336).
See Also
New/Modify Style Dialog Box (on page 329)
Style Dialog Box (on page 328)

New/Modify Style Dialog Box

Sets options for manipulating the styles and appearance of the surfaces and edges of objects
and how they look in the workspace. This dialog box appears when you click New or Modify on
the Surface tab of the Style dialog box.

Topics
General Tab (New/Modify Style Dialog Box)................................. 330
Edges Tab (New/Modify Style Dialog Box) ................................... 331
Faces Tab (New/Modify Style Dialog Box).................................... 333

Common User's Guide 329

 Format Menu

General Tab (New/Modify Style Dialog Box)

Sets options for naming a new surface style, basing the new style on a current style and
determining the rendering mode for displaying objects in the workspace.
Name
Specifies a unique name for the new surface style.
Base on
Lists all the current styles on which you can base a new style. If you do not want to base the
new style on a current style, you can select the no style option.
Render Mode
Determines the physical appearance of 3D objects in the workspace. The options available
are as follows:
 View Default - Use the render mode assigned to the view.
 Outline - Displays objects with edges as a single line and the surfaces solid. Edge lines
and faces not within the normal view are hidden.

The Preview options are defined as follows:

Preview render mode
Provides a view of a 3D object in each available render mode.
Preview object
Specifies an object type to display in the Preview area: Sphere, Cube, or Teapot. When
you select one of the objects, the Preview area shows how your selected rendering mode
affects that object type.
Preview
Displays the selected object type and render mode in graphic form for your preview.

Common User's Guide 330

 Format Menu

Description
Provides a text description of the specified style.
See Also
New/Modify Style Dialog Box (on page 329)
Style Dialog Box (on page 328)

Edges Tab (New/Modify Style Dialog Box)

Defines how you see curved elements in three dimensions. Curved elements can be standalone
curves or the edges of surfaces. Other complex elements can contain both curves and surfaces.
The edges style does not apply to the display of profile and layout elements.
Color
Previews selected edge colors.
Copy From Diffuse Color
Defines the color either by copying the color from the Diffuse color on the Surfaces tab, or
by defining it using the Red, green, blue or Hue, saturation, intensity color bars. In
addition to defining the color of 3D curves, this property allows the color of a surface to differ
from the color of its boundary curves.
Width
Adjusts the width of the curve and displays it in the Preview area. This value is not an exact
dimension.
Pattern
Provides a list of predefined line patterns you can apply to a curve. Additionally, you can
define your own pattern using the line pattern control, which is the area below the Pattern
and Length boxes. Click in the boxes to turn the pattern on or off. When you define your
own line pattern, the Length value defines a scaling of this pattern as applied to curves.
Length
Adjusts the line pattern and displays it in the Preview area.
Red, green, blue
Adjusts the amount of red, green, and blue. You can type a value in the box or use the
sliders.
Hue, saturation, intensity
Adjusts the amount of color saturation and intensity. You can type a value in the box or use
the sliders. The color and hue values must be between 0 and 1.

Common User's Guide 331

 Format Menu

The Preview options are defined as follows:

Preview render mode
Shows the physical appearance of 3D objects in the workspace. The options available are
as follows:
 Outline - Displays objects with edges as a single line and the surfaces solid. Edge lines
and faces not within the normal view are hidden. This setting provides a fast and simple
way to review spacing relationships between objects. Because this view involves hidden
lines, the display is less cluttered.

 Smooth Shaded - Displays objects in a solid format with smooth shaded surfaces.

Common User's Guide 332

 Format Menu

 Shaded with Enhanced Edges - Displays objects the same as the Smooth Shaded
option but with a dark line emphasizing the edges of the objects.

Faces Tab (New/Modify Style Dialog Box)

Defines the properties of rendered surfaces. You can control different components of color as
defined by reflectance, emissive, and attenuation properties of the surface of an object.
Diffuse
Displays the amount of light a surface reflects equally in all directions. Unlike ambient light,
diffuse light also depends on the direction of the light source. When a point on a surface is
perpendicular to a light source, the surface reflects the maximum amount of light. When a
point on a surface is parallel to a light source, the surface reflects no color based upon the
light. Diffuse color is the color of diffuse light reflection from a light source.
Specular
Displays the specular reflection. Unlike diffuse light reflection, specular reflection fully
depends on the direction of the light source. Additionally, specular reflection depends upon
surface finish or texture. Specular color is the color of specular reflection for a light source.
Ambient
Displays ambient light for the surface appearance. In some cases, a point on a surface is
not illuminated by any light source. You can think of ambient light as a light source that
illuminates all points on all surfaces equally. Therefore, ambient light defines a minimum
illumination for all surfaces. The ambient color is the diffuse light reflected from the light
source.
Emission
Displays the emission light for the surface appearance. Emission originates from the object
surfaces, rather than reflecting off the surface from a light source. When you define an
emission color, a surface appears to glow.
For guidelines for creating colors and lighting, see Format Style (on page 321).

Common User's Guide 333

 Format Menu

Copy From Edges Color

Defines the color either by copying the color from the Diffuse color on the Surfaces tab or
by defining it using either the Red, green, blue or Hue, saturation, intensity color bars. In
addition to defining the color of 3D curves, this property allows the color of a surface to differ
from the color of its boundary curves.
Red, green, blue
Adjusts the amount of red, green, and blue. You can type a value in the box or use the
sliders.
Hue, saturation, intensity
Adjusts the amount of color saturation and intensity. You can type a value in the box or use
the sliders. The color and hue values must be between 0 and 1.
Shininess
Controls the amount of specular reflection from a light source. If the shininess value is high,
the surface appears as a polished piece of metal or an object covered with high-gloss paint.
If the shininess value is low, the object appears as a piece of paper or an object covered
with flat paint.
Opacity
Controls the degree to which a surface is visible behind an obscuring surface. If a surface
has high opacity and high shininess, it has the appearance of glass. If a surface is less
shiny, it looks more like plastic.

Common User's Guide 334

 Format Menu

The Preview options are defined as follows:

Preview render mode
Determines the physical appearance of 3D objects in the workspace. The options available
are as follows:
 Outline - Displays objects with edges as a single line and the surfaces solid. Edge lines
and faces not within the normal view are hidden. This setting provides a fast and simple
way to review spacing relationships between objects. Because this view involves hidden
lines, the display is less cluttered.

 Smooth Shaded - Displays objects in a solid format with smooth shaded surfaces.

Common User's Guide 335

 Format Menu

 Shaded with Enhanced Edges - Displays objects the same as the Smooth Shaded
option but with a dark line emphasizing the edges of the objects.

New View Style Dialog Box

Creates a new three-dimensional view style in which you can choose the rendering mode and
perspective for viewing objects in the workspace. You access this dialog box by clicking New on
the 3D View tab of the Style dialog box.

Topics
Name Tab (New View Style Dialog Box) ...................................... 336
Rendering Tab (New View Style Dialog Box)................................ 337

Name Tab (New View Style Dialog Box)

Sets options for selecting a new view style name based on a predefined view style or creating a
new view style.
Name
Displays the name for the new view style.
Based On
Lists all the currently predefined view styles on which you can base a new view style. If you
do not want to base the new view style on another style, you can select the (no style) option
to create a new style.
Preview
Previews graphically the options you select on this dialog box.
Description
Provides a text description of the view style specified.

Common User's Guide 336

 Format Menu

Rendering Tab (New View Style Dialog Box)

Sets options for applying the three-dimensional perspective, render mode, and depth fading to
one or more of the listed aspects. The Preview window graphically displays your selections, and
the Description box lists the selections in a textual format.
Projection Mode
Specifies how close and at what angle objects appear in the workspace. The options
available are as follows:
 Orthographic - Select this option if you want the display to use a parallel projection.
 Perspective - Select this option if you want the display to include a vanishing point.
Render Mode
Provides options for determining the physical appearance of three-dimensional objects in
the workspace.
 Outline - Displays objects with edges that appear as a single line and the surfaces
appear solid. Edge lines and faces that are not within normal view are hidden. This
setting provides a fast and simple way to review spacing relationships between objects.
Because this view involves hidden lines, the display is less cluttered.

Common User's Guide 337

 Format Menu

 Smooth Shaded - Displays objects in a solid format with smooth shaded surfaces.

 Shaded with Enhanced Edges - Displays objects the same as the Smooth Shaded
option but with a dark line emphasizing the edges of the objects.
 Shaded with Hardware Enhanced Edges - Provides a faster solution for displaying
enhanced edges. This option is an alternate display option to Shaded with Enhanced
Edges in that it uses the software running on your system's video card.
This option may not be supported by your graphics driver and/or graphics
card. Smart 3D checks your system information and does not display this option if it is
not supported. Loading a new graphics driver could make this option available.

Common User's Guide 338

 Format Menu

Surface Style Rules

Manages surface style rules. You can create and modify rules, as well as move rules from the
style rule library to your workspace.
Surface style rules are based on filters. When you create or modify rules, you specify a filter on
which to base the rule. For more information on filters, see Select by Filter (on page 354).
If you want objects to appear consistently in certain colors, textures, and other formats in your
workspace, you can define their appearance by applying surface style rules. These rules apply
to all existing objects in your workspace that meet the rule filter. The rules also apply to any new
objects you place in the workspace that meet the filter.
The software evaluates the style rules when you do any of the following:
 Place a new object in the workspace.
 Edit an existing object.
 Click File > Refresh Workspace.
 Open a new workspace.
 Select a rule in the Workspace list, and then click Apply on the Surface Style Rules dialog
box.
A named surface style rule consists of a name, a filter, and a surface style to apply to the
objects returned by the filter. You can create or modify these surface styles by clicking Format >
Style. By default, surface style rules apply to all selected aspects of objects.
The software stores the definition of surface style rules in the Model database. When you create
a surface style rule, the rule is placed in the active permission group. The set of surface style
rules you want to apply to a workspace is stored in the workspace.
Because the software manages surface style rule definitions on a site basis in the database, you
may not have permission to modify some rules. You can create and apply a style rule to the
workspace immediately, or you can create the style rule and apply it later. Each workspace
contains a list of the surface style rules that apply to objects in that workspace. A default style
rule exists in the workspace. It defines the style for all objects whose style was not set by
another rule.
You can tailor the set of style rules selected for application in the workspace to suit your specific
task requirements by using a session template. For example, one template can contain a style
rule set that defines the physical appearance of certain objects. Another template can use a
style rule set that assigns symbology by system. For example, you could assign a smooth
copper texture to all hot water pipes.

Common User's Guide 339

 Format Menu

The software applies surface style rules to parts only, not to features or runs. This concept is
important to remember when working in routing tasks.

What do you want to do?

 Create a surface style rule (on page 340)
 Add a surface style rule to the workspace (on page 340)
 Copy a surface style rule from one model to another (on page 341)
 Remove a surface style rule from the workspace (on page 341)
 Remove a surface style rule from the database (on page 342)
 Modify a surface style rule (on page 342)

Create a surface style rule

1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
2. Click New.
3. Type a name for the new surface style rule in the Rule name box.
4. Select a filter in the Filter list, or click More to create a new filter if necessary.
5. Create a New Filter (on page 360)
6. Choose a style to apply in the Style applied list.
7. Select all the aspects that you want the filter to apply to by clicking in the Select all aspects
to which the style will be applied list.

 You can add new surface styles to apply through rules on the Format > Style dialog box.
 After creating a new surface style rule, you can apply it to the workspace by selecting a rule
in the Style rule library box and clicking Add to add the rule to the Workspace box.
 Because the software processes the rules in descending order, you should list the most
specific rules at the top of the list. Click Move Up and Move Down to change the order of
the rules in the Workspace list.

Common User's Guide 340

 Format Menu

Add a surface style rule to the workspace

1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
2. Select one or more rules to add from the Style rules library list.
3. Click Add.

 You can also add a new rule or modify an existing one from the Surface Style Rules dialog
box.
 The software stores the list of applied surface style rules in the workspace.
 Because the software processes the rules in descending order, you should list the most
specific rules at the top of the list. Click Move Up or Move Down to change the order of the
rules in the Workspace list.

Copy a surface style rule from one model to another

1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
2. On the Surface Style Rules dialog box, select one or more rules to copy from the
Workspace list.
3. Click Copy.
4. Open the model into which you want to copy the rule.
5. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
6. Click Paste.

 If the model into which you paste the rule already contains a rule by the same name, the
software adds "Copy of" to the rule name to avoid duplicating names.
 The software removes any filter data specific to the object identifier when you copy a
surface style rule into another model. The software converts the filter into a parameterized
filter that prompts you for input for any areas that were removed.
 When you copy a style rule, the software renames its associated copied filter with the name
of the surface style rule and prefixes the style rule name with "Copy of".

Remove a surface style rule from the workspace

1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
2. Select one or more rules to remove from the Workspace list.
3. Click Remove.
Removing a rule from the workspace does not delete the rule from the database.
Removing it only deletes the rule from the list of rules that the software evaluates in this
workspace.

Common User's Guide 341

 Format Menu

Remove a surface style rule from the database

1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
2. On the Surface Style Rules dialog box, select one or more rules to remove from the Style
rule library list.
3. Click Remove.
Removing a rule from the database deletes it from the workspace also.

Modify a surface style rule

1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
2. Select a style rule in the Style rules library list.
3. Click Modify.
4. If you want to change the rule name, type a new name in the Rule name box on the
Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box.
5. Change other properties of the rule, such as the filter or the applied surface style.
If you want a surface style applied to the workspace, select the rule in the Style rule
library box, and click Add to add it to the Workspace box.

Surface Style Rules Dialog Box

Provides options to do the following:
 Select an existing surface style rule from the library and add it to the workspace.
 Modify an existing surface style rule in the library and add it to the workspace.
 Create a new surface style rule and add it to the library and the workspace.
 Delete a surface style rule from the library or the workspace.
 Rearrange the style rules in the workspace box of the Surface Style Rules dialog box by
using the Move Up and Move Down commands.
Style rule library
Lists all the current surface style rules in the Site database.
Selected rules
Lists all the names for the surface style rules currently assigned to the workspace.
Add
Adds the selected surface style rule to the workspace.
Remove
Removes a selected surface style rule from the workspace. To remove a surface style from
the workspace, you select the style in the Workspace list, and then click Remove.
Move Up
Moves the selected style rule up one step in the Workspace list.

Common User's Guide 342

 Format Menu

Move Down
Moves the selected style rule down one step in the Workspace list.
New
Activates the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box on which you can create a new
surface style rule and add it to the database. This button is available only if you have write
permission to the surface style rules.
Modify
Activates the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box on which you can modify an
existing surface style rule and add it to the database.
Copy
Creates a copy of the selected rule on the Clipboard. You use Copy to create a copy of a
surface style rule in the Model database so you can modify the rule rather than create a new
one.
If you try to copy a style rule associated with a deleted filter, the style cannot be
copied. A message box displays.
Paste
Pastes the copied rule from the Clipboard so it can be modified.
Delete
Removes the selected Surface Style Rule from the database.
Apply
Applies changes in surface style rules to the workspace.
Double-clicking a surface style rule also activates the Surface Style Rule
Properties dialog box on which you can create or modify a surface style rule if you have
permission.
See Also
Add a Surface Style Rule to the Workspace (on page 340)
Copy a Surface Style Rule from One Model to Another (on page 341)
Create a Surface Style Rule (on page 340)
Modify a Surface Style Rule (on page 342)
Remove a Surface Style Rule from the Database (on page 342)
Remove a Surface Style Rule from the Workspace (on page 341)

Common User's Guide 343

 Format Menu

Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box

Selects a filter and a surface style to be used for the objects identified by the filter. This dialog
box appears when you click New or Modify or double-click a surface style rule on the Surface
Style Rules dialog box. You can also use this dialog box to rename a rule after you use the
Copy and Paste capabilities on the Surface Style Rules dialog box. Paste creates a rule named
Copy of Rulename.

Topics
Surface Style Rule Properties Tab (Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog
Box) .............................................................................................. 344
Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 345

Surface Style Rule Properties Tab (Surface Style Rule

Properties Dialog Box)
Creates or modifies a surface style rule. Surface style rules are based on filters. When you
create new rules or modify rules, you specify a filter on which to base the rule. For more
information on filters, see Select by Filter (on page 354).
Rule name
Specifies the name of the surface style rule.
Filter
Identifies the filter used within the style rule. The filters available are the ones defined for the
current database. The list in the drop-down includes the last 10 filters selected. Selecting
Create New Filter in the drop-down list displays the New Filter Properties dialog box so
you can define a new filter for the style rule. Selecting More in the drop-down displays the
Select Filter dialog box. For more information on selecting a filter, see Select Filter Dialog
Box (on page 369). The Properties button for this field displays the Property dialog for the
selected filter. For more information on defining a new filter or reviewing properties, see
Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 371).
We recommend that you use simple, asking, and compound filters with style rules.
The use of SQL filters could result in significant performance degradation and should be
avoided wherever possible. Unlike the other types of filters, the software runs the query
associated with an SQL filter directly on the database. For each object passed to the SQL
filter, the software checks to see if any of the objects was returned by the query. However,
there are times that modification of the object changes whether or not the object passes the
SQL filter. For example, a pipeline might pass the SQL filter before it is assigned to a
different system. After the system assignment changes, a different style rule is applied.
Hence, some SQL filters may not always afford the gate-keeping behavior one would expect
and could, in fact, result in decreased efficiency in assessing the project data model.
Style applied
Specifies the surface style to be used for the objects identified by the selected filter. The list
in the drop-down includes all surface styles available for the current database. The
Properties button displays the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box so you can edit
the style as needed. For more information, see New/Modify Style Dialog Box (on page 329)

Common User's Guide 344

 Format Menu

Select all aspects to which the style will be applied

Shows a checkbox list of all aspects defined by the model reference data. You can check
multiple aspects. Shift-select toggles the checkbox settings for multiple rows. By default, all
aspects are selected.

 An aspect is a geometric area or space related to an object. The aspect represents

information about the object, such as its physical shape or the space required around the
object. Aspects are associated parameters for an object, representing additional information
needed for placement. Aspects can represent clearances for safety or maintenance,
additional space required during operation, or simple and detailed representations of the
object. You define aspects when you model a part class for the reference data.
 The Simple Physical aspect includes primitive shapes. The space could be a field junction
box displayed in both the model and in drawings. When you publish 3D Model Data
documents, this is the default aspect used if no other aspects are selected for the document
properties.
 The Detailed Physical aspect provides a more detailed view of equipment in the model. For
example, certain types of equipment may include legs and lugs. You select the Simple
Physical aspect to create a less cluttered view of the object, showing only the body of the
equipment. However, the Detailed Physical aspect shows all the graphical details
associated with the equipment.
 The Insulation aspect shows an area around a piece of equipment indicating insulation is
present. For example, a 4-inch pipe with insulation might look like an 8-inch pipe when the
Insulation aspect is selected.
 The Operation aspect includes the area or space around the object required for operation
of the object. This space shows in the model but not in drawings. The Operation aspect
leaves enough space around a motor for a person to operate the motor.
 The Maintenance aspect includes the area or space around the object required to perform
maintenance on the object. This space may appear in the model but not in drawings. The
Maintenance aspect leaves enough space around a motor to perform maintenance on the
motor, including space to remove the motor, if necessary.
 The Reference Geometry aspect allows you to construct or add graphical objects that do
not participate in interference checking. For example, a reference geometry object could be
the obstruction volume for a door on a field junction box. Another example is a spherical
control point.
See Also
Modify a Surface Style Rule (on page 342)
Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box (on page 343)

Common User's Guide 345

 Format Menu

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access
level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Common User's Guide 346

SECTION 9

Tools Menu
The Tools menu provides commands for setting software options, showing and hiding objects,
and displaying objects by filter. It also provides access to PinPoint and measure-related tools.
You can add objects to the SmartSketch list, run reports, check interferences, and access
custom commands. Some of the commands on this menu may change depending on the active
task.

In This Section
Select............................................................................................ 347
Select by Filter .............................................................................. 354
Show ............................................................................................. 386
Hide .............................................................................................. 386
Show All ........................................................................................ 388
PinPoint ........................................................................................ 389
SmartSketch Options .................................................................... 401
Add to SmartSketch List ............................................................... 403
Get Point ....................................................................................... 408
Point Along ................................................................................... 412
Measure ........................................................................................ 415
Checking Interferences ................................................................. 426
Run Report ................................................................................... 434
Drawing Console .......................................................................... 441
Snapshot View .............................................................................. 444
Custom Commands ...................................................................... 450
Utility ............................................................................................. 462
Options ......................................................................................... 494
Weight & CG ................................................................................. 514

Common User's Guide 347

 Tools Menu

Select
Locates one or more objects to apply a specific command. When you choose the Select
command, the ribbon displays the default filter for the task and the Inside and
Inside/Overlapping fence commands. The fence commands allow you to select groups of
objects by drawing a dashed rectangle around them. The selectable objects are based on your
existing permissions, as well as the available locate filters in that task. After you select an object
or group of objects, the software replaces the selection ribbon with an edit ribbon for the select
set.

Locate Filter
Specifies a filter for the selection of specific object types. Filters allow you to select specific
types of objects, or all objects. Filter options are unique for each task. Unlike the
user-defined filters that you create through the Define Workspace command, the locate
filter options are defined by the software.

Inside
Specifies that all objects located entirely inside the fence be selected. This setting is the
default for the Select command.

Inside/Overlapping
Specifies that all objects located entirely inside the fence and those outside the fence but
touching the fence at some point are selected.

Cancelling Multi-Step Commands

You can use the Select command to cancel another command. For example, if you are involved
in a multiple step operation such as routing a pipe, you can click the Select command to quit the
Route Pipe command. Optionally, you can also press ESC or right-click to return to the Select
command.

Using Filters
When you click the Select command, the Locate Filter box displays the active filter for your
task, and each task provides a unique list of available filter options. You can use these filters to:
 Control the selection of compound (or owner) objects versus selection of the constituent
components. For example, in the Piping task, you have the option to locate the run, the
parts, or the features of the run.
 Filter on any object in the current task.
You can apply locate filters to the highlighting and selection in both the graphic and Workspace
Explorer views. You can also use the Edit > Locate Filter command to change the locate filter
when you are in the middle of a command, without canceling the command.

Common User's Guide 348

 Tools Menu

Selecting Graphically
Regardless of the filter you use, you can select objects using the Fence Inside Only or
Fence Inside Overlap commands, or you can add objects to or remove objects from the
select set by pressing CTRL or SHIFT and then selecting the object.
If you are in the SmartStep of a command, you do not need to press CTRL or SHIFT
to multi-select.
When you pass the cursor over objects in the workspace, they highlight in a predefined color.
When you select an object, the color changes to show that the object has been selected. You
can change the colors used to distinguish highlighted and selected objects on the Colors tab of
the Tools > Options dialog box.
After you select one or more objects, the Select ribbon is replaced by another ribbon. If you are
in the appropriate task to edit the selected objects, a ribbon specific to that task displays.
Otherwise, the new ribbon contains only a Name box and a System list. The specific edit ribbon
that appears for each object varies from one task to another. In other words, the ribbon that
appears when you select a segment of pipe in the Piping task contains different lists and boxes
than when you select a member in the Structure task.

 If you select an object that has been deleted from the database or is not in the database, the
software displays a message that the object cannot be found. Click File > Refresh
Workspace to update the session.
 In addition to graphical selection, you can also select objects by clicking their names in the
Workspace Explorer, or use Tools > Select by Filter to create a filter to select objects.
 You can select and delete an object from any task, as long as you have the necessary
security permissions to make that change.

Using QuickPick
When the cursor moves over an area that contains multiple objects, the cursor changes to the
QuickPick icon .

Common User's Guide 349

 Tools Menu

Single mouse click when is displayed to activate QuickPick and help you select a specific
object. QuickPick displays as a list box near your cursor location.

The QuickPick list displays the located model objects. Scroll your mouse wheel, or use the
keyboard arrow keys, to highlight the corresponding object in the graphic view. If the software
locates any nested geometric elements, it displays the icon. Click your mouse wheel to display
the secondary list of the nested geometric elements.

Common User's Guide 350

 Tools Menu

Click your mouse wheel again to select the highlighted item from the QuickPick list.

 Press ESC or move your cursor away from the list to exit QuickPick without making a
selection.
 You can specify the number of seconds the pointer must rest on an object before the
QuickPick feature is available. For more information, see Set the activation time for
QuickPick (on page 499).

What do you want to do?

 Select objects by locate filter for a work session (on page 351)
 Select objects by fence for a work session (on page 351)
 Select objects using QuickPick (on page 352)

Select objects by locate filter for a work session

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select a filter from the Locate Filter list to locate only the indicated types of objects. The
options that appear in this list are specific to the active task and apply to both the graphic
and Workspace Explorer views.

3. Pass the cursor over the object that you want to select until the object highlights.
4. Click the highlighted object to accept it.
5. Click the command that you want to apply to the selected object.

 Some commands you can apply include: Hide - to exclude the objects in the active view;
Format > Style - to change the surface style of the objects; Format > View - to change the
way the objects appear; Delete - to delete all the selected objects.
 When you are working in a specific task, you can select objects in other disciplines by
changing the locate filter to All. For example, if you are working in the Equipment task, you
can set the filter to All, and then select and modify a structural member.

Select objects by fence for a work session

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select a filter from the Locate Filter list to locate only the indicated types of objects. The
options available from this list are specific to the active task and apply to both the graphic
and Workspace Explorer views.

Common User's Guide 351

 Tools Menu

3. Complete one of the following actions:

 Click the Inside Fence command on the Select command ribbon to select all
objects entirely inside the fence.
 Click the Overlapping Fence command to select all objects entirely inside the
fence and those objects outside but touching the fence at some point.
4. Place a fence around the objects you want to select by dragging the dashed fence lines
around the objects and then releasing.

5. Click the command you want to apply to the selected objects.

 Typical commands you can apply include: Hide - to exclude the objects in the active view;
Format > Style - to change the surface style of the objects; Format > View - to change the
way the objects are displayed; Delete - to delete all the selected objects.
 When you are working in a specific task, you can select objects in other disciplines by
changing the locate filter to All. For example, if you are working in the Equipment task, you
can set the filter to All and then select and modify a structural member.

Common User's Guide 352

 Tools Menu

Select objects using QuickPick

1. When the cursor changes to while you are working in the model, click the mouse to
enable the QuickPick feature.
The software displays the QuickPick list, which shows the located model objects.

2. Using the mouse scroll wheel, the keyboard arrow keys, or the mouse, move through the list
to highlight the item in the graphic view.

Common User's Guide 353

 Tools Menu

3. Click a list item to select it.

The model object becomes active in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer. The
software closes the QuickPick list.

 Press ESC or move your cursor away from the list to exit QuickPick without making a
selection.
 Use the gray border to drag the list to another location in the graphic view.

Common User's Guide 354

 Tools Menu

Select by Filter
Selects objects from the workspace using a filter. The filter queries objects in the workspace and
select these to retrieve the specified objects and displays them in the workspace. You define the
search criteria for the filter by selecting specific tabs on the Filter Properties dialog box. After
the software retrieves the objects, you can apply commands such as Copy, Paste, Delete, and
Apply View Style to the entire group.
The Select Filter dialog box allows you to create, edit, delete, and manage different types of
filters in the software. This dialog box appears when you are selecting objects by filter, defining
a workspace, and creating or editing surface style rules. These actions are different, but all of
them use filters as part of their workflow.

Using Filters
A filter is a set of search criteria that helps to select or retrieve data in the model. You use filters
in many ways:
 Define the objects you want to include in your workspace. For more information, see Define
Workspace (on page 62).
 Select or locate objects based on specific criteria. For more information, see Select by Filter
(on page 354). For example, you can use a filter to locate all hot water tanks in the model,
and then apply a property change to all the tanks.
 Apply surface style rules to a group of objects. For more information, see Surface Style
Rules (on page 338).
 Create drawings and reports. For more information, see the Drawings and Reports Help.
You can create a new filter by selecting Create New Filter in the Filter box on the Define
Workspace dialog box as you begin a new session. When at least one filter is defined for the
session, you can create a new filter using the Tools > Select by Filter command.
Permission groups and user access levels in the software control the operations you can do with
filters. For example, creating, editing, and deleting filters are subject to access control. To create
filters, you must have Write permissions in the applicable permission group. To view filters, you
must have a minimum of Read permission.
When filters are created, they belong by default to the permission group associated with their
folder. However, you can later modify the filters to belong to a permission group other than the
permission group of the parent folder.

Common User's Guide 355

 Tools Menu

Filter Types
Filters are classified into different groups based on the criteria described in the following table.
Organizing Filters - Filters can be grouped into sub folders under three main delivered Filter
Folders.

Organizing Filters Description

Catalog Filters Shared outside the model by multiple models that use the same
catalog. The filter definition must be model independent, and cannot
contain model specific data such as System, Assembly, Named
Space, Permission Group, Work Breakdown Structure, and so
on.
In general, you can reuse catalog filters with Drawing View Styles
and Surface Style Rules commands, and you can also use them
with the Define Workspace and Select by Filter commands. These
filters are generic, and contain only metadata criteria such as object
types and properties, and are shared more extensively than model
filters.

Model Filters Shared by all users within the model, and are saved in the model
database. The filter definition can contain any model specific data.
Most users have read-only permissions to model filters.

My Filters (Personal Filters) A subset of model filters available only to the user who created the
filter within the model. The filter definition can contain model specific
data, and you can modify the definition of any filters you create.
Because these are private filters, you cannot use them with the
Drawing View Styles and Surface View Styles commands. However,
you can use them with the Define Workspace and Select by Filter
commands. My Filters contains the filters you create or modify.
Personal filters are also saved in the model database.

In a Global Workshare configuration, users in different domains who have the same
login could encounter problems with write access in My Filters. For example, this situation can
occur with hostdomain\JohnSmith at the host and satellitedomain\JohnSmith at the satellite. In
this scenario, the user with write access (hostdomain\JohnSmith) should create a child folder
under the original My Filters folder and transfer that child folder to a permission group owned by
the satellite location where satellitedomain\JohnSmith has write access. This operation allows
the satellitedomain\JohnSmith user in the satellite location to create filters and folders within that
child folder.

Common User's Guide 356

 Tools Menu

Filters Composition - Filters are composed of simple and compound filters.

Filters Composition Description

Simple Filters Prompts for specific values or properties. The properties you select
determine the extent of your search.
Simple filters define all the queries in one form. The default
extension and restriction is sufficient to complete the search.

Compound Filters Combines entire simple filters using logical conditions, such as
AND, OR, or NOT to define complex queries. You can also
combine any catalog filter with any predefined asking model filter
and so on.
You create compound filters in My Filters or Model Filters using
constituent filters folders from Catalog Filters, Model Filters, or My
Filters. The Compound Filters dialog box has Union, Intersection,
and Negation buttons you can use to build statements.

Compounding is not supported on filters that have external references, such as

Reference Files and Reference 3D.
Filters Definition - Filters can be defined using two methods.

Filters Definition Description

Predefined Queries Filters Uses simple filter definition with some typical predefined queries.
You can select Hierarchical Queries (System, Assembly, Named
Space, Permission Group, Work Breakdown Structure, Reference
3D, Reference, Analysis, and so on), Object Types Query,
Properties Query, or Volume Query (or by Coordinate System
Planes).

Standard Query Language Used when predefined queries are not sufficient. You can create a
(SQL) Filters query using SQL syntax. Type the query text in the SQL Filter
Properties dialog box and click OK. The SQL Filter Properties
dialog box stores the SQL filter in the Model or the Catalog folder.
The SQL filters are listed in the tree view under the appropriate
parent filter folder in the Select Filter dialog box.

Common User's Guide 357

 Tools Menu

Filters Execution - If an asking filter is used with Define Workspace or Select by Filter, the
Filter Properties for Asking Filters dialog box displays. The Asking Filter – user of filter will
supply value option is selected by default when the filter is defined.

Filters Execution Description

Asking Filter Reduces the need for multiple specific individual filters. These
parametric filters prompt for specific values or selection. Filters
such as Catalog or Model have an incomplete definition that
requires user intervention during run time.
Because of this behavior, you can use asking filters with Define
Workspace and Select by Filter. Asking filters provide universal
and flexible usage. These filters are optimal for Model filters which
cannot be modified by most of the users, but can be used easily.
Asking filters are identified with a green question mark.

Silent Filter Silent (non-parametric) filters are exactly opposite to Asking filters.
These filters have complete definition and can be run directly, and
are used in non-interactive modes such as Drawing View Styles
and Surface Style Rules.

You can use asking filters interactively. Their use is limited in commands and
features. You can use bulk filters to execute queries in batch mode or by background process.
Some examples are Surface Style Rules with many rules using filters, or Drawing View Styles
where filters are used for respective tests during run time.
When you create or modify a filter, you must specify the search criteria on the Filter Properties
dialog box. The properties you select determine the extent of the search. For example, the
System, Assembly, or Named Space tabs on the Filter Properties dialog box provide for
extensive searches, while the Properties, Volume, Permission Group, and Object Type tabs
assist with more restrictive searches. The Configuration tab specifies the permission group
assignment of the filter. The Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) tab identifies objects in the
selected WBS for the filter. For example, you can select projects, contracts, or documents from
the WBS.

Access control of filters

To create a new filter or filter folder or modify an existing one, you need to have write access to
a permission group where you create the new filter. Unlike design objects, a new filter inherits
write access to a permission group from its parent folder. By default, the Catalog and Model
filter folders are assigned to their respective administrative root permission group.

Common User's Guide 358

 Tools Menu

Filters - Rules of usage and limitations

The following table contains the list of available filters and their rules of usage and limitations.

What do you want to do?

 Create a new filter folder (on page 360)
 Create a new filter (on page 360)
 Create a new asking filter (on page 362)
 Create a new SQL filter (on page 362)
 Create a new compound filter (on page 363)
 Rename a filter folder (on page 364)
 Rename a filter (on page 365)
 Move a filter (on page 365)
 Copy a filter (on page 366)
 Delete a filter folder (on page 366)
 Delete a filter (on page 367)
 Edit filter properties (on page 367)
 Select objects by filter (on page 367)

Common User's Guide 359

 Tools Menu

Create a new filter folder

1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. Complete one of the following actions:
 To create a new folder under Model Filters, select Model Filters, and click New
Folder.
 To create a new folder under My Filters, select My Filters, and click New Folder.
3. Click New Folder on the New Filter dialog box.
4. Click OK.
5. Type a unique name for the new folder on the Select Filter dialog box.
6. Press ENTER to create the folder.

 You cannot create new folders under the Model Filters folder unless you have permission.
 The typical purpose for creating a new folder is to place one or more filters within it. You can
place your filters in the folder before you exit the Select Filter dialog box. Otherwise, click
Cancel to exit the Select Filter dialog box without applying a filter to the view. The new
folder remains in the tree view.

Create a new filter

1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. Click New Filter to create a new filter. Make sure you select the type of filter from the
following filters.
a. Select Catalog Filters or sub folder under that node to create a new catalog filter.
b. Select Plant Filters or sub folder under that node to create a new plant filter.
c. Select My Filters or sub folder under that node to create a new personal filter.
To create a new filter under My Filters folder, click File > Define Workspace, or
press CTRL+W. In the Plant list, click the model in which you want to work. In the Filters
list, click Create New Filter.
3. Type a name for the new filter in the Name box.
Filter names must be unique within the folder. You can have a filter in your My
Filters folder with the same name as a filter in another folder. If you move a filter into a
folder that already contains a filter of the same name, the software adds a numeric suffix to
the filter name to keep the filter names unique.
4. Specify the filter search queries using one or more of the tabs on the New Filter Properties
dialog box.

Common User's Guide 360

 Tools Menu

5. Select the Include nested objects option if you want the search to include all objects within
a category. Otherwise, you must separately select each category and individual object.
6. Use the System tab to navigate the tree list to the systems to include in the query. These
systems include the model root at the highest point of the hierarchy, as well as all
subsystems, and specific types of objects. Select the Include nested objects option, if you
want to include all objects under specified System nodes.
7. Use the Assembly tab to navigate the tree view and select the assemblies to include in the
search. Select the Include nested objects option, if you want to include all objects under
specified Assembly nodes.
8. Use the Named Space tab to indicate the named spaces and drawing volumes to include in
the search. Select the Include nested objects option, if you want to include all objects
under specified Space nodes.

 A named space is a volume in the model, like a fire or blast zone.

 A drawing volume defines the clipping volume associated with a specific drawing view in
a document.
9. Use the Analysis tab to select structural analysis models to include in the search. Select the
Include nested objects option, if you want to include all objects under specified Analysis
entities.
10. Use the Work Breakdown Structure tab to identify components in the Work Breakdown
Structure to include in the search. Select the Include nested objects option, if you want to
include all objects under specified WBS items.
11. Use the Permission Group tab to navigate the tree list for selecting the permission groups
to include in the search.
12. Use the Object Type tab to restrict the query to the specific object types with the list of
disciplines.
13. Use the Volume tab to restrict selection. Choose between two options for volume search.
Select Named Spaces to designate the named spaces to include. Select Planes to specify
certain reference planes or coordinate locations to define the six sides of a box. For objects
contained in the volume inside this box, the software includes these objects in the filter.
14. Use the Properties tab to restrict the search using properties of objects in the data model.
For example, you can choose to match all properties listed in the grid, match any property
listed in the grid, or use an operator, like equal ( = ) to narrow the search.

 The Select Properties dialog box browses the data model to select properties on types.
In the Property column, click More.
 The Select Object Type dialog box specifies an object type for a property. You access
this dialog box by clicking More in the Object type box on the Select Properties dialog
box.

Common User's Guide 361

 Tools Menu

15. Use the PDS tab (if available) to include objects from PDS.
16. Use the Reference 3D tab (if available) to include any attached reference 3D models,
folders or files in the query.
17. Click OK on the New Filter dialog box to save the new filter and apply it to the selected
objects in the workspace.

 Use the Configuration tab to designate the options and configuration information for the
filter. You can specify filter status and the associated permission group. These settings have
no effect on the objects that the search returns. They govern the access permissions on the
filter itself.
 An asking filter can have specific selection of filter definitions excluded, but have the Asking
Filter - user of filter will supply value selected. You can specify these values when you
use the filter. For more information about creating an asking filter, see Create a new asking
filter (on page 362).
 A compound filter combines two or more filters by using an operator, such as not, union, or
intersection, between the filters to explain the relationship between the filters. For more
information about creating a compound filter, see Create a New Compound Filter (on page
363).

Create a new asking filter

Asking filters are constructed to prompt, or ask for specific values or selection by the user during
run time. Because of this behavior, asking filter can be used by Define Workspace or Select by
Filter commands. Alternatively, they provide universal and flexible usage. These filters are
optimal for Model filters which cannot be modified by most of the users, but can be used easily.
These filters also eliminate the need for creation of typical ad hoc filters under My Filters.
To create an Asking filter, refer the instructions provided in the Create a new filter (on page 360)
section.
Make sure that you select the Asking Filter - user of filter will supply value
option while defining the filter query on the required tab.

 When you apply the asking filter, the software displays the Filter Properties dialog box to
specify the search criteria. Also, the software sequentially presents each tab for which you
selected the Asking Filter - user of filter will supply value option when you created the
filter. You select values to define the filter at runtime. For example, you selected the Asking
Filter - user of filter will supply value option on the System and Permission Group tabs
when you created the filter.
 When you apply the filter, the Filter Properties dialog box opens. You must select some
systems from the hierarchy on the System tab and permission groups from the hierarchy on
the Permission Group tab.

Common User's Guide 362

 Tools Menu

Create a new SQL filter

1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. Select a location in the tree view to place the SQL filter.
You can add the SQL filter in the Catalog Filters, Model Filters, or My Filters
folder, or move the filter after you create it.
3. Click New SQL Filter .
4. On the Filter Properties dialog box, type the name that you want to assign to the SQL filter
in the Name box.
Filter names must be unique within the folder. You can have a filter in your My
Filters folder with the same name as a filter in another folder. If you move a filter into a
folder that already contains a filter of the same name, the software adds a numeric suffix to
the filter name to keep the filter names unique.
5. Type the SQL statements in the Text of SQL query box.

 If you use SQL or Oracle reserved keywords in your query, you must place square brackets
[] around the words. Also, if you include spaces in property names, you must place brackets
around the names.
 You can use SQL filters inside compound filters. A compound filter combines two or more
filters by using an operator, such as not, union, or intersection, between the filters to
explain the relationship between the filters.

Create a new compound filter

1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. On the Select Filter dialog box, copy the existing filters you want to use to construct the
compound filter.

3. Click New Compound Filter .

4. On the New Compound Filter dialog box, type the name for the new filter in the Name box.
Filter names must be unique within the folder. You can have a filter in your My
Filters folder with the same name as a filter in another folder. If you move a filter into a
folder that already contains a filter of the same name, the software adds a numeric suffix to
the filter name to keep the filter names unique.

Common User's Guide 363

 Tools Menu

5. Click Add to String to place the filter name in the text box at the bottom of the New
Compound Filter dialog box. To build the filter string, use the operator buttons for a union,
intersection, the not operator, and parentheses for priorities in sequencing.

 For example, if you want a string that builds a filter to include objects found by both the
Company_Filter1 and Company_Filter2, and you want all of the objects found by
Gate_Valve_0902, one of your personal filters, then the statement reads
(Company_Filter1 and Company_Filter2) or Gate_Valve_0902.
 To remove a filter or a SQL operator from the compound filter definition, click the filter or
operator in the text box, and then click Delete or press Backspace.
6. To review the properties of a filter, select the filter name in the query statement and click
Properties on the New Compound Filter dialog box. Also, you can right-click the filter in
the tree view of the Select Filter dialog box and click Properties. The Compound Filter
Properties dialog box opens.
After you click OK, the Select Filter dialog box opens and now includes the new
compound filter in the tree view.

 A compound filter combines two or more filters by using an operator, such as not, union, or
intersection between the filters to explain the relationship between the filters.
 You can create a compound filter in the My Filters folder or Model Filters folder using
constituent filters folders from any of the Catalog Filters, Model Filters, or My Filters
folders. Command buttons such as Union, Intersection, and Negation are available on the
Compound Filters dialog box for assistance in building statements.
 You must use the and operator together with the not operator. Do not use the not operator
by itself. The following example shows the correct syntax: Create a new model filter and
select the root node for the model on the System tab. Name the filter All System. Create
another model filter and select a part (a unit) from the Model list on the System tab. Name
this second filter Part Unit. In the Filter box, click More. In the New Filter section, click
Compound and select the All System filter. Type the following string: All System AND
NOT Part unit.

Common User's Guide 364

 Tools Menu

Rename a filter folder

1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. On the Select Filter dialog box, select the folder you want to rename.
3. Click Rename .
4. Type the new name for the folder.
5. Press ENTER.

 You cannot rename model filters unless you have permission.

 Click Cancel to exit the Select Filter dialog box. The folder you renamed remains in the tree
view.

Rename a filter
1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. Select the filter you want to rename on the Select Filter dialog box.
You cannot rename filters in the Model Filters folder unless you have permission.
3. Click Rename .
4. Type a new name for the filter.
Filter names must be unique within the folder. You can have a filter in your My
Filters folder with the same name as a filter in another folder. If you move a filter into a
folder that already contains a filter of the same name, the software adds a numeric suffix to
the filter name to keep the filter names unique.
5. Click elsewhere in the view on the dialog box to save the new name.
Click Cancel to exit the Select Filter dialog box. The filter you renamed remains in
the tree view.
There are several commands available in the right-click shortcut menu when renaming a filter.
Below is a list of shortcut commands:
 Cut - Cuts the selected text to the Clipboard.
 Copy - Copies the selected text to the Clipboard.
 Paste - Inserts the Clipboard contents. This command is enabled after you copy text.
 Delete - Removes the selected text.

Common User's Guide 365

 Tools Menu

Move a filter
1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. In the Select Filter dialog box, click the folder you want to move and drag it to the target
folder.
You cannot move a filter unless you have the required permissions.
When you move a model filter to the Catalog Filters folder, all of the
model-specific definitions are removed and the model filter is changed to an asking filter.
This restricts its usage to interactive only.

Copy a filter
1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. In the Select Filter dialog box, CTRL+ click and drag the folder you want to copy to the
target folder.
You can also use the shortcut menu Copy and Paste commands to copy the filter.
You cannot copy a filter unless you have the required permissions in the target folder.
When you copy a model filter to the Catalog Filters folder, all of the
model-specific definitions are removed and the model filter is changed to an asking filter.
This restricts its usage to interactive only.

Delete a filter folder

1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. Select the filter folder you want to delete, and click Delete .
You cannot delete a Model Filters folder unless you have permission.

 You can also press the DELETE key to delete objects.

 When you delete a filter folder, you remove it from the tree view. The software does not
prompt you about deleting the contents of a folder. Therefore, if you delete a folder, you
delete all the filters within that folder.

Common User's Guide 366

 Tools Menu

Delete a filter
1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. Select the filter you want to delete, and click Delete .
You cannot edit a model filter unless you have permission.

 You can also press the DELETE key to delete objects.

 You cannot delete filters from the Model Filters folder or Catalog Filters unless you have
permission.

Edit filter properties

1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. Select the filter you want to edit from the tree view, and click Properties .
You cannot edit a model filter unless you have permission.
3. Choose one or more tabs on the Filter Properties dialog box that contains the search
criteria you want to edit.
4. Specify the selection properties on each tab.
Some of the tabs on the Filter Properties dialog box expand the query, while other
tabs restrict the query. For more information, see Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 371).
If the filter name is modified, you are prompted either to create a new filter with
new name and modified definition or to just rename the modified filter.

Common User's Guide 367

 Tools Menu

Common User's Guide 368

 Tools Menu

Select objects by filter

1. Open the Select Filter dialog box.
You can either click Tools > Select by Filter, or select More from the Filter list in
the Define Workspace dialog box or the Surface Style Rule properties.
2. On the Select Filter dialog box, select an existing filter, or create a new one.
When you are using the Select by Filter command, if you define a filter that results
in a blank set, the following message appears: No objects will be selected as no objects
in the workspace meet filter criteria.
3. Click OK.

 The list displays these types of filters: catalog filters, model filters, and personal filters.
Choose from any of the filters.
 In the My Filters list, you can maintain your own filters and modify them for ad-hoc filter
definition.
 You can select multiple filters by holding down the SHIFT and CTRL keys.

SQL Queries in SQL Server and Oracle

In Smart 3D, all Microsoft SQL Server and Oracle SQL syntax differences are handled internally,
so you need not be concerned with the differences. The delivered filters work on both Microsoft
SQL Server and Oracle. In addition, all SQL-based report query templates include the tag
<ORASQL>, which defines the Oracle-specific version of that query. This tag has no impact on
SQL Server users.
However, if you write your own direct queries for filters and report templates, you must be
familiar with the syntax differences between SQL Server and Oracle. Both vendors have
extended the SQL language.
Here are a few notable syntax differences. This list is not comprehensive.
 Temporary tables - In Microsoft SQL Server, temporary tables can be created and
referenced dynamically within an SQL statement. In Oracle, the temporary table must exist
prior to the statement that references it.
 Internal functions - Both SQL Server and Oracle have many built-in functions for string
manipulation, date formatting, numerical tasks, and so forth. The function names may be
different for the same functionality.
 With Oracle 9i and above, the join syntax is the same so that should not be an issue for
migration from SQL Server to Oracle.
Refer to the corresponding (Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle) documentation
for more information about the best methods of writing SQL statements.

Common User's Guide 369

 Tools Menu

Select Filter Dialog Box

Creates, edits, deletes, and selects filters for use with the Define Workspace, Surface Style
Rules, and other Select by Filter commands, including Project Management's Model Data
Reuse (MDR), Drawings View Styles, and Reports commands that require runtime filter
selection. You can access this dialog box in several ways as listed.
 Select File > Define Workspace, and select the More option in the Filter box.
 Select Format > Surface Style Rules, click New or Modify, and then select the More
option in the Filter box.
 Select Tools > Select by Filter.
The tree view displays the following types of filters:
 Catalog Filters - These filters are used similarly to reference data in the Catalog. For
example, a catalog filter could apply to company-wide operations. Your administrator can
define Company_Filter_1, Company_Filter_2, and so forth.
 Plant Filters (for plant mode) or Ship Filters (for marine mode) - These filters are available
to everyone assigned to a specific model database. There are delivered catalog filters to
query on the different types of plant mode or marine mode objects. You must have the
appropriate privileges to create, edit, or delete these filters.
 My Filters - These are personal filters that you create and place in the My Filters folder.
They are visible only to you, the owner. You cannot see the personal filters of others, and
they cannot see your personal filters. Select a filter from one of the listed filters, or create a
new filter to meet your specific requirements.
New Folder
Creates a new folder.
New Filter (Simple or Asking)
Displays the New Filter Properties dialog box so you can create a new filter. Asking filters
allow you to specify the parameters of the search. An asking filter has built-in functionality to
ask for values (with boxes that you are required to record). The values apply to properties
that you have already designated you will supply when the filter runs. Asking filters are
portable between models.
Model Data Reuse (MDR) does not support asking filters. The only valid filter
types for an MDR transaction are System, Permission Group, Object Type, Volume and
Properties. You can define the filter on any one of these tabs or in a combination using
multiple tabs.

New Compound Filter

Displays the New Compound Filter Properties dialog box, which you use to create a new
compound filter containing the Or, And, or Not operators. Compound filters are not
supported for MDR.
New SQL Filter
Displays the New SQL Filter Properties dialog box, in which you can type the text of an
SQL query. SQL filters are not supported for MDR

Common User's Guide 370

 Tools Menu

Delete
Removes a filter or folder from the Select Filter list. If you delete a folder, the software also
deletes its contents.
Rename
Changes the name of an existing filter or folder from the Select Filter list.
Properties
Displays the Filter Properties dialog box so you can select the properties that determine
your filter search criteria.

 If this dialog box is activated from the Select by Filter command, you can select multiple
filters on this dialog box. Hold CTRL or SHIFT, and click each filter. When you click OK, all
objects that fit the selected filters are selected.
 If this dialog box is activated from the Select by Filter command, it clears the select set
before adding objects to the select set.
See Also
Select by Filter (on page 354)
Select Objects by Filter (on page 367)

Filter Properties Dialog Box

Builds a filter or displays the properties of an existing filter. You access this dialog box from the
Select Filter dialog box, which is available as follows:
 File > Define Workspace - Filter option, or Properties button, if a filter is selected.
 Tools > Select by Filter.
This dialog box is entitled New Filter Properties or simply Filter Properties, depending on
whether you are creating a new filter or modifying an existing filter. Its behavior is the same.
The tabs across the upper part of the dialog box let you pick the appropriate criteria for the filter.
For example, the System, Assembly, or Named Space tabs on the Filter Properties dialog
box provide for extensive searches, while the Properties, Volume, Permission Group, and
Object Type tabs assist with more restrictive searches. The Configuration tab specifies the
permission group assignment of the filter. The Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) tab identifies
objects in the selected WBS for the filter. For example, you can select projects, contracts, or
documents from the WBS.
Name
Displays the name of the selected object. If the name is too long to entirely display in the
box, hover the cursor over the box to display the complete name as a tool tip. If the name is
not defined by a rule, User Defined displays. If this name is generated by a naming
rule, Naming Rule displays. If you type a name in this box, Smart 3D automatically
changes the naming rule to User Defined.
Asking Filter - user of filter will supply value
Creates an asking filter. An asking filter prompts you for specific values for certain
properties. User will be asked to select in hierarchy of this tab when applying an asking filter.

Common User's Guide 371

 Tools Menu

Include nested objects

Specifies whether you want your search to include all objects under a selected node. For
example, when you check this box and then select an object, the software selects all
sub-objects under that object. If you do not check this box, you can select objects
separately. This option is unavailable for certain tabs on this dialog box.
Clear All
Removes the object definition. Click Clear All if you want to start over and redefine the
search criteria.

 When the New dialog box appears, the default is always the last selected option.
 When you double-click a filter on the Select Filter dialog box, the software applies the filter
and dismisses the dialog box.

Topics
System Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) .................................... 373
Assembly Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ................................ 374
Named Space Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ......................... 375
Analysis Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) .................................. 375
Work Breakdown Structure Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ..... 376
Permission Group Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ................... 377
Object Type Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ............................ 377
Volume Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box).................................... 378
Properties Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ............................... 379
PDS Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ........................................ 380
Reference Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) ............................... 380
Reference 3D Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box).......................... 381
Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 381

Common User's Guide 372

 Tools Menu

System Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a tree view list of all the available systems you can include in your filter search criteria.
A model is the highest system in the hierarchy and includes all subsystems. Systems can span
disciplines and include many types of objects.

You can select the Include nested objects option to specify whether you want your search
criteria to include all objects within a System. For example, if you select this option, the software
selects all children objects when you select a parent system. If you do not select this option, you
select only the systems. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple objects
on this tab.
Nodes with more than 1000 children display in bold type rather than auto-expanding if some of
their children are selected in the filter properties. The selected child nodes highlight when you
expand the parent node.

Common User's Guide 373

 Tools Menu

Assembly Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a tree view list of all the available assemblies you can include in your filter search
criteria.

You can select the Include nested objects option to specify whether you want your search
criteria to include all objects within a category. For example, if you select this option, the
software selects all objects when you select a category. If you do not select this option, you
select the assembly objects separately. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select
multiple objects on this tab.
The Include nested assemblies only option includes all nested assemblies, assembly blocks,
blocks, spools, and penetration spools under the selected assemblies, but not the parts.

 The Include nested assemblies only option explicitly includes the assemblies and
assembly parents that you are working on so that the Refresh Workspace command
updates the assembly information without including all of the many parts nested under the
selected assemblies, such as plate parts, that are not of interest.
 Only one of the Include nested objects and Include nested assemblies only options can
be selected. Both options can be unchecked.

Common User's Guide 374

 Tools Menu

Named Space Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a list of all the named spaces and drawing volumes you can include in your search.

Named spaces are regions in the model, like fire or blast zones. Filtering on named spaces is
useful particularly when you work in the Space Management task and need to see the size,
shape, and position of the named spaces that already exist. Drawing volumes are used in the
Drawings and Reports task in the drawing creation process.
You can select the Include nested objects option to specify whether you want your search
criteria to include all objects within a category. For example, if you select this option, the
software selects all objects when you select a category. If you do not select this option, you
select the category and individual objects separately. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT
keys to select multiple objects on this tab.

Analysis Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a list of all the structural analysis models you can include in your search.

Analysis models are associated with the Structural Analysis task in the software. An analysis
model is a non- graphical and logical grouping of member systems that can be sent to a
third-party analysis and design solver package.
You can select the Include nested objects option to specify whether you want your search
criteria to include all objects within a category. For example, if you select this option, the
software selects all objects when you select a category. If you do not select this option, you
select the category and individual objects separately. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT
keys to select multiple objects on this tab.

Common User's Guide 375

 Tools Menu

Work Breakdown Structure Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Browses a tree view of the model Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) to include WBS entities
only if WBS tab is used, or restrict the filters to objects assigned to selected WBS, if other tabs
are used.

A simple filter shows only objects that have been assigned to the selected WBS items
and the WBS items themselves. To see WBS objects on the Workspace Explorer tab, you
must create a compound filter. In other words, if a filter is defined that contains only one WBS
project, this filter would return the WBS project selected on the WBS tab of the Workspace
Explorer and any objects assigned to that particular WBS project on the Systems tab in the
Workspace Explorer. To see all WBS objects on the WBS tab in the Workspace Explorer,
you must create a compound filter. For example, you might create a filter that contains All
Systems OR WBS Objects. This filter would return all objects on the Systems tab and all WBS
objects.
The WBS is the breakdown of the model by the construction work to be performed. The
breakdown can consist of the model at the top level, as well as projects, contracts, and
documents. You can modify a property for an object to associate it to a project. You can
associate published documents to a contract and then reassign the document from one contract
to another. Objects are associated to a document.
You can select the Include nested objects option to specify whether you want your search
criteria to include all objects within a category. For example, if you select this option, the
software selects all objects when you select a category. If you do not select this option, you
select the category and individual objects separately. You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT
keys to select multiple objects on this tab.

Common User's Guide 376

 Tools Menu

Permission Group Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Displays a tree view list of all the permission groups that you can select for your search. The
filter selects objects that belong to the groups that you highlight. If you do not highlight any
groups, the filter includes all groups in the list.

You can add permission groups in the Project Management task.

Object Type Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides options for you to select specific object types to restrict selection of your filter. The
objects are organized by discipline.

This tab provides a list of all the major object types you can include in your search. The filter
selects the objects you highlight. If you do not select any objects, the filter includes all objects in
the list. To include one or more object types in your filter, press CTRL and click the name of
each object type that you want to include.

Common User's Guide 377

 Tools Menu

Volume Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

This tab restricts filter selection to just objects within the selected volume. Provides two options
for defining the volume search method: Named spaces or Planes. The tree view displays the
Named Spaces hierarchy or the coordinate system hierarchy depending on the option that you
select.

Define by
Named spaces
Displays a tree view of the Space hierarchy from which you can choose one or more spaces
to include in your search. This option is useful for filtering all objects located within specific
spaces. In addition to selecting all the objects inside the specified named spaces, the
software retrieves the space itself. You do not need to select the object on the Named
Space tab as well. To select a particular named space, press CTRL and click as many
spaces as you want to include in your search. If you do not select any named spaces, the
filter includes all objects in all named spaces.
Planes
Displays a tree view of the reference coordinate system hierarchy in the window, and a
group of first and second position coordinate boxes at the bottom. The coordinate system
hierarchy is a list of predefined coordinate systems for the model, each having a different
origin point. For example, one coordinate system might have an origin point at the corner of
a boiler room, another at the center of the building, and so forth.
When you select one of these coordinate systems, the software displays a list of coordinate
planes for that system. By selecting a plane and specifying the first and second positions
along that plane, your filter selects all objects that fall between the two positions on that
plane. The positions automatically appear in the first and second position boxes at the
bottom of the dialog box. This option is useful when you want to select objects that are all on
a specific level or plane. You can hold CTRL to select the first and second positions in the
tree view.
Coordinate system
Specify a coordinate system in this box. You can define coordinate systems in the Grids
task.

Common User's Guide 378

 Tools Menu

1st Position (N, E, EL) or (Y, X, n)

Displays the names of the planes that you select to define the first position of the volume.
2nd Position (N, E, EL) or (Y, X, n)
Displays the names of the planes that you select to define the second position of the
volume.
If multiple volumes are selected on the volume tab and PDS criteria are also defined,
the PDS objects returned by the filter would be from the compounded volume that holds all the
volumes specified.

Properties Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides options for selecting object properties that you can use to restrict your search.

Filter Method
You can combine multiple properties on individual rows.
Match All
Returns only those objects matching ALL of the properties listed in the grid. This method is
the same as using the Boolean operator AND.
Match Any
Returns objects matching any one or more of the properties listed in the grid. This method is
the same as using the Boolean operator OR.
Property
Lists the properties of objects in the data model. To select properties and set their data type,
select More in the field drop-down. For more information, see Select Properties Dialog Box
(on page 384).
Operator
Select an operator such as <> (not equal) or = (equal).

 If you are using a wildcard character (asterisk *), you must use the Contains
comparison operator. For example, pumps P-1000A and P-1000B exist in the model. To
query for the pumps using properties, select Match All and type Name Contains P*.
 If your query involves PDS objects, use the <> and = operators only.

Common User's Guide 379

 Tools Menu

Value
Select the value of the property.
Ask
Creates Asking Filter that allows you to specify a value for the property when you run the
filter. The Ask column is so named because the software asks or prompts you to type a
value. An administrator or other user with the required permissions establishes the asking
filter and defines a default value. While defining a workspace, you can type a different value
for the property. This is not a valid option for Model Data Reuse.
Remove
Removes the selected property from the grid.

PDS Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a tree view list of the PDS® (Plant Design System) data you can include in your
search.
You can use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple objects on this tab.
To select PDS objects for filters, you must install the PDS software and associate a
PDS model reference with the model in the Smart 3D Project Management task. For more
information, see the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide available from the Help >
Printable Guides command, or see the Readme file.

Reference Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a tree view list of the available reference files you can include in your search.

You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple objects on this tab.

 To view this tab, you must first insert a file using the Insert > File command. For more
information, see Insert File (on page 273).
 When you copy a filter that contains Reference tab information into the Catalog or into a
different Model database, the software removes the Reference tab information. Because of
this, you cannot create a compound filter that uses Reference tab information. Filters that
use Reference tab information are hidden from the tree view on the Compound Filter
dialog box. You can specify PDS information when you edit an individual filter used by a
compound filter, but the compound filter ignores any Reference tab information.

Common User's Guide 380

 Tools Menu

Reference 3D Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Provides a list of all the Reference 3D models you can include in your search.

You can also use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple objects on this tab.
When you copy a filter that contains Reference 3D tab information into the Catalog or
into a different Model database, the software removes the Reference 3D tab information.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access
level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.

Common User's Guide 381

 Tools Menu

Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box

Builds a compound filter or views the properties of an existing filter. This dialog box appears
when you click New Compound Filter on the Select Filter dialog box or when you select an
existing compound filter and then click Properties on the Select Filter dialog box.
Compound filter name
Specifies a name for the new compound filter or displays the name for an existing
compound filter.
Filter type
Displays the category of filters, such as Catalog Filters.
Select filter to use in compound expression
Provides a tree view to select the existing filters in the Catalog Filters folder you want to
use for building the compound filter.
Add to String
Places the filter name in the text box at the bottom of the Compound Filter Properties
dialog box. To build the SQL statement with the operator buttons on the Compound Filter
Properties dialog box, insert operators, such as a union, intersection, or the not operator,
and parentheses for priorities in sequencing.
Properties
Reviews the properties of a filter. Select the filter name in the query statement and click
Properties.
Or
Specifies or inserts the union operator at the location you indicate in the string in the text
box.
And
Specifies or inserts the intersection operator at the location you indicate in the string in the
text box.
Not
Inserts the not operator at the location you indicate in the string in the text box.
(
Specifies or inserts the left parenthesis, which starts a priority for the operators. The
software inserts the parenthesis at the location you indicate in the string in the text box.

Common User's Guide 382

 Tools Menu

)
Specifies or inserts the right parenthesis, which ends a priority for the operators. The
software inserts the parenthesis at the location you indicate in the string in the text box.
Place pointer in the text box where you want to add a filter name or operator
Instructs you to click the text box at the location to add a filter or SQL operator to the
compound filter definition, and allows you to remove a filter or SQL operator from the
compound filter definition.
To remove a filter or SQL operator from the compound filter definition, click the filter
or SQL operator in the text box, and then click Delete or press Backspace.
Delete
Removes the selected filter or operator from the compound filter definition.
Clear All
Removes the object definition.
You are not required to use parentheses in a statement, but parentheses provide
structure that is easier to follow, especially in a complex statement. Without the parentheses, an
SQL statement follows a default order of operations. Specify Not operators first, followed by
And operators and then the Or operators. For example, in the statement X And Y Or Not Z, the
Not operator is processed first, followed by And and finally Or. To change this order, you must
use parentheses.
Compounding is not supported on filters containing filtering criteria on PDS,
Reference Files tab, and Reference 3D tab.
See Also
Create a new filter (on page 360)
Create a new filter folder (on page 360)
Select by Filter (on page 354)

SQL Filter Properties Dialog Box

Builds an SQL filter or views the properties of an existing filter. This dialog box appears when
you click New SQL Filter on the Select Filter dialog box or when you select an existing SQL
filter and then click Properties on the Select Filter dialog box.
See Also
Configuration Tab (on page 144)
General Tab (SQL Filter Properties Dialog Box) (on page 384)
Select by Filter (on page 354)

Common User's Guide 383

 Tools Menu

General Tab (SQL Filter Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies SQL statements for the filter.
If you use SQL or Oracle reserved keywords in your query, you must place square
brackets [] around the words. Also, if you include spaces in property names, you must place
brackets around the names.
See Also
Create a new SQL filter (on page 362)
SQL Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 383)

Folder Properties Dialog Box

Provides options to specify the name of your new folder and displays the current folder
configuration.
See Also
Configuration Tab (on page 144)
General Tab (SQL Filter Properties Dialog Box) (on page 384)
Select by Filter (on page 354)

General Tab (Folder Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies a name for a folder.
Name
Specifies a name for the folder.
See Also
Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 371)

Select Properties Dialog Box

Browses the data model and selects properties on types. You use the Select Properties dialog
box when specifying filter properties for the workspace and when defining labels. This dialog box
is accessible in both the Common task and the Drawings and Reports task.
In Common, you can access this dialog box when you use the File > Define Workspace
command or the Tools > Select by Filter command to view the properties of a filter. On the
Filter Properties dialog box, click the Properties tab, and in the Property column, click More.
You can also access this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options and selecting the ToolTips
tab. Click Edit Tooltip, and then click Add in the Properties section.
In Drawings and Reports, you can access this dialog box when you use the Edit Template
command on a report template to add properties to a filter query.
Object type used as the basis for the property identification
Specifies an object type. Click More to access the data model tree. For more information,
see Select Object Type Dialog Box (on page 385).
Relationship
Specifies a direct property or a correlation between object types. These relationship names
are sorted alphabetically.

Common User's Guide 384

 Tools Menu

Related object type

Selects another object type. Click More to access the data model tree.
Display properties in this category
Specifies a category. You can define categories in the reference data workbooks on the
Custom Interfaces sheets.
Select one or more properties
Specifies properties. Press SHIFT to select more than one property.
See Also
Create a new filter (on page 360)
Select by Filter (on page 354)
Select Object Type Dialog Box (on page 385)

Select Object Type Dialog Box

Specifies the categories of objects, the feature type, and the component to which you want to
add a ToolTip or label. This dialog box is available for multiple tasks.
In the Common task, you can access this dialog box when you are specifying an object type for
filter properties. You can also access this dialog box when you are editing labels for ToolTips.
When you are working with filter properties or labels, this dialog box opens after you click More
in the Object type box on the Select Properties dialog box. When you are working with
ToolTips, the Select Object Type dialog box opens after you click the browse button on the
ToolTips tab on the Options dialog box.
In the Drawings and Reports task, you can access this dialog box when you use the Edit
Template command on a report template to add properties to a filter query.
In the Project Management task, you can access this dialog box when you use the Configure
Default Colors command to add default style rules.
When the Select Object Type dialog box opens, a tree view lists categories of objects available
in the software. When you double-click an object, the view expands to show the available
feature types. After you select a feature type, another level is available for some categories to
show the component features you can select. For example, double-click HVAC, double-click
HVAC Features, and then click HVAC Transition as the feature, and accept the dialog box.
If objects appear in italics, you cannot select that object on this dialog box. The software uses
your previous selections as the basis for this determination. Italicized text for objects in the
Workspace Explorer indicates the objects are hidden with the Show/Hide options.

Common User's Guide 385

 Tools Menu

Show
Turns on the graphical display of objects in the select set. To select a hidden object, select its
name in the Workspace Explorer. The names of hidden objects appear in italics in the
Workspace Explorer.
You must use Tools > Show All to redisplay a hidden reference 3D object.

Show an invisible object

The Tools > Show command is used to redisplay hidden objects in the graphic view.
1. In the Workspace Explorer, select the objects you want to display. Hidden objects are
displayed in italics.
2. Click Tools > Show.
When you select the Show command, the software displays all objects in the
workspace.

Common User's Guide 386

 Tools Menu

Hide
Turns off the graphical display of selected objects in the workspace. The names of hidden
objects appear in italics in the Workspace Explorer.
If you hide an object while the related tab of the Workspace Explorer is active, the
child objects are automatically hidden. For example, if the System tab is active when you hide a
system object, then all of the children objects are also hidden. If the related WSE tab is not
active, only the object that you specifically select is hidden. For example, if you hide a pipe run
while the Space tab is active, the child parts of the pipe run are not hidden.

Hide an object
The Tools > Hide command makes all selected objects in the current workspace invisible.
1. In a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, select the object(s) you want to hide.
2. Click Tools > Hide.
You can use the Select by Filter command to place a group of objects in the select set.

Common User's Guide 387

 Tools Menu

Show All
Displays all graphically hidden objects in the workspace without having to select them
individually. You must use this command to redisplay a hidden Reference 3D object.

Show all invisible objects

Hidden objects are shown in the Workspace Explorer in italics.
 Click Tools > Show All command to redisplay all of the hidden objects in the workspace.

Common User's Guide 388

 Tools Menu

PinPoint
(Plant) or (Ship) Helps you move, place, or modify objects with precision by displaying
coordinate data at the pointer. The PinPoint command is located on the Tools menu. When you
turn PinPoint on, the PinPoint ribbon displays coordinates relative to a target position you set.
You can reset the target position at any time. Also, PinPoint provides a way to define a
temporary coordinate system with a new origin and axis directions different from those of the
global coordinate system.
You can use the PinPoint command while other commands such as Place Equipment are
running.

How PinPoint Works

The PinPoint command provides coordinate input to commands as you place objects. The
coordinates are relative to a target point that you can position anywhere in a view. You can
change the location of the target point at any time by clicking Reposition Target on the
ribbon and then clicking a new position in the view. Also, you can reposition the PinPoint target
by pressing F12.
As you move the pointer around, PinPoint displays the distances between the pointer position
and the target point. Also, these values appear on the PinPoint ribbon. Dashed lines show the
PinPoint axes of the active coordinate system and the PinPoint orientation.
The PinPoint command only works on objects that have a right-handed coordinate system.

Rectangular, Spherical, and Cylindrical Coordinates

When you use PinPoint, you can work with rectangular, spherical, or cylindrical coordinates.
The default PinPoint mode uses Rectangular coordinates . Rectangular coordinates are the
E, N, EL or X, Y, Z-coordinates. When using Spherical coordinates , you use a specified
distance and angle. For example, spherical coordinates can be useful when routing pipe at a
specified distance and angle. With Cylindrical coordinates , you set radius, height (Z), and
horizontal angle (theta) values.

Locking and Freeing Values

You can lock the coordinates using the boxes on the ribbon. When one coordinate value is
locked, you can position the other coordinates by clicking a position in the view. You also can
set all values using the ribbon boxes. If you want to free the dynamics for a locked value, you
can clear the value box by double-clicking in the box and pressing BACKSPACE or DELETE, or
by pressing the corresponding function keys.
When you use spherical coordinates and lock the absolute distance, you must also
lock at least one of the angle boxes on the ribbon. You cannot unlock an angle while the
absolute distance is locked and no other angle is locked.

Common User's Guide 389

 Tools Menu

PinPoint Orientation
In its default orientation, the axes are set by the active coordinate system. You can re-orient the
axes by defining a temporary coordinate system using the Define Coordinate System by 3
Points or command on the PinPoint ribbon.
If you select a different coordinate system in Coordinate System box, then you must
click Set Target to Origin or to set the selected coordinate system as the origin.

PinPoint Ribbon
Sets options for moving or placing objects with precision.

Display On/Off (F9)

Displays or hides the PinPoint options and distance values. The shortcut key for this option
is F9.
Reposition Target (F12)

Changes the location of the target point. The E (X), N (Y), and EL (Z) coordinates are
relative to the previous position of the target. Also, you can reposition the PinPoint target by
pressing F12.

Set Target to Origin

Moves the target to the origin of the current coordinate system.
If a different coordinate system is selected in the Coordinate System box, you
must click Set Target to Origin to reset the ribbon values.
Relative Tracking
Moves the target to the last location you clicked. In the Relative Tracking mode, the
PinPoint target follows your mouse as you click. When toggled off, the target remains
locked in the same location until repositioned.

Common User's Guide 390

 Tools Menu

Properties of Active Coordinate System

Shows the properties of the active coordinate system specified in the Coordinate system
dropdown box. The dropdown lists the last seven coordinate systems selected and several
options:
 Global - Specifies the current global coordinate system.
 Select Graphically - Allows you to specify the coordinate system graphically in the
active window. Instructions appear in the status bar.
 More - Displays the Select Coordinate System dialog box. For more information, see
Select Coordinate System Dialog Box.
Coordinate system
Sets the active coordinate system. You can select the global coordinate system. Or, you can
select a coordinate system in a graphic view or from a tree view of the workspace or
database.

Define Coordinate System by 3 Points

Defines a temporary coordinate system by three points. Point 1 defines the origin of the
coordinate system. Point 2 defines the end of the local x-axis. Point 3 defines the end of the
local y-axis.

Rectangular Coordinates
Rectangular Coordinates
Specifies the rectangular coordinates mode for the PinPoint command. This is the default
PinPoint mode. The following settings are added to the right side of the ribbon:
 Step - Specifies the PinPoint step value, which is an incremental distance along the
PinPoint coordinate axes. As you use PinPoint, your pointer snaps to locations
corresponding to the step value. You can select a step value from the list in this box, or
you can type your own value.
 E or X - Sets the distance along the E-axis or X-axis of the active coordinate system
between the target point and the current pointer location to the value that you type. The
shortcut key to lock/unlock this box is F6.
 N or Y - Sets the distance along the N-axis or Y-axis of the active coordinate system
between the target point and the current pointer location to the value that you type. The
shortcut key to lock/unlock this box is F7.
 EL or Z - Sets the distance along the EL-axis or Z-axis of the active coordinate system
between the target point and the current pointer location to the value that you type. The
shortcut key to lock/unlock this box is F8.

Common User's Guide 391

 Tools Menu

 Use single or double quotation marks to enclose the reference name plane. The reference
plane must belong to the active coordinate system.
 Multiplication is supported. Parentheses are not supported as part of input, but the software
uses standard computation operator precedence. However, expressions involving
multiplication should use only one length unit. Examples include 'F13' + 2*4m*3 and
"F13"-2*3*4m, - 3*4cm-3m*2+6".
 If an error occurs because of an invalid expression, see the Troubleshooting Reference
Guide available from Help > Printable Guides for more information.

Spherical Coordinates
Spherical Coordinates
Specifies the spherical coordinates mode for the PinPoint command. The following settings
are added to the right side of the ribbon:
 Distance - Sets the distance between the target and the pointer location. The shortcut
key to lock/unlock this box is F6.
 Horizontal - Sets the horizontal angle, which is measured clockwise from the N-axis or
Y-axis. This angle is in the horizontal plane. The shortcut key to lock/unlock this box is
F7.
 Vertical - Sets the vertical angle, which is measured counter-clockwise from plan
horizontal. This angle is from the horizontal plane. The shortcut key to lock/unlock this
box is F8.
When you use spherical coordinates and lock the absolute distance, you must also
lock at least one of the angle boxes on the ribbon. You cannot unlock an angle while the
absolute distance is locked and no other angle is locked.

Cylindrical Coordinates
Cylindrical Coordinates
Specifies the cylindrical coordinates mode for the PinPoint command. The following
settings are added to the right side of the ribbon:
 Radius - Sets the radius of the cylinder. The shortcut key to lock/unlock this box is F6.
 Theta - Sets the horizontal angle, measured from North and clockwise. The shortcut key
to lock/unlock this box is F7.
 Z - Sets the height of the cylinder. The shortcut key to lock/unlock this box is F8.

Common User's Guide 392

 Tools Menu

The following graphic represents how the cylindrical measurements are set:

Lock and Unlock

Use Lock and Unlock in conjunction with the settings dropdowns for the Rectangular
(F6), Spherical (F7), and Cylindrical (F8) coordinates. The current state of the button indicates
whether the setting is locked or not. Deleting the contents of the box automatically unlocks the
setting.

Select Coordinate System Dialog Box

Sets the coordinate system for the active command. You can define coordinate systems in the
Grids task. For more information, see the Grids User's Guide available from Help > Printable
Guides.

What do you want to do?

 Place objects using rectangular coordinates (on page 393)
 Place objects using spherical coordinates (on page 395)
 Place objects using cylindrical coordinates (on page 398)

Place objects using rectangular coordinates

The following procedure shows how the Rectangular Coordinates option is used with the
PinPoint command. For information on using spherical coordinates or cylindrical coordinates,
see Place Objects Using Spherical Coordinates (on page 395) and Place Objects Using
Cylindrical Coordinates (on page 398).
The PinPoint command only works on objects that have a right-handed
coordinate system.
Show me
1. Select a task that allows you to place objects.
2. Click any Place <object name> command.
3. Select an object, and then specify the necessary properties.
The software displays the computed graphics of the selected object.

Common User's Guide 393

 Tools Menu

4. On the Common toolbar, click PinPoint to activate the PinPoint ribbon bar.

Click Display On/Off to turn the PinPoint display on and off. You can also
press F9 to toggle the PinPoint display on and off.
5. In the Coordinate System box, select a coordinate system in the list as the reference point.
 Global - Global coordinate system is the default option. You cannot modify a global
coordinate system.
 Select Graphically - Allows you to specify a coordinate system graphically in the active
window. Follow the instructions that appear in the status bar.
 More - Displays the Select Coordinate System dialog box. Select a coordinate system
from the Workspace or Database.

6. After you select an active coordinate system, click Set Target to Origin (plant) or
(ship).

 The software considers the targeted position as the new origin from which the distance
will be measured. The target position does not change when you change the active
coordinate system.
 The Rectangular Coordinates is the default mode for PinPoint.
7. Set the distance along E-axis (plant) or X-axis (ship), and then click Lock/Unlock Absolute
Distance to lock the value.

The shortcut key to lock/unlock this value is F6.

8. Similarly, set the distances along N-axis (plant) or Y-axis (ship), and EL-axis (plant) or
Z-axis (ship).
The shortcut key to lock/unlock the N-axis (plant) or Y-axis (ship) value is F7, and
F8 is the shortcut key to lock/unlock EL-axis (plant) or Z-axis (ship) value.

Common User's Guide 394

 Tools Menu

9. Click in the graphic view to place the object at the pin-pointed location.
The software places the object at the pin-pointed location.

10. Click to confirm the object placement.

The object is placed at the pin-pointed location.

Place objects using spherical coordinates

The following procedure shows how the Spherical Coordinates option is used with the
Tools > PinPoint command. For information on using rectangular coordinates or cylindrical
coordinates, see Place Objects Using Rectangular Coordinates (on page 393) and Place
Objects Using Cylindrical Coordinates (on page 398).
1. Select a task that allows you to place objects.
2. Click any Place <object name> command.
3. Select an object, and then specify the necessary properties.
The software displays the computed graphics of the selected object.

Common User's Guide 395

 Tools Menu

4. On the Common toolbar, click PinPoint to activate the PinPoint ribbon bar.

Click Display On/Off to turn the PinPoint display on and off. You can also
press F9 to toggle the PinPoint display on and off.
5. In the Coordinate System box, select a coordinate system in the list as the reference point.
 Global - Global coordinate system is the default option. You cannot modify a global
coordinate system.
 Select Graphically - Allows you to specify a coordinate system graphically in the active
window. Follow the instructions that appear in the status bar.
 More - Displays the Select Coordinate System dialog box. Select a coordinate system
from the Workspace or Database.

6. After you select an active coordinate system, click Set Target to Origin (plant) or
(ship).
The software considers the targeted position as the new origin from which the
distance will be measured. The target position does not change when you change the active
coordinate system.
7. Click Spherical Coordinates .
The spherical value settings display on the right side of the ribbon.
8. Set the Distance value, and then click Lock/Unlock Absolute Distance to lock the
value. Absolute distance is the distance between the target and the pointer location.
The shortcut key to lock/unlock this value is F6.

When you lock the Distance value, the software automatically locks the
Vertical angle with a default value. You cannot unlock an angle while the absolute distance
is locked and no other angle is locked.
9. Set the Horizontal angle, and then click Lock/Unlock Absolute Distance to lock the
value. This angle is in the horizontal plane and is measured clockwise from the N-axis
(plant) or Y-axis (ship).
The shortcut key to lock/unlock this value is F7.

Common User's Guide 396

 Tools Menu

10. If necessary, set the Vertical angle. Click Lock/Unlock Absolute Distance to unlock
the value, and then lock after specifying a new value. This angle is measured
counter-clockwise from horizontal plane.
The shortcut key to lock/unlock this value is F8.

Common User's Guide 397

 Tools Menu

11. Click in the graphic view to place the object at the pin-pointed location.
The software places the object at the pin-pointed location.

 The PinPoint command uses the highlight and selected element colors. You can set these
colors on the Tools > Options dialog box. For more information, see Change a Default
Color (on page 496).

Place objects using cylindrical coordinates

The following procedure shows how the Cylindrical Coordinates option is used with the
Tools > PinPoint command. For information on using rectangular coordinates or spherical
coordinates, see Place Objects Using Rectangular Coordinates (on page 393) and Place
Objects Using Spherical Coordinates (on page 395).
1. Select a task that allows you to place objects.
2. Click any Place <object name> command.
3. Select an object, and then specify the necessary properties.
The software displays the computed graphics of the selected object.
4. On the Common toolbar, click PinPoint to activate the PinPoint ribbon bar.

Click Display On/Off to turn the PinPoint display on and off. You can also
press F9 to toggle the PinPoint display on and off.

Common User's Guide 398

 Tools Menu

5. In the Coordinate System box, select a coordinate system in the list as the reference point.
 Global - Global coordinate system is the default option. You cannot modify a global
coordinate system.
 Select Graphically - Allows you to specify a coordinate system graphically in the active
window. Follow the instructions that appear in the status bar.
 More - Displays the Select Coordinate System dialog box. Select a coordinate system
from the Workspace or Database.

6. After you select an active coordinate system, click Set Target to Origin (plant) or
(ship).
The software considers the targeted position as the new origin from which the
distance will be measured. The target position does not change when you change the active
coordinate system.
7. Click Cylindrical Coordinates .
The cylindrical value settings display on the right side of the ribbon.
8. Set the Radius value for the cylinder, and then and then click Lock/Unlock Absolute
Distance to lock the value.
The shortcut key to lock/unlock this value is F6.

9. If necessary, set the Z value. Click Lock/Unlock Absolute Distance to unlock the
value, and then lock after specifying a new value. This is the height of the cylinder.
The shortcut key to lock/unlock this value is F8.

Common User's Guide 399

 Tools Menu

10. Set the Theta value, and then click Lock/Unlock Absolute Distance to lock the value.
This angle is in the horizontal plane and is measured clockwise from the N-axis (plant) or
Y-axis (ship).
The shortcut key to lock/unlock this value is F7.

11. Click in the graphic view to place the object at the pin-pointed location.
The software places the object at the pin-pointed location.

The PinPoint command uses the highlight and selected element colors. You can set
these colors on the Tools > Options dialog box. For more information, see Change a Default
Color (on page 496).

Common User's Guide 400

 Tools Menu

SmartSketch Options
Displays a floating toolbar of SmartSketch options. You can click the options to turn them on
and off as you make selections in the graphic view for other commands.
Intersection
Displays when you move the pointer over points where two or more objects overlap.
Key point
Displays when you move the pointer over the end of an element to which you can attach
other elements.
Parallel
Displays when you place an object parallel to another object in your workspace. When
this indicator appears, the software highlights the parallel objects. For example, if you add a
section of pipe that runs parallel to another piece of pipe anywhere in your workspace, this
indicator appears, and both objects are highlighted.
Perpendicular
Displays when you move the pointer so that a perpendicular relationship between two
objects is recognized. For instance, when you connect two pipes at a 90 degree angle, this
indicator appears.
Center point
Displays when you move the pointer over the center of a circle or arc.
Point on curve

Displays when you move the pointer over any connection point on an object, such as a
nozzle on a piece of equipment.
Reference axis aligned
Displays when you move the pointer so that the object that you are placing is aligned
with either the E-, N-, EL-axis (X-, Y-, Z-axis) of the active coordinate system. For example,
if you are routing a pipe that moves parallel to the E-axis (X-axis), this indicator appears.
Show me

Nozzle or other port point

Displays when you move the pointer over an equipment nozzle or other port. Press F2
to toggle this option on and off.
Point on surface
Displays when you move the pointer over any location point on a surface object, such as
a slab. Press F3 to toggle the option on and off.

Edges on solids

Displays when you move the pointer over the edge of a solid object.

Common User's Guide 401

 Tools Menu

Silhouette edges
Displays when you move the pointer over the silhouette edges of surfaces. The
silhouette edges are the outside edges of the surface with respect to your view.

Divisor point
Displays when you move the pointer to the points where a line divides equally for the
number of divisions that you set. A drop down list lets you choose from 2 to 7 divisions for
the line. For example, if you select 4 for the number of divisions, you get a divisor point at ¼,
½, and ¾ of the length.
Offset

Displays when you move the pointer to a location that is the specified offset from a
selected element or line. Offset also displays Offset from surface.
You must define a projection plane to use Offset.

Common User's Guide 402

 Tools Menu

Offset from surface - Displays when you point to the location of a line that is offset from
the intersection of your selected projection plane with a surface that is in the SmartSketch
locate list. For example, if you are locating the end of a pipe, the indicator appears along the
line that is offset from the intersection of the projection plane with the web plane.

The offset line is often easiest to locate if your view direction is perpendicular to the
projection plane.
Locate only from list
Specifies that the software locates objects on the SmartSketch list defined when you use
Add to SmarkSketch List . For more information, see Add to SmartSketch List (on page
403).

Common User's Guide 403

 Tools Menu

Add to SmartSketch List

Specifies SmartSketch 3D options for locating precision points of design interest relative to
one or more geometric objects in the model.
When you are working in the software, you can use SmartSketch 3D to help locate points in the
model. Four types of SmartSketch points exist:
 Key point
 Point on geometry
 Intersection point
 Linear relationship point
You can control the identification of SmartSketch points and relationship indicators using the
SmartSketch 3D tab on the Tools > Options dialog box.
Other features of SmartSketch 3D include the ability to force all points to a projection plane,
shown with a translucent plane in the graphic view. You can also use SmartSketch 3D along
with PinPoint, the precision coordinate feedback tool. To set a constraint lock, you can use the
shortcut keys, which are CTRL+L. Press and hold X to disable SmartSketch 3D.
SmartSketch 3D has two different behaviors. The first behavior, locate on the display list, is
done in a parent-child manner on the geometry of objects in the model. This behavior is limits
your selection to parent objects that you can actually see in the graphic view. Meaning that the
location of ports is not possible because you cannot see a port, a child object, in the graphic
view. The second behavior, locate on the SmartSketch list, is done in a child-parent manner.
This behavior means that surfaces, ports, and so forth are available for selection.

Add to SmartSketch List Ribbon

Sets options for the locate list in the software.
SmartSketch Options
Displays the SmartSketch Properties dialog box, which is the same as the SmartSketch
tab of the Options dialog box.

Select
Selects objects in the model. You can also click the other buttons on this ribbon to set
SmartSketch options.
Clears the List
Removes all objects from the locate list.
Locate on List Only
Specifies that the software locates objects on the SmartSketch list from the bottom of the list
up, which means that surfaces, ports, and so forth are all available for location.
List size
Specifies the number of objects on the list.

Common User's Guide 404

 Tools Menu

Dwell time
Specifies the time that you must pause the pointer over the object to add it to the list.

SmartSketch Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the SmartSketch relationship indicators you want to use in your workspace. This
dialog box appears when you click SmartSketch Options on the Add to SmartSketch List
ribbon.
Intersection
Displays when you move the pointer over points where two or more objects overlap.
Show me
Offset

Displays when you move the pointer to a location that is the specified offset from a
selected element or line. Offset also displays Offset from surface.
You must define a projection plane to use Offset.
Offset from surface - Displays when you point to the location of a line that is offset from
the intersection of your selected projection plane with a surface that is in the SmartSketch
locate list. For example, if you are locating the end of a pipe, the indicator appears along the
line that is offset from the intersection of the projection plane with the web plane.

The offset line is often easiest to locate if your view direction is perpendicular to the
projection plane.
Key point
Displays when you move the pointer over the end of an element to which you can attach
other elements.
Show me

Common User's Guide 405

 Tools Menu

Nozzle or other port point

Displays when you move the pointer over an equipment nozzle or other port. Press F2
to toggle this option on and off.
Show me nozzles
Show me pipe ends
Divisor point
Displays when you move the pointer to the points where a line divides equally for the
number of divisions that you set. A drop down list lets you choose from 2 to 7 divisions for
the line. For example, if you select 4 for the number of divisions, you get a divisor point at ¼,
½, and ¾ of the length.
Show me
Center point
Displays when you move the pointer over the center of a circle or arc.

Point on curve

Displays when you move the pointer over any connection point on an object, such as a
nozzle on a piece of equipment.

Point on surface
Displays when you move the pointer over any location point on a surface object, such as
a slab. Press F3 to toggle the option on and off.
Show me
Edges on solids

Displays when you move the pointer over the edge of a solid object.

Reference axis aligned

Displays when you move the pointer so that the object that you are placing is aligned
with either the E-, N-, EL-axis (X-, Y-, Z-axis) of the active coordinate system. For example,
if you are routing a pipe that moves parallel to the E-axis (X-axis), this indicator appears.
Show me
Parallel
Displays when you place an object parallel to another object in your workspace. When
this indicator appears, the software highlights the parallel objects. For example, if you add a
section of pipe that runs parallel to another piece of pipe anywhere in your workspace, this
indicator appears, and both objects are highlighted.

Common User's Guide 406

 Tools Menu

Perpendicular
Displays when you move the pointer so that a perpendicular relationship between two
objects is recognized. For instance, when you connect two pipes at a 90 degree angle, this
indicator appears.
Tangent

Displays when you move the pointer over a point of tangency to an object.
Silhouette edges
Displays when you move the pointer over the silhouette edges of surfaces. The
silhouette edges are the outside edges of the surface with respect to your view.

Minimum/maximum point
Displays when you move the pointer over a point that is the given offset in the locked
direction from the minimum/maximum point on a curve. A projection plane must be defined,
and a line or axis constraint must be locked.
Locate only from list
Specifies that the software locates objects on the SmartSketch list defined when you use
Add to SmarkSketch List . For more information, see Add to SmartSketch List (on page
403).

Common User's Guide 407

 Tools Menu

Dwell time for stack

Specifies the number of seconds that should lapse as you pause the pointer over an object
in the graphic view before that object is added to the stack.
Stack size
Specifies how many objects are added to the stack before the software begins removing
previously added objects. The value in this box must be an integer greater than 1.

 Many of the Add to SmartSketch List controls also are available on the SmartSketch tab
of the Options dialog box.
 You can press F3 to toggle the relationship indicator for locating surfaces on and off.
 Press and hold X to temporarily disable SmartSketch.
 The shortcut keys to turn on SmartSketch select mode are CTRL+D.
 To clear the SmartSketch list, press CTRL + SHIFT + D.
 The shortcut keys to set a lock constraint in SmartSketch are CTRL+L.

Add objects to the SmartSketch list

1. Click Tools > Add to SmartSketch List .
2. Click SmartSketch Properties on the ribbon to change any of the relationship indicator
selections.
3. Click Clears the List to remove all objects from the locate list.

4. Click Locate on List Only to specify that the software locates objects on the list from the
bottom of the list up.
5. Select a number in the List size box to change the maximum number of objects on the
locate list.
6. Type a number in the Dwell time box to specify the time in seconds that you pause over an
object to add it to the locate list.
7. Click Select to choose objects in the graphic view you want to add to the locate list.
8. Click Finish to complete the selection and close the command.

 Many of the Add to SmartSketch List controls also are available on the SmartSketch tab
of the Options dialog box.
 Press CTRL+D to add the selected object to the SmartSketch List.
 Press CTRL+L to lock the constraint in SmartSketch.

Common User's Guide 408

 Tools Menu

Get Point
Locates the centroid of planar faces, cylinders, curves, spheres, boxes, circles, and lines
and places a sphere that provides visual feedback. The Tools > Get Point command prompts
you to select a surface, and then it generates the point that can be used as a SmartSketch
glyph.
View manipulations are currently not possible with the Get Point command.

1. Click Tools > Get Point.

The status bar displays: Select surface to get the center point.

 If you click in the Workspace Explorer, the command continues to wait for a graphical
point on a surface.
 If you click in an empty graphical space, the command continues to wait for a graphical
point on a surface.
 If you move the pointer over various objects in the model, whole objects highlight.
 If you pause over the object where you want to select a specific surface, the QuickPick
question mark appears. Click, and then the QuickPick bar appears.
 If you right-click, the command ends.
 If you click another major command, the command ends.
2. Click on a surface.
The centroid of the surface gets stored as a SmartSketch glyph. The point can then be
picked for any active command that uses the point glyph.

Common User's Guide 409

 Tools Menu

Example Workflow
1. Click Tools > Get Point or use the button on the toolbar.
The Get Point command prompts you to select a surface.
2. Pause over the object where you want to select a specific surface.
The QuickPick question mark appears.

Common User's Guide 410

 Tools Menu

3. Click to display QuickPick.

4. Select the surface where you want to specify a center point.

5. From the Equipment task, click Place Nozzle .

6. Specify the nozzle parent and properties.

Common User's Guide 411

 Tools Menu

7. On the Location tab, choose Position by Point and click OK.

The Place Nozzle command prompts you to specify a point on the parent equipment.
8. Use the SmartSketch glyph to select the center point to place the nozzle.

Common User's Guide 412

 Tools Menu

Point Along
Use the Tools > Point Along command to help you place an object at a specific location
along a path. A path can be along a pipe, duct, cableway, or the intersection line between two
surfaces. You can measure:
 Along object, which is the distance along an element, such as along the surface of a pipe
 Orthogonal, which is the distance in the E-, N-, or EL-axis (X-, Y-, or Z-axis) direction from
the reference point of the active coordinate system last defined by PinPoint.
Select a reference point from which to start measuring. As you move your pointer, the Distance
box on the Point Along ribbon indicates the exact distance from the reference point to the
location of your pointer. Key in a distance in the Distance box to lock your pointer that far from
the reference point.

Point Along Ribbon

Sets options for defining a point at a position along a path.
Reference
Identifies the path along which to measure. A path can be along a pipe, duct, cableway,
seam, or the intersection line between two surfaces.

Reference Point
Identifies a point from which to measure. This point should be located on the reference
element. You can use SmartSketch relationship indicators to assist you when setting the
reference point. To turn on the SmartSketch relationship indicators, use the SmartSketch
tab on the Tools > Options dialog box.
Direction
Identifies the direction in which to measure. You can select Along object, which measures
along a selected element, or you can select the E, N, EL or X, Y, Z-direction to measure
orthogonally.
Step
Specifies a step distance from a reference point. The step distance is the incremental
distance at which the software finds points. For example, if you want to insert valves at
five-foot increments along a pipe, you can use this feature. This value must be a positive
number. This option is not available if you type a value in the Distance box.
Distance
Specifies the distance that you want to measure from the reference point in the specified
direction. Typing a value in this box is optional. If you type a value, it must be greater than
zero. If you do not type a value, the distance from the Reference Point to your pointer
displays.

Common User's Guide 413

 Tools Menu

Place objects along another object

1. Click Tools > Point Along .
2. Start the command to place the new object, for example, Place Tap, Insert Component, or
Place Member.

3. Click Reference on the Point Along ribbon.

4. Select the object along which you want to place the new object. This reference object can
be a pipe or a curve, or you can select an E-, N-, or EL-axis (X-, Y-, or Z-axis).
5. Select a point on the object from which to measure.
6. In the Direction list, select the direction of offset measure. You can select:
 Along object to display the distance along the object from the reference point.
 The E-, N-, or EL-axis (X-, Y-, or Z-axis) options display a distance or point in orthogonal
directions using the active coordinate system defined for the workspace. You can define
the active coordinate system using the PinPoint or Measure commands.
7. Move the pointer along the object to view the distance from the reference point. The
distance appears both in the Distance box and in the active view.
8. Click in the view to define the location of the new object.
If you want to select a second point that is not along the reference object, you must
click Reference on the Point Along ribbon.

Common User's Guide 414

 Tools Menu

Measure
Measures distances and angles between objects in the model, including edges, faces, and
key points.
With the Tools > Measure command, you can:
 Measure the actual 3D linear distance between two points.
 Measure the delta E- (X), N- (Y), and EL- (Z) distance using the last active coordinate
system defined in the PinPoint or Measure commands.
 Measure distance along an object, like the Point Along command, or the entire length of an
object.
 Measure minimum distance between two objects, using the outside surface and not just the
axis.
 Measure the minimum distance between two objects as projected to a selected plane.
 Measure and display hole radius and diameter as well as measure and display fillet radius.
 Measure the actual angle defined by three points.
 Measure angle between lines, using cylinder axes or nozzle axes as reference lines.
 Find SmartSketch points when the software prompts you to locate a start or end point to
measure.
 Copy measurement values from the ribbon. The Measure command also sums repeated
measurements and displays the cumulative results on the ribbon.
When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between the current location of the
pointer and the last point that you clicked displays next to the pointer in text and on the ribbon
along with the delta values. The delta values are the distances, as measured along the E- (X),
N- (Y), and EL- (Z) axes.
You can change the displayed units of measure for distance or angle by using the Tools >
Options command.
You can use the Measure command to set the active coordinate system,
which is a temporary coordinate system with a new origin and axis directions different from
those of the global coordinate system. The active coordinate system affects certain calculations,
such as weight and CG.

Measure Ribbon
Sets options for measuring distances and angles by three-dimensional representation of the E-,
N-, and EL-axes (X-, Y-, and Z-axes).

Coordinate System Properties

Shows properties of the active coordinate system.
Coordinate system
Assigns the coordinate system to use to define the axis directions.

Common User's Guide 415

 Tools Menu

Define Coordinate System by 3 Points

Defines a temporary coordinate system by three points. Point 1 defines the origin of the
coordinate system. Point 2 defines the end of the local E-axis (X-axis). Point 3 defines the
end of the local N-axis (Y-axis).

Measure Distance Between 2 Points

Measures the linear distance between two key points. A key point is any point that you can
highlight with the SmartSketch relationship indicators.

Measure Minimum Distance

Measures the shortest distance between two objects.
The software does not use the SmartSketch list when measuring minimum
distance. The SmartSketch list is used, however, when measuring distance.
Measure Distance Along Element
Measures from a reference point on an element to the last point clicked on the element, or
along the entire element by pressing A on the keyboard. This mode is similar to the Point
Along command.
Measure Radius and Diameter
Measures the diameter or radius of a hole or fillet.
Measure Angle Between 3 Points
Measures the angular value between three key points or two surfaces.
Measure Angle Between Objects
Measures the angle between two objects in the model.
Plane
Measures the minimum distance between two objects as projected to a selected plane. The
following options are available:
 No Plane - Measures the minimum distance between the two objects.
 Plan Plane - Calculates the apparent minimum distance between the two selected
objects. The software calculates the minimum distance along the east and north
coordinates and displays it on the ribbon bar. The minimum distances also displays in
the graphic view using the annotation texts at the middle point of the solid yellow lines.

 Elevation Plane - East West - Calculates the minimum distance along the north
and elevation coordinates and displays it on the ribbon bar. The distance also displays
in the graphic view using the annotation texts at the middle point of the solid yellow
lines.
 Elevation Plane - North South - Calculates the minimum distance along the east
and elevation coordinates and displays it on the ribbon bar. The distance also displays
in the graphic view using the annotation texts at the middle point of the solid yellow
lines.

Common User's Guide 416

 Tools Menu

Clear
Resets the Cumulative box to zero.
Cumulative
Sums repeated measurements until you clear this box or switch between angle and distance
modes.
The remaining controls on the ribbon (defined below) depend on your selection of measuring
distance, minimum distance, or angle.

Measuring Distance
Distance
Displays the distance value. You can specify the units by clicking Tools > Options and
selecting the Units of Measure tab. For more information, see Change a displayed unit of
measure (on page 497).
 East (X)
Displays the distance along the E-axis (X-axis).
 North (Y)
Displays the distance along the N-axis (Y-axis).
 Elevation (Z)
Displays the distance along the EL-axis (Z-axis).

Measuring Minimum Distance

Minimum Distance
Displays the minimum distance value. You can specify the units by clicking Tools >
Options and selecting the Units of Measure tab.
 E (X)
Displays the distance along the E-axis (X-axis).
 N (Y)
Displays the distance along the N-axis (Y-axis).
 EL (Z)
Displays the distance along the EL-axis (Z-axis).

Common User's Guide 417

 Tools Menu

Measuring Radius or Diameter

Radius
Displays the radius of the hole or fillet.

Diameter
Displays the diameter of the object.

Measuring Angles
Angle
Displays the angle measurement. You can specify the units by clicking Tools > Options
and selecting the Units of Measure tab.
Apparent angle
Measures the angle of the lines projected onto the active view plane. If lines intersect
(coplanar), then both the Angle and Apparent angle boxes display values. If lines do not
intersect (are not coplanar), then only the Apparent angle box displays a value.
Copy Measurement
Copies the measurement values from the ribbon.

What do you want to do?

 Define a coordinate system by three points (on page 418)
 Measure an actual distance (on page 419)
 Measure minimum distance (on page 420)
 Measure the distance along an element (on page 423)
 Measure a radius or diameter (on page 425)
 Measure an angle (on page 425)

Common User's Guide 418

 Tools Menu

Define a coordinate system by three points

1. Click Tools > Measure .

2. On the ribbon, click Define Coordinate System by 3 Points .

3. Click the first point to define the origin of the coordinate system.
4. Click the second point to define the end of the local E-axis (X-axis).
5. Click the third point to define the end of the local N-axis (Y-axis).
6. Click a measurement mode on the ribbon, and follow the status bar prompts to begin
measuring.

 You can change the units of measure by clicking Tools > Options. For more information,
see Change a displayed unit of measure (on page 497).
 The measurement information only appears while the command is active. This command
does not write any dimensions or information to the database.
 When you change the coordinate system with the Measure command, you also change it
for the PinPoint command.

Measure an actual distance

1. Click Tools > Measure .

2. On the measure ribbon, click Measure Distance Between 2 Points .

3. Click the first point.

Common User's Guide 419

 Tools Menu

4. Click the second point.

The distance from the first point to the second point appears next to the pointer.

QuickPick is useful in selecting the two points for measurement.

5. Continue clicking in the model for additional measurements, as needed.
The software displays the total distance in the Cumulative box on the ribbon. Click Clear
to reset the Cumulative value to zero.
6. Right-click to quit the Measure command.
You can change the display of the units of measure for the distance by clicking Tools
> Options. For more information, see Change a displayed unit of measure (on page 497).

Measure minimum distance

1. Click Tools > Measure .

2. On the measure ribbon, click Measure Minimum Distance .

3. Optionally, select the plane option to use from the Plane list.

Common User's Guide 420

 Tools Menu

4. Select the first object.

The first object highlights, and the software prompts you to select the second object.

Common User's Guide 421

 Tools Menu

5. Select the second object.

After you select the second object, the software draws a dotted line between the two points
that are the nearest on the objects.

The following details appear on the screen: minimum distance, name of the active
coordinate system, delta along the E-axis (X-axis), delta along the N-axis (Y-axis), and delta
along the EL-axis (Z-axis).

 If you select a third object while in this mode, the software starts a new minimum distance
measurement with the selected object as the first object selection.
 The software recognizes all objects that are displayed. For example, if insulation is
displayed in the active graphic view, the software measures the minimum distance from the
outside surface of the insulation.

Common User's Guide 422

 Tools Menu

Measure the distance along an element

1. Click Tools > Measure .
2. On the measure ribbon, click Measure Distance Along Element .
3. Select the object or object edge to measure along. The edge you select can be straight or
curved.
The edge highlights, and the software prompts you to click a reference point along the edge
from which to measure.

4. Click the reference point, or press A to measure the whole object length.
The software prompts you to select a point along the edge to which to measure.

Common User's Guide 423

 Tools Menu

5. Click the point to measure to.

The distance between the two points displays.

Common User's Guide 424

 Tools Menu

Measure a radius or diameter

1. Click Tools > Measure .
2. On the measure ribbon, click Measure Radius and Diameter.
3. Select a curved object or hole in the model.
The software displays the radius measurement on the ribbon if the curve is not closed. If the
curve is closed, the software displays both the radius and diameter on the ribbon.

Common User's Guide 425

 Tools Menu

Measure an angle
1. Click Tools > Measure .
2. On the ribbon, click Measure Angle Between 3 Points.
3. Place the three points in the model.
The angle between the points appears next to the pointer.

4. Right-click to quit the Measure command.

 When you measure an angle, the Angle and Apparent angle boxes appear on the ribbon.
The Apparent angle box displays the angle of the lines projected onto the active view
plane. If lines intersect (coplanar), then both the Angle and Apparent angle boxes display
values. If lines do not intersect (are not coplanar), then only the Apparent angle box
displays a value.

Common User's Guide 426

 Tools Menu

Checking Interferences
Interference checking (IFC) ensures that parts do not occupy the same volumetric space and
that each part meets the design criteria for clearance. A successful interference check ensures
that there is sufficient space around the parts so that they can operate properly, be serviced
properly, and be easily installed or removed when necessary. The IFC process can look at all
model data, including data from a referenced 3D model, a referenced PDS project (32-bit only),
referenced MicroStation and 3D AutoCAD files, and Point Clouds from third-party software with
valid connections.
There are two methods for interference checking:
 Server-based interference checking called Database Detect. For more information, see
Server-Based Interference Checking (Database Detect).
 Interactive interference checking called Local Detect. For more information, see
The major differences between the two methods are:

Database Detect Local Detect

Runs continuously (System Administrator Works only within the current session
choice)

A dedicated server takes care of the IFC Provides immediate graphical feedback (works
process, minimizing impact on users and immediately after commit.)
improving performance

Creates persistent interferences that are Creates temporary interference markers in a

stored in the Model database user session, which are not stored in the Model
database. After you refresh the workspace, the
temporary markers are removed

Based on administrator settings (controlled Based on individual user settings

by permission groups)

Provides feedback on how much has been Checks only created and modified objects in a
checked in the entire plant model session

Common User's Guide 427

 Tools Menu

Database Detect Local Detect

Interference markers associate and come Clears dynamic interferences after refreshing
into the workspace along with the object workspace
participating in the interference

The SP3D-Foreign Interferences Finds interferences involving referenced 3D

option only checks Smart 3D objects against models, PDS objects, referenced MicroStation
foreign objects. objects, and 3D AutoCAD files in the
workspace without requiring a specific setting
SP3D-Foreign Interferences does not
check for interferences between two foreign
objects.
SP3D-PointCloud Interferences option only
checks objects against point clouds and
Smart 3D.

Includes a referenced point cloud when the Receives the point cloud specification via the
Smart 3D Point Cloud Compare option is File > Define Workspace workflow in Smart
selected in the Project Management 3D when the Smart 3D Point Cloud Compare
interference checking settings. option is selected.

The Database interference checking objects, or markers, appear in the model until other objects
are moved so the interferences no longer exist, or the aspects for the interference process are
changed. It is not possible to delete an interference object in the same way you can delete other
objects in the model. However, you can tailor the display to hide acceptable interferences.
Interference checking can be used with rules in the reference data. The delivered rules include
post-processing rules and clearance rules. For more information about the delivered IFC rules,
see Interference Checking Reference Data in the Interference Checking Guide available from
the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

How Interference Checking Results Appear

The Database Detect process marks any persistent interference with a spherical interference
mark at the location of the interference. For example, the Database Detect service found an
interference between this pipe and this beam, so it placed a spherical interference marker at that
location.

Common User's Guide 428

 Tools Menu

The Local Detect process marks any interference it finds with a cube interference marker. For
example, the software finds an interference and places a cube interference marker where there
is an interference between a pipe and the floor.

For both processes, the color of the marker indicates the type of the interference: red for severe,
green for clearance, and yellow for optional. You can modify the default interference marker
colors with the Format > Surface Style Rules command. You can change the size of both the
Database Detect and Local Detect interference markers using the Marker size option on the
Interference Server Setting dialog box in Project Management task and the Interference
Checking Settings dialog box in the Common task, respectively.

Severe Interference Clearance Interference Optional Interference

You can clear the acceptable interferences from your workspace by changing the required
action on the Interference List Dialog Box, and then editing the display properties on the
Interference Checking Settings Dialog Box.

Common User's Guide 429

 Tools Menu

In general, the software checks the parts involved in interfering objects to find and report the
interferences. For example, if you have a pipe run that consists of a pipe, an elbow, and a pipe,
each intersecting another pipe. The interfering pipe intersects the pipe run at each of the three
positions. The software generates three interferences, and then displays them in the
Interference List dialog box.
If an object has an interference with two other objects, these interferences are listed as two
separate interferences in the Interference List. You can view all possible associated
interferences (selected aspects) of an interference by right-clicking the interference row in the
List view. This action opens the Interference Settings dialog box, and you can then click Other
Aspects to see a list of all the aspects at the interfering location.
When an object is brought into the workspace, all of its associated interferences
appear, even if they are not part of the filter used to define the workspace.

Role of the Administrator

An Administrator can limit the access to interference checking to the proper permission groups.
An Administrator sets up the options for the background interference checking at the beginning
of the project and is the only one permitted to change these options. This capability requires that
an Administrator have read access to all objects in the database for the background interference
checking to work properly. Users do not need to have access to all objects. For more
information, see the Smart 3D Interference Checking Guide available from the Help > Printable
Guides command in the software.
The server-based interference checking process can only be started from a client machine on
which both the Project Management and the Database Interference Detection Process
options are installed. The Administrator can run the detection process on more than one model
simultaneously on the interference server. When an Administrator starts Database Detect,
progress and statistical information is displayed on the Status tab of the dialog box.
Only an Administrator can start the Interference Detection Service (IfcNtSvc)
on the system and set up the Interference Detection process (IFCProcess).

Interference Checking License Management

The interference checking process consumes one license to process five models. It releases a
license for every five models that stop processing. For example, IFC consumes two licenses to
process ten models, one license for processing Model1 through Model5, and then another for
processing Model6 through Model10. Similarly, it releases a license after the sixth model stops
processing, and then another after the remaining models stop processing.

 The IFC service does not consume a license when it starts. It consumes a license only while
processing the model.
 IFC consumes a license for every five models.
 IFC cannot process a new model if a new license is not available.
 If IFC fails to consume or release a license, the software logs error messages in the error
log and in the Event Viewer Application log with the source name IfcNtSvc.
 You cannot set a number for processing models in the registry.
See Also
Checking Interferences Common Tasks (on page 433)

Common User's Guide 430

 Tools Menu

Server-Based Interference Checking (Database Detect)

Unlike the traditional file-based method of manually defining groups of parts to check against
each other, Check Interference is a separate software process that runs directly on the Model
database. Although the interference detection process can be run on any computer with the
Database Interference Detection Service installed, due to the intensive nature of the
interference check computations, the recommendation is to have a computer dedicated as the
interference server.
In order to monitor interferences, you must install the Database Interference
Detection Service option on the same computer that the Project Management option is
installed.

Database detection options are set in the Project Management task. You can also start and stop
the interference detection service in the Project Management task.
Interference detection requires disk space for the file cache that temporarily stores the
interference data. Before starting the interference process, the interference server checks to see
if enough space exists in the TMP location for the file cache. The server also checks to see if
you have the proper permissions to write, read, and delete files in the TMP location. During the
process, if the space becomes too low, the software stops IFC, and then displays an error
message. These checks primarily apply to the server-based interference process. Although,
they can apply to the local checking process if extremely low or no disk space is available for the
temporary folder on the local computer.
Configure automatic disk defragmentation in order to free space for the file
cache.

Common User's Guide 431

 Tools Menu

After you start the process, use the Status tab on the Interference Server Settings dialog box
to monitor the start time, progress of the interference checking, time when the last part was
modified, and the status of the checking. A box at the top of the dialog box identifies the model
that you are checking.
The software automatically checks new or modified objects apart from existing objects. When
you create or modify an object, the software checks for interference against all objects in the
Model database. The interferences generated by this process are persistent; that is, the
interferences are stored in the database like any other objects in the software. You can also
modify these objects by changing the properties. Interferences are also assigned to a
permission group; thereby the entire process is under the control and restrictions of an
administrator.
You can interrupt the automatic interference checking process during a work session without
forcing a recheck of all parts in the database when the process is brought back online. When
you restart the interference check process, the software begins checking where it left off when
the process went offline. However, if you change any of the options on the Interference Server
Settings dialog box for Database Detect, all pre-existing interference checking processes are
cleared from the database, and checking restarts from the beginning.
The server-based interference checking runs continuously. Therefore, you can perform an
interference check at any time and view the interferences of interest that result from the
background check by refreshing the workspace. After you have reviewed the interferences, you
can remove an interference automatically from the database by editing the objects so that the
interference no longer exists. You can then see the results of your edit by refreshing the
workspace. Because certain types of interferences are allowable, you also have the capability to
mark such interferences as acceptable.
Be aware that there is a four minute interval between the time you make your edits and the time
that the database detect service rechecks the objects. After the database detect process
reaches 100%, the software issues a query only every two minutes to locate newly modified
objects. Therefore, it is possible that there is a six minute delay before a modified object is
processed. We do not recommend changing the default four minute interval. However, if you are
in Project Management with the Interference Server Setting dialog box open, press
CTRL+SHIFT+F12 to change the default four minute interval.
When the Database Detect process reaches 100%, it does not mean that all clashes between
Smart 3D and other foreign objects, such as PDS, referenced MicroStation objects, 3D
AutoCAD files, or referenced point cloud objects, have been processed. Here, 100% indicates
that all Smart 3D objects have been processed against each other.
You must run the Database Detect process before running an interference report.
The report is not intended to run on local interferences.

Common User's Guide 432

 Tools Menu

Interactive Interference Checking (Local Detect)

You can start and stop local interference checking from a user workstation. You can start the
local interference checking by selecting the Check Interference command on the Tools menu.
This action invokes the Check Interference ribbon, which provides all the tools required for
setting up and running the local interference checking process.
When you run local interference checking, interferences are calculated on your workstation, not
on the interference-checking server. Therefore, interactive and background interference
checking processes can run simultaneously. Local interference detection is limited to checking
objects that you create or edit while the Local Detect option is turned on. The status of the local
interference check appears in the lower right corner of the application window.
Interactive interference checking provides real-time help through graphical feedback about
potential interferences. You can see the interferences immediately after placing the object in the
model. For example, when routing a pipe, the software checks interferences for that pipe after
the commit to the database.
Because interactive interference checking occurs in real time, the interferences detected
interactively are more current than those detected from background interference checking. You
can view these background interferences from your workstation. If you have appropriate
permissions, you can change the required action of the interferences.
Interactive interference checking only looks for interferences between objects in the active
workspace. Hidden objects are not checked. Thus, what you see is what is checked for
interferences. Interactive interference checking is not persistent. Therefore, if you close and
open or refresh the session file, all the local interferences are removed. However, when you
refresh the session, your local interferences become part of the Model database if server-based
interference checking is running on the same model.

Run Clash Detection Interactively on a Select Set

You can use the S3DFoulCheckCmds.CForceLocalIFCCommand custom command to
process a defined workspace for interference. This command does the following:
 If there is a select set, processes all of the selected objects for clashes against other objects
in the workspace, including those objects in the select set.
 If there is no select set, processes the entire workspace for clashes.
 Turns on the local interference detection to initialize the Local IFC engine.
 Honors your clash detection settings.
This custom command clears any existing local clashes in the workspace, but does
not change the remote clashes created by the IFC remote engine.

Common User's Guide 433

 Tools Menu

Checking Interferences Common Tasks

The following tasks are used frequently when you want to check interferences in your
workspace.

Installing and Configuring Database Interference Detection Service

To install and configure the Database Interference Detection Service, follow these procedures in
order:
Install Database Interference Detection Service
Services Authentication Settings
Configure Interference Service Properties
Start the Database Interference Detection Service
Create IFC Permission Group Folder and Permission Group
Set IFC Permissions
Check Database Interferences

Setting the Local Interference Checking Parameters

You can edit the local interference checking parameters to meet your specific requirements. For
more information, see Set Interference Checking Parameters on a Workstation.

Displaying Interferences
You can control the display of interferences as follows:
 Show all the interferences or only those related to selected objects.
 Hide all the interferences or only those related to selected objects.
 Fit the interferences detected by the software in a view.
For more information, see Control Interference Display.

List Interferences
You can display the list of detected interferences and edit the objects to correct the problem. For
more information, see List interferences.

Change Required Action

You can change the required action for the interferences selected in the graphic or list view. For
more information, see Change Required Action.

Common User's Guide 434

 Tools Menu

Run Report
Runs an existing catalog or personal report. By default, all reports generated with this command
are in Microsoft® Excel format (.xlsx). You can use Tools > Run Report to generate reports in
any of the 3D tasks.
Reports are divided into two overall categories: catalog reports and personal reports. Catalog
reports include report templates delivered with the software and templates that a reports
designer has created. Personal reports use templates you create and save.
Depending on the report definition, you may need to specify additional information such as filters
or parameters when running a report. Here are some examples.
 Specifying a filter on the Select Filter Dialog Box (on page 369).
 Specifying inputs for an asking filter on the Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 371).
 Specifying parameters on the Report Parameters Dialog Box (on page 438).
If a required filter does not exist, a message appears asking you to create the required filter.
When you have provided the necessary information, the command displays the report in Excel.
The Tools > Options command allows you to specify the location of personal report templates
and report output. On the File Locations tab, you can specify Personal Report Templates and
Reports Output locations. You can change these locations to identify any folder accessible
from your computer.
If any errors occur during the processing of a report, the command generates an error log called
SP3DReports.log in your local Temp folder.

 For information about creating the Report databases, see the Smart 3D Installation Guide
available from the Help > Printable Guides in the software.
 In the Drawings and Reports task, you can create, modify, update, save as another file,
print, and run personal reports. Also, you can save reports to the catalog to be used by other
users or publish the reports in an integrated environment. For information on creating report
templates or report deliverables, see the Reports User's Guide.
 Microsoft Excel 32-bit is the supported version for the Drawings and Reports task. Click File
> Excel Options. Go to the Trust Center category and select the Trust Center Settings
button. Select the Macro Settings category and check Trust access to the VBA project
object model.
For more information about Microsoft Office and service packs, refer to the Microsoft web
site (http://www.microsoft.com/).

What do you want to do?

 Run an Existing Catalog Report (on page 440)
 Run an Existing Personal Report (on page 440)

Common User's Guide 435

 Tools Menu

Run Report Dialog Box

Runs a specified type of report. You can select a catalog report from the list on the Catalog
Reports tab, or select a personal report from the list on the My Reports tab. You can also view
the properties of catalog reports.

Topics
Catalog Reports Tab (Run Report Dialog Box) ............................. 436
My Reports Tab (Run Report Dialog Box) .................................... 437

Catalog Reports Tab (Run Report Dialog Box)

Specifies a catalog report template from the list and runs it. All reports are in Microsoft Excel
format (.xls).
If a button is grayed out, it is not available with the Run Report command. You can
create new report templates in the Drawings and Reports task.
Available report templates
Lists all of the catalog report templates currently available in an expandable hierarchy.
For a listing of which engineering check report to run for which piping part class,
refer to the "Engineering Check Reports: Piping Parts" topic in the Catalog User's Guide.
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box. For more information, see Properties Dialog Box (on page
438).
List view
Displays the template properties in a list format.
Grid view
Displays the template properties in a grid format.
File name
Displays a descriptive name for the report output file.
Browse
Displays the Select Report dialog so you can open a report from a different location.
Use Select Set
Specifies that the report only return records associated with the objects in the select set.
Run
Runs the selected report. If the report requires additional input, such as a filter or parameter,
the command displays the necessary dialog boxes, such as the Select Filter Dialog Box (on
page 369), Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 371), and Report Parameters Dialog Box
(on page 438).
When creating a Catalog filter, filter names are case-sensitive.

Common User's Guide 436

 Tools Menu

My Reports Tab (Run Report Dialog Box)

Selects a personal report template from the list and runs it. All reports are in Microsoft Excel®
format (.xls). You can create and modify report templates in the Drawings and Reports task and
save them to the catalog. Set the Personal Report Template option on the Tools > Options >
File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 510) to the location of your personal report
(.rtp) files.
Available report templates
Lists all of your personal report templates currently available.
File name
Displays a descriptive name for the report output file.
Browse
Displays the Select Report dialog so you can open a report template from a different
location.
Use Select Set
Specifies that the report only return records associated with the objects in the select set.
Run
Runs the selected report. If the report requires additional input, such as a filter or parameter,
the command displays the necessary dialog boxes, such as the Select Filter Dialog Box (on
page 369), Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 371), and Report Parameters Dialog Box
(on page 438).
When creating a Catalog filter, filter names are case-sensitive.

Common User's Guide 437

 Tools Menu

Report Parameters Dialog Box

Specifies parameters for a report deliverable, such as units of measure and coordinate systems.
This dialog box only appears when you run a report that requires input for the parameters. In
addition, the controls on this dialog box may vary, depending on the report definition. For more
information on configuring parameters for a report, see Designing Report Layout in the Reports
User's Guide.
Unit of Measure
Sets the units of measure for the report.
Matrix
Specifies information about the coordinate system.

 For some reports, several dialog boxes requiring report parameters appear. The dialog
boxes take the form of a wizard with Back, Next, and Finish buttons at the bottom.
 The query you set up for running a report can generate dialog boxes that prompt for certain
report parameters. In this way, your query can customize the report creation.
See Also
Run Report (on page 434)

Properties Dialog Box

Displays the general properties and configuration of a selected report or label. This dialog box
does not allow you to change the properties of the template.

Topics
Definition Tab (Properties Dialog Box) .......................................... 438
Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 439

Definition Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the general properties and property values of a selected report template.
Property
Displays the properties of a selected report template. These properties typically include the
template name, description, and type. The type can be a standard report template or a
catalog report template.
Value
Displays the value of each property that appears in the Property column.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 438)

Common User's Guide 438

 Tools Menu

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access
level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Common User's Guide 439

 Tools Menu

Run an Existing Catalog Report

1. Click Tools > Run Report.
2. On the Run Report dialog box, go to the Catalog Reports tab.
3. Expand the tree view to select the category for your report (such as Piping or Equipment),
and select the report template you want to use.
4. Optionally, type a name for the output file in the File name box, and click Browse to locate
the report template to use.
5. To run the report on objects in the select set, check the Use Select Set option.
6. Click Run. If the report requires additional input, such as a filter or parameter, the command
displays the necessary dialog boxes, such as the Select Filter Dialog Box (on page 369),
Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 371), and Report Parameters Dialog Box (on page
438).

 Before running a report, confirm your system administrator has created the necessary
reporting databases; that is, the Reports database must exist before you can run a report.
 If you attempt to run a report template but the Reports database does not exist, the software
displays the message Cannot get Reports Database connection. Contact your system
administrator for the prerequisite databases.
 You can define the path to your output report in advance by clicking Tools > Options and
then selecting the File Locations tab.
 Some templates require you provide some additional information. This information is based
on the particular criteria you select for your report.
 Reports in .xls format can have a maximum of 65,536 rows. If a report reaches the
maximum, a message in the error log of the software alerts you: Excel sheet limit (65,536
rows) was reached. Change the format to .xls to avoid the row limit.
 If you click No to avoid overwriting an existing report, the software displays the Browse
dialog box so you can specify a different report name.
See Also
Run Report (on page 434)

Run an Existing Personal Report

1. Set the Personal Report Template option on the Tools > Options File Location tab to the
location of your personal report (.rpt) files.
2. Click Tools > Run Report.
3. On the Run Report dialog box, go to the My Reports tab.
4. Select the report template you want to run.
5. Type a name for the output file in the File name box.

Common User's Guide 440

 Tools Menu

6. To access folders with available reports you have created, click the Browse button and
locate the file with the Select Report dialog box.
7. Click Run. If the report requires additional input, such as a filter or parameter, the command
displays the necessary dialog boxes, such as the Select Filter Dialog Box (on page 369),
Filter Properties Dialog Box (on page 371), and Report Parameters Dialog Box (on page
438).

 If you attempt to run a report template but the Reports database does not exist, the software
displays the message Cannot get Reports Database connection. Contact your system
administrator for the prerequisite databases.
 Because each user can generate personal reports, the My Reports folder is initially empty.
 You can add report files to the personal report template folder either by copying the files to
the folder or with the Save Report Template As command. For more information, see Save
Report Template As (File Menu) in the Smart 3D Reports User's Guide.
 If you click No to avoid overwriting an existing report, the software displays the Browse
dialog box so you can specify a different report name.
 Reports in .xls format can have a maximum of 65,536 rows. If a report reaches the
maximum, a message in the error log of the software alerts you: Excel sheet limit (65,536
rows) was reached. Change the format to .xls to avoid the row limit.
See Also
Run Report (on page 434)

Common User's Guide 441

 Tools Menu

Drawing Console
Allows you to create new drawings and manage existing drawings without switching to the
Drawings and Reports task. You can edit and update drawing documents through using the
Tools > Drawing Console command. The Drawing Console is a free-floating, resizable form
which shows you the same hierarchy of folders and components as you see in the Management
Console in the Drawings and Reports task. Unlike the Drawings and Reports task where the
documents are displayed in the Detail View, drawing and report documents are included in the
Drawing Console hierarchy.
The Drawing Console allows you perform the same operations as the Management Console
with a few exceptions:
 Spreadsheet report documents have no Edit Template command. Go to the Drawings and
Reports task to edit the templates.
 The Open command is not available on drawing documents. Right-click a drawing and
select Edit to open it in SmartSketch Drawing Editor.
 You create new composed drawings by right-clicking the composed drawing component and
selecting New Drawing on the shortcut menu.

Commands Available Through the Drawing Console

Command Description

Copy Copies the Console hierarchy from the selected component down. The
copy command does not copy documents.

Copy Report to Copies a modified report template to the catalog so it can be used by
Catalog other users.

Create Document Generates the drawings that have not previously been created.

Create Report Specifies a report template and then generates a report for the selected
spreadsheet component.

Delete Removes an item and its sub-items from the hierarchy and the
database.

Edit Opens a drawing document in SmartSketch Drawing Editor for editing.

Edit Options Sets various options that affect piping isometric drawing output, such as
dimension styles, layers, drawing frame text, material lists, and weld
lists. Displays the Isometric Style Options Browser.

Edit Template Allows you to modify a template for a volume drawing component in
SmartSketch Drawing Editor.

New Create a new folder or component in the hierarchy.

Common User's Guide 442

 Tools Menu

Command Description

New Drawing Creates a new composed drawing. This command is only available on
the shortcut menu for a selected Composed Drawing component.

Parameters Specifies the parameters for a report, such as units of measure and
coordinate systems.

Paste Inserts the last-copied contents into the hierarchy, modifies the template
information, or creates drawing volumes, depending on the component
you have selected.

Print The simple Print command sends a print request for the selected
Batch > Print documents to the default printer. The Batch > Print command allows you
to submit document files directly to a print queue for a printer or
schedule the document files to be sent to the print queue at a later date
or at recurring intervals. If the Batch command is not available, you are
not configured to use batch processing. Contact your administrator for
more information.

Properties Views and edits properties for the selected document.

Publish Publishes the information in the selected documents. You can access
the Publish Documents command by right-clicking a component or
document. This command is only available if you are registered to work
in an integrated environment.

Refresh Compares the date of the last update of the document with the
Batch > Refresh modification date in the model for any object that has a positive (can be
seen) resymbolization in the drawing. The Batch > Refresh command
allows you to refresh documents on a Batch Server while you continue
to work on other tasks. If the Batch command is not available, you are
not configured to use batch processing. Contact your administrator for
more information. The Refresh and Batch > Refresh commands are not
available for Spreadsheet Report documents.

Rename Activates the name of an item in the hierarchy so you can type a
different name.

Revise Reserves revision numbers. This command is only available if you are
registered to work in an integrated environment.

Run Query Runs the query associated with the selected Drawings by Query
Manager component.

Save As Saves drawings and reports as specified file types to an external

location, such as a share on another server.

Common User's Guide 443

 Tools Menu

Command Description

Save Package Saves the console hierarchy from the selected component down. The
package saves the setup information and any template definitions that
may exist on nodes within the selected hierarchy.

Save As SmartPlant Saves a 3D Model Data document as a SmartPlant Review file.

Review

Setup Defines the options for a component, such as the Drawings by Query
components or the 3D Model Data component.

Update The Update Document(s) and Update commands query the model to
Update Now regenerate a single document or multiple documents. The Update Now
Update Documents command always performs a complete regeneration on the local
Batch > Update machine for a single selected drawing. The Batch > Update command
Batch > Local Update allows you to update documents on a Batch Server while you continue to
work on other tasks. The Batch > Local Update command is a special
batch command available on a document, allowing you to
background-process the update of the document. If the Batch
commands are not available, you are not configured to use batch
processing. Contact your administrator for more information.

View Log Displays the log information for the selected document.

View Extraction Data Displays part and report information for a line that has been processed.
You can view the log file and Piping Component File (PCF) data for the
extraction. This command is available for Piping Isometric Drawings
only.

See Also
Snapshot View (on page 444)

Common User's Guide 444

 Tools Menu

Snapshot View
Creates a view and a volume you can place on a drawing sheet when editing a composed
drawing. You can choose a snapshot view by selecting the available snapshot commands:
 All Objects - Displays all objects in the view.

 Visible Objects Only - Displays only the visible objects in the view. Objects that are
partially visible when the snapshot is taken are captured in the drawing, even if it includes
hidden edges. For example, if a pipe has visible and hidden edges, the hidden edges are
also included in the view.

Common User's Guide 445

 Tools Menu

When you select Tools > Snapshot View > All Objects, a ribbon appears allowing you to pick
a composed drawing component, name the snapshot view, and assign a view style. When you
select Tools > Snapshot View > Visible Objects Only, a composed drawing sheet must be
selected, and a ribbon appears allowing you to name the snapshot view and assign a view style.
After you select the information you want, the software captures the view when you click Finish.
The view is associated with the composed drawing component you selected on the ribbon, or
with the selected composed drawing sheet.
You can create additional snapshot views by updating the graphic view contents and then
clicking Finish again.

 You must have appropriate permissions to access composed drawing types, or you cannot
use the Snapshot View command. If you have only read permission, you receive a
message that alerts you to this condition.
 We highly recommend you use clipping to produce better results in your snapshot views. If
the graphic view is clipped, the volume created uses the clipping boundaries as its volume
boundaries. If the view is not clipped, then the command uses the extents of the graphic
view window as its top/bottom/left/right boundaries and the range of the objects as its front
and back boundaries.
After you create the snapshot views, you can use the Tools > Drawing Console command to
edit a composed drawing in SmartSketch Drawing Editor, then place snapshot views using
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Place Snapshot View command. For more information on creating
drawings in a 3D task, see Drawing Console (on page 441). For additional information on the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor commands, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.

Snapshot View Ribbon

Sets options for snapshot views. You can place snapshot views on composed drawings when
you open them in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. You display this ribbon by selecting Tools >
Snapshot View.
Finish
Saves the snapshot view with the options you specified on this ribbon. If you are using
Visible Objects Only, clicking Finish opens the selected drawing and starts the Place
Snapshot View command.

Selected Set
Indicates that the snapshot view should only include selected objects. For example, if a view
contains a pipe and a pump, but this toggle is activated and only the pump is selected, only
the pump is included in the updated drawing. This option is only available for the All
Objects command.
Drawing type
Displays the last ten composed drawing selections you have made. Select a composed
drawing type to associate with the snapshot view. Select More for an extended list of
composed drawing types. This option is only available for the All Objects command.

Common User's Guide 446

 Tools Menu

View name
Specifies a name for the snapshot view. You can type a maximum of 40 characters for the
view name. When you place the snapshot view in a drawing open in SmartSketch Drawing
Editor, this is the view name you want to associate with your snapshot drawing view. For
information on the Place Snapshot View command, see the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Naming rule
Select a naming rule to name the snapshot view. The last rule that you selected is displayed
as the default. To override this default, you can select a different naming rule. Select More
for an extended list of naming rules.
View style
Displays the last style you selected. You can specify a different view style to control the
appearance of objects in the finished drawing. Select More for an extended list of view
styles. You can create and edit view styles in the Drawings and Reports task.
Space folder
Specifies the Space folder where you want to store the drawing volume created by the
command.
Generate Preview
If checked, displays a preview of the snapshot view when you click Finish. This option is
only available when you create a snapshot view with the All Objects command.

Create a snapshot view containing all objects

Before using the Tools > Snapshot View > All Objects command in the Common task, a
composed drawing component must exist. If one does not exist, you can create a composed
drawing component using the Tools > Drawing Console command. For more information, see
Drawing Console (on page 441).
1. In the Common task, use commands such as Define Workspace, Clip by Object,
Show/Hide, or Named Views to manipulate the view to produce the view that you want to
capture.
2. From any 3D modeling task, click Tools > Snapshot View > All Objects.
The Snapshot View ribbon appears.
3. Select the composed drawing component you want in the Drawing type box. Select More
to display the Select Drawing Type dialog box for more options.
4. Type a name for the view in the View name box. When you place the snapshot view in a
drawing open in SmartSketch Drawing Editor, this is the view name you want to associate
with your snapshot drawing view. If you prefer to use a naming rule, select one from the
Naming rule drop-down.

 You can type a maximum of 40 characters for a view name.

 If you select User Defined as the view name, the Finish button disables after you click
it the first time. You have to key in a different name. If you use a naming rule, the
software automatically moves to the next name based on the rule.

Common User's Guide 447

 Tools Menu

5. Select a drawing view style in the View style box. You can use any orthographic view style.
6. In the Space folder field, specify where you want the snapshot view volume stored. Select
More to display the Select Space Folder dialog box for a list of available folders.
7. Click Finish to store the snapshot view.
The software creates a volume for the view. You can view the volume listed on the Space
tab of Workspace Explorer.
You can create additional snapshot views by updating the graphic view contents
and then clicking Finish again.
You can now open an existing composed drawing or create a new composed drawing and place
snapshot views using the Place Snapshot View command in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. For
more information on creating drawings in a 3D modeling task, see Drawing Console (on page
441). For additional information on the SmartSketch Drawing Editor commands, see the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Help.

 You must have appropriate permissions to access composed drawing types, or you cannot
use the Snapshot View command. If you have only read permission, you receive a
message that alerts you to this condition.
 We highly recommend you use clipping to produce better results in your snapshot views. If
the graphic view is clipped, the volume created uses the clipping boundaries as its volume
boundaries. If the view is not clipped, then the command uses the extents of the graphic
view window as its top/bottom/left/right boundaries and the range of the objects as its front
and back boundaries.

Create a snapshot view containing only visible objects

Before using the Tools > Snapshot View > Visible Objects Only command in the Common
task, a composed drawing sheet must exist.
1. In the Common task, use commands such as Define Workspace, Clip by Object,
Show/Hide, or Named Views to manipulate the view to produce the view that you want to
capture.
2. From any 3D modeling task, click Tools > Snapshot View > Visible Objects Only.
The Snapshot View ribbon appears.
If a composed drawing is not already open, the Select Drawing dialog box
displays. Select a composed drawing sheet and click OK.
3. Type a name for the view in the View name box. When you place the snapshot view in a
drawing open in SmartSketch Drawing Editor, this is the view name you want to associate
with your snapshot drawing view. If you prefer to use a naming rule, select one from the
Naming rule drop-down.

 You can type a maximum of 40 characters for a view name.

 If you select User Defined as the view name, the Finish button disables after you click
it the first time. You have to key in a different name. If you use a naming rule, the
software automatically moves to the next name based on the rule.

Common User's Guide 448

 Tools Menu

4. Select a drawing view style in the View style box. You can use any orthographic view style.
5. In the Space folder field, specify where you want the snapshot view volume stored. Select
More to display the Select Space Folder dialog box for a list of available folders.
6. Click Finish to store the snapshot view.
The selected composed drawing sheet opens.
7. Use the Place Snapshot View command to place the snapshot view on the drawing sheet.
Click and drag the mouse on the drawing sheet to place the view.
8. Specify the snapshot view properties in the Snapshot View ribbon displayed above the
drawing area.
You can right-click the view, and then select Properties to change the style or
scale used in the snapshot view.
When the view is placed, it is automatically updated.
We highly recommend you use clipping to produce better results in your snapshot
views. If the graphic view is clipped, the volume created uses the clipping boundaries as its
volume boundaries. If the view is not clipped, then the command uses the extents of the
graphic view window as its top/bottom/left/right boundaries and the range of the objects as
its front and back boundaries.

Select View Style Dialog Box

Specifies a view style to associate with the snapshot view you are creating. This dialog box
opens when you click More in the View Style box while you are completing the Tools >
Snapshot View command. Before you create a snapshot view using this command, you must
have added at least one composed drawing component using the Tools > Drawing Console
command. The Choose View Style dialog box provides a tree view to select the view style that
you want. For more information, see Drawing Console (on page 441).

Select Drawing Type Dialog Box

Specifies a composed drawing component to associate with the snapshot view you are creating.
This dialog box opens when you click More in the Drawing Type field while you are completing
the Tools > Snapshot View command. Before you create a snapshot view using this command,
you must add at least one composed drawing component using the Tools > Drawing Console
command. The Select Drawing Type dialog box provides a tree view to select the type you
want.

Select Naming Rules Dialog Box

Specifies a naming rule that assigns a name to the snapshot view you are creating with the
Tools > Snapshot View command. The last naming rule you selected serves as the default. If
you select More, the Select Naming Rules dialog box opens and provides additional options.
Before you create a snapshot view using this command, you must have added at least one
composed drawing component using the Tools > Drawing Console command. For more
information, see Drawing Console (on page 441).

Common User's Guide 449

 Tools Menu

Select Space Folder Dialog Box

Specifies a parent for a folder or volume in the space hierarchy. This dialog box appears when
you select More in the Parent box on the Create Space Folder ribbon. When you select More
in the Space folder boxes on the volume creation and modification ribbons.
Look In
Specifies from which location you want the software to pull hierarchical information. You can
retrieve hierarchical information from the workspace or from the entire model database.

Common User's Guide 450

 Tools Menu

Custom Commands
Provides end-user application programming capability for the 3D software. Using Microsoft®
Visual Basic, you can create a custom command that groups a series of commands and
instructions into a single command that runs as an operation in the 3D software. As a result, you
can access the customized commands that directly relate to the work routine in your operation.
Use the Visual Basic Command Wizard to help you build a custom command. For example,
the wizard's first step prompts you to identify general information including command name,
project name, author, and company. Start the wizard in Visual Basic by clicking Command
Wizard on the Add-Ins menu. For more information about installing the Command Wizard and
other programming resources, see the Intergraph SmartTM 3D Installation Guide, available by
clicking Help > Printable Guides in the software.
After adding a custom command in the 3D software, you can edit it using the Edit Custom
Command dialog box which requires you to specify the program identifier (prog_id), command
name and description, command priority, and a command line of arguments in a string.

Delivered Custom Commands

The following list provides descriptions and ProgIDs for the delivered custom commands. For
more information consult the Database Integrity (DBI) Guide and the Common User's Guide
(Tools Menu > Custom Commands). Both are available from Help > Printable Guides.

Custom Command Check Database Integrity

ProgID SP3DCheckDatabaseIntegrity.CCheckObj

Description Creates records for the objects that need to be cleaned. Run this
custom command directly on a database (Site, Catalog, or Model).
Then, you can generate a report to review the errors that the Check
Database Integrity command generated.
For more information on this command, see the Database Integrity
Guide.

Custom Command Clean Database

ProgID SP3DCleanDatabaseCmd.CCheckObj

Description Deletes or cleans an object. Use this command when an action on the
Check Database Integrity report is To Be Removed or To Be
Repaired.
For more information on deleting and cleaning objects in the database,
see the Database Integrity Guide.

Custom Command Create Drawing View

Common User's Guide 451

 Tools Menu

ProgID MenuDrawView.CMenuDrawView

Description Saves and converts the contents of a three-dimensional graphic view

window into a snapshot view. This command creates a rectangular
object associated to a clipping volume, or volumes, in the
three-dimensional model.
Before you create a snapshot view using this command, you must
have added at least one composed drawing type to the Management
Console in the Drawings and Reports task.
You can save additional views by updating the view contents and then
saving the new design. If you used the Tools > Hide command to
avoid displaying certain objects, those objects are included in a
composed drawing you create.
To use the Tools > Snapshot View command, you must have
appropriate permissions to access composed drawing types. If you
have only read permission, you receive a message that alerts you to
this condition.
After you create the snapshot views, you can add them to composed
drawings when you use the Tools > Drawings Console command.

Custom Command Duplicate Part Numbers

ProgID DuplicatePartNumbers,Ingr.SP3D.ProjectMgmt.Client.Commands.Dup
licatePartNumbersCommand

Description Repairs duplicate parts that exist in the catalog, including any proxies
that might also exist in all the associated models. The command is
available only when you have selected a catalog in the Project
Management tree.
In a Global Workshare environment, you must run
this command only from the Host location.

Custom Command Find Object by OID

ProgID SP3DFindObjectByReport.FindObjects

Description Finds objects with integrity problems in a graphic view. Before running
this command, you must define your workspace to include these
objects. Run a database integrity report, and use the reported OIDs of
the objects in the workspace definition.
For more information on this command, see the Database Integrity
Guide.

Common User's Guide 452

 Tools Menu

Custom Command Fix Project Root

ProgID SP3DPRJMGTRepairCmd.FixCnfgProjectRoot

Description Synchronizes the model name in the Model database and the Site
database. The name in the Site database prevails.
You must run this command from a task in the model, not from Project
Management.

Custom Command Large Sector Utility

ProgID DwgBinaryEditorCmd.FixSectorSize

Description Converts existing production drawings from a small to a larger sector

format to avoid exceeding Microsoft structured storage limits and
causing errors to occur.

Custom Command Model Data Reuse (MDR) Validation Tool

ProgID MDRValidation.CValidateGeometry

Description Helps you in analyzing the MDR results. If MDR is performed across
models, you must run this tool on both the source and the destination
models to enable analysis of the results. The tool locates the objects in
the model that failed to copy as well as the objects that have a data
mismatch with the source and the destination.

Custom Command Modify Style

ProgID ModifyStyleCmd.ModifyStyles

Description Modifies system-based styles existing in a custom model database.

For information on creating correct style colors, see Format Style (on
page 321).
For older databases (created before version 06.00.22xx), run this
custom command to update the database; then exit the application.
Delete the old session file and open with a new session file. The new
colors are available.
New databases (created after version 06.00.22xx) automatically use
the corrected colors.

Common User's Guide 453

 Tools Menu

Custom Command Place Piles

ProgID PileFoundation,PileFoundation.PileFoundation

Description Provides a placement wizard to facilitate the modeling of pile

members. Through the Place Piles command, you can specify the
number of piles in each direction as well as edge clearances and
depth dimensions. You can also specify the member cross section and
material for the piles.

Custom Command Placing Supports from XLS

ProgID PlacingSupportsFromXLS,PlacingSupportsFromXLS.PlacingSupports
FromXLS

Description Places support information from an .xls file into Smart 3D. You must
run this command from Smart 3D, and not from Project Management.
For more information, see Placing Supports from XLS Command in
the Smart 3D Hangers and Supports User's Guide.

Custom Command Remove Design Basis

ProgID IMSEngFrameworkCmd.RemoveDsgnBasis

Description Removes all correlation relationships and then deletes all design basis
objects in the 3D model.
This command is useful when you want to register to a different
SmartPlant foundation database.
After running this command, you must register the model, retrieve
information, and correlate the objects again.
You must run this command from a task in the model, not from Project
Management.

Custom Command Repair Documents

ProgID DwgRepairCmd.RepairDocuments

Common User's Guide 454

 Tools Menu

Description Updates invalid Styles.sha or Symbol Browser file paths on a

document or a set of documents. Invalid file paths can occur when you
change the symbol share. This causes overhead while editing, saving,
or updating documents.

Custom Command Repair Duplicate Permission Group ID

ProgID RepairDuplicatePermissionGrpID,Ingr.SP3D.ProjectMgmt.Client.Com
mands.
RepairDuplicatePermissionsGrpIDCommand

Description Lists all catalogs and models that have a duplicate permission group
ID.
Select the catalogs and models to repair. You cannot select all of the
databases under a particular duplicate permission group ID.
This command can only be invoked from Project Management.
This command cannot be run from a Satellite location. You should run
this command only from the Host location.

Custom Command Repair Permission Groups

ProgID PermissionGroupsAndLocations,Ingr.SP3D.ProjectMgmt.Client.Comm
ands.PermissionGroupsAndLocationsCommand

Description Repairs the corrupted relationship between permission groups and the
location for both catalog and model permission groups.
If a permission group has lost the relationship with a location or has
multiple relationships, then this command re-establishes a proper
relation. This command cannot be run from a Satellite location. You
should run this command only from the Host location.
Users with full permissions in the corrupted permission
group can only re-establish the relationship.

Custom Command Repair Style Path

ProgID DwgRepairCmd.RepairDocuments

Description Fixes Symbol and Style paths on RAD documents.

Common User's Guide 455

 Tools Menu

Custom Command Reset Design Basis Time

ProgID IMSEngFrameworkCmd.EngFrameworkCmdArgument=ResetDesignB
asisTime

Description Modifies the Design Basis timestamp. Use this command to set the
time and date back to a point in the past. This command is useful if, for
any reason, delete instructions could not be processed.

Custom Command Reset Symbol Definition

ProgID SymbolTestCmds.CResetSymbolDefinition

Description Resets the input, aspect, and output information of a symbol definition
in the model database, which is useful for symbol development. After
the symbol is in production, this command should not be used to reset
the symbol definition data.
This command should not be used in production databases.

Custom Command Synchronize Drawing Component Templates

ProgID DwgSynchTemplatesCmd.SynchTemplates

Description Repairs a drawing component that has become corrupted by

synchronizing it with a different, uncorrupted drawing component. This
command requires that the source component is the same type as the
corrupted component, and that the source component cannot be
corrupted. Also, the number of views on the source component must
be the same as the number of views on the corrupted component. The
names of the views on the source component must match the view
names of the corrupted component.

Custom Command Synchronize Drawing Templates

ProgID DwgSynchTemplatesCmd.SynchTemplates

Description Synchronizes, or copies, a template from one drawing component to

another.

Custom Command Verify P&ID Integrity

Common User's Guide 456

 Tools Menu

ProgID SP3DDisplayPIDService.VerifyPIDCmd

Description Validates the internal connections between objects on a P&ID and

objects in the Model database. This command is useful when there is
a problem displaying a P&ID or selecting objects on a P&ID. The
command provides some basic troubleshooting statistics: number of
design basis objects, number of 3D objects (correlated), number of
P&ID objects, number of deleted P&ID OIDs, and number of duplicate
OIDs.

Custom Command Profile Auto Bound

ProgID mhprofileautobound.AutoBoundProfile

Description Creates mutual bounding between stiffeners profiles or profile edge

reinforcements present on the chute plates. The command requires
that the chute plates be mutually bounded to each other and that the
distance between the stiffener\edge reinforcement is between 0 to
0.01m.

Custom Command Audit Tool

ProgID stAnalysisTool.AuditTool

Description Compares two databases using an SQL query. The databases can be
on different servers and have different catalog schema. Changed
objects can be displayed in the workspace of the current model. This
command is useful after performing a migration, synchronization, or
hull swap.

Custom Command Compart Query Service

ProgID CompartQuery.CCompartQueryCmd

Description Provides queries on compartments, objects, geometry and loads. You

can save a .SAT file from the geometry queries.

Custom Command Copy By Family Manual Find

ProgID StructCopyFamilyFind.ManualFindCMD

Common User's Guide 457

 Tools Menu

Description Manually finds structural objects that are similar and meet the criteria
of the Source Group and the Target group in Family Definition. For
more information, see Copy By Family Manual Find Custom in the
Molded Forms User's Guide.

Custom Command GC Menu

ProgID GCMenu.Activate

Description Places the GC menu on the software toolbar. This menu contains
commands for creating geometric constructions, GC sets, and GC
macros. For more information, see Geometric Construction Macros
(GC Menu) in the Molded Forms User's Guide.

Custom Command Verify Seam Pattern to Split

ProgID SplitCommands.VerifySeamPatternToSplit

Description Checks the status of seams and plates split by the seams. This
command provides a count of successful and failed splits, and
modified, new, identical, and deleted leaf systems. You can also
display the objects affected by the seams by selecting one or more of
the following options: Identical Bodies (Green), Modified Bodies
(Yellow), New Bodies (Red), Deleted Bodies (White), or Bad
Splitters (Blue). This command is useful when swapping an old
imported hull system with a new hull. For more information, see Swap
Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay in the Molded
Forms User's Guide.

What do you want to do?

 Create custom commands (on page 459)
 Add custom commands (on page 459)
 Run a custom command (on page 459)
 Edit a custom command (on page 460)
 Delete a custom command (on page 460)

Common User's Guide 458

 Tools Menu

Create custom commands

1. Open Microsoft® Visual Basic.
2. In Visual Basic, click Add-Ins > Command Wizard.
3. Complete all steps on each page of the Command Wizard.

 You do not create custom commands within the software. You create them in Visual
Basic using the Command Wizard.
 You must install the Command Wizard software in Visual Basic. The setup for the
Command Wizard (SP3DCommandWizardV2.exe) is located in the [Product
Folder]\Programming\Tools\CommandWizard folder.

Add custom commands

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
2. On the Custom Commands dialog box, click Add.
3. On the Add Custom Command dialog box, type the program identifier you assigned to the
®
command in Microsoft Visual Basic in the Command ProgID box.
4. Type the name you assigned to the command in the Command name box.
5. Type a phrase that describes the command in the Description box.
6. If necessary, change the option in the Priority section.
7. Type command line arguments in a string in the Argument box.
After you complete this procedure, the Custom Commands dialog box lists the
command you added to the software. You can run the command, edit the settings, or delete
the command.

Run a custom command

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
The Custom Commands dialog box opens.
2. To start a custom command you created, select the command in the list box, and click Run.
3. After the command runs, click Close on the Custom Commands dialog box.

Common User's Guide 459

 Tools Menu

Edit a custom command

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
The Custom Commands dialog box opens.
2. To change the options for a custom command, select the command in the list box, and click
Edit. For example, you can change the name and description of the command.
3. After completing the needed changes, click Close on the Custom Commands dialog box.
You must open the command in Microsoft® Visual Basic if you want to edit the
underlying code.

Delete a custom command

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
The Custom Commands dialog box opens.
2. Select the command in the list box, and click Delete. The software removes the command
from the list box; however, the command code is not deleted.
3. After completing the needed changes, click Close on the Custom Commands dialog box.
This action does not delete the DLL for the custom command. It just removes access
to the custom command from the user interface.
See Also
Custom Commands Dialog Box (on page 460)
Add Custom Command Dialog Box (on page 461)
Edit Custom Command Dialog Box (on page 461)

Custom Commands Dialog Box

Adds and edits customized commands you have created with the Command Wizard in
Microsoft® Visual Basic. For information on creating custom commands, see Create custom
commands (on page 459).
Command names
Lists the names of commands that have been added.
Run
Starts the custom command you select in the list box. For more information, see Run a
custom command (on page 459).
Close
Cancels the Custom Commands dialog box.
Edit
Opens the Edit Custom Command dialog box. You can change settings for the command,
such as the program identifier (prog_ID) and command name. For more information, see
Edit a custom command (on page 460).

Common User's Guide 460

 Tools Menu

Add
Installs the custom command into the software. For more information, see Add custom
commands (on page 459).
Delete
Removes the custom command from the software. For more information, see Delete a
custom command (on page 460).
Clear
Deletes the information you have typed in the boxes on the Custom Commands dialog
box.
Description
Contains an identifying phrase so you can better recognize the custom command with which
you are working

Add Custom Command Dialog Box

Accesses a customized command you created in Microsoft® Visual Basic and saves the
command within the software.
Command ProgID
Identifies the program identifier for the custom command you created in Visual Basic.
Command name
Specifies the name you assigned to the custom command.
Description
Describes the custom command.
Priority
Assigns a priority of High, Normal, or Low.
Argument
Specifies command line arguments in a string.

Edit Custom Command Dialog Box

Changes options for a customized command you added to the software.
Command ProgID
Specifies the program identifier for the custom command you created in Microsoft® Visual
Basic.
Command name
Provides a text box for you to change the name you assigned to the custom command.
Description
Provides a text box to provide a descriptive phrase for the custom command.

Common User's Guide 461

 Tools Menu

Priority
Changes priority to High, Normal, or Low.
Argument
Change the command line arguments in a string.
Reset Default
Returns the dialog box to its default settings.

Common User's Guide 462

 Tools Menu

Utility
Provides specialized utility and maintenance commands. To access the commands, select
Tools > Utilities, and then click the needed command.

Synchronize Workspace with Catalog

Updates selected items in the Model database with all changes from the Catalog database,
including property, specification, and symbol changes. You access the command by selecting
Tools > Utilities > Synchronize with Catalog. For more information, see "Synchronize Model
with Catalog Command" in the Project Management User's Guide.
By synchronizing only selected objects in the model, the amount of time it takes to
synchronize with the catalog is greatly reduced. This command differs from the Synchronize
Model with Catalog command used in the Project Management task to synchronize all model
objects with the current catalog database.
The Synchronize with Catalog command updates select objects in the following states:
 The model object is out-of-date on the To Do List.
 The model object is in error on the To Do List.
 The model object is flagged with a warning on the To Do List.
 A related catalog object has been modified and the model object is mark out-of-date by the
Mark out-of-date occurrences option in the Project Management task.
For more information about out-of-date and in error objects, see To Do List (on page 264).
When catalog objects have been modified, the Synchronize Model with
Catalog command in the Project Management task must first be run with the Mark out-of-date
occurrences option selected and the Update out-of-date occurrences option cleared. Contact
your administrator to run the command. For more information, see Synchronize Model with
Catalog Dialog Box in the Project Management User's Guide.

What do you want to do?

 Synchronize all objects in the workspace (on page 464)
 Synchronize selected objects (on page 464)

Common User's Guide 463

 Tools Menu

Synchronize all objects in the workspace

1. Click Select .
2. In a graphics view, click in an empty area so that no items are selected.
3. Select Tools > Utilities > Synchronize with Catalog.
4. In the Synchronize with Catalog dialog box, all items in the workspace that are out-of-date
appear in the grid.
5. Click Update.

Synchronize selected objects

1. Click Select .
2. In a graphics view or in the Workspace Explorer, select the model items that you want
synchronize with the catalog.
3. Select Tools > Utilities > Synchronize with Catalog.
4. In the Synchronize with Catalog dialog box, the selected items that are out-of-date appear
in the grid.
5. Click Update.

 Select Show objects with To Do Records to also display items on the To Do List that are
also out-of-date.
 Select an item in the grid to highlight it in the graphic views and the Workspace Explorer.
 Fields selected in the grid can be copied.
 To stop the synchronization process, click Cancel. Processing ends after synchronization of
the current item is complete.
 When processing is complete, a summary of the results is displayed. The summary shows
the number of successful and failed updates. You can also choose to display a log file
containing more details.

Synchronize Workspace Dialog Box

Displays out-of-date items with their properties and status.
Out of Date objects
Selected objects that are out-of-date appear in the grid.
Object ID
OID, or internal identifier for the item. The OID is used by the software.
Name
Name of the item, as shown in the Workspace Explorer.

Common User's Guide 464

 Tools Menu

Reason
Explanation of why the item is out-of-date.
Catalog Object Name
Name of the related item in the Catalog. The out-of-date item is synchronized to the catalog
item.
Status
Status of the synchronize process.
Update
Click to start the synchronize process on items in the grid.
Cancel
Click to stop the synchronize process and close the dialog box.
Show objects with To Do Records
Click to display items on the To Do List that are also out-of-date.
See Also
To Do List (on page 264)
Synchronize All Objects in the Workspace (on page 464)
Synchronize Selected Objects (on page 464)

Review MDR Results

The Model Data Reuse operation is performed in Project Management. After the operation
completes, you can use this utility to review additional information about the transaction.
To access this utility, click Tools > Utilities > Review MDR Results in the Smart 3D graphical
environment.

What do you want to do?

 Create an MDR Results Report (on page 465)
 Filter MDR Results (on page 466)

Create an MDR Results Report

1. Click Tools > Utilities > Review MDR Results.
The Review MDR Results utility displays.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the required MDR log file.
The dialog box populates with the log file results.
3. Click Report to view the MDR results in an Excel spreadsheet report.
To create a select set of objects to view in the Review MDR Results dialog box,
click Filter and select filter objects before clicking Report.

Common User's Guide 465

 Tools Menu

Filter MDR Results

1. In the Smart 3D graphical environment, click Tools > Utilities > Review MDR Results.
2. Click Filter on the Review MDR Results dialog box.
3. Set your filter options.
Filter MDR Results Dialog Box (on page 467)
4. Click OK, and view the results of the filtering process in the same dialog box.

Review MDR Results Dialog Box

Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Utilities > Review MDR Results on the toolbar in the
Smart 3D graphical environment.
Model Data Reuse log file
Shows the location of the log file.
Browse
Locates the log file generated by the Model Data Reuse Wizard. The log file may be located
at %temp% or any shared location.
Report
Creates a report in Microsoft® Excel about the items copied during an MDR operation.
Filter
Filters out the objects or classes that you do not want to appear in the report; that is, the
filter lets you select the items you want to see in the report.
<< First
Moves to first page.
< Previous
Moves to previously viewed page.
Next >
Moves to next page.
Last >>
Moves to last page.
Select
Creates a select set as you click an object or objects in either the Original Name or Copy
Name column. Use the select set to manipulate those objects in the Smart 3D graphical
view.

Common User's Guide 466

 Tools Menu

Unselect
Removes objects that makeup the select set (original or copy). You can also click
anywhere in the graphical view to clear the select set. This option is only available after you
select objects.

Filter MDR Results Dialog Box

Use the Filter MDR Results dialog box to filter out the objects you do not want included in the
MDR Results Report.
Design objects successfully copied
Shows the design objects that successfully copied.
Design objects that failed to copy
Shows the design objects that failed to copy.
Design objects not attempted to be copied
Shows the design objects the software did not attempt to copy.

Common User's Guide 467

 Tools Menu

Classes
Shows the results and the classes included or excluded in the MDR Results Report. Check
the ones to include and remove the check from those you want to exclude.

See Also
Filter MDR Results (on page 466)
Create an MDR Results Report (on page 465)

View the MDR Log File

The Model Data Reuse (MDR) command generates a log file for each MDR operation. This log
file contains information about each design object that was part of the operation. For the objects
that were successfully copied, the original object ID (OID) and the copy OID are shown in the
log. For the objects that failed to copy, only the original OID displays.

Common User's Guide 468

 Tools Menu

Use Windows Explorer or another browser to locate the MDR log file, which is stored at
%temp%. The name of the log file is MDR[file_number].log where file_number is replaced by a
number to make it unique. The text file appears similarly to the one shown in the following
illustration.

User-defined Forms
User-defined forms are powerful custom forms that contain illustrations of objects. For example,
user-defined forms can contain illustrations of equipment or an equipment component, as well
as their properties. These custom forms are applicable to Add Part and Place Support
commands in Hangers and Supports and to the Place Equipment command in the Equipment
and Furnishings task. In addition, after you define the form, you can view it in the modeling
window, and as you make changes, you can see the result on the screen. You can create
user-defined forms in Microsoft® Visual Studio 2010 or by using the form definition wizard.
As you modify the values in the form, changes made to the attributes on the form automatically
update the corresponding attribute in the Property pages.
The advantage of creating and using this form is that the picture of the object and its properties
appear in the same form. If necessary, you can also create multiple or nested forms that hold
similar properties that can be called from the main form.

Common User's Guide 469

 Tools Menu

An example of a completed form is shown in the graphic below.

After Defining the Form

 Place the form's .dll file in the $Symbols\bin folder.
 For example, key in <<AssemblyName,NameSpaceName.ClassName>> to the
FormDefinition column of Equipment part in the Catalog task.

Common User's Guide 470

 Tools Menu

Opening the User-defined Form

The Custom Form Definition command automatically displays when you place the object
for which a form definition exists. After placing the object, click Custom Form Definition to
open the form. It is enabled only if a proper form definition is defined for that particular object.
For the remaining objects, it is disabled.
To see the user-defined form when placing objects for which a form definition exists,
run CasPol.exe from the command prompt to allow .NET access the SharedContent on the
client computer. For computers running a Windows 7 or Windows Vista operating system, the
command prompt must be Run as administrator. Execute the following command in the
command prompt:
<path_to_CasPol>\CasPol –pp off –m –ag 1.2 –url
file://<server_name>/<SharedContentShareName>/* FullTrust
You can find the CasPol.exe file in C:\WINDOWS\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v2.0.50727 folder.
You must use forward slashes for the SharedContent path.

 Save your first project as a template for all other user-defined forms. You can make changes
on this project for other symbols instead of creating the form from scratch each time.
 Properties such as Name, Weight and CG, Surface Treatment, and so forth, are common for
most of the symbols. Therefore, these properties need not be modified each time.
 You can make minor changes on the form for similar symbols. For example, in Equipment
and Furnishings task, the delivered pumps Horiz Centrifugal Pump With Flush and Drain
Nozzles and Horiz Centrifugal Pump With StructureSteel or Polyshield Base are similar
equipment but have different symbols. They may have common properties like
MotorLength, CouplingLength, and so forth. Therefore, the same form can be used for
both.
 If there is some similarity between equipment, for example, Complex Horizontal
Cylindrical Vessel and Storage Tank, you can keep the common properties like Vessel
Diameter and Vessel Length, and modify, add, and remove the remaining properties,
including the background of the form.
 You can modify the form by changing the interface name and the property name on the
Properties window of the user control in .NET.

What do you want to do?

 Create a user-defined form in Visual Studio (on page 471)
 Check Validation (on page 483)
 Create Multiple or Nested Forms (on page 486)
 Create a user-defined form using Form Definition Wizard (on page 490)

Common User's Guide 471

 Tools Menu

Create a user-defined form in Visual Studio

To create a user-defined form in Microsoft Visual Studio, use the following procedures:
1. Create the project (on page 472).
2. Add references to the project (on page 473).
3. Add New Windows Form (on page 477).
4. Design the Symbol Background (on page 478).
5. Add user controls to the Toolbox (on page 479).
6. Place a control on the form (on page 481).

Create the Project

1. Open Microsoft Visual Studio, and click File > New > Project.
2. In the New Project window, select Class Library and type a name for the project.

A new tab opens for the new class file.

Common User's Guide 472

 Tools Menu

3. In the Solution Explorer, right-click Properties under the new form you created.
4. On the Properties window, select Build.
5. To change the output path, click Browse. For example, to create user defined equipment
forms, change the output path to $Symbols\bin\Equipment\UserDefinedForms\Release.

6. Click Save, and close the Properties window.

Common User's Guide 473

 Tools Menu

Add References to the Project

1. In the Solution Explorer, right-click References, and click Add Reference.
Add Reference dialog box appears.

2. Click on Browse tab.

3. Browse to [Product Folder]\Core\Container\Bin\Assemblies\Release folder, and select the
following references.
 Sp3DFrmDefhelper.dll

Common User's Guide 474

 Tools Menu

 CustomFormDefinitionControls.dll

Common User's Guide 475

 Tools Menu

4. Click OK.
The selected references are appended to the list of existing references.

Common User's Guide 476

 Tools Menu

Add New Windows Form

1. In the Solution Explorer, right-click TestForm, and click Add > Windows Form.

2. In the Name box, type TestForm.cs, and click Add.

Common User's Guide 477

 Tools Menu

Design the Symbol Background

1. Invoke TestForm.cs from Solution Explorer.
2. On the Properties window, set the background image to SP3DComplexVesselAsm.gif.
This file should be available at $Symbols\SymbolIcons\.

Common User's Guide 478

 Tools Menu

3. Set BackgroungImageLayout to ensure the correct settings.

Add User Controls to the Toolbox

1. Right-click the Toolbox window on the left side, and select Add Tab.
2. Type a name for the new toolbox. For example, type SP3D Controls.
3. Right-click the SP3D Controls tab, and click Choose Items.
The Choose Toolbox Items dialog box opens.
4. Click Browse.
The Open dialog box opens.
5. Select CustomFormDefinitionControls.dll from the [Product
Folder]\Core\Container\Bin\Assemblies\Release folder.

Common User's Guide 479

 Tools Menu

6. Select the following .NET Framework Components:

 SP3DFrmDefCodeLstCtrl
 SP3DOKApplyCtrl
 SP3DUOmCtrl

7. Click OK.
The user controls are added to the SP3D Controls tab of the Toolbox.

Common User's Guide 480

 Tools Menu

Place a Control on the Form

1. In TestForm.cs, select SP3DUOmCtrl and try to place the control on the form near 'A'.
To place the control, drag the mouse on the form as if drawing a rectangle in
Microsoft Paint.

2. Go to the Properties window of the control placed in Step 1, and fill in the InterfaceName
and PropertyName values under Misc. Similarly, place the user controls at all the required
locations on the form.

Common User's Guide 481

 Tools Menu

The InterfaceName and PropertyName for each of the properties are found on
the delivered spreadsheet: [Product Folder]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFilesEquipment.xls
or from the metadata browser. For example, in this step the property at control 'A' is 'Dome
Height 1'. Equipment.xls provides you with the InterfaceName and the
PropertyName(AttributeName) on the Custom Interface sheet.

Common User's Guide 482

 Tools Menu

Check Validation
1. Select the control at 'C', and open the Events window.
2. On the Events window, type the value for Load as sp3DUOmCtrl11_Load. You can select
this value from the drop-down list.
Check the name of the control, and type the values accordingly. In this case, the
control at 'C' is sp3DUOmCtrl1. Check the controls with your form, and type the values
accordingly (sp3DUOmCtrlxxx).

Common User's Guide 483

 Tools Menu

3. On the Events window, type the value for ValidityProperty as

sp3DUOmCtrl1_ValidateProperty, and press ENTER.
You are automatically directed to the Coding page.

4. On the Coding page, type the following: MessageBox.Show("Value acceptable");

Common User's Guide 484

 Tools Menu

5. Similarly for the control at 'D', type the following code:

try
{
UserControl oCntl = (UserControl)sender;
if (oCntl != null)
{
double odblVal =System.Convert.ToDouble(e.NewPropertyValue);
if (odblVal < 0.5)
{
MessageBox.Show("Value should be > 0.5");
e.SuccessfullyValidated = false;
}
else
{
e.SuccessfullyValidated = true;
}
}
}
catch (Exception)
{
e.SuccessfullyValidated = false;
}

Common User's Guide 485

 Tools Menu

Create Multiple or Nested Forms

When you do not have enough space to accommodate all of the properties on a single form, you
can create a nested form; that is, a form that contains a similar set of properties and that can be
used with other forms. For example, Insulation properties can be placed in a nested form, and
you can invoke that form with a button click on the main form.

See Also
Create Multiple Forms (on page 486)

Create Multiple Forms

To create multiple forms, see the following example.
1. From Solution Explorer, right-click TestForm, add a new Windows form, and name it
TestForm2.
For information about adding a new windows form, see Add New Windows Form
(on page 477).

Common User's Guide 486

 Tools Menu

2. Change the background of the form to any image, as shown in the following illustration, and
add controls.
For more information, see Design the Symbol Background (on page 478) and
Place a Control on the Form (on page 481).

Common User's Guide 487

 Tools Menu

3. Go to the main TestForm, Add a Button, and rename the button as Insulation.

4. Double-click the button to be directed to the code page, and type the following text:
TestForm1.TestForm2 oTestForm2 = null;
oTestForm2 = new TestForm1.TestForm2();
Form oFrm = (Form)oTestForm2;
oFrm.ShowDialog();

Common User's Guide 488

 Tools Menu

5. Save and Build the solution.

6. Open Smart 3D, and go to Catalog task. Type 'TestForm,TestForm.TestForm' on the
FormDefinition column of the Equipment part in the Catalog task, as shown in the
following example.

Common User's Guide 489

 Tools Menu

7. Go to the Equipment and Furnishings task, and place the vertical complex vessel.
When placing the vessel, you can observe that the form appears.

Form Definition Wizard

You can create a new .Net project using the Form Definition Wizard.

What do you want to do?

 Create a user-defined form using Form Definition Wizard (on page 490)

Create a user-defined form using Form Definition Wizard

 Ensure that the System Variable Path in the Environment Variables dialog box contains
[Product Folder]\Smart3D\Core\Runtime.
 Install the Programming Resources in the same location as the product.
 Install Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 or a higher version.
1. Right-click FormDefWizard.exe in the [Product
Folder]/Core/Container/Bin/Assemblies/Release folder, and select Run as administrator.
The S3D Custom Form Definition Wizard is displayed.

Common User's Guide 490

 Tools Menu

2. Specify the form definition location details. See S3D Custom Form Definition Wizard Dialog
Box (on page 493).
3. Click Next
The Properties on form Definition window is displayed.
4. Choose the part properties to be displayed on the form definition. See Choose Part
Properties Dialog Box (on page 494).
5. Click Next.
The Creating the final Project window is displayed.

This dialog box shows the steps to be performed after you click Finish. It also displays the
new project location and a list of files that are created in the project.

Common User's Guide 491

 Tools Menu

6. Click Finish.
The Creating the final project window is displayed to open the created user-defined form.

7. Click Open to open the solution of the .Net project. Click Close to close the form definition
wizard.

Common User's Guide 492

 Tools Menu

S3D Custom Form Definition Wizard Dialog Box

Use the S3D Custom Form Definition Wizard Dialog Box to specify the form definition location
details.

 Plant name - Specifies the plant name that you want to work on.
 Project Location - Specifies the location where the .Net project needs to be created. You
can click the browse button to select the location.
 Project Name - Specifies the name of the project.
 Form Name - Specifies the name of the form.
 Namespace - Displays the Project Name that you specified previously.

Common User's Guide 493

 Tools Menu

Choose Part Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the part properties that need to be displayed on the form definition.

 Part Number - Specifies the Part number.

 GetAttributes - Click to select the attributes to be added to the grid.
 Part Image - Specifies the part image. You can click the browse button to select the part
image file. If you do not specify anything, then the preview image of the part is used by the
software.
 Attribute - Select the interface attribute for the specified part number. Select the part
attributes for the specified interface from the second drop-down box.
 Add - Adds the attribute to the form. If the selected interface and the part attributes do not
exist in the data grid, Add is enabled and Delete is disabled.
 Delete - Deletes the attribute from the form. If the selected interface and the part attribute
are already present in the data grid, Delete is enabled whereas Add is disabled.
The part image and the attribute controls are stored in the form that is to be created
and will show up in the newly created project.

Common User's Guide 494

 Tools Menu

Options
Specifies options to configure the software. The options are grouped by topic on tabs on the
Tools > Options dialog box.

General
Enables the Undo command and the status bar. In addition to allowing you to toggle these
features on and off, these options specify the number of actions you can cancel using the Undo
command and set the time allowed before activating QuickPick. You can also define the locate
zone for the software to find SmartSketch points and for the tabs displayed in the Workspace
Explorer.

Colors
Selects the colors the software uses for the background, highlighted and selected objects, and
handles.

Units of Measure
Determines the units of measure that appear in the readout and key in boxes of the software.
Additionally, you can specify how precisely the software displays these units.
All the data (length, angle, volume, mass, and so forth) are stored with the unit of
measure defined in the metadata. For example, the unit of measure for length is defined as
meters in the metadata. If you set the length unit as ft on this tab, then the software displays the
length readout as ft by default but stores the value as meters in the database.

ToolTips
Defines ToolTips for a selected object type. ToolTips are based on catalog labels, but they are
saved to the session file. To create a label to use as a ToolTip, go to the Catalog task.

File Locations
Sets the default path to the folder where the software saves Workspace session files,
Workspace Templates, Personal Report Templates, Report Output files, and Custom
Documentation.

SmartSketch
Selects the standard SmartSketch relationship indicators you want the software to use.

Common User's Guide 495

 Tools Menu

Selected PG
Restricts the edits and propagation to objects in the selected permission group.

What do you want to do?

 Change a default color (on page 496)
 Change a default file location (on page 496)
 Change a displayed unit of measure (on page 497)
 Change the displayed Workspace Explorer tabs (on page 497)
 Manage ToolTips (on page 498)
 Restrict edits and propagation to a Permission Group (on page 498)
 Set the activation time for QuickPick (on page 499)
 Set the Locate Zone (on page 499)
 Turn a SmartSketch Relationship Indicator on or off (on page 499)
 Turn the Status Bar on or off (on page 500)

Change a default color

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. Click the Colors tab.
3. In the list associated with the color you want to change, select a new color. You can change
the color of the background, highlighted objects, selected objects, or handles.

 Any changes you make appear in the Preview box on the right side of the tab.
 Any changes you make are applied to all views in your workspace.

Common User's Guide 496

 Tools Menu

Change a default file location

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. Click the File Locations tab.
3. In the File Types column, click the type of file for which you want to change the default
location. This location is the folder selected by default when you save a new file.
4. Click Modify.
5. On the Select Directory dialog box, select the folder in which you want to save the file. The
location can use a UNC path.
6. If necessary, use the hierarchy tree to find the folder in which you want to save the file.

 You can change the default file locations for Workspace, Workspace Template, Personal
Report Template, Report Output files, and Custom Documentation.
 The software saves these file locations within the workspace, so each workspace can have
its own default locations for saving files.

Change a displayed unit of measure

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. Click the Units of Measure tab.
3. In the Unit column, find the type of measurement for which you want to change the default
displayed unit.
4. Click in the Readout field of the appropriate row.
5. Select the unit of measure from the list.

 You can also change the number of digits after a decimal. Click in the Precision field, and
type the number of digits you want to appear after the decimal point. The Precision field is
not available if the units are fractional.
 The units of measure you select here appear in all ribbons, dialog boxes, PinPoint values,
and other unit displays within your workspace. However, because the setting is saved in the
workspace, your selections have no effect on the displays of other users.

Change the displayed Workspace Explorer tabs

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. Click the General tab.
3. In the Tabs to display in Workspace Explorer list, click to select and clear the needed tab
names. The selected tabs will be included in the Workspace Explorer when you restart the
software.
4. Restart the software to implement the changes to the Workspace Explorer.

Common User's Guide 497

 Tools Menu

Manage ToolTips
ToolTips are created and managed within the session file. Any changes you make to the labels
assigned to ToolTips are only seen within the session file. They are not saved to the catalog.
1. Click Tools > Options.
2. Click the ToolTips tab.
3. To turn the display of ToolTips on in the graphic views, check Show object ToolTips.
4. To create a new ToolTip, click an empty Object type cell, then click the ellipsis button. The
Select Object dialog box appears.
5. Select an object type from the hierarchy, expanding folders as needed. Click OK to accept
the selected object type.
6. On the ToolTips tab, select Catalog Data Labels in the Label to Use for the ToolTip
drop-down. The Select Label dialog box appears.
7. Select a label type from the Label hierarchy, expanding folders as needed.
8. Use the Grid View and List View buttons to adjust the display of available labels.
9. Select a label from the available labels and click OK.
10. To edit a ToolTip, select it in the Label to Use for the ToolTip cell, and then click Edit
ToolTip. The Edit Label dialog box appears.
11. Edit the ToolTip label properties as needed.
The Edit Label dialog box provides specific properties depending on the type of
label associated with the ToolTip, either SQL label or COM label. However, the editing
capabilities are similar.
12. Click OK to save the changes to the ToolTip label to the session file.
13. On the ToolTips tab, click OK or Apply to save all the ToolTip assignments to the session
file.
To enable recursive expansion of embedded labels, the report RFM file must set the
ToParse flag to Yes, as in the following example:
<DATA
Column="ShortMaterialDescription"
ToParse="yes"
Visible="yes"/>

Common User's Guide 498

 Tools Menu

Restrict edits and propagation to a Permission Group

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. Click the Selected PG tab.
3. Select the check box to restrict edits and propagation to objects in the selected permission
group.
4. Select the appropriate permission group(s) from the list.
You can select the permission groups and save the session for future use. The
software saves the changes only in your session. The changes do not affect other users.

Set the activation time for QuickPick

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the General tab, in the Dwell Time for QuickPick list, select the number of seconds
that should lapse before the QuickPick feature becomes available. This time period starts
when you rest the pointer on an object in the graphic view.

 The QuickPick feature is available when a question mark appears beside the pointer while
resting on an object.
Using the dwell time you set, the software displays the QuickPick question mark when the
pointing device has rested after a move to indicate it has found multiple objects. This action
occurs even if the pointer is not paused for an object. When the QuickPick feature is active, the
software highlights each object in the graphic view as you cycle through the QuickPick choices.
For more information, see Select objects using QuickPick (on page 352).

Set the Locate Zone

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the General tab, in the Locate Zone list, select the radius for the zone. The values of
this box range from 3 to 12 pixels.
This option indicates how close the pointer must be to a specific SmartSketch point,
such as the intersection of two objects or the key point of an object, before the software
interprets your intentions.

Common User's Guide 499

 Tools Menu

Turn a SmartSketch Relationship Indicator on or off

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. Click the SmartSketch tab.
3. Select the check box next to any relationship indicator to activate or deactivate it. A check
mark indicates the option is active.

Turn the Status Bar on or off

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the General tab, select the View status bar check box to activate or deactivate the
feature. A check mark indicates the feature is active.
If you turn off the status bar, you cannot see any prompts when using commands.

Options Dialog Box

Specifies options for colors, units of measure, ToolTips, file locations, SmartSketch indicators,
and the selected permission group. This dialog box consists of several tabs, each containing
options you can select for your workspace.

Topics
General Tab (Options Dialog Box) ................................................ 500
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) .................................................. 502
Units of Measure Tab (Options Dialog Box).................................. 502
ToolTips Tab (Options Dialog Box) ............................................... 503
File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) ...................................... 510
SmartSketch 3D Tab (Options Dialog Box)................................... 511
Selected PG Tab (Options Dialog Box) ........................................ 514

General Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Provides options that control the features available in the workspace.

Undo
Make Undo available
Makes the Undo command on the toolbar and menu available. When you clear this check
mark, you cannot reverse commands you perform, such as accidentally deleting an object
from the model.
Number of undo actions
Select the number of previous actions that can be cancelled using the Undo command. The
values in this box can range from 1 to 20. The initial value is 3.

Common User's Guide 500

 Tools Menu

Status Bar
Status Bar Location
Specifies where the status bar appears. Top (shown below) displays the status bar above
the graphic views and below the command ribbon. Bottom displays the status bar at the
bottom of the Smart 3D window.

Locate
Locate Zone
Sets the size of the locate zone radius. The locate zone is a region around a pointer. The
software finds SmartSketch points within the locate zone so you do not have to move the
pointer to an exact position. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid.
QuickPick Dwell Time
Specifies the number of seconds the pointer must rest on an object before the pointer
changes to a question mark indicating that the QuickPick feature is available.

Workspace Explorer Tabs

Displays a list of tabs you can include in the Workspace Explorer. By default, the Space,
System, and WBS (Work Breakdown Structure) tabs are checked.

 You can also right-click a tab in the Workspace Explorer, and select Hide to hide the
tab.
 Restart the software to see the changes to the Workspace Explorer tabs.

Common User's Guide 501

 Tools Menu

Theme
Floating
Select to configure the software interface for ship building. Select this option to use X, Y,
and Z coordinates labels in commands such as the Grids Wizards and the Tools > Measure
command.
Fixed
Select to configure the software interface for offshore modeling, such as the top side of
offshore platforms. Select this option to use North, East, and Elevation coordinate labels in
commands.
See Also
Change the displayed Workspace Explorer tabs (on page 497)
Set the activation time for QuickPick (on page 499)
Set the Locate Zone (on page 499)
Turn the Status Bar on or off (on page 500)

Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Provides options to control the colors of the background, highlighted and selected elements, and
handles.
Background
Specifies the color of all windows in your workspace. To conserve toner in your printer, use
this option to change the background color to white before printing a view. You can also
change the background color to white if you have difficulty seeing SmartSketch relationship
indicators, PinPoint coordinates, or other visual feedback.
Highlight
Specifies the color of objects when you move the pointer over them in a graphical view or in
the Workspace Explorer.
Selected elements
Specifies the color of objects selected with the Select or Select by Filter commands. When
you move the pointer over selected objects, their color changes from the select color to the
highlight color temporarily.
Handles
Specifies the colors of the circles that appear at the corners of objects that can be enlarged
or reduced by dragging with the pointer.
See Also
Change a default color (on page 496)

Common User's Guide 502

 Tools Menu

Units of Measure Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Provides options to set the display units used in the workspace.
Unit
Lists the types of measures that appear in the workspace.
Readout
Specifies the units of measure you want to display for the associated type of measure. For
example, you can display all lengths in meters, while someone else can display all lengths in
feet.
Precision
Specifies the number of digits you want to appear after the decimal point. The Precision
value must be an integer. The maximum number allowed is 30.

 If the selected Readout is fractional rather than decimal, the Precision field is not
available. The precision values are not valid with fractional units.
 If the selected Readout includes (fractional), values will display appropriate fractional
measures.
See Also
Change a displayed unit of measure (on page 497)

ToolTips Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls ToolTip content displayed by mapping labels to object types. Editing labels in the
Common task should be used as a temporary test. For permanent modifications to delivered
ToolTips, edit the labels in the Catalog task.
ToolTips display information about graphic objects in the model. This information can include
name, part class, part number, and weight of the object. You can view ToolTips by pausing your
pointer over an object in your workspace.
Show object ToolTips
Turns the display of ToolTips with object properties on or off. When this option is selected,
even object types without labels mapped to them display the name of the object as a
ToolTip. When this option is cleared, no object ToolTips display. By default, this option is
selected.
Object Type

Specifies a three-dimensional object type. Click to display the Select Object Type
dialog box. For more information, see Select Object Type Dialog Box (on page 385).
Label to Use for the ToolTip
Specifies the label content for the ToolTip that displays when the corresponding object type
is selected in the model. Click Catalog Data Labels to display the Select Label dialog box.
For more information, see Select Label Dialog Box (on page 504).

Common User's Guide 503

 Tools Menu

Edit Tooltip
Displays the Edit Label dialog for the selected ToolTip. This functionality is not available if a
ToolTip is not selected. For more information, see Label Editor Dialog Box (on page 505).
To enable recursive expansion of embedded labels, the report RFM file must set
the ToParse flag to Yes, as in the following example:
<DATA
Column="ShortMaterialDescription"
ToParse="yes"
Visible="yes"/>
See Also
Manage ToolTips (on page 498)

Select Label Dialog Box

Specifies a label from the Catalog. This dialog box is accessible in both the Common task and
the Drawings and Reports task.
In the Common task, this dialog box appears when you select Catalog Data Labels from the
Labels to Use for the ToolTip drop-down on the ToolTips tab of the Options dialog box. After
you accept the Select Label dialog box, the software returns the Options dialog box and inserts
the text from the label in the Label to Use for the ToolTip column of the grid.
In the Drawings and Reports task, this dialog box appears when you select More in the Name
drop-down on the Labels tab of the Item Properties dialog box when using Design Layout to
format a report. After you accept the Select Label dialog box, the software returns the Label
Editor dialog box with the text and properties for the chosen label.
Labels are created and maintained within the Catalog task. The Select Label dialog allows you
to select a label and view the properties for a selected label.
Labels
Provides the top-level folder in the navigation pane at the left of the window. Subfolders
contain the various labels that have been defined in the Catalog database.
When you select a folder containing ToolTips, the right side of the dialog shows the
properties associated with the selected Tooltip. The properties for the ToolTips are
described as follows:
 Name - Specifies the name of the label or ToolTip.
 Description - Describes the label or ToolTip.
 Type - States the type of label (for example, Label Template).
Properties
Displays the Properties for the selected ToolTip label. The properties are read-only. For
more information, see Properties Dialog Box (on page 438).
List View
Changes the right-side display to a list view.
Grid View
Changes the right-side display to a grid view.

Common User's Guide 504

 Tools Menu

Label Editor Dialog Box

Defines the contents and formatting for a label.
In the Common task, this dialog box appears when you select a ToolTip on the Options
ToolTips tab and click Edit Tooltips. You can edit the formatting for the selected label and the
changes are saved to the session file. Edits made to the label are not saved to the Catalog.
In the Drawings and Reports task, this dialog box appears when you select New Format in the
Name drop-down on the Labels tab of the Item Properties dialog box when using Design
Layout to format a report. You can create a new label format to use within your report.
In the Catalog task, labels are created and maintained using the Tools > Define Label
command.
Name
Specifies the name of the label. You can specify a label name to override the existing name
or select More from the drop-down and edit an existing label definition. If you are accessing
the label definition from the Options ToolTips tab, the name is read-only.
Description
Describes the label.
Add Row
Adds a new row to the properties list.
Delete Row
Deletes the selected row from the properties list.

Properties
Displays properties associated with the label. The options available are different depending on
the type of label, either COM or SQL Query.
If you are working with a COM Label, you can add or delete property rows as needed.
If you are working with an SQL Query Label, the definition provides the following capabilities:
 Show Results Pane - Adds a results pane to the Properties section. The results update
when you execute the query.
 Execute Query - Runs the query as specified. If the Results pane is shown, the results
display.
 Properties - Displays the Query Parameters Designer dialog box.
 Name - Specifies a name for the query.

Common User's Guide 505

 Tools Menu

Layout
Provides a text field for typing text and fields to be used in the label. The options available are
described as follows:

Rich Text Format

Displays the Font dialog box so you can specify font, font style, font size, and font special
effects to be used in the label.

Conditional Block
Not available in this version.
Field Formatting
Displays the Field Formatting dialog box so you can define specific formatting for a
selected field. This button is disabled unless a field is selected in the Layout text box. For
more information, see Format Field Dialog Box (Label Editor) (on page 506).

Unit Formatting
Displays the Select Rule dialog box for specifying a Unit of Measure formatting rule. This
button is disabled unless a unit of measure field is selected in the Layout text box. For more
information, see Select Rule Dialog Box (Label Editor - Unit of Measure) (on page 506).

Position Definition
Displays the Position Definition dialog box for defining the display of the positional
information within the label. This button is disabled unless a positional field is selected in the
Layout text box. For more information, see Position Definition Dialog Box (on page 509).

Orientation Definition
Not available in this version.

Format Field Dialog Box (Label Editor)

Defines the format for the selected field. The Format Field dialog box appears when you select
a field in the Layout text box on the Label Editor dialog box and click Format Field . The
dialog box is similar to the Microsoft Excel Format Cell command.
Category
Specifies the type of the formatting to assign to the field. The category controls the definition
controls displayed on the dialog box.
Sample
Shows a sample of the selected format.

Select Rule Dialog Box (Label Editor - Unit of Measure)

Lists the available unit of measure rules. You can open this dialog box when you select a single
field in the Layout text box on the Label Editor dialog box and click Format Unit .
Rule Name
Lists the names of available unit of measure rules.

Common User's Guide 506

 Tools Menu

Description
Lists the descriptions of the rules.

New
Displays the Unit of Measure dialog box for creating a new unit of measure rule. For more
information, see Unit of Measure Dialog Box (Label Editor) (on page 507).
Delete
Deletes the selected rule.
Rename
Renames the selected rule.
Properties
Displays the Unit of Measure dialog box to review or edit the selected rule.

Unit of Measure Dialog Box (Label Editor)

Specifies properties for a new unit of measure rule. This dialog box appears when you click New
on the Select Rule dialog box. The properties displayed are inherited from the context in
which the unit of measure label is created (that is, session, report, or drawing).
Rule Name
Specifies a name for the unit of measure rule.
Description
Describes the unit of measure rule.
Inherit from Session, Reports, Drawing
Indicates that the parameter should use the same units used in the session, the report, or
the drawing. This option is checked by default, which makes the Properties read-only.

Properties
Unit
Displays the type of unit, such as distance.
Primary
Specifies the primary unit of measure, such as yards in yards, feet, inches.
Secondary
Specifies the secondary unit of measure, such as feet in yards, feet, inches.
Tertiary
Specifies the tertiary unit of measure, such as inches in yards, feet, inches.
Displayed Unit
Turns the display of the units on and off.

Common User's Guide 507

 Tools Menu

Precision Type
Specifies Decimal, Fractional, or Scientific. Your selection in this box determines the
availability of the remaining boxes on this dialog box.
Decimal Precision
Specifies the number of places after the decimal point. This value can be 0 or greater.
Leading Zero
Places a zero before the decimal point, if applicable.
Trailing Zeros
Places zeros after the last significant digit, if applicable.
Fractional Precision
Specifies a fraction for the precision. The highest value that you can specify is 1/2. This box
is available only if you select Fractional in the Precision Type box.
Reduce Fraction
Reduces the fraction. For example, displays 3/4 instead of 6/8. This box is available only if
you select Fractional in the Precision Type box.

Select Rule Dialog Box (Label Editor - Position Definition)

Lists the available position matrix rules. You can open this dialog box when you select More in
the Matrix Rule drop-down on the Position Definition dialog.
Rule Name
Lists the names of available position matrix rules.
Description
Lists the descriptions of the rules.

New
Displays the Matrix Rule dialog box for creating a position matrix rule. For more information,
see Matrix Rule Dialog Box (on page 508).
Delete
Deletes the selected rule.
Rename
Renames the selected rule.
Properties
Displays the Unit of Measure dialog box to review or edit the selected rule.

Common User's Guide 508

 Tools Menu

Matrix Rule Dialog Box

Specifies properties for a position matrix rule. This dialog box appears when you click New
on the Select Rule dialog box.
Rule Name
Specifies a name for the unit of measure rule.
Description
Describes the unit of measure rule.

Position Definition Dialog Box

Defines position information for a new label field. This dialog box appears when you select a
positional field in the Layout text box on the Label Editor dialog box and click Define Position
.
Properties
Displays a list of the properties currently assigned to the positional field. For example, you
select the label text field <F>CGx</F> and you want to represent the value as 5.45m
GlobalCS East. You would need to define the coordinate system, the name of the +/- axes,
and the read-out order for the values.
The Matrix Rule property provides a drop-down list of the last 10 selected rules. Selecting
Create New Rule in the drop-down allows you to create a new positional definition rule. For
more information on creating a new positional rule, see Matrix Rule Dialog Box (on page 508).
Selecting More in the drop-down displays a Browse dialog to select an existing rule. For more
information on selecting an existing rule, see Select Rule Dialog Box (Label Editor - Position
Definition) (on page 508).
The Readout property has a drop-down that contains all of the possible combinations
for value, coordinate system, and axis, including cases where you might want to omit one of the
read-out options.

Common User's Guide 509

 Tools Menu

File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Provides options for the default file locations of Workspaces, Workspace Templates, Personal
Report Templates, Report Output files, and Custom Documentation.
File Types
Displays the types of files for which you can modify default file locations. Some default
locations can only be modified through reference data.
Location
Displays the default storage location and search path for workspaces, workspace templates,
and other files you can create with the software. Supports the selection of a local path or a
UNC path. To modify a default location, click the item, and then click Modify to specify a
new default location.
Modify
Displays a dialog box that allows you to modify the path of the default location for the
selected type of files.
See Also
Change a default file location (on page 496)

Select Directory Dialog Box

Specifies the folder in which you would like the software to save the selected type of file. The
selection you make on this dialog box appears in the Location column on the File Locations
tab of the Options dialog box.
To access this dialog box, select a type of file on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog
box, and click Modify.
Directory List
Displays a hierarchical list of the folders in the selected drive. Select a folder from this list
and click OK to choose it, or double-click a folder to display any subfolders.
Drive
Select the physical, virtual, or mapped network drive from which you want to select a folder.
Make New Folder
Creates a new folder in the hierarchy, beneath the currently selected folder.
See Also
Change a default file location (on page 496)
File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 510)

Common User's Guide 510

 Tools Menu

SmartSketch 3D Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Specifies the SmartSketch relationship indicators you want to use in your workspace.
Intersection
Displays when you move the pointer over points where two or more objects overlap.
Offset

Displays when you move the pointer to a location that is the specified offset from a
selected element or line. Offset also displays Offset from surface.
You must define a projection plane to use Offset.
Offset from surface - Displays when you point to the location of a line that is offset from
the intersection of your selected projection plane with a surface that is in the SmartSketch
locate list. For example, if you are locating the end of a pipe, the indicator appears along the
line that is offset from the intersection of the projection plane with the web plane.

The offset line is often easiest to locate if your view direction is perpendicular to the
projection plane.
Key point
Displays when you move the pointer over the end of an element to which you can attach
other elements.
Nozzle or other port point

Displays when you move the pointer over an equipment nozzle or other port. Press F2
to toggle this option on and off.
Divisor point
Displays when you move the pointer to the points where a line divides equally for the
number of divisions that you set. A drop down list lets you choose from 2 to 7 divisions for
the line. For example, if you select 4 for the number of divisions, you get a divisor point at ¼,
½, and ¾ of the length.

Common User's Guide 511

 Tools Menu

Center point
Displays when you move the pointer over the center of a circle or arc.

Point on curve

Displays when you move the pointer over any connection point on an object, such as a
nozzle on a piece of equipment.

Point on surface
Displays when you move the pointer over any location point on a surface object, such as
a slab. Press F3 to toggle the option on and off.
Edges on solids

Displays when you move the pointer over the edge of a solid object.

Reference axis aligned

Displays when you move the pointer so that the object that you are placing is aligned
with either the E-, N-, EL-axis (X-, Y-, Z-axis) of the active coordinate system. For example,
if you are routing a pipe that moves parallel to the E-axis (X-axis), this indicator appears.
Parallel
Displays when you place an object parallel to another object in your workspace. When
this indicator appears, the software highlights the parallel objects. For example, if you add a
section of pipe that runs parallel to another piece of pipe anywhere in your workspace, this
indicator appears, and both objects are highlighted.
Perpendicular
Displays when you move the pointer so that a perpendicular relationship between two
objects is recognized. For instance, when you connect two pipes at a 90 degree angle, this
indicator appears.
Tangent

Displays when you move the pointer over a point of tangency to an object.

Common User's Guide 512

 Tools Menu

Silhouette edges
Displays when you move the pointer over the silhouette edges of surfaces. The
silhouette edges are the outside edges of the surface with respect to your view.

Minimum/maximum point
Displays when you move the pointer over a point that is the given offset in the locked
direction from the minimum/maximum point on a curve. A projection plane must be defined,
and a line or axis constraint must be locked.
Locate only from list
Specifies that the software locates objects on the SmartSketch list defined when you use
Add to SmarkSketch List . For more information, see Add to SmartSketch List (on page
403).
Dwell time for stack
Specifies the number of seconds that should lapse as you pause the pointer over an object
in the graphic view before that object is added to the stack.

Common User's Guide 513

 Tools Menu

Stack size
Specifies how many objects are added to the stack before the software begins removing
previously added objects. The value in this box must be an integer greater than 1.

 Many of the Add to SmartSketch List controls also are available on the SmartSketch
Properties dialog box accessible from the Add to SmartSketch List ribbon.
 You can press F3 to toggle the relationship indicator for locating surfaces on and off.
 The shortcut keys to turn on SmartSketch select mode are CTRL+D.
 The shortcut keys to set a lock constraint in SmartSketch are CTRL+L.
See Also
Turn a SmartSketch Relationship Indicator on or off (on page 499)

Selected PG Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Restricts edits to selected permission groups. The filter only selects objects that belong to the
groups you select. If you do not select any groups, the filter includes all groups in the list.
To enable the tree view for selection, check the Restrict edits and propagation to objects in
the permission groups selected below.
To include one or more permission groups for your objects, press CTRL and click the name of
each group you want to include. You can display objects only in the groups for which you have
read access. You can select several groups in a folder by selecting one group and then holding
the SHIFT key and selecting another. All groups between the two are also selected.
You can add permission groups in the Project Management task.

Common User's Guide 514

 Tools Menu

Weight & CG
Determines the weight and center-of-gravity of an object or set of objects.
The Weight & CG command is similar to the PinPoint command: it remains active as you work
in the model and can be toggled on and off. You add objects to the select set, specify a
coordinate system, and specify dry or wet weight. The software displays the total weight,
coordinates of the center-of-gravity, and optionally, visual markers in the model at the coordinate
system reference and center-of-gravity. You can also view a list of parts in the select set with
corresponding weights and center-of-gravity coordinates.

Weight & CG Ribbon

Sets options for calculating the weight and center-of-gravity for an object or set of objects in the
model.

Select
Selects objects for the calculation. You can click multiple objects (without holding the CTRL
key) for inclusion in the select set.
The software adds all the select set objects that support the Selection Filter.

Clear Latest Selection

Removes all objects from the select set for weight and center-of-gravity. To remove just one
object, click it again. This button appears after you click Select.
Accept Latest Selection
Accepts all currently selected objects and finishes the selection process.
Coordinate System
Specifies a coordinate system in the workspace or defines a new coordinate system by
three points.

Toggle Center of Gravity

Displays the coordinate system reference and center-of-gravity symbol .

Toggle List of Parts

Displays a table (Weight & CG Display List) of the selected parts with their corresponding
weights and centers-of-gravity. For more information about Weight & CG Display List, see
Weight & CG Display List (on page 516).
Condition
Specifies either dry or wet weight.
Weight
Displays the weight value of the selected objects. You can specify units on the Units of
Measure tab on the Tools > Options dialog box.

Common User's Guide 515

 Tools Menu

Coordinate (X, Y, Z)
Displays the center-of-gravity of the selected objects. You can specify units on the Units of
Measure tab on the Tools > Options dialog box.
Close
Ends the command. You can also end the command by clicking Tools > Weight & CG
again.
Selection Filter
Selects the hierarchy filter for objects.
Weight and CG calculation requires one hierarchy to avoid duplicate addition of
weight for sub-parts.
All: Objects that belong to any hierarchy can be selected.
Selecting this filter might result in double counting of Weight & CG. The
Weight & CG values might not be reliable.
Auto Selection: Automatically selects objects belonging to any hierarchy.
The order in which you select objects determines the hierarchy. Selection of more
objects gets restricted to the hierarchy that belongs to the selected objects. If all the objects
support multiple hierarchies, the software gives preference to the System Hierarchy for
Weight & CG calculation.
System Filter: Select only objects that belong to the System hierarchy.
Assembly Filter: Select only objects that belong to the Assembly hierarchy.
Analysis Filter: Select only objects that belong to the Analysis hierarchy.
Select Nested
Select this option to add all the recursive hierarchical children to the selected objects for
Weight & CG computation.

Common User's Guide 516

 Tools Menu

Weight & CG Display List

Displays a list of objects selected for Weight & CG calculation in tabular form containing Name,
Weight, CG, Oid, and Comments for individual items in the hierarchical order.
Rows that contain objects with an invalid Weight or CG value are highlighted in
yellow.

Show Parts with Invalid Weight/CG

Updates the table to show rows containing objects with invalid Weight or CG values.
Show Parts with Valid Weight/CG
Updates the table to show rows containing objects with valid Weight or CG values.
Export
Generates a .CSV (Comma Separated) file that contains the Weight & CG value of the
objects and their respective OIDs (Object Identifiers). The software exports the .CSV file to
the user-specified folder.

Calculate Weight & CG

1. Click Tools > Weight & CG.
The Weight & CG ribbon displays.

2. Click Select on the ribbon.

3. Select objects in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
To remove an object from the select set, click it again. To remove all objects, click
Clear Latest Selection on the ribbon.
4. When you finish adding objects to the select set, click Accept Latest Selection on the
ribbon.
5. In the Coordinate System box, select a coordinate system for the center-of-gravity
calculation. You can choose any coordinate system in the workspace or define a new
coordinate system by three points.

6. Click Toggle Center of Gravity to see the coordinate reference and center-of-gravity
markers in the graphic view.

Common User's Guide 517

 Tools Menu

7. Click Toggle List of Parts to see a table of the parts in the select set with their
corresponding weights and centers-of-gravity.
8. In the Condition box, select dry or wet weight.
9. View the weight and coordinate data in the boxes in the ribbon.
If the Caution icon displays beside Weight or CG, this indicates that there are
some parts that have invalid Weight or CG values. Otherwise, the Correct icon displays.
Click Toggle List of Parts to see the items that have invalid Weight or CG. The
Weight & CG Display List shows the list of parts that have invalid Weight or CG in yellow
font.
10. To end the command, click Close on the ribbon. Alternatively, click Tools > Weight & CG
again.
The Weight & CG command is similar to the PinPoint command. It remains active as
you work in the model and can be toggled on and off.

Common User's Guide 518

SECTION 10

Project Menu
The Project menu provides commands for managing project-related objects, including claiming
objects to projects, releasing objects, and specifying relationships for Work Breakdown Structure
(WBS) items. Some of the commands on this menu may change depending on the active task.

In This Section
WBS Items and Projects ............................................................... 519
Claim ............................................................................................ 537
Release Claim .............................................................................. 540
Assign to WBS .............................................................................. 541
Update WBS Assignments............................................................ 544

Common User's Guide 519

 Project Menu

WBS Items and Projects

In Smart 3D, the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) provides a means to define additional
groupings of design objects for a variety of work purposes. In the software, the currently active
Work Breakdown Structure project is shown in the drop-down list in the upper left-hand corner of
the task window, next to the Permission Group box.

Each time you create a new session, a blank row is the default. This blank row indicates
that the active project or WBS item is set to "none."
Work Breakdown Structure grouping is hierarchical. Objects are assigned at lower levels in the
hierarchy, and higher levels automatically provide consolidation. The first level of grouping
object is the project. Under the project level, you can nest additional types of groupings called
WBS items. Typically, WBS grouping is used for activities at the end of the engineering phase,
such as activities related to the generation of deliverables and construction techniques. The
following are some examples of the practical usage of WBS functionality in the software:
 Manual Piping Isometric Sheet Management - Normally when a pipeline isometric is
generated using ISOGEN, the software automatically breaks the pipeline into multiple
sheets; however, in order to reduce the number of drawings to be issued in case of
revisions, many companies control the sheet assignment manually. Smart 3D provides
functionality to automatically group and assign objects to a WBS item that represents a
single sheet of piping isometric drawing.
 Modularization of Pipe Racks - In many projects, pipe racks are pre-fabricated in sections
and shipped to the site for installation. A number of sections could be large on a project. You
can use WBS grouping to define modules representing pipe rack sections.
 Work Package Definition - Although the definition of Work Package varies widely, Smart
3D WBS functionality can be applied in most situations. Typically, design objects belong to
multiple work packages, which is allowed by WBS assignment logic.
 Use of 3D models in Operation and Maintenance – In a typical plant, the actual plant and
3D model representation keep changing due to small and large projects to improve the
plant. The as-built project is used to maintain current state of the model. You can either copy
or move 3D objects to different WBS projects to manage changes being made. The Smart
3D Drawings and Reports task provides functionality to distinguish objects on the drawing
based on their association with the WBS project. For example, as-built objects can be
shown in one color/line style and upcoming changes related to a project can be shown in a
different color/line style.

Common User's Guide 520

 Project Menu

In the Common task, you can create new WBS projects and items or edit existing ones. The
New WBS Project and New WBS Items commands appear on the shortcut menu when you
right-click a WBS project folder or a WBS item on the WBS tab in the Workspace Explorer.

 Implementing WBS functionality on a project requires making decisions on common factors

regardless of the end goal. Careful planning and decision making based on a study of the
following factors will lead to successful usage of WBS functionality on projects. For more
information, see Appendix: Implementing a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) (on page
635).
 When you edit an object, it retains the current project and/or WBS item relationship. You can
change the project parent using Claim (on page 537). You can change the WBS item
relationship using Assign to WBS (on page 541).
 In the Drawings and Reports task, the WBS is used in conjunction with publishing.

Select Active Project Dialog Box

Displays the existing WBS hierarchy, which you can use to specify the active project. You can
access the Select Active Project dialog box by clicking More in the Active Project box.
The Active Project box is right next to the Permission Group box on the main toolbar.

Workspace
Displays WBS projects and items retrieved to the workspace based on the current Define
Workspace filter.
Database
Displays WBS projects and items that are in the current active database.
See Also
Workspace Explorer (on page 243)

Common User's Guide 521

 Project Menu

Create WBS Project

Creates a new project. You access this command by right-clicking a WBS project folder on the
WBS tab in the Workspace Explorer, and then selecting Create WBS Project.
See Also
Create a New WBS Project (on page 528)

Create New WBS Project Dialog Box

Displays options for defining the properties of a new WBS project.
Type
Displays the project type.
Project Purpose
Specifies either As-built or Project. Only one as-built WBS project is allowed per model.
You cannot change purpose of the project after you create the project. This list is defined by
the WBSProjectPurpose codelist.
Project Status
Specifies the current project status. This list is defined by the WBSProjectStatus codelist.
WBS Parent
Identifies the higher-level object that is associated with the WBS item that you are creating.
The WBS parent must be for a single project object or for another WBS object. You cannot
change the parent after the WBS project has been created.
Name
Specifies a name for the project or renames it.
Correlation Status
Displays the correlation status assigned by the software. This value is read-only. The
following table provides a description of the correlation statuses:

Status Description

Correlated with Represents objects that have a data match between the design basis
data match data and the objects in the three-dimensional model.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
data mismatch However, these objects have a discrepancy, which generates the
mismatch. The cause of the discrepancy can result from changes in the
P&ID or the 3D model.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
approved data However, these objects have approved data discrepancies.
mismatch

Common User's Guide 522

 Project Menu

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
approved topology However, these objects have approved topology discrepancy.
mismatch

Not correlated yet Objects that have either not been modeled from the P&ID or that have
been modeled but have not been correlated with design basis data.

Ignored or not Shows that the object either is not claimed (that is, it exists in the
claimed (Project as-built condition), or that the software ignores the object (for example,
Management revision clouds and labels).
environment only)

Correlation Basis
Specifies if the object is correlated to a corresponding design basis. Select Correlate
Object to associate the objects in three-dimensional model with the design basis. Select No
correlation is required if the objects do not have a correlating design basis data.
Correlation Approval Status
Specifies if the component is approved with discrepancies in the three-dimensional data
compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch approved if components
topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology mismatches approved if
the components data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None if you do not
want to approve a mismatch.
See also
Create WBS Project (on page 522)

WBS Project Edit Ribbon

Sets project properties. You can use also this ribbon to assign objects in the model to a project.
Properties
Views and edits the properties of the project. For more information, see WBS Project
Properties Dialog Box (on page 524).
Type
Displays the type of the project.
Purpose
Displays the purpose of the project.
Name
Specifies the name of the project.
WBS Parent
Displays the parent of the project. You cannot change the parent of the project; the parent is
always the root node of the hierarchy.
See Also
WBS Items and Projects (on page 519)

Common User's Guide 523

 Project Menu

WBS Project Properties Dialog Box

Displays the properties of the projects for edit and review. This dialog box opens when you
right-click a project folder in the Workspace Explorer, and then select Properties.
See Also
Configuration Tab (on page 144)
General Tab (WBS Project Properties Dialog Box) (on page 524)
Notes Tab (on page 179)

General Tab (WBS Project Properties Dialog Box)

Displays high-level properties that identify the project, such as purpose, status, and correlation
facts.
Displays options for defining the properties of a new WBS project.
Type
Displays the project type.
Project Purpose
Specifies either As-built or Project. Only one as-built WBS project is allowed per model.
You cannot change purpose of the project after you create the project. This list is defined by
the WBSProjectPurpose codelist.
Project Status
Specifies the current project status. This list is defined by the WBSProjectStatus codelist.
WBS Parent
Identifies the higher-level object that is associated with the WBS item that you are creating.
The WBS parent must be for a single project object or for another WBS object. You cannot
change the parent after the WBS project has been created.
Name
Specifies a name for the project or renames it.
Correlation Status
Displays the correlation status assigned by the software. This value is read-only. The
following table provides a description of the correlation statuses:

Status Description

Correlated with Represents objects that have a data match between the design basis
data match data and the objects in the three-dimensional model.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
data mismatch However, these objects have a discrepancy, which generates the
mismatch. The cause of the discrepancy can result from changes in the
P&ID or the 3D model.

Common User's Guide 524

 Project Menu

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
approved data However, these objects have approved data discrepancies.
mismatch

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
approved topology However, these objects have approved topology discrepancy.
mismatch

Not correlated yet Objects that have either not been modeled from the P&ID or that have
been modeled but have not been correlated with design basis data.

Ignored or not Shows that the object either is not claimed (that is, it exists in the
claimed (Project as-built condition), or that the software ignores the object (for example,
Management revision clouds and labels).
environment only)

Correlation Basis
Specifies if the object is correlated to a corresponding design basis. Select Correlate
Object to associate the objects in three-dimensional model with the design basis. Select No
correlation is required if the objects do not have a correlating design basis data.
Correlation Approval Status
Specifies if the component is approved with discrepancies in the three-dimensional data
compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch approved if components
topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology mismatches approved if
the components data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None if you do not
want to approve a mismatch.
See also
Create WBS Project (on page 522)

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Common User's Guide 525

 Project Menu

Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access
level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Transfer Ownership Dialog Box

Allows you to specify a new location and permission group for the selected model objects.
Current location
Displays the name of the location with which the current permission group is associated. All
the objects in the select set must belong to the same location.
Current permission group
Displays the name of the permission group with which the selected objects are currently
associated. If all the objects in the select set do not belong to the same permission group,
this box appears blank.
New location
Specifies the name of the location to which you want to assign the objects. In a global
workshare configuration, this box lists all the locations in which you have write access to one
or more permission groups. The selection in this box filters the entries in the New
permission group box.
New permission group
Specifies the new permission group to which to assign the selected objects. If you specify a
value in the New location box, this list displays all permission groups to which you have
write access in the selected location. If you do not specify a value in the New location box,
this list includes all permission groups to which you have write access in all locations except
the current location. This box is blank if you do not have write access to any permission
groups at any locations other than the current one.
We strongly recommend that administrators follow naming convention rules that
include the location as a prefix in the permission group name.

Common User's Guide 526

 Project Menu

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The
notes provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in
downstream tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within
design review sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on
an object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point
Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name
Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date
Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.
Time
Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note
Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author
Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text
Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.
Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component.
It is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note
Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note
Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not available in
this version.

Common User's Guide 527

 Project Menu

Highlight Note
Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and the object to
which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note
Deletes the currently displayed note.

Create a New WBS Project

In this procedure, you are not retrieving projects in the project list, but you are creating a new
project in the Workspace Explorer.
1. Set the filter to All in the Locate Filter box on the main toolbar.
2. In the Workspace Explorer, click the WBS tab.
3. Right-click the model folder at the top of the tree view, and select Create WBS Project.
4. On the Create WBS Project dialog box, select the appropriate options.

 The grid on this dialog box has two columns. The Property column identifies the
properties for the project. The Value column either displays a value that you can review
but cannot change, or a value that you can type or select from a list.
 The Name cell is required. You cannot complete the command until you type a name.
 You cannot edit the cells that have grey shading.
5. Click OK.
The new project is added to the WBS tab of the Workspace Explorer.
6. Add WBS items to the new project as needed. For more information, see Create a New
WBS Item (on page 537).

 You can create as many WBS Project type projects as necessary; however, only one WBS
As-Built type project is allowed per model.
 You can delete a WBS object even if objects are related to it. However, the software deletes
only the relationships, not the related objects.
 You can change a design object (that is, any object that supports the relationship to a
project) from one project to another by selecting the project on the WBS tab and using the
WBS Project Edit ribbon.

Common User's Guide 528

 Project Menu

Create WBS Item

Creates a new Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) item. You access this command by
right-clicking a WBS project folder on the WBS tab in the Workspace Explorer, and selecting
Create WBS Item.
See Also
Create a New WBS Item (on page 537)

Create WBS Item Dialog Box

Displays options for defining the properties of a new WBS item.

Standard
WBS Type
Specifies the type of WBS item. Available options are defined in the current active Catalog
database. The list is defined by the WBSItemType codelist.
WBS Purpose
Specifies the purpose of the WBS item. You cannot change this property after you create
the WBS item. Available options are defined in the current active Catalog database and
depend on which WBS Type you selected. The list is defined by the WBSItemPurpose
codelist.
If you intend to create multiple WBS Items under the same WBS Project that use
more than one type of WBS Purpose > Iso Drawing (codelist entries 195-215), you must
create a separate label for each style of Iso Drawing used in the project. For more
information on creating labels, see the Piping Isometric Drawings User's Guide.
Exclusive
Specifies whether an object can be related to more than one Work Breakdown Structure
(WBS) object of the same type and purpose.
True indicates that the given object cannot be assigned to another WBS item of the same
type and purpose.
False indicates that the given object can belong to multiple WBS items of the same type and
purpose.
After the WBS item has an assigned object, this property becomes read-only.
All WBS items of the same type and purpose in a given project must have the
same setting for the Exclusive property.

Common User's Guide 529

 Project Menu

WBS Assignment
Specifies the assignment type. The assignment type you select here controls the behavior of
the Assign to WBS command in the software. The list is defined by the
WBSItemAssignment codelist.
System indicates that Smart 3D automatically assigns all nested children of the system
object to the WBS item. As you add or remove objects from that system, you can update the
assignment with Update WBS Assignment.
Assembly indicates that Smart 3D automatically assigns all nested children of the assembly
object to the WBS item. As you add to or remove objects from that assembly, you can
update the assignment with Update WBS Assignment.
Manual indicates that Smart 3D only assigns the selected object to the WBS item. There is
no automatic assignment based on system parent or assembly. The software does not
automatically update WBS assignments for objects belonging to this WBS when you run
Update WBS Assignments or Assign to WBS. This is the default setting.
For any given WBS type or purpose, you can assign all systems or all assemblies, but not a
mixture of both. After the WBS item has an assigned object, this property becomes
read-only. To modify the assignment type, you must create a new WBS item. This option is
enabled only when Exclusive is set to True.
WBS Parent
Identifies the higher-level object that is associated with the WBS item that you are creating.
When the WBS item is created, this property is set to read-only.
Name
Specifies a name for the WBS item.
Correlation Status
Displays the correlation status assigned by the software. This value is read-only. The
following table provides a description of the correlation statuses:

Status Description

Correlated with Represents objects that have a data match between the design basis
data match data and the objects in the three-dimensional model.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
data mismatch However, these objects have a discrepancy, which generates the
mismatch. The cause of the discrepancy can result from changes in the
P&ID or the 3D model.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
approved data However, these objects have approved data discrepancies.
mismatch

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
approved topology However, these objects have approved topology discrepancy.
mismatch

Common User's Guide 530

 Project Menu

Not correlated yet Objects that have either not been modeled from the P&ID or that have
been modeled but have not been correlated with design basis data.

Ignored or not Shows that the object either is not claimed (that is, it exists in the
claimed (Project as-built condition), or that the software ignores the object (for example,
Management revision clouds and labels).
environment only)

Correlation Basis
Specifies if the object is correlated to a corresponding design basis. Select Correlate
Object to associate the objects in three-dimensional model with the design basis. Select No
correlation is required if the objects do not have a correlating design basis data.
Correlation Approval Status
Specifies if the component is approved with discrepancies in the three-dimensional data
compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch approved if components
topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology mismatches approved if
the components data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None if you do not
want to approve a mismatch.

Administrator
Restriction Criteria
Controls the behavior of object assignment to a WBS item. The list is defined by the
WBSAssignmentRestriction codelist.
Allow assignment of all objects to WBS indicates that the software does not enforce any
restrictions based on the approval status. When this setting is active, you can assign any
object, even an object with a non-working approval state, to a WBS item. This is the default
setting.
Only allow assignment of objects in working status to WBS restricts the assignment of
objects with a non-working approval state to a WBS item. When this setting is active, the
software prevents assignment and removal of any object that is in a non-working state.

WBS Item Edit Ribbon

Sets the options for the properties of a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) item. You can use this
ribbon to assign objects in the model to a WBS item.
If any selected object has one or more children claimed to another project, then you
cannot change the WBS assignments. You need to release the claims before modifying the
assignments.
Properties
Views and edits the properties of the WBS item. For more information, see WBS Item
Properties Dialog Box (on page 532).
Select objects to assign
Associates objects in the model with the WBS item.

Common User's Guide 531

 Project Menu

Clear all
Disassociates all previously selected objects in the model with the WBS item.
Finish
Commits the changes to the database.
Type
Displays the type of the WBS item.
Purpose
Displays the purpose of the WBS item.
Name
Displays the name of the WBS item. You can type a different name if necessary.
WBS Parent
Displays the parent of the WBS item. You can select a different parent if necessary.
See Also
WBS Items and Projects (on page 519)

WBS Item Properties Dialog Box

Displays the properties of the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) items for edit and review. This
dialog box opens when you right-click a WBS item in the Workspace Explorer and then click
Properties.
See Also
Create WBS Item (on page 529)
WBS Items and Projects (on page 519)
General Tab (WBS Item Properties Dialog Box)
The following common properties are provided for the Standard and Administrator
categories and are identical to those that display on the Create WBS Item dialog box.
Displays options for defining the properties of a new WBS item.

Standard
WBS Type
Specifies the type of WBS item. Available options are defined in the current active Catalog
database. The list is defined by the WBSItemType codelist.
WBS Purpose
Specifies the purpose of the WBS item. You cannot change this property after you create
the WBS item. Available options are defined in the current active Catalog database and
depend on which WBS Type you selected. The list is defined by the WBSItemPurpose
codelist.
If you intend to create multiple WBS Items under the same WBS Project that use
more than one type of WBS Purpose > Iso Drawing (codelist entries 195-215), you must
create a separate label for each style of Iso Drawing used in the project. For more
information on creating labels, see the Piping Isometric Drawings User's Guide.

Common User's Guide 532

 Project Menu

Exclusive
Specifies whether an object can be related to more than one Work Breakdown Structure
(WBS) object of the same type and purpose.
True indicates that the given object cannot be assigned to another WBS item of the same
type and purpose.
False indicates that the given object can belong to multiple WBS items of the same type and
purpose.
After the WBS item has an assigned object, this property becomes read-only.
All WBS items of the same type and purpose in a given project must have the
same setting for the Exclusive property.
WBS Assignment
Specifies the assignment type. The assignment type you select here controls the behavior of
the Assign to WBS command in the software. The list is defined by the
WBSItemAssignment codelist.
System indicates that Smart 3D automatically assigns all nested children of the system
object to the WBS item. As you add or remove objects from that system, you can update the
assignment with Update WBS Assignment.
Assembly indicates that Smart 3D automatically assigns all nested children of the assembly
object to the WBS item. As you add to or remove objects from that assembly, you can
update the assignment with Update WBS Assignment.
Manual indicates that Smart 3D only assigns the selected object to the WBS item. There is
no automatic assignment based on system parent or assembly. The software does not
automatically update WBS assignments for objects belonging to this WBS when you run
Update WBS Assignments or Assign to WBS. This is the default setting.
For any given WBS type or purpose, you can assign all systems or all assemblies, but not a
mixture of both. After the WBS item has an assigned object, this property becomes
read-only. To modify the assignment type, you must create a new WBS item. This option is
enabled only when Exclusive is set to True.
WBS Parent
Identifies the higher-level object that is associated with the WBS item that you are creating.
When the WBS item is created, this property is set to read-only.
Name
Specifies a name for the WBS item.

Common User's Guide 533

 Project Menu

Correlation Status
Displays the correlation status assigned by the software. This value is read-only. The
following table provides a description of the correlation statuses:

Status Description

Correlated with Represents objects that have a data match between the design basis
data match data and the objects in the three-dimensional model.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
data mismatch However, these objects have a discrepancy, which generates the
mismatch. The cause of the discrepancy can result from changes in the
P&ID or the 3D model.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
approved data However, these objects have approved data discrepancies.
mismatch

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with the design basis.
approved topology However, these objects have approved topology discrepancy.
mismatch

Not correlated yet Objects that have either not been modeled from the P&ID or that have
been modeled but have not been correlated with design basis data.

Ignored or not Shows that the object either is not claimed (that is, it exists in the
claimed (Project as-built condition), or that the software ignores the object (for example,
Management revision clouds and labels).
environment only)

Correlation Basis
Specifies if the object is correlated to a corresponding design basis. Select Correlate
Object to associate the objects in three-dimensional model with the design basis. Select No
correlation is required if the objects do not have a correlating design basis data.
Correlation Approval Status
Specifies if the component is approved with discrepancies in the three-dimensional data
compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch approved if components
topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology mismatches approved if
the components data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None if you do not
want to approve a mismatch.

Common User's Guide 534

 Project Menu

Administrator
Restriction Criteria
Controls the behavior of object assignment to a WBS item. The list is defined by the
WBSAssignmentRestriction codelist.
Allow assignment of all objects to WBS indicates that the software does not enforce any
restrictions based on the approval status. When this setting is active, you can assign any
object, even an object with a non-working approval state, to a WBS item. This is the default
setting.
Only allow assignment of objects in working status to WBS restricts the assignment of
objects with a non-working approval state to a WBS item. When this setting is active, the
software prevents assignment and removal of any object that is in a non-working state.
See Also
Create a New WBS Project (on page 528)
WBS Item Properties Dialog Box (on page 532)
Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Model
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access
level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.

Common User's Guide 535

 Project Menu

Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The
notes provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in
downstream tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within
design review sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on
an object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point
Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name
Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date
Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.
Time
Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note
Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author
Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text
Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.
Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component.
It is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.

Common User's Guide 536

 Project Menu

New Note
Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note
Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not available in
this version.
Highlight Note
Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and the object to
which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note
Deletes the currently displayed note.

Create a New WBS Item

1. Right-click a WBS project folder on the WBS tab in the Workspace Explorer, and select
Create WBS Item.
2. On the Create WBS Item dialog box, specify a name for the new WBS item, and set the
properties as needed.
General Tab (WBS Item Properties Dialog Box) (on page 532)
3. Click OK.
The new WBS item is created in the Workspace Explorer hierarchy.

 The Exclusive property controls whether objects can belong to more than one WBS item
that has the same type and purpose.
 All WBS items of the same type and purpose in a given project must have the same settings
for the Exclusive property.
 The WBS Assignment property controls the behavior of the Assign to WBS command. For
example, you can define properties that allow you to use the system or assembly hierarchy
to automatically assign objects to the WBS item.
 When a WBS item is created in Smart 3D, the following properties are set to read-only:
WBS Parent and Correlation Status. After a WBS item has an assigned object, the
following properties become read-only: Exclusive and WBS Assignment.
 You can undo the creation of a new WBS item.
 You can copy and paste a new WBS item.

Common User's Guide 537

 Project Menu

Claim
Claims objects exclusively to the active project.
The Claim command requires that at least one as-built project exists. For
more information, see WBS Items and Projects (on page 519).
To claim objects to a project, you must have Write permission to the project. You can, however,
modify the objects without having Write permission to the project object. For example, piping
designers only need Write permission to the piping features and parts, not to the project.
Certain objects require Write permission to other related objects for modifications, but the
related objects are not claimed automatically when you claim the primary object, such as
nozzles on equipment. If you try to modify the relationship between the objects, the software
displays a permission error stating that you have not claimed both objects.
In other cases, the software automatically claims objects that are related to the object that you
are claiming. For example, control points are claimed when you claim the parent object, such as
a piece of equipment. This behavior goes both ways. If you claim the equipment, the associated
control points are also claimed. Other examples are supports/support components, member
systems/member parts, member systems/frame connections, slabs/openings, and slabs/slab
assembly connections.
To reassign a claim, use Project > Release Claim. This command moves the claimed objects
back to as-built and releases any relationships to other WBS objects. Another project can then
claim the object with the Claim command.

 When selecting objects to claim, make sure that you select only the objects that you want to
claim. For example, when you "fence select" a pump, you might accidentally select more
than the pump object. You select the nozzles associated with the pump. You can also select
the foundation under the pump, even though the foundation is not nested under the pump in
the Workspace Explorer.
 Exclusive claim means that the active project is the only project that can modify the claimed
object.
 If errors occur when using the Claim command, refer to the Troubleshooting Reference
Guide in Help > Printable Guides for additional information.

Common User's Guide 538

 Project Menu

Claiming Objects
When you work in an integrated environment, you must identify the objects that will be modified
and associate them with a project. This identification is also known as claiming.
The Claim command creates a relationship between the selected object and a project object.

 In an integrated environment, exclusive claims are specific to the tool. Although a Smart 3D
project has exclusive claim on a piece of equipment, SmartPlant P&ID and Aspen Basic
Engineering users can still claim and modify the 2D version of the object in their respective
tools.
 You should publish the model prior to claiming. For more information on publishing the
model, see the Drawings and Reports Help.
You can claim objects in the software by selecting objects in the model, choosing an active WBS
project, and then clicking the Claim command. You can also use the View P&ID command or
create a select filter to choose objects for claiming.
To claim objects to a project, you must have Write permission to the project. However, Write
permission to the project is not necessary in order to modify those objects. For example, piping
designers only need Write permission to the piping features and parts, not to the project.
Certain objects require Write permission to other related objects for modifications, but the
related objects are not claimed automatically when you claim the primary object, such as
nozzles on equipment. If you try to modify the relationship between the objects, the software
displays a permission error stating that you have not claimed both objects.
In other cases, the software automatically claims objects that are related to the object that you
are claiming. For example, control points are claimed when you claim the parent object, such as
a piece of equipment. This behavior goes both ways. If you claim the equipment, the associated
control points are also claimed. Other examples are supports/support components, member
systems/member parts, member systems/frame connections, slabs/openings, and slabs/slab
assembly connections.
To reassign a claim to the as-built, use Project > Release Claim. This command moves the
claimed objects back to as-built, as well as releasing any relationships to other WBS objects.
For more information, see Releasing Claims. Reassigning a claim is a two-step process. First,
you use Release Claim to set the relationship back to as-built, and then you claim to a new
project. To release a claim in an integrated environment, you must switch to the Drawings and
Reports task and publish at least one document containing the released objects.

Common User's Guide 539

 Project Menu

Claim Objects
1. Select the objects that you want to claim. For example, when you "fence select" a pump,
you might accidentally select more than the pump object. You select the nozzles associated
with the pump. You can also select the foundation under the pump, even though the
foundation is not nested under the pump in the Workspace Explorer.
2. In the Active Project box on the main toolbar, specify a project.
If the appropriate WBS project does not appear in the list, click More to open the
Select Active Project dialog box (on page 258).
3. Click Project > Claim.
The software associates the objects with the active project. If no as-built projects are
available, an error message requests that you create a project in the Workspace Explorer
and choose As-built in the Project Purpose field. You can then re-run the command.

 You must have an as-built project for the Claim command to run. For more information, see
WBS Items and Projects (on page 519).
 You must have Write access to the active project in order to claim an object to it. For more
information, see WBS Items and Projects (on page 519).
 An object can be related to only a single project. If you attempt to claim an object that
belongs to another project, the claim will fail. You must use the Release Claim command to
set the relationship back to the as-built and then re-run the Claim command to claim it to the
new project. For more information, see Release Claim (on page 540).
 You can create a filter of objects by project and set a style rule, so objects belonging to a
certain project are easily distinguished.
 If errors occur when using the Claim command, refer to the Troubleshooting Reference
Guide in Help > Printable Guides for additional information.

Common User's Guide 540

 Project Menu

Release Claim
Reassigns the selected objects back to as-built so that another project can claim them.
You claim objects to the active project for the purpose of editing or modifying the objects.
Sometimes you need to release a claim on an object. For example, you may have claimed an
object by mistake, or another project may need to work on the object. The Release Claim
command reassigns a claim from the active project back to as-built so that another project can
claim it.

 To remove a new object from the active project, you can delete the object.
 If problems occur when using the Release Claim command, refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide in Help > Printable Guides for additional information.
 You must have Write permission to both the project and the as-built to release an object,
and the status of both the project and the as-built must be Working.

Release Claimed Objects

The Release Claim command requires that an as-built project exists.
1. Select objects in the model by clicking in a graphic view, dragging a fence around objects, or
selecting by filter.
2. Click Project > Release Claim.
The software reassigns the selected objects back to the as-built project and removes any
relationships to the other Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) items, such as contracts.

Common User's Guide 541

 Project Menu

Assign to WBS
Creates a relationship in the database between each object in the select set and the selected
Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) item in the Workspace Explorer. These relationships display
on the Relationships tab of the object Properties dialog box.
WBS assignment is controlled by the software to enforce certain conditions. Rules for
assignment to WBS items are defined by properties of the WBS item. For more information, see
General Tab (WBS Item Properties Dialog Box) (on page 532). To support automatic
assignments and updates, the Assign to WBS command uses the following rules:
 For a given WBS item with a specific type and purpose, you can assign all systems or all
assemblies, but not a mixture of both. In the following example, because the first type of
assignment under Painting is a system assignment, the Assign to WBS command only
allows you to assign other systems (or individual objects) to the Painting WBS item.

 When you assign a system or an assembly to a WBS item, the Assign to WBS command
automatically assigns all associated objects to the WBS item as well. For example, suppose
you assign MemberSystem-1-0101 to the Painting WBS item. The Assign to WBS
command assigns FrameConnection-1-0101, FrameConnection-1-0102, and
MemberPartPrismatic-1-0101 to the Painting WBS item automatically.

 When you assign a higher-level system or an assembly object to a different WBS item, the
Assign to WBS command prompts you to move the sub-objects to the new WBS item.
You can manually assign objects to WBS items after they have been created. You can
determine which object classes are assigned during the manual assignment by editing the
object class list in the WBSAssignableNames_Manual.txt file delivered in the SharedContent
share. Only object classes in this file are assigned during the manual assignment. If the
WBSAssignableNames_Manual.txt file is deleted, all selected objects are assigned to WBS.

Common User's Guide 542

 Project Menu

You can also have the objects assigned automatically as you create them by setting the active
WBS project or WBS item during modeling. If a WBS project is identified in the Active Project
box on the main toolbar, all new objects are claimed to that active project when they are
created. If a WBS item is identified, objects are first claimed to the parent project of the WBS
item and then assigned to the WBS item. Only lowest-level objects, commonly termed as parts,
are automatically assigned. For example, design objects like piping features or grouping objects
like pipelines are not assigned, but piping parts are assigned. The automatic assignment of
objects to WBS is controlled by the WBSAssignableNames.txt file located in the SharedContent
share. You can modify the file to determine which object classes are automatically assigned.

 The Update WBS Assignments command handles cases where you add new objects to a
system or an assembly as part of the 3D modeling tasks, or when you move systems or
modify the system hierarchy.
 The Assign to WBS command always checks to make sure that, at the time of assignment,
a system or assembly and all sub-objects are valid for assignment.
 When assigning a pipe run to the WBS item, you must select the entire pipe run. Use the
Locate Filter (on page 148) or QuickPick to help with selecting the entire pipe run.
See Also
Assign Objects to a WBS Item (on page 543)
WBS Items and Projects (on page 519)

Assign to WBS Dialog Box

Creates a relationship between the objects in the select set and the selected Work Breakdown
System (WBS) item.
Look in
Specifies whether you want to look in the workspace or in the Model database for the WBS
items.
See Also
Assign to WBS (on page 541)

Assign Objects to a WBS Item

1. Select the active WBS project in the Active Project box on the main toolbar.
If the appropriate WBS project does not appear in the list, click More to open the
Select Active Project dialog box (on page 258).
2. Select objects in the model by clicking in a graphic view, dragging a fence around objects, or
selecting by filter.
When assigning a pipe run to the WBS item, you must select the entire pipe run.
Use QuickPick to help with selecting the entire pipe run.
3. Click Project > Assign to WBS.
4. On the Assign to WBS dialog box, specify Workspace or Database to update the
hierarchy of WBS items.
5. Select the WBS item to which you want the selected objects assigned.

Common User's Guide 543

 Project Menu

6. Click OK to create the relationships between the objects in the select set and the selected
WBS item.
7. Verify the relationship by selecting an object and doing one of the following:
 Select an object and view the Relationship tab on its Properties dialog box.

 Select the WBS item in the Workspace Explorer and click Select objects to assign
on the WBS Item Edit ribbon. All of the associated objects highlight in the graphical
view.
 Right-click the WBS item in the Workspace Explorer and click Select Nested. All of
the associated objects highlight in the graphical view.

 If no as-built project exists, then a message indicates that the command requires an as-built
project. You can create an as-built project in the Workspace Explorer by setting As-built in
the Project Purpose field. For more information, see WBS Items and Projects (on page
519).
 If the select set contains objects that are already claimed to the parent project of the
selected WBS item, or the objects are not claimed to another project through another WBS
assignment, then the command highlights the objects and displays a message asking if you
want to continue with the assignment on the other objects.
 If some objects cannot be assigned because of assignment type problems, a message
appears. Click Yes to continue with the valid objects.
 If some of the objects are not valid because they are assigned exclusively, a message
appears. Click Yes to change the assignment of the highlighted objects.
See Also
Assign to WBS (on page 541)

Remove All Objects from a WBS Item

1. Select a WBS item in the Workspace Explorer.

2. Click Select objects to assign on the WBS Item Edit ribbon.

All of the associated objects highlight in the graphical view.
3. Click Clear all on the ribbon to clear all selections, and then click Finish.

Common User's Guide 544

 Project Menu

Update WBS Assignments

Updates system and assembly Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) assignments.
Any given project could contain many different WBS items. Membership, for performance
reasons, is not updated automatically as you add or remove objects from systems and
assemblies as part of your 3D modeling tasks. The Update WBS Assignments command
resolves system and assembly assignments whenever you require them to be updated.
For more information on assigning objects to WBS items, see Assign to WBS (on page 541).
See Also
Update WBS Assignments (on page 545)

Update WBS Assignments

1. Select one or more WBS items to update in the Workspace Explorer.
The WBS objects highlight in the select color.
2. Click Project > Update WBS Assignments.
All WBS assignments for the selected objects update.

 If any of the objects have WBS assignment conflicts, then a confirmation message appears.
In cases where one of the assignments requires exclusive membership, the command
changes the object and its children to the more restrictive assignment. Click Yes to continue
processing the update.
 If an object belongs to an assigned system or assembly object (or both), then the software
assigns the object to the same WBS item as the owning object. Any nested objects are
assigned.
 If an object belongs to more than one WBS item and one of the WBS items is set to
exclusive, then the object is put on the To Do List in an error state to be resolved. You can
modify the WBS item to clear assignments when there are conflicts.
See Also
Update WBS Assignments (on page 544)

Common User's Guide 545

SECTION 11

SmartPlant Menu
The SmartPlant menu provides commands for publishing documents or retrieves revisions from
engineering documents. It also provides the tools for correlating and comparing with the design
basis. Some of the commands on this menu may change depending on the active task. The
SmartPlant menu is only available in the Common, Electrical, Equipment, and Piping tasks.

In This Section
Smart 3D in an Integrated Environment ........................................ 546
Publish documents ....................................................................... 555
Find Documents to Publish ........................................................... 564
Retrieving Data ............................................................................. 565
Viewing P&IDs .............................................................................. 571
Correlate with Design Basis Command ........................................ 584
Correlate Automatically Command ............................................... 594
Compare Design Basis Command ................................................ 599
Design Basis Viewer Command ................................................... 605
Remove Correlation with Design Basis Command ....................... 610

Common User's Guide 546

 SmartPlant Menu

Smart 3D in an Integrated Environment

Using Intergraph SmartTM 3D in an integrated environment allows you to re-use data in Smart
3D that has already been typed into authoring tools such as SmartPlant ® P&ID and SmartPlant
Instrumentation.
In this integrated environment, data is published to and retrieved from a central repository.
During a publish operation, drawings, reports, or 3D model data is sent to the repository. During
a retrieve operation, the design basis is brought into the software and then related to 3D objects.
Design basis is the term used for piping, instrumentation, electrical, and equipment data from
other applications outside Smart 3D.
The role of SmartPlant Foundation is crucial in an integrated environment, not only from the
standpoint of managing the transfer of the data but also setting up the project structure.
Before any project work is created, the project structure must be created in SmartPlant
Foundation and then published. The published structure is then retrieved into the authoring
tools. The retrieval of this PBS (Plant Breakdown Structure) automatically creates the same
structure in the tools. Then, when data is created in the authoring tools, the publish functionality
automatically groups items in SmartPlant Foundation to that structure and builds relationships
among the data within that PBS. For more information, see Retrieving Data (on page 565) in the
Integration Reference Guide. The PBS can also be created directly in the 3D model. For more
information, see Creating a Plant Breakdown Structure without Retrieving a PBS Document in
the Integration Reference Guide.
If a new area or project is created in an authoring tool, but not in SmartPlant Foundation, a
publish operation places that data at the top level of the plant in SmartPlant Foundation.
The following graphic shows the publish and retrieve operations along with the central repository
(SmartPlant Foundation) in a conceptual manner.

Common User's Guide 547

 SmartPlant Menu

The following graphic shows a more detailed view of the publish and retrieve operations. You
can see the flow of data and the different types of data.

 Smart 3D can retrieve P&IDs, SmartPlant Electrical cable schedules, SmartPlant

Instrumentation DDP files, Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS). The retrieved information
assists you in creating and modifying objects in the model. For example, after you retrieve a
P&ID, you can use the P&ID Viewer in Smart 3D for guidance when routing pipe, inserting
components and instruments, and placing equipment in the 3D model.
 In the Smart 3D Drawings and Reports task, you can publish orthographic drawings,
isometric drawings, and reports as view files. The view files include relationships to the 3D
model data. You can publish 3D model data for use with SmartPlant Foundation and
SmartPlant Review. The 3D model data can include data related to the orthographic,
isometric, and report documents. For more information, see the Drawings and Reports Help.
 SmartPlant P&ID interfaces with Smart 3D Catalog data through the Remote Piping
Specification data. This connection allows the P&ID user to validate components against the
catalog data before you retrieve it in Smart 3D. Remote Piping Specifications require
additional setup in Smart 3D and P&ID. Please refer to the SmartPlant P&ID Utilities Guide
for more information.

Common User's Guide 548

 SmartPlant Menu

Hexagon PPM Work Process Guides

Hexagon PPM Work Process guides map the process, power, and marine industries' basic work
processes to SmartPlant Enterprise solutions. This documentation helps your organization
transition from previous work practices to using Hexagon PPM tools as the new way of
executing projects. These documents are available on https://smartsupport.intergraph.com
(https://smartsupport.intergraph.com) under View Documentation > Work Process Guides.
Enterprise Work Processes describe an entire engineering discipline or process at two
different levels, including:
 Providing a swim lane diagram to define the typical roles and high-level processes involved
in a project
 Showing how Hexagon PPM tools are used to produce required deliverables
Integration Capability Statements describe a specific work process among a set of Hexagon
PPM tools, including:
 Explaining the out-of-the-box capabilities of the tools and their recommended use
 Providing a swim lane diagram to show how the tools interact in the work process
 Stating critical requirements and precautions
Enterprise Work Processes and Integration Capability Statements offer a better understanding
of how Hexagon PPM tools work together and how to adapt the tools to improve existing work
processes.

Common User's Guide 549

 SmartPlant Menu

Understanding Integration Terminology

In the context of integration, certain terms carry a specific connotation for their usage with Smart
3D. The following terms are used frequently when you use the software.
 Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) - The composition of the model based on the
construction work to be completed. The model occupies the top level of the hierarchy (area),
followed by projects, contracts, and documents.
 Area - A group of work organized primarily by geographic position relative to a named
volume or area to which you can assign a relationship.
 Project - The scope of work approved for capital expenditure; a financed set of work (that is,
a job). Normally, a project begins in the design world and then progresses to the physical
world when the actual construction is approved.
 Contract - A specific contract to the fabricator or erector. You can associate published
documents to a contract and then reassign the document from one contract to another. You
can also assign documents to multiple contracts.
 As-built - Describes the computer model intended to accurately represent the physical
model as it was built (constructed). Objects in the as-built model contain property values (for
example, contractor or industry commodity codes) that associate the model objects to
physical objects in the model. The accuracy of this model depends on the incorporation of
changes based on changes made in the actual model during construction. If no such
changes are made, the model is "as-designed."
As -built is not available in integration mode.
 As-designed - Describes the computer model that depicts the design of the physical model.
This model does not use property values (that is, serial numbers) but identifies objects by a
tag number or actual location. Currently, the authoring tools update the as-designed model,
not the as- built model.
 As-is - Describes the set of physical objects that actually exist in the model. The as-is model
is not a computer model but a physical entity.
 Claim - To identify objects as part of a project.
 Design Basis - A collection of objects that represent the pieces of data from other authoring
tools outside of Smart 3D.
 Design object - Any object that you can select with a property page. An object can be
related to one or more contracts of different types. Or, you can limit this relationship to only
one contract of a given type, by setting the Exclusive property.
 Part - An object managed for production by a unique identity.
 Assembly - A set of parts, using a unique identity, grouped together for production
purposes.
 Pipe spool - A set of piping parts assembled in a workshop and installed as a unit in the
field. Typically, a pipe spool represents the lowest level assembly of piping parts. The Piping
task includes commands to automatically define the spool groupings based on rules.
 Pipe run - A piping path with the same nominal pipe diameter (NPD). The contents of a pipe
run use the same specification and have the same service.
 Pipeline - A collection of pipes and components that form a distribution system.

Common User's Guide 550

 SmartPlant Menu

Hierarchy for Work Breakdown Structure

The organization of components in the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) differs between an
owner/operator company and an engineering, procurement, and construction (EPC) company.
The hierarchy for an owner/operator WBS is as follows. In the graphic, notice that the as-built
and project objects share the same level.

An EPC has the following hierarchy for WBS:

See Also
Retrieve Documents (on page 569)

Integrating with SmartPlant Enterprise

The following lists include rules that must be followed when using Smart 3D in an integrated
environment. Following these rules allows Smart 3D data to be shared correctly with SmartPlant
P&ID, SmartPlant Instrumentation, SmartPlant Electrical, and other tools. Other tools that are
not listed here have no known Smart 3D integration concerns.

Important Points to Remember

 To ensure piping properties are passed correctly from SmartPlant P&ID to Smart 3D, you
must specify the value SmartPlant 3D for the Use Piping Specification property in
SmartPlant P&ID Options Manager.
 For proper P&ID correlation, SmartPlant P&ID and Smart 3D must use the same naming
convention for piping components and equipment. For example, piping reducers must use
the same name, such as Concentric Size Change or Concentric Reducer, in both
SmartPlant P&ID and Smart 3D.
 The To Do Lists in the 2D design basis applications are different from the Smart 3D To Do
List accessed from the View menu. The other tools To Do Lists show the tasks required to
update information in an integrated SmartPlant environment. Specifically, these To Do Lists
aid in retrieving data by providing a list of all the items that must be added, deleted, or
modified in the tool. The Smart 3D To Do List shows inconsistencies in the model when one
of two situations occurs: 1) an object has lost a relationship with another, required object, or
2) an object becomes outdated due to permission constraints when you modify a
relationship in the model. Items that could appear in the To Do List are flow direction
problems, invalid connections, or parts not found.
 You should use the Smart 3D To Do List along with the P&ID Viewer to ensure that all
inconsistencies are corrected in the model and in the design basis.

Common User's Guide 551

 SmartPlant Menu

 You can run a report in Smart 3D that lists items on the SmartPlant To Do List. Click Tools
> Run Report and open the Diagnostic folder; select Diagnostic 3D To Do List Entries,
and click Run. Before running the report, you need to check data consistency on the model
database server. For more information, see the Database Integrity Guide, available from
Help > Printable Guides.
There are other reports in the Diagnostic folder such as the Diagnostic P&ID
Correlated 3D Object that can be used in an integrated environment.
 After retrieving piping and instrumentation data, you can use the colors in the P&ID Viewer
to see what objects have been modified or added to the drawing. After retrieving cable data,
you can view a cable schedule document.

Ports
SmartPlant Instrumentation uses physical ports, while SmartPlant P&ID uses logical ports.
When the workflow goes from SmartPlant P&ID to SmartPlant Instrumentation, a Same As
relationship is created between the ports in SmartPlant. That Same As relationship is required
by Smart 3D to correctly match the design basis ports to the 3D representation of the ports.
When the workflow goes from SmartPlant Instrumentation to SmartPlant P&ID, however, a
Same As relationship is not created in SmartPlant. Without this Same As relationship, the result
may be additional ports in Smart 3D. The result also depends on the way SmartPlant P&ID and
SmartPlant Instrumentation synchronize the retrieval of data.
If Smart 3D retrieves the DDP before it retrieves the P&ID, there could be four ports in the
design basis after the P&ID is retrieved. This causes a design basis mismatch in the 3D model.
This is commonly referred to as "the four-port issue". After the four port issue has appeared for
an instrument in a 3D model, it cannot be resolved. There will always be mismatched items on
the Compare Design Basis dialog box for the affected instrument.
To avoid the issue, always retrieve the DDP after you have retrieved the P&ID. If you are unable
to avoid the issue and it does appear, synchronize SmartPlant Instrumentation and SmartPlant
P&ID, and then have SmartPlant Instrumentation republish the DDP. Smart 3D can then
re-retrieve the newly republished DDP and this resolves the issue.

Piping Hierarchy
You can configure the plant breakdown structure (PBS) in the 3D model in two ways:
 Before retrieving P&IDs into the model, retrieve the PBS document to set up the
plant/area/unit (PAU) hierarchy. The first three levels of the hierarchy must match between
the tools. For more information, see Retrieving Data (on page 565) in the Integration
Reference Guide.
 Configure the PBS directly within the model without retrieving the PBS document. For more
information, see Creating a Plant Breakdown Structure without Retrieving a PBS Document
in the Integration Reference Guide.

Common User's Guide 552

 SmartPlant Menu

Piping Data
If you define a piping hierarchy and route pipe before retrieving piping data on a P&ID, you must
correlate the existing runs to runs on the P&ID. Here is an example workflow.
1. Model the pipe run before the P&ID is available.
2. Select the existing pipe run in the 3D model.
3. Click SmartPlant > Correlate with Design Basis.
4. Select the corresponding run on the P&ID.
5. On the Compare Design Basis dialog box, click Update. The software moves the pipe run
from its existing parent to its new parent.
You can browse the Workspace Explorer to check the system assignment of the
run.
For detailed information on using the Piping task in an integrated environment, see the Piping
User's Guide.

Off-Page Connectors (OPCs)

Off-Page Connectors (OPC) connect multi-page P&ID drawings. Unlike other P&ID elements,
the OPC is correlated when the two pipe runs are joined. The actual P&ID symbol is never
selected or used for correlation. The main issue to take into consideration when correlating
piping with an OPC is that a weld is placed where the two pipe runs meet. Therefore, you should
find a logical connection point for this weld in the model to avoid adding an additional unneeded
weld. For more information on correlating a pipe run that is located on multiple drawings, see the
Piping User's Guide.
In Smart 3D, when claiming a line that contains an Off-Page Connector (OPC) from a P&ID
created prior to SmartPlant P&ID version 4.3, you must claim the OPC at the same time that you
claim the line.

Equipment Data
You correlate and update equipment in the Equipment and Furnishings task.
You must correlate existing equipment using a two-step process. Correlate the equipment body
first, and then correlate nozzles separately.
Nozzles correlate at the same time as equipment if they have the same names on the
equipment and P&ID.
As with piping, equipment can be built on the fly. For more information about correlating and
updating equipment, see the Correlate Existing Equipment for Use in an Integration
Environment topic in the Equipment and Furnishings User's Guide.

Select Lists (Codelists)

The names of select lists in Smart 3D are case-sensitive. When you make a change to a select
list in SmartPlant, you must inspect the Smart 3D Catalog Schema database to verify that the
change did not create a duplicate entry. Select list values must have an appropriate value, not a
zero as a place holder. A zero value causes an error upon validation of the schema.

Common User's Guide 553

 SmartPlant Menu

Claiming
Smart 3D provides the ability to exclusively claim objects to a project. Auto-claiming in Smart 3D
as a result of claims initiated in SmartPlant P&ID is not supported. Also, SmartPlant P&ID does
not support auto- claiming based on claims from other tools. Therefore, you must manually
maintain consistent claim scopes between SmartPlant P&ID and Smart 3D.
For example, when objects are shared between tools, the object is typically claimed first in
SmartPlant P&ID. In Smart 3D, use Project > Claim to claim the correlated object. When Smart
3D claims a correlated object first, SmartPlant P&ID does not auto-claim the object during a
retrieve. You must manually claim the object in SmartPlant P&ID.

Permissions
We recommend that you or your administrator create a separate permission group for users that
perform the retrieve operation. Only users from the retrieve permission group should retrieve
documents. Following this recommendation prevents ownership issues related to design basis
objects.
Smart 3D requires that you have Write permission in order to claim objects to a project. You are
not required to have Write permission to the project to modify claimed objects; you only need
Write permission to the objects themselves. You must also have Write permission to as-built,
which must be in a Working status to claim and release claims in Smart 3D.

Workflow for Smart 3D in an Integrated Environment

The following tasks are used when you work with Smart 3D in an integrated environment.

Register with SmartPlant

Before starting the workflow, an administrator must register the model in the Project
Management task. There can be only one registration per model. For more information, see the
Project Management User's Guide available from Help > Printable Guides.
When you register the model, you create a relationship between the local model and the
SmartPlant Foundation URL/plant. This operation creates a unique signature for the tool/model
combination being registered.

Define the Workspace and Populate the Work Breakdown Structure

 Define or open a workspace in the software. For more information, see Define Workspace
(on page 62)
 Populate the WBS, shown on the WBS tab in the Workspace Explorer. If you are working
with a correlated SmartPlant project, you can populate this tab by retrieving a project list.
For more information, see Retrieve Documents (on page 569). If you are working in as-built,
create projects and objects manually using the Create WBS Project or Create WBS Item
commands. For more information, see WBS Items and Projects (on page 519).
 Set the active project using the drop-down list on the main toolbar. For more information,
see Select Active Project Dialog Box (on page 258).

Common User's Guide 554

 SmartPlant Menu

Retrieve Documents
Retrieve documents such as PBS, P&IDs, and instrument DDPs (Dimensional Data for Piping).
The software allows you to retrieve the documents that pertain to the active model only. For
more information, see Retrieve Documents (on page 569). To retrieve an electrical cable
schedule, go to the Electrical task to perform the retrieve. For more information, see the
Electrical User's Guide.

Update Retrieved Data

There are several ways to update the retrieved data. For information on any of the commands
listed below, see SmartPlant Menu (on page 546).
 Use the View P&ID command to open a retrieved P&ID. You can view correlated objects
(new or changed objects) using the P&ID Viewer. You can view deleted objects using a filter
with the Correlation Status property.
 Use the Correlate with Design Basis and Compare Design Basis commands to trace the
differences between the P&ID and the 3D model. The Correlate with Design Basis
command is used to correlate objects previously modeled in Smart 3D to the retrieved
P&IDs.
 Use the View Cable Schedule command to create and update the retrieved electrical
cables in 3D model. For more information, see View Cable Schedule.

Model and Update Objects

Model piping, instrumentation, and equipment objects while using the P&ID as a visual To Do
List.

Publish Documents
Create and publish drawings and reports, if necessary. You can also publish 3D model data in
the Drawings and Reports task or using the Tools > Drawing Console command. For more
information, see the Drawings and Reports Help.
After publishing the 3D Model Data, you can view the data in SmartPlant Foundation
and SmartPlant Review.

Back Up the Database

Back up the databases in the Project Management task. For more information, see the Project
Management User's Guide.

Common User's Guide 555

 SmartPlant Menu

Publish documents
Before you can publish documents, you must ensure that your computer is configured properly.
The configuration includes installing the SmartPlant Client and the SmartPlant Schema
Component and registering the model through the SmartPlant Registration Wizard.
You must use the SmartPlant > Retrieve command in one of the 3D tasks to import published
data.
When you publish a 3D model, you must now enable the Scheduler and
Loader in SmartPlant Foundation to make the 3D model data document retrievable. The load,
consolidate, and merge tasks must complete successfully before the 3D model document can
be retrieved.
The SmartPlant menu is not available in all tasks.
1. Right-click a component and select Publish. The Publish dialog box displays.

 If the Publish command is not available on the shortcut menu for the component or
document, check the document properties and make sure that the documents are
up-to-date and have been revised first.
 You can use the Publish > Update and Publish command to update drawings and
publish them in one step. This command is available only if the model is registered with
SmartPlant Foundation.
2. Edit information as necessary for the selected documents.
When multiple documents are selected, only property values shared by all of the selected
documents display in the table. Changing a value in the table changes that value for all of
the selected documents.
3. Select the Publish Type.
 Smart 3D supports Publish Type for delta publish.

 The default setting for Publish Type is Changes Only. If the 3D model has not
been published before, the software automatically selects All and performs a
complete publish to ensure all filtered data is published and loaded into SmartPlant
Foundation.
 For subsequent publishes, select All to publish all filtered data in the 3D model,
even if it is unchanged. Select Changes Only to publish only the changes in the 3D
model since the last successful publish.
 If the 3D model does not publish successfully during a delta publish, select All so
that data from the previous publish is published and loaded into SmartPlant
Foundation.
 Other SmartPlant applications do not support Publish Type. For these SmartPlant
applications, the default setting for Publish Type is All, and it cannot be changed.

Common User's Guide 556

 SmartPlant Menu

4. Select one of the following operations:

 Publish to publish the selected documents immediately.
 Background publish to publish as a separate process so that you can continue
working in the application.
 Scheduled publish to publish in the batch mode by the authoring tool. The documents
are not published immediately. Instead, the selected documents are scheduled for
publish at a later time and may be scheduled as a recurring operation.
5. Click OK to publish the selected documents.

 You can verify the publishing process by starting the SmartPlant Client on your computer
and searching for the published document.
 When publish is complete, the following message displays: Documents have been
published successfully. If the View Log button is enabled, messages are available
concerning the operation. These messages include errors, warning, and informational
messages. Click View Log to review these messages.

Publish
Publishes the information in the selected documents. You can access the Publish Documents
command by right- clicking a component or document.
The Publish and Update and Publish commands are available for the following types of
documents:
 3D Model Data (SmartPlant Review file type)
 Orthographic Drawings, including Volume and Composed drawings (viewable file with links
to data)
 Piping Isometric Drawings (viewable file with links to data)
 Reports (viewable Microsoft Excel workbook file with links to data)

 The viewable files created when you publish drawings and reports provide relationship links
to the 3D Model Data. You must also publish the 3D Model Data to provide the navigation
between the viewable files and the 3D Model Data.
 The Publish > Update and Publish command updates and then immediately publishes the
selected documents in one step. This command is available only if the model is registered
with SmartPlant Foundation.
When you publish a 3D model, you must now enable the Scheduler and
Loader in SmartPlant Foundation to make the 3D model data document retrievable. The load,
consolidate, and merge tasks must complete successfully before the 3D model document can
be retrieved.

Common User's Guide 557

 SmartPlant Menu

Define the Discipline and Document Type properties to enable publishing for the documents.
For more information see Set properties for publishing documents.
For 3D model data, the Discipline and Document Type properties are already
populated.
You may also want to specify documents to be revised, not published, or reserve revision
numbers. For more information, see Revising.
To generate a list of documents that need to be published, you can use SmartPlant > Find
Documents to Publish. For more information, see Find Documents to Publish (on page 564).
You can publish isometric drawings to SmartPlant Foundation in additional file formats other
than the SHA drawing file format. These additional files along with the SHA drawing are
generated by the update process. When publishing isometric drawings you can also publish
other available data files and reports generated by the update process. For more information,
see Published Files (S3D Supplementary).
Publish Dialog Box (on page 558)

Publish Dialog Box

Provides a list of documents selected to publish.
Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page 558)
Issue Request Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page 562)
See Also
Publish documents (on page 555)
Find Documents to Publish (on page 564)
Publish (on page 557)

Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box)

Displays the properties of the selected document or documents. If only one document is
selected in the tree view, the properties displayed on this tab are the properties of that one
document. If multiple documents are selected, only the properties with the same value for all
documents display. Any properties with varying values across the documents display with blank
values in these fields.
You can change some of the values assigned to one or more documents by changing the value
displayed in the table. The value you type here overrides any existing values for all selected
documents.
Selected documents
Displays a list of the documents selected for publishing. You must populate this list by
selecting documents in the Management Console or Detail View before you use the
Publish command. For each document, this list displays the name, the type of document,
the workflow from which the document was last published, the revision and version
numbers, the revision scheme, and the date when the document was last published.
Engineering Tool
Opens a dialog box to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. This
functionality is not available in the current release.

Common User's Guide 558

 SmartPlant Menu

File System
Opens a standard Microsoft dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the
Selected documents list. When you select a file with this Select File dialog box, the
Document Properties dialog box displays, allowing you to specify information about the
file, such as whether it is a new file; the category, type, and subtype of the document; and
the name, description, and title of the document.
Find
Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box, which allows you to search for
documents to add to the Selected documents list. For more information, see Find
Documents to Publish Dialog Box (on page 564).
Last Published
Indicates the date on which the document or documents were last published.
Name
Displays the name of the document.
Source
Indicates the authoring tool in which the document was created.
Type
Displays the type of document or documents selected.
Comment
Allows you to type information about the selected documents that are publishable.
Issue Only
Allows you to issue request documents without, necessarily, republishing them. Use this
option when no changes were made to a drawing and you only want to add it to a contract.

 Even with this option set, you can still publish the documents. If any of the documents
have never been published, they must be published, regardless of this setting.
 You will receive an error message if you select multiple documents and activate this
option when one or more of the selected documents cannot be changed. For example,
the error message displays if the selected set of documents includes both a new
document (for which this field can be set only to No) and current or locked documents
(for which this field can be set only to Yes). The error message prompts you to select a
smaller set of documents.
Owning Group
Select an owning group from the drop down list to which the document belongs.

 By default, the owning group selected for the previous version, if any, is shown.
 All the owning groups configured in SmartPlant Foundation are listed.

Common User's Guide 559

 SmartPlant Menu

Revision
Displays the current revision number of the selected document or documents.
You will receive an error message if you attempt to change the value in this field
when you have selected one or more documents that have conflicting revision schemes or
different possible revisions. The error message prompts you to select a smaller set of
documents.
Revision Scheme
Displays the revision scheme applied to the selected document or documents.
Only revision schemes that are applicable to the configuration (plant) or
classification (document type) are available in the shortcut menu. The revision schemes
related to a configuration or classification are not available for any other configurations or
classifications. If none of the revision schemes are related to the configuration or
classification, then all revision schemes are available unless they are related to any other
configuration or classification. For more information on revision scheme configuration, see
Configuring Different Revision Scheme Strategies in the How to Configure Document
Management guide.
You will receive an error message indicating that this field cannot be edited if one or
more of the documents that you have selected are not new or will have a revision scheme
supplied by the authoring tool. The error message prompts you to select a smaller set of
documents.
Version
Indicates the current version of the document or documents.
Workflow
Indicates the workflow to which the selected document or documents are assigned.

Common User's Guide 560

 SmartPlant Menu

Publish Type
Allows you to publish all data in a 3D model or only the changes to the model since the last
successful publish. If the 3D model has not been published before, the software
automatically selects All and performs a complete publish to ensure all filtered data is
published and loaded into SmartPlant Foundation.

Publishing documents Publish Type

All Changes Only

First publish after creating the document All objects All objects

Subsequent publish with no changes to the model All objects No objects

Subsequent publish with changes to the model All objects Changed objects

Subsequent publish with no changes to the model All objects No objects

(after changing the Publish Type)

Subsequent publish with changes to the model All objects Changed objects
(after changing the Publish Type)

You will receive an error message indicating that this field cannot be edited if one or
more of the documents that you have selected have conflicting sets of possible workflows.
The error message prompts you to select a smaller set of documents.
Check and publish released claims for previously deleted items
Specifies that you want to resolve issues where deleted items were restored from an earlier
version and the claim on them was released. This check takes additional time and should
only be used when deleted items have been restored. This option is not supported in this
release.
This check box should also be activated when publishing after a backup is restored
or when releasing the claim on an object forces another tool to release the claim on a
related object that was previously deleted. In this specific case, the tool fetches the object
from As-Built again and releases the claim.
Operation
Specifies the operation to perform on the selected documents.
 Publish - Selected documents are published immediately.
 Background publish - Selected documents are published immediately as a separate
process, allowing you to perform other tasks at the same time.
 Scheduled publish - Selected documents are published in the batch mode by the
authoring tool. This option is available only for tools that support batch mode and are
processed by the authoring tool, not the SmartPlant Client. The documents are not
published immediately. Instead, the selected documents are scheduled for publish at a
later time and may be scheduled as a recurring operation.
If the software cannot make a SmartPlant Foundation server connection
when you use Scheduled Publish, you are prompted to provide a valid SmartPlant
Foundation login and password.

Common User's Guide 561

 SmartPlant Menu

Custom
Opens the Custom dialog box. This functionality is available only if defined by your project
implementation team.
Check for deleted objects no longer on documents
Select Check for deleted objects no longer on documents option if you want to process
the move instructions while publishing.
See Also
Publish documents (on page 555)
Find Documents to Publish (on page 564)
Publish (on page 557)

Issue Request Tab (Publish Dialog Box)

Displays the documents associated with a specific issue request and allows you to add
documents to or remove documents from a request.
Selected documents
Displays a list of the documents selected for publishing. You must populate this list by
selecting documents in the Management Console or Detail View before you use the
Publish command. For each document, this list displays the name, the type of document,
the workflow from which the document was last published, the revision and version
numbers, the revision scheme, and the date when the document was last published.
Engineering Tool
Opens a dialog box to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. This option
is not supported in this release.
File System
Opens a standard Microsoft dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the
Selected documents list. When you select a file with this Select File dialog box, the
Document Properties dialog box displays, allowing you to specify information about the
file, such as whether it is a new file; the category, type, and subtype of the document; and
the name, description, and title of the document.
Find
Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box, which allows you to search for
documents to add to the Selected documents list.
Issue to
Contains a list of all objects (contracts) that can support issue requests. When you select an
item from this list, the names of any documents associated with that object display in the
table.
Add
Creates a new item in the table for any documents highlighted in the Selected documents
tree view.
Remove
Deletes a selected document from the table.

Common User's Guide 562

 SmartPlant Menu

Document Name
Displays the names of all documents associated with the object in the Issue to field.

Common User's Guide 563

 SmartPlant Menu

Find Documents to Publish

Generates a list of documents that either have not been published or have been modified and
need to be published again or have been deleted since the last publish. The command is found
on the SmartPlant menu in the Drawings and Reports task.
This command can also be accessed from using the Find button on the Publish tab of
the Publish dialog box. For more information, see Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page
558).
Documents must be up-to-date, and the required Discipline property must be defined in order
for the documents to be available for publishing. An error message displays if one or more of the
documents found by the Find Documents to Publish command do not meet this criterion. All
items matching the publish criteria continue through the process. For more information on
setting the appropriate properties, see Set properties for publishing documents. For more
information on updating documents, see Updating Documents.
The SmartPlant > Find Documents to Publish command looks for the following:
 Documents created but never published
 Documents modified since their last publish
 Documents deleted after being published
The command looks for documents that need to be republished in the active WBS project. For
example, if Project A is the active project, the Find Documents to Publish command looks for
documents in Project A only. You set the active WBS project in the Active Project box on the
main toolbar. For more information, see Manage Projects.
Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box (on page 564)

Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box

Allows you to search for documents that have been updated since they were last published.
Additionally, you can use this dialog box to terminate documents that were previously published
but no longer exist in the authoring tool. You can access the Find Documents to Publish
dialog in two ways:
 Select SmartPlant > Find Documents to Publish.
 Click Find on the Publish command dialog box.
Last Published
Displays the date when the files were last searched. The information displaying in the lists
on this dialog box was found on this specified date and time. This option is not available in
the current release.
Update
Displays the Update dialog box, which allows you to define new search criteria for finding
documents to publish. This option is not available in the current release.

Common User's Guide 564

 SmartPlant Menu

Select documents to publish

Displays a list of files that were either updated since they were last published or files that
have not yet been published. For each file, this list displays the file name and type, and the
date on which the document was last published. If the file has not been published, the Last
Published field for the document is New.
Select documents to terminate
Displays a list of the files that were previously published but have since been removed from
the project. For each file, this list box displays the file name and type, and the date on which
the document was last published.
Select All
Selects all of the files in the associated list of documents.
Clear All
Clears any selected documents in the associated list.
See Also
Find Documents to Publish (on page 564)
Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box) (on page 558)

Retrieving Data
When you retrieve documents in an integrated environment, you are retrieving the document
data that was previously published. For example, in SmartPlant Instrumentation, you can
retrieve engineering information from a published P&ID into the SmartPlant Instrumentation
database.
To retrieve a document, you can use the SmartPlant > Retrieve command to open a dialog box
that assists you in retrieving the applicable documents.
The Retrieve command is available only if you have registered the model using the
Project Management task. You must also install the SmartPlant Client and SmartPlant
Schema Component to use the Retrieve command.
When you use the Retrieve command, the software searches the integrated environment for
documents to retrieve, and the Retrieve dialog box lists these documents.
You can retrieve a document in the following ways:
 As published - Retrieves only the data that the authoring tool originally published with the
selected revision and version of the document. Retrieving as-published data retrieves the
.XML file that the authoring tool published.
 With the latest data - Retrieves the latest data associated with the selected document. If
another, more recently published document contains updates to objects in the selected
document, then the software retrieves the most current data for those shared objects. When
you retrieve the latest data, an .XML file containing the published data is generated.
 CDW data - Retrieves the data by updating the property values contained in a published
XML with those contained on the corresponding CDW (consolidated warehouse) object.

Common User's Guide 565

 SmartPlant Menu

In Smart 3D, the types of documents and data that you can retrieve include:
 P&IDs
 Project Breakdown documents
 Electrical
 Dimensional Datasheets (DDPs)
 Plant Breakdown Document
You must have write permissions to the model to use the Retrieve command.

Retrieving P&IDs
You can retrieve piping, instrumentation, and equipment data from a P&ID in an integrated
environment.
To use a P&ID in Smart 3D, the piping designer should have defined specific properties on the
objects in the P&ID. These properties include fluid code, tag sequence number, piping material
class, and nominal piping diameter. In addition, the nozzles should be labeled on the P&ID.
You should retrieve the SmartPlant Instrumentation data before placing
instrumentation in the model.

Retrieving Electrical Cable Schedules

You can retrieve electrical cable schedule data from SmartPlant Electrical (SPEL). In the
Electrical task, the SmartPlant > View Cable Schedule command allows you to view the
retrieved data and update or import cables.

Retrieving Instrumentation Datasheets

You can retrieve SmartPlant Instrumentation dimensional data for piping. The software retrieves
instruments defined in SmartPlant Instrumentation and maps those instruments to a parametric
symbol.
Smart 3D retrieves the non-graphical property values, such as instrument tag, manufacturer,
and part number, as well as dimensional group data used to model the instrument.
You should retrieve the SmartPlant Instrumentation data before placing
instrumentation in the model.

Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS)

You can retrieve the plant breakdown structure (PBS). The PBS is created in and published by
SmartPlant Foundation and retrieved to provide information about the models, areas, and units
that need to be created in the software.
The PBS document published by SmartPlant Foundation contains information about the physical
model whose structure consists of plants, areas, and units. The default structure is
plant/area/unit, but you can define a custom hierarchy in the Schema Editor.
For more information, see Create a Custom PBS Hierarchy in the Integration Reference Guide.

Common User's Guide 566

 SmartPlant Menu

Data Handling After Retrieval

You can view P&IDs using the SmartPlant > View P&ID command to access the data and
correlate objects. You can view retrieved electrical cable schedule data with the SmartPlant >
View Cable Schedule command in the Electrical task.

Understanding the Design Basis

The 3D design basis is the set of objects in the model database which represent the data from
documents previously retrieved from TEF. You do not directly create, edit, or delete these
objects. When you correlate a 3D object, a relation is created between that 3D object and its
correlated design basis object. For more information, see Design Basis Explanation.
Objects that you retrieve can become the design basis for objects in downstream documents.
Objects that become the design basis for other objects can be specific objects that get richer as
they move through the lifecycle, or they can be schematic or logical objects in one application
that evolve into more detailed objects downstream.
Design basis is implicitly based on retrieval; you do not have to define it. For example, a pump
retrieved from a PFD becomes the design basis for a pump in the P&ID.

Retrieve and Restore

When another application has been restored to a previous state, the Smart 3D design basis
objects are deleted and re-created upon retrieval. To avoid duplicating 3D objects, the retrieval
process checks systems, pipelines, and projects/contracts to see if they exist with the same
name and type as design basis objects. If the objects do exist, then the software correlates to
the objects upon retrieval instead of creating new objects.
After the retrieve operation, you must re-correlate the other 3D objects (besides systems,
pipelines, and projects/contracts) with the new design basis objects.

Updating Project Status

When you work in an integrated environment, SmartPlant Foundation (SPF) workflows manage
the project status. At each stage in the workflow, you publish your project status information.
There are two types of statuses. One is the status on the project: Active, Complete, Merged, or
Canceled. The other is the Working/Approved status. Each object in the project has a
Working/Approved status, and the project object itself can be set to Working/Approved. The
as-built object must always have a Working status. When it becomes Approved, the as-built
project becomes read-only.

Common User's Guide 567

 SmartPlant Menu

Retrieve Command
Provides a list of the published documents that are available for retrieval. This list is displayed
on the Retrieve dialog box, from which you can select the documents that you want to retrieve,
bringing the information from the integrated environment into Smart 3D.

 The Retrieve command is available only if you have registered the model using the Project
Management task. For more information on registering, see the Project Management User's
Guide. You must also install the SmartPlant Client and SmartPlant Schema Component
to use the Retrieve command. For more information, see the Intergraph SmartTM 3D
Installation Guide and the Integration Setup Guide.
 The Retrieve command requires that you have write permissions to the model. Otherwise,
error messages are displayed. For example, when you are retrieving the Plant Breakdown
Structure (PBS), the command displays an error that says it is unable to create the Plant
Breakdown Structure (PBS) systems when retrieving the PBS. For all errors, you have the
option of continuing the retrieve process and cleaning up the design basis, or you can
cancel the retrieve process and fix the permissions and status, then re-run the Retrieve
command.
See Also
Retrieving Data (on page 565)

Retrieve Dialog Box

Allows you to retrieve information published by other authoring tools.
Document type - Indicates the types of documents that you can retrieve. Selecting a document
type changes the list view to show only that document type.
Show - Indicates which documents you want to see in the list. Choose from the following
options:
 Documents to be retrieved only - Provides a list of only those documents that need to be
retrieved. In other words, the list displays the documents that have newer versions that have
been published since they were last retrieved.
 New documents only - Provides a list of only the new documents that have not yet been
retrieved.
 All documents - Provides a list of all of the documents available for retrieval, including both
new and previously retrieved documents.
Documents to retrieve - Displays a list of the documents that are available for retrieval. For
each document, this list provides the name, type, revision and version numbers, status, date of
the last retrieval, and revision option. Select the check box beside each document that you want
to retrieve, and then use the Retrieve Option column to specify whether you want to retrieve
the document with the latest data or as it was published.
Select All - Selects all of the files in the associated list of documents.
Clear All - Clears any selected documents in the associated list.

Common User's Guide 568

 SmartPlant Menu

Batch retrieve - Indicates that the system will retrieve the selected documents in batch mode, in
other words, in the background. When you use this feature, an e-mail message alerts you when
the process is complete. Otherwise, the retrieval process begins as soon as you click OK. This
option is not available in this release.
Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) documents, such as the Plant Breakdown
Structure (PBS) documents are considered administrative documents by the software and must
be retrieved by all tools that subscribed to these types of documents. So, even when these
documents are new to the tools (have not been retrieved by the tool before), they are still listed
in the Documents to be retrieved only list, because they must be retrieved.
See Also
Retrieve Documents (on page 569)
Retrieving Data (on page 565)

Retrieve Documents
1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve. The Retrieve dialog box appears.

 This command is available only if you have registered the active model using the
SmartPlant Registration Wizard. For more information, see the Project Management
User's Guide. You must also install the SmartPlant Client and SmartPlant Schema
Component to use the Retrieve command. For more information, see the Intergraph
SmartTM 3D Installation Guide and the Integration Setup Guide.
 If you are logged on with a user name that is not defined in the integrated environment,
you are prompted to log on when you use this command.
 The Retrieve command searches the SmartPlant Foundation model for documents that
are ready to be retrieved. These documents appear in the Documents to retrieve list
on the Retrieve dialog box.
2. In the Document type box, specify the type of document to be retrieved.

Common User's Guide 569

 SmartPlant Menu

3. In the Show section, select Documents to be retrieved only to include documents that
have been retrieved previously and have been published again since the last retrieval.
Select All documents to include all revisions and types of documents. Select New
documents only to retrieve documents that have not been retrieved yet.

4. In the Documents to retrieve list, select the check box beside each document that you
want to retrieve. To help identify the documents, review the details in the Type, Revision,
Version, and Last Retrieved columns.
To quickly select the entire list, click Select All. To quickly cancel the selections,
click Clear All.

Common User's Guide 570

 SmartPlant Menu

5. For each document that you checked, use the Retrieve Option column to specify whether
you want to retrieve the document with the latest data or retrieve it as published.
6. Click OK to retrieve the specified documents.

 In the Project Management environment, the Deleted and Unclaimed Objects document is
retrieved automatically every time you retrieve, if there is a newer version of this document
since the last retrieval. The document is not included in the list, but it is retrieved
automatically to ensure that the applicable information is updated.
 When the retrieval process is complete, the following dialog box appears. If the View Log
button on the dialog box is enabled, then messages are available concerning the operation.
These messages may include errors or warnings or even information messages. Click the
View Log button to see these messages.

 After retrieving, you can use the View P&ID command and the P&ID Viewer to review data
that requires attention. Any items that need to be addressed appear in green, red, and
purple in the P&ID Viewer. For more information about colors, see Set Correlation Status
Colors Dialog Box (on page 577). You can use the Compare Design Basis command to
see property differences. For example, if you have custom equipment in your model, you
may need to modify select list values in the Custom Equipment reference data. You may
have to perform routing tasks from the P&ID and place inline components and instruments.
Refer to task-related documentation for assistance in correcting data from the P&ID.
 To allow the placement of piping components from a retrieved P&ID, you must specify the
value SmartPlant 3D for the Use Piping Specification property in SmartPlant P&ID
Options Manager.
 Examples of documents that the software can retrieve include Plant Breakdown Structure
(PBS) documents, SmartPlant® Instrumentation dimensional data sheets, electrical cable
schedules, and P&IDs. In the Project Management environment, other possible documents
available for retrieval are deleted and unclaimed object documents.
See Also
Retrieving Data (on page 565)

Common User's Guide 571

 SmartPlant Menu

Viewing P&IDs
The SmartPlant > View P&ID command allows you to display a P&ID that has been retrieved
into the model.
Using a P&ID from the two-dimensional (2D) environment within the three-dimensional (3D)
environment is an example of the integration of disciplines. Beyond the display functionality, the
software allows you, the designer, to retrieve objects that correlate between the P&ID and the
model. This process helps you to create the appropriate 3D design objects.
The P&ID objects you can select and place in the 3D model include pipe runs, equipment, piping
components, cables, and instrument components. You can assign 3D objects to Work
Breakdown Structure (WBS) projects and later change the assignments to different projects.
In the Piping task, the Route Pipe command includes the option Select from P&ID to
graphically select a run from a P&ID to route. You must set the Locate Filter box to All or Pipe
Run before selecting a run from a P&ID. When you select a run on a P&ID, the software checks
to see if the run already exists in the model. If the run does exist and is correlated, then the
software locates the existing run in the model from the correlated run on the selected P&ID. If
the run does not exist, then the Create New Run dialog appears, allowing you to create the new
run. For most components, you can add them during routing or after routing is complete. Some
components, like reducers, must be inserted during routing.
The Equipment and Furnishings task also provides commands that work with placing objects
from a P&ID. These commands include the Place Equipment, Place Equipment Component,
Place Designed Equipment, Place Designed Equipment Component, Place Shape, and
Place Nozzle commands.
A picture of the P&ID File Viewer window appears below. You can resize the window with
standard Windows commands on the title bar, like Minimize, Expand, and Close. The window
has its own toolbar with viewing commands, such as Zoom Tool, Window Area, Fit, and Pan.

The colors of various objects in a P&ID reflect the correlation status between the P&ID and the
3D model. You can consider this a graphical To Do List that helps you identify additional work
after using the Retrieve command. Use the P&ID Viewer in conjunction with the Compare
Design Basis command to see property differences. You can specify the colors using Options
> Set Correlation Status Colors in the P&ID File Viewer menu bar.

Common User's Guide 572

 SmartPlant Menu

The Select Correlated command on the P&ID File Viewer Tools menu selects 3D objects that
match with objects in the P&ID. You can select objects with data match, data mismatch,
topology mismatch, and unknown data match. You can also select correlated objects in as-built.
The objects must satisfy the parameters of the active locate filter. When you complete a Select
Correlated command, the software highlights the objects in the 3D view and places them in the
select set.

Handling Deleted Design Basis Issues

Items deleted from the P&ID can be found in the 3D model by updating the objects using the
Compare Design Basis dialog box or by specifying a filter to select the deleted objects. Any
design basis objects that compare with a status of correlated design basis deleted will be
deleted when you click Update on that dialog box.
You can also use Fence Select to update large amounts of data. You set the Select filter to All,
fence the design objects to update, and then run the Compare Design Basis command.

Common User's Guide 573

 SmartPlant Menu

View P&ID Command

Displays a P&ID that corresponds to the design basis. You can choose the P&ID from a list of
P&IDs that have been retrieved.
All P&IDs that have been retrieved into the model appear in this list. If no P&IDs have been
retrieved, then this list is empty.
When you select a drawing and click OK, the P&ID opens in the P&ID File Viewer window.
The software displays the P&ID in the same location and at the same size from the last time that
it was displayed in the workspace. You can resize the view with the standard Windows
commands on the title bar, like Minimize, Maximize, and Cancel. A toolbar offers view
commands, like Zoom Out, Zoom Area, Fit, and Pan. Menus allow you to select correlated
objects and specify P&ID colors.

You can use the P&ID to access items, such as equipment, piping information, and SmartPlant
Instrumentation dimension data, to help create the appropriate 3D design objects. Also, you can
select a correlated object within the model and display the P&ID from which the object was
drawn. You can do this by selecting the object in the model and then selecting the Smart 3D >
View P&ID command. This opens the drawing in which the correlated object exits. If the
correlated objects span multiple P&IDs (such as a split equipment), then the software displays a
list of P&IDs that you can choose from.
If there is a problem displaying a P&ID or selecting objects on the P&ID, you can consider
running a custom command for troubleshooting purposes (this command does not resolve any
errors). The ProgID for this command is SP3DDisplayPIDService.VerifyPIDCmd. For more
information, see Verify P&ID Integrity Command (on page 581).
See Also
Viewing P&IDs (on page 571)

Common User's Guide 574

 SmartPlant Menu

View P&ID Dialog Box

Opens the file that serves as the design basis. All P&IDs that have been retrieved appear in this
list. If no P&IDs have been retrieved, then this list is empty. You can sort the list based on any
column by clicking a column heading. You can select only one drawing at a time.
This dialog box appears after you select the SmartPlant > View P&ID command. When you
select a drawing and click OK, the P&ID opens in the P&ID File Viewer window.
Drawing Number
Provides the number of the available design basis document.
Title
Identifies the title of the available design basis document.
Revision
Indicates the revision number of the document.
Version Date
Indicates the revision date of the document.
See Also
Correlate Model Objects with Design Basis Objects (on page 590)

P&ID File Viewer

Displays the P&ID you selected. This window is associated with the SmartPlant > View P&ID
command.

Toolbar
Zoom Out
Decreases the display size of selected objects.
Zoom Area
Magnifies an area of the model. Drag or click two points to create a fence around an object
or area of the model that you want to enlarge.
Fit
Fits all visible objects in the active view.
Pan
Moves the view up, down, left, or right to display other areas of the model. The pointer
appears as a hand when this command is active.

Show Primary View

Displays the primary components only for the P&ID.

Show Typicals View

Displays the typicals components only for the P&ID.

Common User's Guide 575

 SmartPlant Menu

Show Primary and Typicals

Displays both the primary and typicals components only for the P&ID.

View Menu
This menu contains the Fit, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Area, and Pan commands to assist in
orienting the P&ID view.

Tools Menu
Magnify
Displays a small zoomed-in view of a portion of the P&ID.
Overview
Displays a small view of the entire P&ID.
Select Correlated
Selects the 3D objects that are correlated to the design basis objects. The selection of
objects is based on the locate filter that is currently specified. The Select Correlated
command highlights the correlated objects in the model and provides a way to quickly see
areas where you need to do more work, such as highlighting all objects that have Data -
mismatch.
Some of these objects may not have corresponding objects on the P&ID (for
example, the pipeline object). These commands also select objects regardless of whether
the objects are loaded in the current workspace or not. It will not change the workspace
definition. These objects can then be manipulated by commands. If they do not match the
workspace filter, then they will be removed from the workspace on the next workspace
refresh.
The Select Correlated command includes the following options: Correlated - data match,
Correlated - data mismatch, Correlated - topology mismatch, Correlated - that are in
as-built, Approved - topology mismatch, and Approved - all mismatches. For more
information about the first three options, see Set Correlation Status Colors Dialog Box (on
page 577). The Correlated - that are in as-built option selects objects in the 3D model that
are related to as-built and also are on the currently active P&ID.

Options Menu
Set Correlation Status Colors
Specifies the colors of various objects in the P&ID. The colors reflect the correlation status
between P&ID objects and the corresponding objects in the 3D model.
Set Highlight Color
Sets the color of highlighted objects on the P&ID Viewer.
Set Select Set Color
Sets the color of selected objects on the P&ID Viewer.

Common User's Guide 576

 SmartPlant Menu

Layer Controls Menu

Show Typicals
Displays the typicals components in the P&ID File Viewer.
Hide Primary
Removes the primary components from the P&ID File Viewer. This command appears if the
Show Primary command is selected.
Swap on Highlight
Displays either the primary or typicals components when a correlated 3D object is selected
in the model. For example, if the typicals components are hidden and you select a 3D object
that is correlated to a typicals object, then the typicals components are displayed and the
primary components are removed from the view.
See Also
Display a P&ID and Retrieve Drawing Data (on page 578)

Set Correlation Status Colors Dialog Box

Specifies the colors that designate correlation status of objects in the design basis with objects
in the three-dimensional model. You also specify the standard color for objects in the P&ID that
do not have a correlation with any model object.

Correlated / Complete Match

Designates the color of the objects in the design basis that have a match in the model
without any discrepancies in the data or topology. The default color is .
Correlated / Property Match / Topology Mismatch
Designates the color of the objects in the design basis that have a match in the model
without any discrepancies in the data, but have discrepancies in topology. The default color
is .

Common User's Guide 577

 SmartPlant Menu

Correlated / Property Mismatch

Designates the color of objects in the design basis that have a match in the model.
However, problems exist between the data associated with the design basis (for example,
the P&ID object) and model object. The default color is .
Correlated/ Property and Topology Mismatch Approved
Designates the color of objects in the design basis that you have compared or checked
against the current design basis and approved the discrepancies in the data and topology.
The default color is .
Correlated / Topology Mismatch Approved
Designates the color of objects in the design basis that you have compared or checked
against the current design basis and approved the discrepancies in topology. The default
color is .
Not correlated
Designates the color of objects in the design basis that do not have a match or do not exist
in the model (have not been modeled yet). The default color is .
Ignored or not claimed
Designates the color of objects in the design basis that you have drawn but cannot have
correlation because you have not placed the objects in the model. Ignored applies to things
such as labels within the design basis. Not claimed applies to items that were not claimed
on the P&ID during the Project operation. The default color is .
Use approved colors
Reveals the designated color of approved objects. For example, if you check this option, the
color of the object with approved topology mismatch turns to from . This option is
useful in identifying and verifying the approved mismatches in the design basis.
Preview
Provides a window that shows the representative colors you selected to identify the
correlation status.
See Also
Display a P&ID and Retrieve Drawing Data (on page 578)

Common User's Guide 578

 SmartPlant Menu

Display a P&ID and Retrieve Drawing Data

1. Select an object in the model.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID.
3. If the active object in the model has a match (or a correlated object) in only one P&ID, then
the software automatically opens the associated P&ID. If the active object does not match,
or has multiple matches in more than one P&ID, then the Open P&ID File dialog box opens
listing the P&IDs that contain the matching object and allowing you to specify the drawing to
open.
Use the document revision number and last revision date to select the correct
document.
4. If the Open P&ID File dialog box opens, select the P&ID you want to access from the list of
all P&IDs that have been imported. The P&ID File Viewer: [drawing name] window opens
and displays the drawing.
The grid on the P&ID File Viewer: [drawing name] window states the name and
description of the P&ID.
5. When the P&ID opens in the P&ID File Viewer: [drawing name] window, use the various
commands in the P&ID File Viewer to orient the drawing, select correlated objects, and
specify colors.
6. Select objects in the P&ID and use commands in the 3D software to create or edit these
objects in the model.
7. To close the P&ID File Viewer: [drawing name] window, click Close on the title bar.
8. To open a different drawing, start the SmartPlant > View P&ID command again.

 You can use the P&ID that the software displays in the P&ID File Viewer window as a
reference when you model objects and thus create the appropriate 3D design objects.
 Among P&ID objects that you can select are a pipe run, equipment, cable, piping
component, instrument component, branch point, and an attribute break point. Piping
components and instrument components result in along-leg features in the 3D model. A
branch point results in a branch feature in 3D, and an attribute break point results in a run
change feature in 3D.
 If there is a problem displaying a P&ID or selecting objects on the P&ID, then you can
consider running a custom command for troubleshooting purposes (this command does not
resolve any errors). The ProgID for this command is
SP3DDisplayPIDService.VerifyPIDCmd.

Common User's Guide 579

 SmartPlant Menu

Viewing and Correlating P&ID Typicals

In Smart 3D, you can now view a P&ID’s typicals and correlate these with your model. Within a
P&ID drawing, typicals are user defined, graphical representation, of a group of objects and their
relationships. On a P&ID drawing, typicals mark the position of where similar groups of objects
should appear but have been hidden from view. For example, on a drawing typicals that contain
a series of pipes, a pump, and valves, informs the viewer that at this position on the drawing
there is more than one group of objects that consist of a series of pipes, a pump, and valves, but
have been hidden from view to make the reading of the drawing clearer.
By default, typicals are hidden when you view the P&ID using the View P&ID command. To
know exactly what the hidden objects are the viewer needs to switch views, from the primary
view to the typicals view. Layer Control commands allow you to switch show and hide typicals,
show and hide primary, and switch between primary and typicals views when a 3D object is
highlighted.

View and Correlate P&ID Typicals

1. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID.
2. Select a P&ID from the drawing list in the Open P&ID File dialog box. By default, the viewer
opens displaying primary P&ID components.

3. Click to view the primary components.

4. Click to select the typicals view.

5. To display both primary and typicals, click .

You can use the Layer Control commands to show and hide the P&ID’s primary
or typicals components.
6. To automatically switch between displaying primary and typicals components when a 3D
object is selected, click Layer Control > Swap on Highlight. If both the primary and
typicals views are displayed, then no switching between views occurs.
Using the Piping control on the main ribbon, select All before selecting the 3D
Objects
7. To correlate, see Correlate with Design Basis Command (on page 584) or Correlate
Automatically Command (on page 594).

Common User's Guide 580

 SmartPlant Menu

Assign Colors for Correlation

1. Click Smart 3D > View P&ID. If an active (or selected) object in the model has a design
basis match (or a correlated object) in only one P&ID, then the software automatically opens
the associated P&ID. If the active object does not match or has multiple matches in more
than one P&ID, then the Open P&ID View dialog box opens with the list of P&IDs with a
match for that object.
2. When the Open P&ID View dialog box opens, select the P&ID you want to access from the
list of all imported P&IDs. The P&ID File Viewer: [drawing name] window opens and
displays the drawing.
3. On the P&ID File Viewer: [drawing name] window, click Options > Set Correlation
Status Colors.
4. On the Set Correlation Status Colors dialog box, select a color for specifying objects with
correlation and without any errors in the Correlation Status section, complete match box.
5. Select a color for specifying objects with correlation but have property inconsistencies in the
Correlation Status section, Property mismatch box.
6. Select a color for objects you have approved with data mismatches in the Correlation
Status section, approved property mismatch box.
7. Select a color for object you have approved with association problems in the Correlation
Status section, Topology mismatch box.
8. Select a color for objects you have approved with topology mismatches in the Correlation
Status section, approved topology mismatch box.
9. Select a color for objects that cannot be correlated or are not claimed in the project in the
Ignored or not claimed box.
10. Select a color for specifying objects that have not been drawn or are drawn in the model but
not correlated in the Not Correlated box.
You can review the selected colors in the Preview area by clicking Apply.
See Also
Viewing P&IDs (on page 571)

Common User's Guide 581

 SmartPlant Menu

Verify P&ID Integrity Command

Validates the internal connections between objects on a P&ID and objects in the Model
database. This command is a custom command (ProgID:
SP3DDisplayPIDService.VerifyPIDCmd) and provides some basic troubleshooting statistics. It
does not resolve database integrity errors. For more information about database integrity, see
the Database Integrity Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
The Verify P&ID Integrity command displays the following information:
 Design Basis Objects: The total number of design basis objects that have a relationship to
the P&ID document object. The number should be the same as what is seen in the P&ID
Viewer.
 3D Objects: The number of design basis objects that have a correlated relationship between
the P&ID document and the Smart 3D object. The current correlation status is also reported.
 P&ID Objects (Total Identified): This count is the total number of RAD objects that have a
drawing ID in the P&ID document. The total identified should match the number of Design
Basis Objects. These objects are displayed with their representation ID.
 P&ID Objects (contained in Design Basis): The number of RAD objects that have a graphic
OID that will map to drawing representation design basis objects. This number should match
the Design Basis Object count. A mismatch most likely means that the objects were deleted.
The difference is the number of Deleted P&ID OIDs.
 Deleted P&ID OIDs: The number of RAD objects that have a graphic OID but do not exist in
the model.
 Duplicate OIDs: The number of multiple RAD objects with the same graphic OID. Most
likely, there is a problem with the P&ID file or with the integrated environment.
 Miscellaneous Errors - Any errors not defined above are in this category.
See Also
Validate Connections between P&ID and 3D Objects (on page 584)
Viewing P&IDs (on page 571)

Common User's Guide 582

 SmartPlant Menu

Verify P&ID Integrity Dialog Box

Allows you to select a P&ID to verify, and displays the results of the process.
Select P&ID
Lists the P&IDs that you can verify. You can select only one P&ID at a time to validate.
Verify
Click this button to start the verification process. The software displays the following items:
 Design Basis Objects: The total number of design basis objects that have a relationship
to the P&ID document object. The number should be the same as what is seen in the
P&ID Viewer.
 3D Objects: The number of design basis objects that have a correlated relationship
between the P&ID document and the Smart 3D object. The current correlation status is
also reported.
 P&ID Objects (Total Identified): This count is the total number of RAD objects that have
a drawing ID in the P&ID document. The total identified should match the number of
Design Basis Objects. These objects are displayed with their representation ID.
 P&ID Objects (contained in Design Basis): The number of RAD objects that have a
graphic OID that will map to drawing representation design basis objects. This number
should match the Design Basis Object count. A mismatch most likely means that the
objects were deleted. The difference is the number of Deleted P&ID OIDs.
 Deleted P&ID OIDs: The number of RAD objects that have a graphic OID but do not
exist in the model.
 Duplicate OIDs: The number of multiple RAD objects with the same graphic OID. Most
likely, there is a problem with the P&ID file or with the integrated environment.
 Miscellaneous Errors - Any errors not defined above are in this category.
Results
Lists the verification criteria (P&ID objects, 3D objects, and so forth) and the counts
associated with each criterion.
Details
Displays a list of the objects with the selected error. For more information, see Details
Dialog Box (on page 583).
Close
Closes the dialog box. This command does not save any data.
See Also
Validate Connections between P&ID and 3D Objects (on page 584)
Verify P&ID Integrity Command (on page 581)
Viewing P&IDs (on page 571)

Common User's Guide 583

 SmartPlant Menu

Details Dialog Box

Lists the objects with the error condition you selected on the Verify P&ID Integrity dialog box.
P&ID
Lists P&ID objects.
3D Model
Lists the corresponding 3D model object.
Correlation Status
Shows the correlation status between the P&ID object and 3D object.
Notes
Displays any notes.
Close
Closes the dialog box and returns you to the View P&ID Integrity dialog box.
See Also
Verify P&ID Integrity Dialog Box (on page 582)

Validate Connections between P&ID and 3D Objects

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
2. Add the SP3DDisplayPIDService.VerifyPIDCmd command, and run it.
3. On the dialog box, select a single P&ID to verify.
4. Click Verify.
5. To view additional statistics about any result, click a row in the Results box, and then click
Details.
You can select an object (only select one) in the Details list and see it highlight in
the select color on the P&ID.
See Also
Viewing P&IDs (on page 571)

Publishing 3D Data
You can publish 3D model data in the Drawings and Reports task or using the Tools > Drawing
Console command. The model can then be viewed through SmartPlant Foundation or
SmartPlant Review. For more information, refer to the Drawings and Reports Help.

Common User's Guide 584

 SmartPlant Menu

Correlate with Design Basis Command

Specifies an object in the three-dimensional model and an object in a P&ID to correlate. A P&ID
pipe run can correlate with multiple Smart 3D pipe runs. A P&ID pipeline can correlate with
multiple Smart 3D pipelines.
If the objects do not have a status of Correlated with data match, you can trace the origin of
the problem using the Compare Design Basis dialog box.
You can add conditions to the [Reference Data
Folder]\SharedContent\Xml\ExemptCorrelateClasses.xml file that cause the Correlation Basis of
an object to be set to Ignored when that object meets the conditions. The data in the
<IgnoreObjects> xml tag is used to list conditions to determine if an object should be ignored for
a P&ID topology comparison. Valid values for the Operator attribute in the <Condition> tag are =
for equality and != for inequality. For example:
<IgnoreObjects>
<Condition>
<Property Interface = "IJRtePipePathFeat"
Name = "Type" Value = "Nipple" Operator = "=" />
</Condition>
</IgnoreObjects>
You can change the correlation colors by clicking Tools > Set Correlation Status Colors in the
P&ID File Viewer.

Default Color Status Description

Complete match Represents objects that have a data and topology

match between the design basis data and the
objects in the three-dimensional model.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with

property the design basis. However, these objects have a
mismatch property discrepancy which generates the
mismatch. The cause of the discrepancy can
result from changes in the P&ID or in the
three-dimensional model.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with

Topology the design basis. However, these objects have a
mismatch topology discrepancy which generates the
mismatch.

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with

approved the design basis. However, these objects have
property approved property discrepancies.
mismatch

Common User's Guide 585

 SmartPlant Menu

Default Color Status Description

Correlated with Represents objects that have a correlation with

approved the design basis. However, these objects have an
topology approved topology discrepancies.
mismatch

Not correlated Objects that have either not been modeled from
yet the P&ID or that have been modeled but have not
been correlated with design basis data.

Ignored or not Shows the object either is not claimed (that is, it
claimed exists in the as-built condition), or the software
ignores the object (for example, revision clouds
and labels).

See Also
Retrieving Data (on page 565)

Correlate with Design Basis Dialog Box

Correlates the selected object in the 3D model to a matching design object on the P&ID. If the
objects do not have a status of Correlated complete match, you can trace the origin of the
problem using the Compare Design Basis dialog box.
See Also
Correlate with Design Basis Command (on page 584)
Correlate Model Objects with Design Basis Objects (on page 590)
Properties Tab (Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box) (on page 586)
Topology Tab (Correlate with Design Basis Dialog Box) (on page 588)

Properties Tab (Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box)

Selected
Specifies the name of the selected object in the 3D model. A P&ID pipe run can correlate
with multiple Smart 3D pipe runs. A P&ID pipeline can correlate with multiple Smart 3D
pipelines. The Selected drop-down lists all objects in the 3D model that are correlated with
the design basis object.

Common User's Guide 586

 SmartPlant Menu

Category
States the category for the property. Properties are listed in alphabetical order according to
the interface of the category that you selected for the property pages of the 3D model.
Select All to list all the properties in alphabetical order.
The read-only field beside the Category box provides the following information about the
correlation for the object that you selected in the 3D model:
 Property Match - Indicates that the object that you selected in the model has all
properties matching those of its correlated design basis object.
 Property Mismatch - Indicates that the object that you selected in the model has one or
more properties with values not matching the value of the mapped property in the
correlated object.
The check box beside the Model Property Name allows you to selectively update the
properties in the list. You must select Copy properties from design basis to enable the
selective update check boxes.

 indicates clear or disabled state. Selective update is disabled or none of the

properties are selected for update.

 indicates select state. All the properties in the list are selected for update.

 indicates mixed state. One or more properties in the list are either read-only or not
selected for update.
 indicates read-only. You cannot update this property.

 You must check the selective update check box of the corresponding property to set its
correlation status to Property Match.
 The software remembers the last saved selective update preference for an object type
such as a pipe run, equipment, and pipeline system. For example, if you do not want to
update Name for piperun1, clear the checkbox corresponding to Name, and then click
Update. When you correlate piperun2, the dialog box displays your preference from the
piperun1 you last correlated.
Model Property Name
States the name of the property for the model object.
Design Basis Value
States the value of the property for the design basis object.
To view the difference between design basis value and model value, set the
Precision value to 4 or more for the properties you defined for comparison, such as
pressure and temperature. For more information, see Units of Measure Tab (Options Dialog
Box) (on page 502).
Model Value
States the value of the property for the three-dimensional model object.
To view the difference between design basis value and model value, set the
Precision value to 4 or more for the properties you defined for comparison, such as
pressure and temperature. For more information, see Units of Measure Tab (Options Dialog
Box) (on page 502).

Common User's Guide 587

 SmartPlant Menu

Correlation Approval Status

Specifies if the object is approved with discrepancies in the 3D model data compared with
design basis data. Select Topology mismatch approved if the object topology mismatch
can be ignored. Select Data and Topology mismatches approved if the object data and
topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None if you do not want to approve a
mismatch.
Copy properties from design basis
Controls copying of properties from the design basis object to the 3D model object. Select
this option to allow the update of 3D object properties during manual correlation. Clearing
this option clears and disables all the selective update check boxes.
Update
Transfers data from the design basis object (in the P&ID, for example) to match the 3D
model object. Clicking Update changes entire property values if selective update check box
is disabled.
Close
Closes the Compare with Design Basis dialog box.
Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) relationships (project or as-built) are shown on the
Property tab. However, the Update button does not update project membership for 3D objects
to match the design basis. In the Command task, use the Project > Claim command to claim
objects to the project.
See Also
Compare Design Basis with the Model (on page 604)
Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box (on page 600)

Common User's Guide 588

 SmartPlant Menu

Topology Tab (Correlate with Design Basis Dialog Box)

Displays the child objects of the selected grouping object and indicates both the 3D objects not
correlated to the P&ID (design basis) and also the P&ID objects (design basis) not correlated to
3D objects. For example, when you select a pipe run, the Topology tab indicates objects that
are correlated and in the same order on the pipe run, as well as objects that are correlated and
not in the same order on the pipe run.
This tab is available only for those objects that support correlation and get topology
from the design basis.
Selected
Displays the name of the selected object in the 3D model.
The read-only field provides the following information about the correlation for the object you
selected in the 3D model:
 Topology Match - Indicates that the object in the model you selected has a match or
correlation with an object in the design basis.
 Topology Mismatch - Indicates that the object in the model you selected does not have
a match or correlation with an object in the design basis.
#
Indicates an index number to reference the object as defined in the design basis (that is, the
drawing).
Design Basis Name
States the name of the object in the design basis (for example, a pipe run).
Model Name
States the name of the object in the 3D model.
Correlation Approval Status
Specifies if the component is approved with discrepancies in the three-dimensional data
compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch approved if components
topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology mismatches approved if
the components data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None if you do not
want to approve a mismatch.
Copy properties from design basis
Copies properties from the design basis objects to the corresponding 3D objects. This
option is not selected by default. Changes made to this option are saved to the session file.
Selecting this option overwrites the 3D object properties with the
corresponding correlated design basis object values. Therefore, do not select this option if
you do not want to modify the properties of a 3D object.
Changes made to this option are applied to all the commands that use it. For
example, if you select this option in the Correlate Automatically dialog box, then this option
is also selected in the Correlate with Design Basis and Compare with Design Basis
dialog boxes.

Common User's Guide 589

 SmartPlant Menu

Select
Selects a row in the grid. The object highlights in the model.
Close
Closes the Compare with Design Basis dialog box.
If a discrepancy exists on the Topology tab after clicking Update on the
Properties tab, you can trace the discrepancy and attempt to resolve it. For example, a
discrepancy might be an object routed or placed out of order.
See Also
Compare Design Basis with the Model (on page 604)
Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box (on page 600)

Correlate Model Objects with Design Basis Objects

A P&ID pipe run can correlate with multiple Smart 3D pipe runs. A P&ID pipeline can
correlate with multiple Smart 3D pipelines.
1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve data into the software (for example, a P&ID or a
Dimensional Datasheet).
2. Click SmartPlant > Correlate with Design Basis.
3. Select an object in the 3D model that you want to correlate. If you do not have a P&ID open,
the software displays the Open P&ID dialog box.
If you are correlating pipelines, set the filter to Pipelines; likewise, for pipe runs,
set the filter to Piping Runs. This is because you cannot select pipelines in P&ID and the
software uses the filter to determine what kind of piping objects you are correlating.
4. Select the P&ID to display.
5. In the P&ID File Viewer, select the object that you want to correlate. The software then
displays the Correlate with Design Basis dialog box. If one of the following conditions
exist, then a message first displays.
a. The 3D object supports one-to-many correlation, and the P&ID object is already
correlated to one or more 3D objects. The following message displays:
Selected Design Basis object is already correlated to another 3D object. Are you sure
you want to correlate more than one 3D object the same Design Basis object?
Click Yes to continue.
-OR-
Click No to display the Compare Design Basis dialog box, and proceed to step 6.
-OR-
Click Cancel to exit and cancel the correlation.

Common User's Guide 590

 SmartPlant Menu

b. The 3D object does not support one-to-many correlation, and the corresponding P&ID
object and 3D object correlation already exists. The following message is displayed:
You are trying to correlate to the same object again.
Click Ok to display the Compare Design Basis dialog box with the correlation objects
highlighted. Proceed to step 6.
-OR-
Click Cancel to exit and cancel the correlation.
c. The 3D object does not support one-to-many correlation, and the corresponding P&ID
or 3D object are already correlated. The following message displays:
You are trying to correlate to an object that is already correlated. Would you like to
remove the existing correlation and correlate again?
Click Yes to remove the existing correlation and correlate the selected objects. After the
new correlation, the software displays the Compare Design Basis dialog box with the
newly correlated objects highlighted. Proceed to step 6.
-OR-
Click No to display the Compare Design Basis dialog basis with the correlated objects.
Proceed to step 6.
-OR-
Click Cancel to exit and cancel the correlation.
6. Review the Properties tab for highlighted objects that have a discrepancy between the
P&ID and the 3D model. Objects that do not match are displayed in a different background
color.
7. Review the Topology tab to understand the differences in shapes between the 3D model
and the design basis.
8. Select Copy properties from design basis if you want to update the 3D object properties.
Clear this option to prevent overwriting the 3D object properties from design basis.
9. Click Update to correlate the 3D object with design basis object.
You can also select the Correlate with Design Basis command after activating a
model object, a design basis object, or both types of objects. If you select an object before
starting the command, follow the prompts on the status bar at the lower left of the application
window.

Common User's Guide 591

 SmartPlant Menu

Manually Correlate Multiple Smart 3D Pipe Runs/Pipelines

with a P&ID Pipe Run/Pipeline
If a P&ID pipe run or pipeline is split into multiple pipe runs or pipelines in Smart 3D, you can
use the following procedure to manually correlate these multiple Smart 3D piping objects to the
single P&ID pipe run or pipeline.
If you are correlating pipelines, set the filter to Pipelines; likewise, for pipe runs, set
the filter to Piping Runs. This is because you cannot select pipelines in P&ID and the software
uses the filter to determine what kind of piping objects you are correlating.
1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve P&ID data into the software.
2. Open the P&ID in the P&ID File Viewer.
3. Click SmartPlant > Correlate with Design Basis.
4. Select an object in the 3D model that you want to correlate.
5. In the P&ID File Viewer, select the object that you want to correlate.
The software detects whether the P&ID object is already correlated to one or more 3D
object. When you see the following message, click Yes to continue.
Selected Design Basis object is already correlated to another 3D object. Are you sure you
want to correlate more than one 3D object the same Design Basis object?
If you click No, the software un-correlates the existing correlated run, and then
correlates the new run.
6. Review the Correlate with Design Basis dialog box, set correlating options as needed, and
click Update.
7. Review discrepancies between the Smart 3D piping object and the design basis using the
SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis command.
The Compare Design Basis command helps you to determine if there are missing
correlations to the P&ID piping object.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to correlate more Smart 3D objects to the P&ID piping object.
When all related objects in the 3D model are correlated with the P&ID piping object, the
Correlation Status property of these 3D objects shows Correlated with data consistency.

Create a Filter to Select Piping Components Based on

Correlation Status
1. Click Tools > Select by Filter.
2. On the Select Filter dialog box, click New Filter (Simple or Asking) .
3. On the New Filter Properties dialog box, select the Properties tab.
4. Select More in the Property box.
5. Select Pipe Nozzle as the object type.
6. Select Direct Property of Object Type as the relationship.
7. Select Standard as the category.

Common User's Guide 592

 SmartPlant Menu

8. Select the Correlation Status attribute, and click OK.

9. On the New Filter Properties dialog box, select an operator and a value. For example, you
can specify that the filter select piping components with a correlation status equal to
Correlated with Data Consistency.

 The filter capability provides a means to query all piping objects based on their correlation
status with one operation.
 In addition to the filter for piping components, you can create a filter to select all pipes with a
specific correlation status. For more information, see Create a Filter to Select Pipes Based
on Correlation Status (on page 593).

Create a Filter to Select Pipes Based on Correlation Status

1. Click Tools > Select by Filter.
2. On the Select Filter dialog box, click New Filter (Simple or Asking) .
3. On the New Filter Properties dialog box, select the Properties tab.
4. Select More in the Property box.
5. Select Piping as the object type.
6. Select Run to Part-Owner as the relationship.
7. Select Piping Runs as the related object type.
8. Select Standard as the category.
9. Select the Correlation Status attribute, and click OK.
10. On the New Filter Properties dialog box, select an operator and a value. For example, you
can specify that the filter select piping components with a correlation status equal to
Correlated with Data Consistency.

 The filter capability provides a means to query all piping objects based on their correlation
status with one operation.
 In addition to the filter for pipes, you can create a filter to select all piping components with a
specific correlation status. For more information, see Create a Filter to Select Piping
Components Based on Correlation Status (on page 592).

Common User's Guide 593

 SmartPlant Menu

Correlate Automatically Command

Automatically correlates 3D objects with the design basis objects on the P&IDs based on the
matching properties and topology.
There are several reasons why the data in the 3D model might be current than the data in the
P&ID. For example, the model might exist before the P&ID, and you now want to correlate the
existing model data to the P&ID data that you have retrieved.

 If no 3D objects are selected, then the command runs the correlations for all selected P&ID
drawings against all 3D objects in the workspace.
 Nozzles are correlated automatically when the parent equipment is correlated.
 You can correlate one P&ID pipeline to many 3D pipelines. You can also correlate one P&ID
pipe run to many 3D pipe runs.

Correlate Automatically Dialog Box

Lists all of the retrieved P&IDs in the 3D model that can be used for correlation. You can use
CTRL + Select and SHIFT + Select to select multiple drawings to correlate. You can sort the
drawings by clicking on the column headers, and filter using the [Custom Filter] option.
Name
Displays the name of the P&ID. Click , and select the P&ID name from the list to filter.
 [All] - Displays all the available P&IDs. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter when you select this option. To filter, type the exact P&ID name, or type
* and % special characters as the first or last characters in the AutoCorrelate Custom
Filter box.
RevNumber
Displays the number of times the P&ID is reviewed. Click , and select the revision number
from the list to filter.
 [All] - Displays all the available P&IDs. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter when you select this option. To filter, type the exact number in the
AutoCorrelate Custom Filter box.
RevDate
Displays the date (YYYYMMDD) that the P&ID is reviewed. Click , and select the date
from the list to filter.
 [All] - Displays all the available P&IDs. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter when you select this option. To filter, type the exact date in the
AutoCorrelate Custom Filter box.

Common User's Guide 594

 SmartPlant Menu

Parent
Displays the name of the parent to which the P&ID belongs. Click , and select the parent
from the list to filter.
 [All] - Displays all the available P&IDs. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter when you select this option. To filter, type the exact parent name or type
* and % special characters as the first or last characters in the AutoCorrelate Custom
Filter box.
Copy properties from design basis
Copies properties from the design basis objects to the corresponding 3D objects. This
option is not selected by default. Changes made to this option are saved to the session file.
Selecting this option overwrites the 3D object properties with the
corresponding correlated design basis object values. Therefore, do not select this option if
you do not want to modify the properties of a 3D object.
Changes made to this option are applied to all the commands that use it. For
example, if you select this option in the Correlate Automatically dialog box, then this option
is also selected in the Correlate with Design Basis and Compare with Design Basis
dialog boxes.
See Also
Automatically Correlate with the 3D Model (on page 595)
Correlate Automatically Command (on page 594)

Automatically Correlate with the 3D Model

1. Select only equipment objects in the model by clicking them in a graphic view, dragging a
fence around objects, or selecting by filter.
If no 3D objects are selected, then the software runs the correlation for all
selected P&IDs against all 3D objects in the workspace.
2. Select SmartPlant > Correlate Automatically.
The Correlate Automatically dialog box displays.
3. Select one or more P&IDs from the design basis to correlate.
We recommend that you correlate 3D objects that belong to the selected
P&ID.
Verify that the Copy properties from design basis check box is clear.
4. Click OK.
If the property match rules are met, then the software correlates all equipment and piping
nozzles in the P&ID. The Auto-correlate Report is displayed after the auto-correlation
process is complete. For more information on the auto correlation report, see Auto-Correlate
Report (on page 596).

Common User's Guide 595

 SmartPlant Menu

5. Resolve any ambiguities in the Auto-Correlate Report:

a. On the Auto-Correlate Report > Ambiguous Objects, click the 3D object to correlate.
The selected 3D object is highlighted and zoomed to in the active view.
b. Select the appropriate P&ID object to be correlated from the list of possible matches.
The selected design basis object is highlighted yellow in the P&ID Viewer.
c. On the Auto-Correlate Report, click Correlate.
Perform these steps until all the ambiguities are resolved.
6. Select only pipeline objects within the workspace, and repeat steps 1 to 4.
If all auto-correlation rules are met, then the software correlates all pipelines, pipe runs, and
piping components in the P&ID.
7. Repeat step 5.
8. Click Cancel to close the report.

 The log file is stored in the temporary folder of your Documents and Settings folder.
 The software ignores objects that are already correlated in the 3D model.

Auto-Correlate Report
This report is divided into three sections that allow you to review and resolve any correlation
discrepancies. You can edit 3D objects, 3D object properties, compare with design basis,
manually correlate, and review your edits in the auto-correlate report while it is open.

Ambiguous Objects
This section contains a list of 3D objects with one or more possible matching design basis
objects.

Common User's Guide 596

 SmartPlant Menu

Design Basis Objects

Displays the name of the ambiguous design basis object. Click , and select the 3D object
from the list to filter ambiguous objects based on the 3D object.
 [All] - Displays all the objects. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter when you select this option. To filter, type the exact object name, or type
* and % special characters as the first or last characters in the AutoCorrelate Custom
Filter box.
3D Objects
Displays the name of the 3D object. Click , and select the 3D object from the list to filter
ambiguous objects based on the 3D object.
 [All] - Displays all the objects. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter when you select this option. To filter, type the exact object name, or type
* and % special characters as the first or last characters in the AutoCorrelate Custom
Filter box.
3D Type
Displays the object type. Click , and select the object type from the list to filter ambiguous
objects based on the object type.
 [All] - Displays all the objects. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter when you select this option. To filter, type the exact object name, or type
* and % special characters as the first or last characters in the AutoCorrelate Custom
Filter box.
A 3D object can have one or more design basis objects listed as possible match,
when the design basis objects have matching properties with the 3D object.

Not Correlated Objects

This section contains a list of 3D objects that are not correlated with any design basis objects.

Design Basis Objects

Displays the name of design basis object for which there is no matching 3D object.

Common User's Guide 597

 SmartPlant Menu

3D Objects
Displays the name of the 3D object. Click , and select the 3D object from the list to filter
not correlated objects based on the 3D object.
 [All] - Displays all the objects. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter when you select this option. To filter, type the exact object name or type
* and % special characters as the first or last characters in the AutoCorrelate Custom
Filter box.
3D Type
Displays the object type. Click , and select the object type from the list to filter not
correlated objects based on the object type.
 [All] - Displays all the objects. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter when you select this option. To filter, type the exact 3D type name or
type * and % special characters as the first or last characters in the AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter box.
A 3D object is not correlated for the following possible reasons:
 3D object has no design basis object.
 3D object does not have a design basis object with matching properties and topology.
 3D object's parent and the design basis object are not correlated.
 You do not have write permission to update the 3D object.

Correlated Objects
Contains a list of 3D objects with matching design basis objects. This list contains both newly
correlated objects and existing correlated objects.

Design Basis Objects

Displays the name of the correlated design basis object. Click , and select the 3D object
from the list to filter correlated objects based on the 3D object.
 [All] - Displays all the objects. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter, when you select this option. To filter, type the exact object name or a
special character as the last character in the AutoCorrelate Custom Filter box.

Common User's Guide 598

 SmartPlant Menu

3D Objects
Displays the name of the correlated 3D object. Click , and select the 3D object from the
list to filter not correlated objects based on the 3D object.
 [All] - Displays all the objects. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter, when you select this option. To filter, type the exact object name or a
special character as the last character in the AutoCorrelate Custom Filter box.
Correlate Result
Specifies whether the object is already correlated or newly correlated. Click , and select
the result type from the list to filter the correlated object list based on the correlate result.
 [All] - Displays both newly correlated and existing correlated results. This option is
selected by default.
 New Correlated - Displays only objects that are newly correlated results.
 Existing Correlated - Displays only objects that are manually correlated, and the
objects that are correlated prior to auto correlation.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter, when you select this option. To filter, type the exact text in the
AutoCorrelate Custom Filter box.
3D Type
Displays the object type. Click , and select the object type from the list to filter not
correlated objects based on the object type.
 [All] - Displays all the objects. This option is selected by default.
 [Custom Filter] - Allows you to customize the object filtering. Displays AutoCorrelate
Custom Filter, when you select this option. To filter, type the exact 3D type name or a
special character as the last character in the AutoCorrelate Custom Filter box.

Expands or collapses the section.

Correlate
Correlates selected 3D object and matching design basis object.
Save
Saves the auto correlation report as an xml file.
Cancel
Closes the report.

Common User's Guide 599

 SmartPlant Menu

Compare Design Basis Command

Compares the differences in property and topology (or shape) values in the three-dimensional
model and the design basis (for example, a P&ID). The purpose of the command is to update
the properties on correlated objects so that values for mapped properties (design basis) from
tools, such as SmartPlant P&ID and SmartPlant Instrumentation, are updated on the object if
you specify to update and pass the values. You can also process deleted objects. As a result,
you are managing the changes of the model to match the design basis without having to
re-model.

Topology Checker
The topology checker simply starts at one end of the pipeline and moves to the end of the line.
There are some rules that you should be aware of in order to make sure the topology checker is
running properly.
 Tees and reducers have the unique ability to belong to three different runs. For the purpose
of topology comparison, any piping component can be considered to be in two runs.
 A pipe run must be continuous for the topology to be checked properly. This means that no
component (tees included) can belong to a different run along that line. For example, if the
third component along a pipe run was a tee that belonged to the branch run, then the
topology checker would not give proper results because the tee breaks the run. There are
piping components that are still members of that first run, but the run is not continuous (left
image: tee is not highlighted). After this tee is made a member of the original run, the
topology checker gives proper results (right image: tee is highlighted).

For more information on the topology checker, see the Piping User's Guide.
Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) relationships (project or as-built) are shown on the
Property tab of the Compare with Design Basis dialog box. However, the Update button does
not update project membership for 3D objects to match the design basis. Use the Claim
command to claim objects to the project.
See Also
Retrieving Data (on page 565)

Common User's Guide 600

 SmartPlant Menu

Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box

Compares and examines the mapped properties for both the design basis object on the P&ID
and in the 3D model. This dialog box identifies the properties that are different due to a
discrepancy. You can update all of the properties listed in the dialog box by clicking Update.
Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) relationships (project or as-built) are shown on the
Property tab. However, the Update button does not update project membership for 3D objects
to match the design basis. In the Common task, use the Project > Claim command to claim
objects to the project.
See Also
Compare Design Basis Command (on page 599)
Correlate with Design Basis Command (on page 584)
Properties Tab (Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box) (on page 586)
Topology Tab (Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box) (on page 603)

Properties Tab (Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box)

Selected
Specifies the name of the selected object in the 3D model. A P&ID pipe run can correlate
with multiple Smart 3D pipe runs. A P&ID pipeline can correlate with multiple Smart 3D
pipelines. The Selected drop-down lists all objects in the 3D model that are correlated with
the design basis object.
Category
States the category for the property. Properties are listed in alphabetical order according to
the interface of the category that you selected for the property pages of the 3D model.
Select All to list all the properties in alphabetical order.
The read-only field beside the Category box provides the following information about the
correlation for the object that you selected in the 3D model:
 Property Match - Indicates that the object that you selected in the model has all
properties matching those of its correlated design basis object.
 Property Mismatch - Indicates that the object that you selected in the model has one or
more properties with values not matching the value of the mapped property in the
correlated object.

Common User's Guide 601

 SmartPlant Menu

The check box beside the Model Property Name allows you to selectively update the
properties in the list. You must select Copy properties from design basis to enable the
selective update check boxes.

 indicates clear or disabled state. Selective update is disabled or none of the

properties are selected for update.

 indicates select state. All the properties in the list are selected for update.

 indicates mixed state. One or more properties in the list are either read-only or not
selected for update.
 indicates read-only. You cannot update this property.

 You must check the selective update check box of the corresponding property to set its
correlation status to Property Match.
 The software remembers the last saved selective update preference for an object type
such as a pipe run, equipment, and pipeline system. For example, if you do not want to
update Name for piperun1, clear the checkbox corresponding to Name, and then click
Update. When you correlate piperun2, the dialog box displays your preference from the
piperun1 you last correlated.
Model Property Name
States the name of the property for the model object.
Design Basis Value
States the value of the property for the design basis object.
To view the difference between design basis value and model value, set the
Precision value to 4 or more for the properties you defined for comparison, such as
pressure and temperature. For more information, see Units of Measure Tab (Options Dialog
Box) (on page 502).
Model Value
States the value of the property for the three-dimensional model object.
To view the difference between design basis value and model value, set the
Precision value to 4 or more for the properties you defined for comparison, such as
pressure and temperature. For more information, see Units of Measure Tab (Options Dialog
Box) (on page 502).
Correlation Approval Status
Specifies if the object is approved with discrepancies in the 3D model data compared with
design basis data. Select Topology mismatch approved if the object topology mismatch
can be ignored. Select Data and Topology mismatches approved if the object data and
topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None if you do not want to approve a
mismatch.
Copy properties from design basis
Controls copying of properties from the design basis object to the 3D model object. Select
this option to allow the update of 3D object properties during manual correlation. Clearing
this option clears and disables all the selective update check boxes.

Common User's Guide 602

 SmartPlant Menu

Update
Transfers data from the design basis object (in the P&ID, for example) to match the 3D
model object. Clicking Update changes entire property values if selective update check box
is disabled.
Close
Closes the Compare with Design Basis dialog box.
Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) relationships (project or as-built) are shown on the
Property tab. However, the Update button does not update project membership for 3D objects
to match the design basis. In the Command task, use the Project > Claim command to claim
objects to the project.
See Also
Compare Design Basis with the Model (on page 604)
Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box (on page 600)

Topology Tab (Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box)

Displays the child objects of the selected grouping object and indicates both the 3D objects not
correlated to the P&ID (design basis) and also the P&ID objects (design basis) not correlated to
3D objects. For example, when you select a pipe run, the Topology tab indicates objects that
are correlated and in the same order on the pipe run, as well as objects that are correlated and
not in the same order on the pipe run.
This tab is available only for those objects that support correlation and get topology
from the design basis.
Selected
Displays the name of the selected object in the 3D model.
The read-only field provides the following information about the correlation for the object you
selected in the 3D model:
 Topology Match - Indicates that the object in the model you selected has a match or
correlation with an object in the design basis.
 Topology Mismatch - Indicates that the object in the model you selected does not have
a match or correlation with an object in the design basis.
#
Indicates an index number to reference the object as defined in the design basis (that is, the
drawing).
Design Basis Name
States the name of the object in the design basis (for example, a pipe run).
Model Name
States the name of the object in the 3D model.

Common User's Guide 603

 SmartPlant Menu

Correlation Approval Status

Specifies if the component is approved with discrepancies in the three-dimensional data
compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch approved if components
topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology mismatches approved if
the components data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None if you do not
want to approve a mismatch.
Copy properties from design basis
Copies properties from the design basis objects to the corresponding 3D objects. This
option is not selected by default. Changes made to this option are saved to the session file.
Selecting this option overwrites the 3D object properties with the
corresponding correlated design basis object values. Therefore, do not select this option if
you do not want to modify the properties of a 3D object.
Changes made to this option are applied to all the commands that use it. For
example, if you select this option in the Correlate Automatically dialog box, then this option
is also selected in the Correlate with Design Basis and Compare with Design Basis
dialog boxes.
Select
Selects a row in the grid. The object highlights in the model.
Close
Closes the Compare with Design Basis dialog box.
If a discrepancy exists on the Topology tab after clicking Update on the
Properties tab, you can trace the discrepancy and attempt to resolve it. For example, a
discrepancy might be an object routed or placed out of order.
See Also
Compare Design Basis with the Model (on page 604)
Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box (on page 600)

Compare Design Basis with the Model

The Compare with Design Basis command allows you to resolve discrepancies between an
object in the 3D model and the design basis.
1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve data into the software.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to open the P&ID that contains the data that you retrieved.
3. Select an object on the P&ID or in the model.
4. Click SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis.
5. Review the Properties tab for highlighted objects that have a discrepancy between the
P&ID and the three-dimensional model. Objects that do not match appear in a different
background color (red).

Common User's Guide 604

 SmartPlant Menu

6. Review the Topology tab to check for differences in shapes between the P&ID and the 3D
model. This tab is available only for objects that support correlation.
When you select a pipe run or a duct run, the Topology tab indicates objects that
are correlated and in the same order on the pipe run or duct run, as well as objects that are
correlated and not in the same order on the pipe run or duct run.
7. Click Close if you do not want to update the properties from design basis.
-OR-
After you correct the errors that cause the discrepancy, click Update on the Compare with
Design Basis dialog box to transfer data from the design basis object to the 3D model
object and update properties that are out-of-date. The Design Basis Value and the Model
Value columns change to show the new values.

 Clicking Update changes the property values. You can selectively update properties by
selecting associated check boxes. For more information see, Properties Tab (Compare
with Design Basis Dialog Box) (on page 586).
 For certain exceptions, the software does not process an update. For example, an
object that is not mapped with properties is not updated.
When you have finished your review, click Close.

Common User's Guide 605

 SmartPlant Menu

Design Basis Viewer Command

The SmartPlant > Design Basis Viewer allows you to correlate and compare design basis data
from any engineering document retrieved to the active model. Design basis viewer allows you to
correlate design basis object that is not represented on a P&ID.
You can choose a document by using the document filter options. The Document List displays a
list of filtered documents according to the document filters. The list is empty if no document
matches the filter criterion. Double-click on a document to display a list of design basis data with
their current correlation status in the adjacent panel. You can use the design basis objects to
access items, such as equipment, piping information, and SmartPlant Instrumentation dimension
data, to create appropriate 3D design objects.
Similar to P&ID viewer, you can resize the design basis viewer with the standard Windows
commands on the title bar, such as Minimize, Maximize, and Close.
See Also
Retrieving Data (on page 565)
Compare a design basis object with 3D object (on page 608)
Correlate a design basis object with 3D object (on page 609)

Design Basis Viewer Dialog Box

Object Selection
Contains document filter options and displays documents based on the filter criterion.
Document Filter
Filters documents based on the value you type. Type a value to search among all the
retrieved documents.
 Document Type - Filters matching documents of only the selected document type.
Choose Electrical documents, Dimensional Data Sheets (DDP), P&ID, or PBS
Document.
 Name - Filters all possible matching documents with the specified name. Type a name
to search among all the retrieved documents.
 Revision - Filters all possible matching documents with the specified revision number.
Type a number to search among all the retrieved documents.
 Version Date - Filters all possible matching documents with the specified version date.
Click on to select the date or type the date in MM/DD/YYYY format.
Document List
Displays the document list based on the Document Filters. You can use a single filter or a
combination of filters for precise results. You can sort the list in ascending or descending
order by clicking on the column headers.
 Name - Displays the name of the document.
 Revision - Displays the latest revision number of the document.
 Version Date - Displays the latest version date of the document.
 PBS Parent - Displays the name of parent model break down system.

Common User's Guide 606

 SmartPlant Menu

Design Basis Objects List

Displays all the design basis objects in the document that you select from the Document List.
You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by clicking on the column headers.
Name
Displays the name of the design basis object.
Type
Displays the type of design basis object, such as DIMnstrument, PIDPipe, PIDNozzle, etc.
Document
Displays the retrieved document name the design basis object belongs to.
SP3D Name
Displays the three-dimensional object name of the corresponding design basis object.
SP3D Correlation Basis
Displays if the three-dimensional object is correlated to a corresponding design basis object.
SP3D Correlation Status
Displays the correlation status of the 3D object.
Use the Filter to search design basis objects that are not correlated.
SP3D Correlation Approval Status
Displays if the component is approved with discrepancies in the 3D data compared with
design basis data.

Common User's Guide 607

 SmartPlant Menu

Filter
Displays a pop up menu with more filter options for further refined filtering. For example,
above filter criterion may display a long list of possible matches. In such a scenario you may
want to refine your search by narrowing down the filter criteria. This filter menu allows you to
customize your search query to improve the results.

See Also
Correlate a design basis object with 3D object (on page 609)
Compare a design basis object with 3D object (on page 608)

Compare a design basis object with 3D object

The Compare with Design Basis command allows you to resolve discrepancies between a 3D
object and the design basis object.
1. Select SmartPlant > Design Basis Viewer
The Design Basis Viewer dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a document by using the Document Filter options.
A list of matching documents is displayed in the Document List grid.
3. Click on the required document.
A list of all design basis objects is displayed.
4. Right-click an object that you want to compare.

Common User's Guide 608

 SmartPlant Menu

5. Select Compare with Design Basis command.

The software displays the Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box (on page 600).
6. Review the Properties tab for highlighted objects that have a discrepancy between the
design basis object and the 3D object. Objects that do not match appear in a different
background color (red).
7. Review the Topology tab to check for differences in shapes between the design basis
object and the 3D object. This tab is available only for objects that support correlation.
8. Click Close if you do not want to update the properties from design basis.
-OR-
After you correct the errors that cause the discrepancy, click Update on the Compare with
Design Basis dialog box to transfer data from the design basis object to the 3D object and
update properties that are out-of-date. The Design Basis Value and the Model Value
columns change to show the new values.

 Clicking Update changes the property values. You can selectively update properties by
selecting associated check boxes. For more information see, Properties Tab (Compare
with Design Basis Dialog Box) (on page 586).
 For certain exceptions, the software does not process an update. For example, an
object that is not mapped with properties is not updated.
9. After you finish reviewing, click Close.

Correlate a design basis object with 3D object

1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve design basis data into the software, such as an
Electrical, Dimensional Data Sheets (DDP), P&ID, or a PBS Document.
2. Click SmartPlant > Design Basis Viewer.
The Design Basis Viewer dialog box is displayed.
3. Select a document by using the Document Filter options.
A list of matching documents is displayed in the Document List grid.
4. Click on the required document.
The software displays a list of all design basis objects.
5. Right-click an object that you want to correlate.
6. Select Correlate with Design Basis command.
On the status bar, the software prompts you to select a 3D item in the model to correlate.
7. Select a 3D item in the model.
The software then displays the Correlate with Design Basis Dialog Box (on page 586) dialog
box.

Common User's Guide 609

 SmartPlant Menu

8. If the software detects that the design basis object is already correlated to one or more 3D
objects, the following information message displays. Click Yes to continue.
Selected Design Basis object is already correlated to another 3D object. Are you sure you
want to correlate more than one 3D object the same Design Basis object?
9. Review the Properties tab for highlighted objects that have a discrepancy between the
design basis object and the 3D object. Objects that do not match are displayed in a different
background color (red).
10. Review the Topology tab to understand the differences in shapes between the 3D model
and the design basis.
11. Select Copy properties from design basis option if you want to update the 3D object
properties. Clear this option to prevent overwriting the 3D object properties from design
basis.
12. Click Update to correlate the 3D object with design basis object.

Review design basis object properties

1. Select SmartPlant > Design Basis Viewer
The Design Basis Viewer dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a document by using the Document Filter options.
A list of matching documents is displayed in the Document List grid.
3. Click on the required document.
A list of all design basis objects is displayed.
4. Right-click an object that you want to review.
 Select Design Basis Properties command to review non-correlated design basis object
properties.
 Select Correlated Object Properties command to review correlated design basis
object properties.
5. After you finish reviewing, click Close.

Common User's Guide 610

 SmartPlant Menu

Remove Correlation with Design Basis Command

The SmartPlant > Remove Correlation with Design Basis allows you to remove the
correlation between 3D object and the design basis.
The Remove correlation with Design Basis command filters the correlated objects from the
selected 3D objects and uncorrelates the correlated objects from the design basis.

Remove Correlation with Design Basis Ribbon Bar

Inside Fence
Selects all objects entirely inside the fence.
Overlapping Fence
Selects all objects entirely inside the fence and those objects outside but touching the fence.
Select Correlated Objects
Selects correlated objects.
Finish
Completes the uncorrelation of 3D objects from design basis.
See Also
Remove correlation with design basis (on page 611)

Remove correlation with design basis

Removes correlation from a 3D model object to a design basis object.
1. Select SmartPlant > Remove Correlation with Design Basis.
The software prompts you to select correlated objects.
2. Select objects using fence selection commands, Inside Fence . and Overlapping Fence
.
OR
3. Click Finish.
The Remove correlation with Design Basis command filters the correlated objects from the
selected 3D objects and un-correlates the correlated objects. The software displays the
un-correlation status and the number of objects uncorrelated on the status bar.

Common User's Guide 611

SECTION 12

Tasks Menu
The software uses tasks to separate its user interface into discipline-specific user environments.
Tasks are sets of commands focused on a particular engineering discipline, such as routing pipe
or placing equipment. You usually need only a few of these tasks to accomplish your particular
job. For example, if you are a piping designer, you probably only need to use the tasks that
allow you to route pipe or create isometric drawings.
You define the tasks that appear on the Tasks menu by using the Configure Task List
command. This command allows you to specify the tasks and the sequence you want them to
appear on the Tasks menu. The software saves the selected tasks in the active workspace.
Each workspace can display a different list of tasks on the Tasks menu. You can configure the
Tasks menu for the workspace at any time.
To switch to a different task, click the task you want on the Tasks menu. When you activate a
new task, the views remain unchanged, but the menu commands and tool bars are replaced by
the new task. The software does not create new views of the model when you switch to another
task. The Catalog, Systems and Specifications, and Project Management tasks do not have
views of the model. Also, some tasks do not appear in the list if you did not install them.

In This Section
Catalog ......................................................................................... 613
Common ....................................................................................... 613
Drawings and Reports .................................................................. 613
Electrical ....................................................................................... 614
Equipment and Furnishings .......................................................... 614
Grids ............................................................................................. 614
Hangers and Supports .................................................................. 615
HVAC ............................................................................................ 615
Piping ............................................................................................ 615
Space Management ...................................................................... 615
Structural Analysis ........................................................................ 616
Structure ....................................................................................... 616
Systems and Specifications .......................................................... 616
Configure Task List ....................................................................... 617

Common User's Guide 612

 Tasks Menu

Catalog
Switches to the Catalog task.
The Catalog task allows you to view and edit the Catalog database. Under the root for the
Catalog database, you can select from catalogs such as Piping, Equipment, and Duct. You can
create and edit select lists, piping specifications, and part data in this task. There are also tools
to help you validate catalog data.

Common
Switches to the Common task.
The Common task refers to the functions shared with other tasks and identifies the commands
required to accomplish these functions. Each task user must use these commands when they
need to perform certain functions. This guideline ensures that everyone using the numerous
tasks of the software performs common operations in the same way.
The task allows you to define a workspace and perform common operations on that workspace,
also known as your session. The workspace represents the portion of the model data you need
to perform your intended task. This workspace also includes the view settings for user modeling.
Many other tasks on the Tasks menu are not available until you have defined and saved your
workspace.
After defining your workspace, you can use the Tasks menu to move among the various design
tasks. You can perform specified functions, depending on your access permissions. After you
select a task, the interface and available functionality appear. Some of the commands and
functionality are unique to the particular task. For example, some commands for the Piping task
are not available in the Equipment and Furnishings task. However, most of the Common task
commands are available in all of the various design tasks. You use the Common task
commands and functionality the same way regardless of the active task. For example, the View
and File menu commands function the same way in every task.

Drawings and Reports

Switches to the Drawings and Reports task.
The Drawings and Reports task creates two-dimensional drawings from the three-dimensional
model. You can produce drawings to e-mail to another person, to print, or to publish.
This task provides a drawing update process to increase productivity for your company. After the
3D model changes, you can update drawings locally or on a batch server.
The task provides drawing types, such as Piping Plan and Equipment Plan that can be
customized to your needs. Using the component functionality of the console, you can create,
edit, update, and print drawings and reports.
The Drawings and Reports task also provides the ability to create and publish the 3D model
data.

Common User's Guide 613

 Tasks Menu

Electrical
Switches to the Electrical task.
The Electrical task provides a workspace for distributed cableway system design and routing of
conduit and cable. The task creates a three-dimensional representation or model of a distributed
system. You can create a fully rendered 3D model of the various cableway systems in your
model.
The Electrical task uses point-by-point route design and inserts cableway components and splits
during design. Also, the task includes placement of conduit, the hollow tubing used to house and
protect cables.
After you complete a cableway design and route conduit, you then route cables through existing
conduit and cableways. The Electrical task provides commands that allow you to create cables
and their properties, edit cable routes, which includes defining where cables enter and exit
cableway, and display the existing route of a cable.
The Electrical task also provides a command for retrieving cable schedules in an integrated
environment.

Equipment and Furnishings

Switches to the Equipment and Furnishings task.
You can use this task to select equipment objects from the catalog and position occurrences of
these objects in the model. After they are placed, you can define relationships among pieces of
equipment, and rotate equipment within the model to obtain precisely the design your
specifications require.
The software also provides the ability to design custom equipment models, using Visual Basic or
Solid Edge software, and bulk load those objects into your Catalog database. By enabling users
to expand the available selection of equipment objects, the software frees you to implement the
equipment solution necessary for your design. The task also allows you to modify the properties
of a piece of equipment on an occurrence-by- occurrence basis.

Grids
Switches to the Grids task.
The Grids task creates and manipulates coordinate systems, elevation grid planes, vertical grid
planes, and grid lines.
Coordinate systems provide a locating scheme when working in the model. The grid lines of a
coordinate system represent the relative positioning requirements for a specific design purpose.

Common User's Guide 614

 Tasks Menu

Hangers and Supports

Switches to the Hangers and Supports task.
The primary purpose of hangers is to support various types of distributive systems such as
pipes, HVAC, and cable ducts. Although these are the main elements on which hangers
depend, hangers must be connected to structural parts such as beams and horizontal braces for
their support.

HVAC
Switches to the HVAC task.
The HVAC task provides a workspace for distributed duct system design. The task creates a
three-dimensional representation or model of a distributed system. You can create a fully
rendered 3D model of the various duct systems.
The HVAC task uses point-by-point route design and inserts HVAC components and splits
during design. Complete specification control selects exactly the type of parts you need. You
can also modify HVAC features as design needs arise.

Piping
Switches to the Piping task.
The Piping task is used to model distributed pipelines in your model using a point-by-point
design method. Using the Piping task, you can create a fully rendered three-dimensional model
of the various pipelines in your model. You can also use this task to insert piping components,
instruments, and splits during design and then spool the pipe.

Space Management
Switches to the Space Management task.
This task creates and manages named spaces in your design. Using volumes, you can define
safety zones, areas set aside for distinct processes, maintenance regions, or any other
conceptual spaces that you need. A zone can refer to one or more space systems and areas,
while an area can be entirely or partially part of several different zones.
Several methods are available for you to define the geometry of a volume. You can define
spaces by two points, four points, or by reference to existing spaces. In addition to these
functions, you can also merge existing spaces together.
The Space Management task also provides the commands necessary to create drawing
volumes.
See Also
Tasks Menu (on page 612)

Common User's Guide 615

 Tasks Menu

Structural Analysis
Switches to the Structural Analysis task.
The Structural Analysis task places and modifies pre-analysis objects such as load cases and
load combinations, loads, and boundary conditions. Also in this task, you can use the model
geometry created in Smart 3D to generate a CIMsteel Integration Standards Release 2
analytical model for structural analysis and design. Results from analysis and design can be
imported back into the model for immediate update of the members.

Structure
Switches to the Structure task.
The Structure task places and modifies structural objects. Using this task, you can place beams,
columns, braces, truss elements, cables, equipment foundations, column footings, openings,
slabs, and connections in your model. You can also create custom section shapes using 2D
Symbols and place those custom sections in the model.
The Structure task also provides for traffic needs by placing stairs, ladders, and handrails.
Although not required, it is recommended that you place grids using the Grids task
before placing structural members.

Systems and Specifications

Switches to the Systems and Specifications task.
The Systems and Specifications task defines a system hierarchy for your design. All design data
can then be organized under this hierarchy. In addition to organizing the various piping,
equipment, duct, cableway, and structural elements into systems in the hierarchy, you can also
assign the allowed specifications for each system. These specifications then limit part selection
and placement based on the specific design needs of your project.
The available system types that can be created are Ducting, Piping, Pipeline, Electrical, Conduit,
Structure, Equipment, Generic, Area and Unit. By organizing design information into systems,
the software enables queries and filters by the systems you have defined. This filtering makes it
much simpler to obtain information on only the portion of the total design that you need at any
given time.

Common User's Guide 616

 Tasks Menu

Configure Task List

Specifies all of the tasks in the sequence you want them to appear on the Tasks menu. A task is
a set of commands specific to a particular engineering discipline, such as routing pipe.
You can configure the Tasks menu for the workspace at any time. The software saves the
selected tasks in the active workspace. Each workspace can have a different list of tasks on the
Tasks menu. After you define the commands and their sequence on the Tasks menu, you can
switch to a different task by clicking the task name on the Tasks menu.

Configure Tasks
1. Click Tasks > Configure Task List.
2. Select the tasks you want to add to the menu from the Available task environments list.
3. Click Add.
4. If you want to remove tasks in the task list, click the task names under Task list, and then
click Remove.

 After you configure the Tasks menu, you can switch to a different task by clicking the task
name on the Tasks menu.
 Tasks appear on the Tasks menu in the sequence that they appear on the task list. You can
use the Move Up and Move Down buttons on the Configure Task List dialog box to
change the order of the tasks.
 Each time that you open a new workspace, you can configure a new Tasks menu.

Configure Task List Dialog Box

Configures the Tasks menu for your workspace.
Available task environments
Lists all of the tasks installed on your computer. A task is a set of commands specific to a
particular engineering discipline, such as routing pipe. To select multiple tasks in this list,
hold CTRL and then click each object you want to select. You also can select several tasks
by selecting one task and holding SHIFT while selecting another task. All tasks between the
two are selected as well.
Task list
Lists all tasks in the sequence in which you want them to appear on the Tasks menu. To
select multiple tasks in this list, hold down CTRL and then click each object that you want to
select. You also can select several tasks by selecting one task and holding SHIFT while
selecting another task. All tasks between the two are selected as well.
Add
Copies the selected tasks to the Task list box. Tasks in the Task list box appear on the
Tasks menu. You must select one or more tasks in the Available task environments list
before clicking this button.

Common User's Guide 617

 Tasks Menu

Remove
Deletes the selected tasks from the Task list box. Tasks in the Task list appear on the
Tasks menu. You must select one or more tasks in the Task list box before clicking this
button.
Move Up
Moves the selected tasks up in the Task list box and changes the order of the commands
on the Tasks menu. You can move multiple tasks simultaneously by selecting more than
one task in the Task list.
Move Down
Moves the selected tasks down in the Task list box and changes the order of the
commands on the Tasks menu.

Common User's Guide 618

SECTION 13

Windows Menu
Sometimes you need to see several parts of a workspace at once. You can have several
windows open at one time. Each window can display a different view of the data in the
workspace.
The Window menu contains commands that let you manage open windows. You can create
new windows, or tile or cascade the open windows.

In This Section
New Window ................................................................................. 619
Cascade........................................................................................ 621
Tile Horizontally ............................................................................ 621
Tile Vertically ................................................................................ 622

Common User's Guide 619

 Windows Menu

New Window
Opens a new graphical window. Opening multiple windows is useful for tasks like routing pipe,
when you often need to view an object from several angles or to zoom in on different parts of a
model at the same time. The new window appears on top of all the other windows and becomes
the active window.
You can cascade the windows to see only the active window and the title bars of all the other
windows, or tile horizontally or tile vertically to see all the windows at the same time. If you
change the contents in one window, the other windows that contain the same information reflect
the changes automatically without refreshing the view.

Create a new window

Click Window > New Window.

 The software saves the number, size, and arrangement of all open windows in your
workspace when you save the session.

Common User's Guide 620

 Windows Menu

Cascade
Cascades all open windows diagonally across the screen so you can see the title bar of each
window. The active window always appears in the bottom right front with the rest of the windows
behind it. The windows appear at close to full window size and stack down and to the right from
the active window. The rest of the windows appear in the order they appear in the Window
menu. You can view the title bars of several windows in this way. When you have more windows
open than will fit in the view, then a second group of windows stacks on top of the first group.

Cascade windows
Click Window > Cascade.
The software displays all the open windows overlapping so you can read the title
bars, keeping the active window in the front.

Common User's Guide 621

 Windows Menu

Tile Horizontally
Arranges multiple windows to fit horizontally on the screen without overlapping. The windows
appear in roughly equal rectangular sizes to fill the application window. The active window
appears on the top or the upper left. The software saves the number, size, and arrangement of
all open windows in your workspace.

Tile windows horizontally

Click Window > Tile Horizontally.

Common User's Guide 622

 Windows Menu

Tile Vertically
Arranges multiple tall, thin windows to fit side-by-side on the screen without overlapping. The
windows appear in roughly equal sizes to fill the application window. The active window appears
in the upper left corner of the screen.

Tile windows vertically

Click Window > Tile Vertically.

Common User's Guide 623

SECTION 14

Help Menu
The Help menu contains commands that provide information about the task. For example, you
can open the online Help from the Help menu. The Help contains procedures, reference
information, and conceptual overviews that can be accessed through a table of contents,
keyword index, or full text search engine.
You can also get context-sensitive information about commands and dialog boxes in the
software by pressing F1.
If you want information on a specific topic, you can use the Index and Search tabs in the online
Help and type key words to narrow the search.
For documentation that you can print, use the Printable Guides command to display a list of all
the delivered guides. You must have Adobe® Reader® installed to open and print the guides.
If you have added Help topics, which are customized to the day-to-day procedures and practices
in your operation, the Custom Documentation command allows you to access this material in
the software. The command opens a Web page that lists the customized files, which can be in
formats like HTML Help (.chm), Microsoft Word documents (.doc), and Microsoft Excel
workbooks (.xls). Other possible file types include HTML (.htm), SmartSketch (.igr), and text
(.txt). A Web page is available for each task.
Lastly, you can find out the software version number and copyrights on the About dialog box.
This dialog box also contains a Tech Support button to aid in getting customer assistance for
troubleshooting problems.

In This Section
Help .............................................................................................. 624
Printable Guides ........................................................................... 626
Custom Documentation ................................................................ 628
About ............................................................................................ 628

Common User's Guide 624

 Help Menu

Help
Opens the online Help. The Help contains procedures, reference information, and
conceptual overviews that can be accessed through a table of contents, keyword index, or full
text search engine.
See Also
Display License Information (on page 629)
Help Menu (on page 624)

Common User's Guide 625

 Help Menu

Display help topics

Click Help > Smart 3D Help.

 You can view conceptual overviews and work through procedures while using the software.
 You can look up keywords on the Index tab and search for keywords or phrases on the
Search tab.
 To bookmark a topic, you can add it to the list on the Favorites tab.
 Press F1 to display help on a dialog box or command.
See Also
Display Help Topics (on page 626)
Display License Information (on page 629)
Help Menu (on page 624)

Common User's Guide 626

 Help Menu

Printable Guides
Opens a page in your default browser that includes links to the user's guides in portable
document format. Click a link and the corresponding guide opens in Adobe Reader, which
allows you to print the guide. The guides contain the same information that is in the online Help.
See Also
Access the Printable Guides (on page 627)
Help Menu (on page 624)

Access the Printable Guides

1. Click Help > Printable Guides.
2. In the browser that opens, click a link to a guide you want to view or print.
To print a guide, use the File > Print command in Adobe Reader. The shortcut keys
for the Print command are CTRL+P.

 The printable guides include administrative guides, user's guides, reference data guides,
and third-party software guides.
 You must have Adobe Reader installed to open and print the guides.
If pages in the PDF file display very slowly, configure Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader to be a
helper application. To do this, start Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader, click Edit > Preferences,
select the Internet category, and clear the Display PDF in browser option.
See Also
Help Menu (on page 624)

Common User's Guide 627

 Help Menu

Custom Documentation
Provides access to customized Help files and other material that documents the daily
operations, specific to your operation. The command opens a Web page for the active task in
the software and lists available files. The custom documentation can consist of HTML Help files
(.chm), Microsoft Word documents (.doc), Microsoft Excel workbooks (.xls), HTML files (.htm),
SmartSketch files (.igr), text files (.txt), or any other file type for which you have defined a default
application.
You define the path to the custom documentation using the File Locations tab of the Tools >
Options dialog box. For more information, see Change a Default File Location (on page 496).

Access Customized Files

1. Click Help > Custom Documentation.
When you select Custom Documentation, a Web page opens and is associated
with the active task. For example, if you are working in the Piping task and click Custom
Documentation, the Piping Custom Documentation page opens.
2. Click the link for the customized file you want to open. The file opens in its associated
application, such as Help, Excel, Word, or any other application for which you have defined
a default type.

 The Custom Documentation command provides a method to integrate custom Help files
that relate to the daily practices in your operation.
 You define the path to the custom documentation using the File Locations tab of the Tools
> Options dialog box. For more information, see Change a Default File Location (on page
496).
See Also
Help Menu (on page 624)

Common User's Guide 628

 Help Menu

About
Displays information about your copy of the software, including the version number and the
copyright, legal, and licensing notices.
See Also
About Dialog Box (on page 629)
Display License Information (on page 629)

About Dialog Box

Displays information about your copy of the software, including the version number and the
copyright, legal, and licensing notices.
Other software products incorporated with this product - Displays information about
third-party software used in the product.
This product is licensed to - Displays the name and corporate affiliation of the user who holds
the license to this software and the serial number of the product.
System Info - Provides information about your computer operating system.
Anti-Piracy - Click this button to view information about anti-piracy of the software.
Tech Support - Click this button to access information about contacting Intergraph for support.
See Also
About (on page 628)
Display License Information (on page 629)

Display License Information

Click Help > About Smart 3D.
The About dialog box displays the software version number, copyright notices, and licensing
information.
See Also
About (on page 628)
About Dialog Box (on page 629)

Common User's Guide 629

APPENDIX A

Appendix: Shortcuts
In This Appendix
Shortcut Keys ............................................................................... 630
Shortcut Menus............................................................................. 633

Common User's Guide 630

 Appendix: Shortcuts

Shortcut Keys
The following table lists the shortcut key combinations for various commands in the software.

Command or action Shortcut keys

Change active axis of rotation Up Arrow key

(equipment objects)
The default axis of rotation is
the Z-axis.

Component or folder name change F2

Copy CTRL+C

Define workspace CTRL+W

Delete objects DELETE

Edit locate filter CTRL+E

End a process ESC

Fit all views Hold SHIFT+A, and click Fit.

Help F1

Hyperlink CTRL+K

New workspace CTRL+N

Open workspace CTRL+O

Pan CTRL+SHIFT+P

Pan (using mouse wheel) Drag the middle mouse wheel to pan the view

Pan up CTRL+scroll mouse wheel down

Pan down CTRL+scroll mouse wheel up

Pan left CTRL+SHIFT+scroll mouse wheel down

Pan right CTRL+SHIFT+scroll mouse wheel up

Paste CTRL+V

PinPoint display on or off F9

Common User's Guide 631

 Appendix: Shortcuts

Command or action Shortcut keys

PinPoint target move F12

PinPoint - unlock rectangular or spherical F6 (E or absolute distance), F7 (N or horizontal

coordinates angle), F8 (EL or vertical angle)

Previous View ALT+F5

Print CTRL+P

QuickPick CTRL+middle mouse click

Recompute Objects (Compartmentation, CTRL+R

Molded Forms, Structural Detailing, and
Structural Manufacturing)

Refresh Workspace F5

Rotate about the current active axis Left and Right Arrow keys
(equipment objects)

Route in fast mode SHIFT+F

Route plane lock by turn or branch CTRL+4

Route plane lock by three points CTRL+5

Route plane lock to EL east-west CTRL+2

Route plane lock to EL north-south CTRL+3

Route plane lock to no plane CTRL+6

Route plane lock to Plan CTRL+1

Save CTRL+S

Select All CTRL+A

Selected objects do not move with the F10

pointer during the Move command

Shortcut menu for interface component Right-click

(to open session file in Windows
Explorer, dialog box, Workspace
Explorer, etc.)

SmartSketch locate surface F3

Common User's Guide 632

 Appendix: Shortcuts

Command or action Shortcut keys

SmartSketch lock constraint CTRL+L or click middle mouse button or wheel

Add selected object to SmartSketch CTRL+D

Locate List

Start a command or confirm (OK) a ENTER

dialog box

To Do List CTRL+T

Undo CTRL+Z

Zoom CTRL+SHIFT+Z

Zoom in scroll mouse wheel up

Zoom out scroll mouse wheel down

See Also
PinPoint (on page 389)

Common User's Guide 633

 Appendix: Shortcuts

Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are menus that appear when you right-click certain areas or objects in the user
interface. You can access shortcut menus by right-clicking an object in a graphical view or in the
Workspace Explorer. The following commands appear on the shortcut menus.
New System
Creates a new system without switching to the Systems and Specifications task. This
command only appears in the Workspace Explorer.
Select Nested
Selects the object and all nested children of the object.
Copy
Copies the selected object and associated relationships to the Clipboard.
Paste
Inserts the Clipboard contents in the model. This command is enabled after you copy an
object.
Create WBS Project
Initializes a new Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) project. This command only appears in
the Workspace Explorer.
Create WBS Item
Initializes a new Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) item. This command only appears in the
Workspace Explorer.
Select WBS Assignment Method
Specifies the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) assignment method. This command only
appears in the Workspace Explorer.
Delete
Removes the selected object from the database and deletes any relationships and notes on
the object.
Show
Turns on the display of a selected object.
Hide
Turns off the display of a selected object.
Claim
Identifies objects in the model for modification in a project.
Go to Hyperlink
Views a file or a Web page associated with an object in the model. This command is
available after you insert a hyperlink on an object.
Properties
Edits the properties of a selected object.

Common User's Guide 634

APPENDIX B

Appendix: Implementing a Work

Breakdown Structure (WBS)
WBS functionality can provide significant benefits to the project, especially in the later stages of
engineering and during construction. Careful planning and decision making based on a study of
the following factors will lead to successful implementation of WBS functionality on projects.
 Decide on Required WBS Type and Purpose – You can modify WBS type and purpose by
changing the delivered codelist. The exclusive flag setting must be considered while
customizing this list, because the exclusive setting is valid across a given type and purpose
value. For example, it is beneficial to use the exclusive flag while creating WBS items for
isometric drawing generation so that a single component does not accidentally show up in
multiple isometric drawings. However, there could be multiple isometric drawings for the
same pipeline, such as a fabrication isometric and a stress isometric. This results in the
requirement to have multiple WBS purpose values that match the type of isometric drawing.
Similar consideration applies for contract types.
 Understand Usage of WBS Items in Terms of Software Operation – How the WBS items
you create are used drives the type of design objects to be assigned to the WBS item. For
example, if the WBS is being used to generate single sheet isometrics, then piping parts
should be assigned. This is because the isometric generation code in the Drawings and
Reports task looks for the collection of piping parts in order to generate the piping isometric.
In the software, the isometric generation code automatically looks for connections and pipe
supports connected to these parts. As such, there is no need to explicitly assign connections
to the WBS item. In another example, if a pipeline can only belong to a single painting
contract and the objective of the contract definition is to estimate materials, then it might be
easier to assign the pipeline (design object) to a contract (WBS item). A custom report can
expand the pipeline into individual parts to calculate surface area and estimate. In general, it
is better to assign as few objects as possible to a WBS item. This reduces the work involved
in assignment and also minimizes the number of relationships stored in the database.
 Select WBS Assignment Method – WBS assignments can be done manually after the
objects are placed, automatically during initial placement, or automatically after placement
through a custom command. Choosing the right method for your specific usage is largely
determined by two factors: the number of WBS items expected and the moment in time
when the WBS items can be defined. For example, if the WBS is being used to define
design areas, the number of design areas in a typical project is limited, perhaps up to a few
dozen. Because design areas can be defined very early in a project cycle, it is reasonable to
use the automatic assignment by setting the active WBS item during modeling. On the other
hand, if the WBS is being used to define single sheet isometrics, there can potentially be
thousands of sheets in a typical project. Because the number of sheets and the naming of
those sheets cannot be defined in advance of modeling, the automated creation of WBS
items and the automated assignment of design objects after placement becomes necessary.
As a result, a custom command may have to be created in order to implement WBS on a
project.

Common User's Guide 635

 Appendix: Implementing a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)

 Access Control and Status Management – As mentioned previously, in order to assign

objects to a WBS item, you must have Write permission to that WBS Item. The assignment
method chosen must take this into consideration. In a Global Workshare Configuration, for
example, a single WBS Item cannot be shared across multiple locations because the users
at the remote location cannot assign objects to the WBS item owned by the host or the other
location. It is important to clearly define how the status of WBS items is managed. In an
isometric generation using a WBS scenario where an isometric drawing is issued/approved,
the WBS items that represent the drawing and the actual pipeline in the model must be
locked using Approval status. Leaving either one in a modifiable state can allow significant
changes to the isometric drawing

Common User's Guide 636

APPENDIX C

Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor

S3D Memory Monitor is a software that receives periodic notifications from the applications that
use the memory monitoring service. These notifications give information on the monitored
applications’ memory usage. They display alert notices if memory use enters a warning or
critical level. S3D Memory Monitor can also be used to establish those levels.
Under normal conditions, S3D Memory Monitor appears as an icon in the Windows System
Tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen). The circled image below shows the
S3D Memory Monitor icon.

If you exit S3D Memory Monitor while the dialog box is displayed, the next time you start S3D
Memory Monitor, the dialog box will be displayed. If you exit while S3D Memory Monitor is an
icon, it will be an icon the next time you start S3D Memory Monitor.

What do you want to do?

 Run the S3D Memory Monitor manually (on page 638)
 Run the S3D Memory Monitor automatically (on page 639)
 Display the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box (on page 639)
 Copy memory statistics to the clipboard (on page 641)
 Remove a process that has exited in a Critical or Warning state (on page 641)
 Set options for the S3D Memory Monitor (on page 641)
 Exit the S3D Memory Monitor (on page 641)

Common User's Guide 637

 Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor

Run the S3D Memory Monitor manually

1. Run the Enable Error Log application. This application is delivered in the
\Tools\Administrator\Bin folder under Core.

2. Click Start Memory Monitor.

Regardless of how many times you click the Start Memory Monitor button, only a single
instance of S3D Memory Monitor will run.

Common User's Guide 638

 Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor

Run the S3D Memory Monitor automatically

1. Run the Enable Error Log application. This application is delivered in the
\Tools\Administrator\Bin folder under Core.

2. Click Start memory monitor automatically when SP3D starts.

Common User's Guide 639

 Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor

Display the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box

1. Double-click S3D Memory Monitor in the system tray.
The S3D Memory Monitor dialog box displays.

Common User's Guide 640

 Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor

Copy memory statistics to the clipboard

1. From the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box, click the ... button for the process.
The S3D Memory Stats dialog box displays.
2. Click Copy.

Remove a process that has exited in a Critical or

Warning state
1. From the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box, click the ... button for the process that has
exited. Exited processes are highlighted.
The S3D Memory Stats dialog box displays.
2. Click Remove.

Set options for the S3D Memory Monitor

1. From the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box, click Options.
2. Set the options to meet your needs. For more information, see Options Dialog Box (on page
644).

Exit the S3D Memory Monitor

1. Click Exit on the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box.
OR
Right-click S3D Memory Monitor in the Windows System Tray, and select Exit from
the menu.

Common User's Guide 641

 Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor

S3D Memory Monitor Dialog Box

Displays memory usage for monitored applications. All processes that are found display in a list.
The S3D Memory Monitor dialog box adds new rows as reporting processes become active,
and removes a row if a process exits (with the exceptions noted below). If you start multiple
instances of Smart 3D, each instance is reported.
As S3D Memory Monitor monitors processes, the memory use for those processes can enter
Warning or Critical states.

When a process goes into a warning or critical state, S3D Memory Monitor displays a small
window along the bottom of the screen. These alert boxes display even if S3D Memory Monitor
itself is minimized in the System Tray.

The alert boxes will remain for a few seconds (the default is 10), then fade away. If you hover
over an alert box, a tooltip similar to that shown on the main application window displays.
If a process is in a Warning or Critical state and then goes to the Okay state, then the alert box
immediately disappears. You can also dismiss the alert box by clicking the red X on the title bar.

Common User's Guide 642

 Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor

If a reporting process exits while in a Warning or Critical state, the row on the main dialog box
corresponding to that process will not go away. Instead, the process name highlights.

Process
Displays the name of the process. Hover the pointer over a process name to display a
tooltip with the Main Window caption for the reporting process.

Proc ID
Displays the process identification number for the process.
Status
Displays the status (Okay, Warning, or Critical) for the process.
...
Displays a continuously updated S3D Memory Stats dialog box for the process. S3D
Memory Monitor can simultaneously display a dialog box for each monitored process. For
more information, see S3D Memory Stats Dialog Box (on page 644).
Options
Displays the Options dialog box. For more information, see Options Dialog Box (on page
644).
Exit
Closes the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box.

Common User's Guide 643

 Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor

S3D Memory Stats Dialog Box

Displays memory statistics for the process.
Process
Displays the name of the process. Hover the pointer over a process name to display a
tooltip with the Main Window caption for the reporting process.
Proc ID
Displays the process identification number for the process.
Free memory
Displays the amount of unallocated memory.
Largest free block
Displays the size of the largest block of unallocated memory.
Total memory used
Displays the sum quantity of memory in use by the process.
Remove
Deletes a hanging process. This button is only available if the process has exited.
Processes in this condition display as highlighted on the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box.
Copy
Writes the statistics from the dialog box to the clipboard. From there, you can paste the
statistics into the application of your choice.
Close
Exits the S3D Memory Stats dialog box.

Common User's Guide 644

 Appendix: S3D Memory Monitor

Options Dialog Box

Displays settings for various options for the S3D Memory Monitor.
Opacity
Determines the opacity of S3D Memory Monitor dialog boxes. Lower opacity means that
you can use S3D Memory Monitor even when it is in AlwaysOnTop mode. Default is 100%.
Always on top
When checked, the S3D Memory Monitor application is the topmost window. The default is
unchecked.
Show alerts
When checked, S3D Memory Monitor will display the memory alerts at the bottom of the
Windows screen. Default is checked.
Length of time alerts are displayed
Displays the length of time that the alerts are displayed before automatically disappearing.
The minimum value for this field is one second.
Free memory warning limit
When the free memory for a reporting process falls below this limit, the process is shown in
warning state. If Show alerts is checked, an alert box will also be displayed.
Free memory critical limit
When the free memory for a reporting process falls below this limit, the process is shown in
critical state. If Show alerts is checked, an alert box will also be displayed.
Largest free block warning limit
When the largest free block for a reporting process falls below this limit, the process is
shown in warning state. If Show alerts is checked, an alert box will also be displayed.
Largest free block critical limit
When the largest free block for a reporting process falls below this limit, the process is
shown in critical state. If Show alerts is checked, an alert box will also be displayed.

Common User's Guide 645

Glossary
abaft
Toward the stern of a ship, behind, further aft than.
abstract part
A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that cannot be materially provided by the
organization that defines the specification.
Active Template Library (ATL)
Set of class templates and wizards supplied with Microsoft C++ Version 5.0 and later. You can
use an ATL when you create ActiveX controls and any other type of object that uses the
Component Object Model (COM). Using an ATL is generally preferred over Microsoft
Foundation Classes (MFC), because the implementations are smaller, easier to use, and more
closely tied to the COM model.
aft
Toward, at, or near the stern.
after body
The hull from aft of the midship section.
aftermost
Nearest the stern.
angle
The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch.
approval state
Recorded state of acceptance of information contained in objects within the database. The
approval states indicate a level of confidence in the information stored in the database and
govern your ability to alter specific data about a product.
arrangement (accommodation)
Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional
representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and
piping.
attribute
A single type of non-graphics information that is stored about an object such as diameter or end
preparation.

Common User's Guide 646

 Glossary

axis
An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms
of an x-, y-, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic objects have an associated axis used to define the
center or axis for rotations.
basic design
Engineering definition of the model and its systems.
bill of material (BOM)
Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of
BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of an engineering
department; an MBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of manufacturing).
built ships
Complete database of NGC information after completion of the ship contract.
bulkload
The process by which reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks is loaded into the Catalog
database.
catalog
Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. When you use
catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project.
This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.
Catalog database
The database that contains the reference data. Each Plant/Ship database can reference a
different Catalog database.
ceiling
Overhead design of the cabin area, including distribution systems for power, water, and
ventilation.
chain
A set of continuous and tangent segments.
change history
Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for any given modification.
change management
Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. For
example, software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need
updating as a result of a change in a 3-D model.
change propagation
Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a
higher order object.

Common User's Guide 647

 Glossary

class
Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics.
class rule check
Verification that the developing design meets the rules of a particular classification society, such
as ABS, Lloyd's, or DNV.
Class Rules
Classification Society Design Rules.
classification folder
A folder in the Catalog hierarchy that contains part classes. Classification folders are one level
above part classes. The ClassNodeType and R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the Microsoft
Excel workbooks define the classification folders.
codelist
A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or
selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification allows you to
select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel.
commodity code
A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog.
commodity item
A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component).
component
Physical part that a feature generates.
concurrent access
Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of
a model.
consolidated tasks
A collection of tasks that can be run in batch. For example, the software allows you to extract a
set of drawings immediately or to schedule the batch extraction for a future time.
constraints
A logical restriction that controls how part symbols' ports relate to each other and to reference
ports. There are four constraints: parallel, perpendicular, coincident, and distance.
contract
A Work Breakdown Structure object representing a scope of work, usually performed by an
external supplier. The contract is related to a project and appears in the Work Breakdown
Structure hierarchy.

Common User's Guide 648

 Glossary

control point
A point that is used to control the shape of a NURBS (non-uniform rational basis spline) curve or
surface. Curves have a one-dimensional array of control points, while surfaces have a
two-dimensional array.
coordinate
The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
coordinate system
A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common
coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located by
traversing the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the model. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin
defined as 0,0,0.
cutting plane
A plane that cuts through an object.
damage records
Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after
construction of a model.
data interchange
Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or
movement to another computer software system.
database
Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual
objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate.
database backup
Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes after
the date that the last complete copy was created.
database break and recovery
Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.
database copy
Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another
design project.
database management
Functionality related to managing a product model database.
database monitor record
Transactions that occur in order to provide database (DB) recovery after a stop in response with
a minimum of lost data.

Common User's Guide 649

 Glossary

degree
The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree
1 curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve.
design alternative
Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new
design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or
customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so you can uniquely
refer to the design alternatives.
design approval log
Record of review and approval of parts of the design.
design data auto input
Automation in loading existing design data into a new design database.
design documents
Drawings, sketches, material lists, procedures, and so forth that are generated during the design
phase.
design object
Any object with properties that you can select. A design object can be related to one or more
contracts of different types, but related only to one contract of a given type.
design progress check
Analysis of the content of the design to some metric unit that gives an idea of the degree of
completion.
design review
Functionality to support rapid viewing of the design and markup of features with comments.
design service
Any general system services related to the design function.
design standard
Feature or object used in model design that has been determined to the normal or approved
way of accomplishing a design requirement. In the context of computer software, the term refers
to computer functionality to support standards, not the standard itself.
detail schedule
Lowest level of schedule used to manage and track work progress.
distributed systems
Systems consisting of sequential parts with a distributive characteristic (for example, pipes
distribute fluids, HVAC distributes air, cabling distributes power, and structure distributes loads).

Common User's Guide 650

 Glossary

distribution systems
Term synonymous and used interchangeably with the term distributed systems.
documentation
Drawings and other records that you must produce to document, obtain approval, or build the
design.
drawing tool
Tool that helps in the process of creating, modifying, or manipulating objects. Examples are
PinPoint and SmartSketch.
easting
A term that describes an east coordinate location in a coordinate system.
edge
A topological object that represents a trimmed curve bounded by a start and end vertex.
edge distance
The distance from the center of a bolt or rivet to the edge of a plate or flange.
equipment catalog
Catalog of equipment geometry and limited properties that the software uses to identify and
visualize equipment and its placement in the model. The catalog is not the source for the total
specification and ordering data for the object.
external appendages
External structure attached to the hull, such as the propeller nozzle, shaft struts, bilge keel, and
so forth.
fabricate
To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the shop.
face
A topological object that represents a trimmed surface bounded by a loop of edges.
face plate
An edge reinforcement type that places a plate or profile at the selected plate edge.
face-to-face
The overall length of a component from the inlet face to the outlet face.
fasteners
Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members.
element
Primitive geometric shape such as a line, circle, or arc.

Common User's Guide 651

 Glossary

fence
Boundary or barrier that separates or closes off an area. To surround or close like a fence.
field adjustment
Material added to the neat design geometry of piping or structural parts to allow for extra
material when it is required due to uncontrolled variance in the manufacturing and construction
process.
fire integrity
Deck and bulkhead treatments and fire and smoke blocks for fire control and retardation.
flavor
A different variation of a symbol. Each variation has different occurrence property values.
focus of rotation
A point or line about which an object or view turns.
full penetration weld
A type of weld in which the weld material extends through the complete thickness of the
components being joined.
function points
Part of the requirements documentation, function points are the smallest granularity of a
requirement statement that describe specific detailed actions that the software performs.
functional block diagram
Schematic representation of a system (piping, electrical, ventilation) showing system parts and
their relationship. You use symbols to represent equipment and components. A connecting
network of lines illustrates their relationship. Taken together, the symbols and the network
illustrate the function of the system.
furnishings
Parts such as movable articles and fittings that normally are not associated with a system (for
example, a chair).
generic specific
Object that is parametrically defined or defined to suit a family of specific parts (for example,
International Standards parametrics). For example, a 100 - 200 gpm pump in the catalog can
provide a general shape to appear in the model until a specific object has been identified.
GUIDs
Acronym that stands for Globally Unique Identifiers. The software automatically creates the
GUIDs sheet in the Excel workbooks when you create the Catalog database and schema. The
purpose of storing GUIDs within Excel workbooks is to help you keep track of what has been
loaded into the database. Storing GUIDs also helps to avoid the situation in which a
replacement Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid.

Common User's Guide 652

 Glossary

host location
The first location created for a Site. This host location is defined when the Database Wizard
creates the Site database.
host server
The database server on which the Site database was created using the Database Wizard.
Alternatively, if it is a restored database set, the Host Server is the database server where the
Site database is restored. The Host Server in a Workshare environment contains the origin for
the Site, Site Schema, Catalog, and Catalog Schema databases. Consequently, most Project
Management and reference data work must take place at the Host.
initial design
Early stage of design work, generally before contract, used to estimate construction costs and
provide a rough concept of the intended model. Contains information relating to a model created
during its initial (concept) design period.
initial structural plan
Principal structural plan for the model; also called a construction profile.
instantiation
Occurrence of a catalog object at a specific geometric location in the model.
interference checking
A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between objects in the
model.
job order
Industrial authorization for accomplishing work; synonymous with a work order.
joiner
Non-structural bulkheads, and trim and built-in furnishings.
kinematics analysis
Analysis of mechanical motion.
ksi
Kips per square inch.
leg length analysis
Preferred term is welding length analysis.
library
Resource of reference information that you can access in developing a model design.
life cycle database
Information developed to assist in the maintenance and modernization of delivered models.

Common User's Guide 653

 Glossary

link
Way to store information about another file in your document. You can update a link so that
changes in the file appear in your document.
lintel
A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening.
load group
A grouping in which all components feature uniform load limits and stress safety characteristics.
For example, if a pipe clamp from load group 5 has a maximum nominal load of 20kN, then so
does a threaded rod from load group 5.
location
A Location is defined by three user-defined inputs: 1) a unique name, 2) a unique name rule ID,
and 3) the server where the Site databases reside for that Location. A Location is defined and
created when the Site database is created using the Database Wizard. Additional Locations can
be created in the Project Management task. Each Location is a Site-level object, thus other
Models within the same Site collection can use the Locations when the Models are configured
for Workshare.
logical member
An object in the model used to represent the design topology.
machinery
Major pieces of equipment installed in a model.
macro
A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro,
the software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the macros in Visual
Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the other OLE-aware
programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications, Visual C++, and so forth.
maintenance envelope
A rectangular box around the part for clearance during maintenance operations.
maintenance parts
Required material for depot or on-board repair or overhaul of equipment, as determined by
engineering study. Generally at a level below the purchased construction object of the model.
maintenance records
Records of breakdown, repair, and overhaul of equipment.
material analysis
Analysis of a completed design work for extracting detailed material requirements; also called
material lists.
material list
An option category that controls the format and content of the bill of materials.

Common User's Guide 654

 Glossary

methods
Objects in the database that describe the manufacturing methods to the component parts of a
model.
move from point
Starting point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move From
point determines the point of origin for the move.
move to point
Ending point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move To
point determines where you want the move to stop.
MTO neutral file
A non-graphic output file that can be fed into a material control system. MTO stands for Material
Take-Off.
natural surface
A surface without a boundary curve.
node
 One of the set of discrete points in a flow graph.
 A terminal of any branch of a network or a terminal common to two or more branches of a
network.
 An end point of any branch or a network or graph, or a junction common to two or more
branches.
northing
A term that describes a north coordinate location in a coordinate system.
nozzle
A piping connection point to a piece of equipment.
nozzle standout
The shortest allowable distance between the connection point of a nozzle and the start point of a
turn on the leg connected to the nozzle.
NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter)
The diameter of a pipe.
object
A type of data other than the native graphic format of the application.
occurrence (of part or equipment)
Instantiation of a part of equipment in the plant that refers to the part library; an instance of a
specific object. The design can be built several times, and therefore the occurrence can apply to
more than one hull. Typically, an occurrence points back to a specific object, either for its
complete definition, as in the case of a particular valve, or for its made from material, as in the

Common User's Guide 655

 Glossary

case of a steel plate part cut from sheets. Thus, when a designer selects a component from the
catalog and places it at a location in the space of the plant, the software creates an occurrence
of that object in the plant design.
occurrence property
A characteristic that applies to an individual object in the model. Occurrence properties are
designated with 'oa:' in the reference data workbooks. You can view and modify occurrence
properties on the Occurrence tab of the properties dialog boxes in the software. Depending on
the object, some occurrence properties are read-only.
origin
In coordinate geometry, the point where the X-, Y-, and Z-axes intersect.
origin point
The point at which the coordinate system is placed, providing a full Cartesian coordinate system
with positive and negative quadrants. Points are placed at coordinates relative to the origin
point, represented by the X, Y, and Z values.
orthogonal
The characteristic of an element consisting completely of elements positioned at 90-degree
angles. A square is an orthogonal element.
orthographic
A depiction of an object created by projecting its features onto a plane along lines perpendicular
to the plane.
P&ID
Diagram that shows the topology, functional components, and special requirements of a piping
system; generally represents the engineering design of the system.
package
Set of closely related classes. (UML)
painting
Computation of paint surface and recording of paint system requirements.
parameter
A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something.
part class
A group of similar objects. You can define part classes in the Excel workbooks. A part class can
have multiple parts. For example, a heat exchanger part class can contain heat exchangers with
different dimensions.
part number
Unique identifier of a part.

Common User's Guide 656

 Glossary

PDS (Plant Design System)

A comprehensive, intelligent, computer-aided design and engineering application for the
process, power, and marine industries. PDS consists of integrated 2-D and 3-D modules that
correspond to engineering tasks in the design workflow.
physical occurrence
Unique specific object that has traceability and is the physical manifestation of an occurrence
object. A physical occurrence applies to one and only one hull. It is a version of its occurrence
object with as-built or as-modified differences included and has a serial number or lot number.
PinPoint
Tool that allows you to place, move, and modify elements with precision, relative to a reference
point.
principle of superposition
The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and displacements due to different forces can
be combined. This principle is only valid for linear analysis.
product
Data objects that describe the components of a ship and any corresponding properties. An
individual object or part (or its representation in the product model) that may be installed in the
ship. Examples of individual products include objects such as a coffee urn, a light fixture, a piece
of pipe, a piece of ventilation duct, a radar display console, a bulkhead plate, and a structural
profile stiffening a bulkhead.
Product Data Management (PDM) System
Software intended to manage both product data and documents associated to the product data.
Functionality typically includes: object-based data modeling tools, user administration, business
rules, and document management. Document management typically includes document editing
or reviewing, document mark-up or redline, document storage, and full-text retrieval.
product structure
Hierarchical breakdown or decomposition of a product into constituent parts, volumes, or units.
(For example, a bill of material is one possible type of product structure.)
production planning
Functionality associated with the work breakdown and sequence of the construction of a model.
promotion
Process of associating approval state with a product version. A product version begins its
existence at a working approval state. When the version is at some level of maturity, its approval
state is elevated to a higher approval state (that is, promoted). Then, further changes must be
carefully controlled and generally require the data set demoted to a working state. One or more
promotions can occur successively higher approval states (between working and approved) to
represent various intermediate levels of review or progressive approval.
query select sets
Set of objects that are selected in a query or queries on the database.

Common User's Guide 657

 Glossary

reference data
The data that is necessary to design plants or ships using the software. Reference data includes
graphical information, such as symbols. It also contains tabular information, such as physical
dimensions and piping specifications.
resource estimation
Rough estimate of material, manpower, and facility utilization for the design and construction of
the model.
route
1) A line connecting a series of points in space and constituting a proposed or traveled route. 2)
The set of links and junctions joined in series to establish a connection.
satellite server
The database server where the replicated databases reside for Workshare. The Satellite Server
is not used unless Workshare is activated.
schema
A database that creates the structure of another database. For example, a schema specifies the
queries, tables, fields, and data types in a database.
schema update utility
Functionality used to assist in processing existing product models to an updated database
structure after you modify or add to the database structure.
sheetbody
A topological object that represents a collection of faces joined along their common edges
(stitched).
shell structure
External portion of the surface of the model.
ship
A collection of modeled objects that can be simultaneously displayed and edited in a workspace.
A Ship points to a Catalog (optionally shared with other Ships). Access control is managed at
the Ship level.
site
The top level in the Project Management hierarchy. A Site configuration may contain several
Catalogs, each shared by multiple Models.
site administrator
Person responsible for managing the standards and general parameters for a given model site
within a Site database.
site setup
Functionality associated with establishing a new model site or hull for design development.

Common User's Guide 658

 Glossary

sketch and trace

User interface for rough definition of a required design feature that typically works in a 2-D
mode.
specials
An option category that allows you to control specialized calculations for equipment trim,
repeatability, and center-of-gravity.
specifications
Contracted requirements for the model.
steel outfitting
Internal structural elements of a ship that are required to meet a local requirement such as
foundations, non-structural bulkheads, walkways, and so forth.
stern frame
Casting and structure that support the rudder and shaft opening.
stud
A bolt, threaded on both ends, used to connect components.
suspended floor
A concrete floor system built above and off the ground.
swash bulkhead
A longitudinal or transverse nontight bulkhead in a tank that decreases the swashing motion of
the liquid contents. A plate in a tank that has this same effect but that does not extend to the
bottom of the tank is called a swash plate.
symmetric node
Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a symmetric node has the same curvature on each side
of the node. A handle can be attached to a symmetric node for editing.
system
A conceptual design grouping that organizes parts in hierarchical relationships. A system
represents a functional view of the model and includes information such as system name, type,
properties, and design specifications for the objects assigned to the system.
tag number
User-specific, unique number assigned to an object (for example, CV-101 for a control valve,
HE-2002 for a heat exchanger).
target point
The origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target point
anywhere on the drawing sheet or view.

Common User's Guide 659

 Glossary

tolerant geometry
A type of ACIS geometry - either an edge or a vertex - that is outside the tolerance for ACIS and
requires special handling.
transverse
At right angles to the fore-and-aft center line.
transverse frames
The athwartship members that form the ribs of the ship.
trim
The difference between the forward draft and the aft draft.
trimmed surface
A surface whose boundary is fully or partially inside the "natural" geometric definition of the
surface. Some or the entire control polygon extends outside the face boundary.
trunk
Feature that quickly reserves space for the distributive systems and other systems that have a
path. Along the trunk are stations that define the cross section and identify part or system
membership.
tumble home
The inboard slope of the side of a ship, usually above the designed waterline.
unit/module modeler
Facility of the system to structure collections of equipment and components into a single
identifiable object.
user attributes
A customized property in the reference data. The Custom Interfaces sheets in the Excel
workbooks define these properties. You can list the customized properties on the individual part
class sheets.
version control
Ability of the system to manage multiple versions of a single part of the design. Version control
should support conditional analysis and promotion status, as well as alternate design features
among hulls within a model site.
vertex
A topological object that represents a point in the three-dimensional model.
vertical keel
A row of vertical plates extending along the center of the flat plate keel.

Common User's Guide 660

 Glossary

viewset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) that a view operation uses. Membership
or lack of membership for any object in a viewset does not affect the actual stored
representation of the object, but only its availability or desirability for viewing in the current
scenario.
water line
A line parallel with the base line that depicts the water.
watertight door
A door that when closed prevents the passage of water.
weather deck
A deck exposed to the weather.
weathertight door
A door that when closed prevents the passage of rain and spray.
weight and CG analysis
Routines that compute the weight of commodity materials as configured in a given design (for
example, plate and pipe) and determine total weight and center of gravity (CG) for a collection of
material and equipment, as well as the complete model.
welding
Weld requirements for joining materials. Welding length analysis is the calculation of required
weld dimensions; also called leg length analysis.
windlass
The machine used to hoist and lower anchors.
wirebody
A topological object that represents a collection of edges jointed at their common endpoints.
wizard
Software routine attached to an application that provides guidance and expert help to you to
complete one of the functionalities of the application.
work content
Estimation development of metrics from the database that relates to the work hour content of the
various construction units.
work order
Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order.
working plane
The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection.

Common User's Guide 661

 Glossary

workset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) used in an interactive change, add, or
delete operation. Membership or lack of membership for any object in a workset does not
necessarily affect the actual stored representation of an object. However, you can change or
delete an object in a workset that also results in a change or deletion of the stored object.
Similarly, when you add a new object (not currently stored) to a workset, the software also adds
the object container.
workspace
Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and
includes the user modeling settings.
workspace document
Document into which you can extract a portion of the model data for a user task.
Workspace Explorer
Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace.

Common User's Guide 662

Index
Apply a permission group to styles • 326
3 Apply a Style to a View • 242
3D Navigation Controls • 218 Apply a surface style • 325
3D Navigation Tips • 228 Apply View Style • 241
3D View Tab (Style Dialog Box) • 329 Apply View Style Dialog Box • 242
approval state • 646
A arrangement (accommodation) • 646
Aspect Refresh in Progress Message Box •
abaft • 646
321
About • 629
Assembly Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box)
About Dialog Box • 629
• 374
abstract part • 646
Assign Colors for Correlation • 581
Access Control • 21
Assign Objects to a WBS Item • 543
Access Customized Files • 628
Assign to WBS • 542
Access the Printable Guides • 627
Assign to WBS Dialog Box • 543
Active Template Library (ATL) • 646
attribute • 646
Active View Control • 197
Auto-Correlate Report • 596
Active View Control Dialog Box • 198
Automatically Correlate with the 3D Model •
Add a surface style rule to the workspace •
595
341
axis • 647
Add Ad Hoc Note to control points for
drawings • 299
Add CAD details of a support component in B
the drawings • 300 basic design • 647
Add control points • 294 Best Practices • 36
Add Custom Command Dialog Box • 461 bill of material (BOM) • 647
Add custom commands • 459 Browse to Address Dialog Box • 285
Add location point coordinates to PCF • 295 built ships • 647
Add New Windows Form • 477 bulkload • 647
Add objects to the SmartSketch list • 408
Add References to the Project • 474 C
Add the location coordinates of the key plan
to drawings • 303 Calculate Weight & CG • 517
Add to SmartSketch List • 404 Cancel your last action • 129
Add User Controls to the Toolbox • 479 Cascade • 621
Adjust a view along a line • 208 Cascade windows • 621
Adjust a view by points • 206 catalog • 647
aft • 646 Catalog • 613
after body • 646 Catalog database • 647
aftermost • 646 Catalog Reports Tab (Run Report Dialog
Analysis Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) • Box) • 436
375 ceiling • 647
angle • 646 Center View by Object • 241
Appendix chain • 647
Implementing a Work Breakdown Change a default color • 496
Structure (WBS) • 635 Change a default file location • 497
S3D Memory Monitor • 637 Change a displayed unit of measure • 497
Shortcuts • 630 Change a system owner • 263
Apply a 3D view style • 327 change history • 647

Common User's Guide 663

 Index

change management • 647 Configure Tasks • 617

change propagation • 647 consolidated tasks • 648
Change the displayed Workspace Explorer constraints • 648
tabs • 497 Construct symmetrical connections • 175
Change the locate filter • 150 contract • 648
Changing default colors • 47 control point • 649
Check Validation • 483 Control Point • 290
Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings - Control Point Properties Dialog Box • 305
Microsoft Windows 7 Instructions • 233 coordinate • 649
Checking Interferences • 427 coordinate system • 649
Checking Interferences Common Tasks • Copy • 131
434 Copy a filter • 366
Choose Part Properties Dialog Box • 494 Copy a surface style rule from one model to
Claim • 538 another • 341
Claim Objects • 540 Copy and paste an object • 134
Claiming Objects • 539 Copy memory statistics to the clipboard •
class • 648 641
class rule check • 648 Copy objects to the Catalog • 143
Class Rules • 648 Copy to Catalog • 142
classification folder • 648 Copying and Pasting Using the Catalog •
Clear Clipping • 195 141
Clip by object • 187 Copying Large Areas of the Model • 132
Clip by Object • 185 Correlate a design basis object with 3D
Clip by plane • 192 object • 609
Clip by volume • 188 Correlate Automatically Command • 594
Clip by Volume or Plane • 187 Correlate Automatically Dialog Box • 594
Clipping • 185 Correlate Model Objects with Design Basis
Close • 56 Objects • 590
Close a session • 56 Correlate with Design Basis Command •
codelist • 648 585
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 502 Correlate with Design Basis Dialog Box •
commodity code • 648 586
commodity item • 648 Create a 3D view style • 326
Common • 613 Create a Filter to Select Pipes Based on
Common Overview • 15 Correlation Status • 593
Common Views • 204 Create a Filter to Select Piping Components
Common Views Dialog Box • 204 Based on Correlation Status • 592
Compare a design basis object with 3D Create a Mapping File • 102
object • 608 Create a new asking filter • 362
Compare Design Basis Command • 600 Create a new compound filter • 363
Compare Design Basis with the Model • 604 Create a new filter • 360
Compare with Design Basis Dialog Box • Create a new filter folder • 360
601 Create a new session • 52
component • 648 Create a new SQL filter • 363
Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box • Create a New System in the Workspace
382 Explorer • 263
concurrent access • 648 Create a New WBS Item • 537
Configuration Tab • 144, 181, 259, 346, Create a New WBS Project • 528
381, 439, 525, 535 Create a new window • 620
Configuration Tab (Reference 3D Generic Create a session template • 53
Element Properties Dialog Box) • 262 Create a snapshot view containing all
Configure Task List • 617 objects • 447
Configure Task List Dialog Box • 617

Common User's Guide 664

 Index

Create a snapshot view containing only Delete a surface style • 325

visible objects • 448 Delete a view style • 327
Create a surface style • 324 Design Aids • 31
Create a surface style rule • 340 design alternative • 650
Create a user-defined form in Visual Studio design approval log • 650
• 472 Design Basis Viewer Command • 606
Create a user-defined form using Form Design Basis Viewer Dialog Box • 606
Definition Wizard • 490 design data auto input • 650
Create an MDR Results Report • 465 design documents • 650
Create custom commands • 459 design object • 650
Create Multiple Forms • 486 Design Objects • 20
Create Multiple or Nested Forms • 486 design progress check • 650
Create New WBS Project Dialog Box • 522 design review • 650
Create the Project • 472 design service • 650
Create WBS Item • 529 Design Session • 28
Create WBS Item Dialog Box • 529 design standard • 650
Create WBS Project • 522 Design the Symbol Background • 478
Custom Commands • 451 detail schedule • 650
Custom Commands Dialog Box • 460 Details Dialog Box • 584
Custom Documentation • 628 Display a P&ID and Retrieve Drawing Data
cutting plane • 649 • 579
Display help topics • 626
D Display hidden objects • 196
Display License Information • 629
damage records • 649 Display objects on the To Do List • 268
data interchange • 649 Display rulers • 264
Data Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box) • Display the S3D Memory Monitor dialog box
107 • 640
database • 649 distributed systems • 650
database backup • 649 distribution systems • 651
database break and recovery • 649 documentation • 651
database copy • 649 Drawing Console • 442
database management • 649 drawing tool • 651
database monitor record • 649 Drawings and Reports • 613
Define a coordinate system by three points
• 419
Define a workspace using a new filter • 63 E
Define a workspace using an available filter easting • 651
• 64 edge • 651
Define Prompts Dialog Box • 144 edge distance • 651
Define roles • 65 Edges Tab (New/Modify Style Dialog Box) •
Define Workspace • 62 331
Define Workspace Dialog Box • 68 Edit a custom command • 460
Defining a Workspace Common Tasks • 61 Edit a saved view • 202
Defining Workspace Content • 60 Edit control points • 294
Definition Tab (Properties Dialog Box) • 438 Edit Custom Command Dialog Box • 461
degree • 650 Edit filter properties • 367
Delete • 151 Edit Menu • 128
Delete a custom command • 460 Edit Properties • 178
Delete a filter • 367 Electrical • 614
Delete a filter folder • 366 Enhanced Edges Tab (Format View Dialog
Delete a reference file • 276 Box) • 320
Delete a saved view • 203 Enter Fly Mode • 226

Common User's Guide 665

 Index

Equipment and Furnishings • 614 Follow a note • 287

equipment catalog • 651 Form Definition Wizard • 490
Exit • 127 Format a view • 309
Exit the S3D Memory Monitor • 641 Format Field Dialog Box (Label Editor) •
Export coordinate system • 103 506
Export Grids • 103 Format Menu • 307
Export Model Tab (Export To PDS Dialog Format Style • 322
Box) • 121 Format View • 308
Export Model to PDMS Datal Dialog Box • Format View Dialog Box • 312
111 full penetration weld • 652
Export Options Dialog Box • 107 function points • 652
Export Settings • 122 functional block diagram • 652
Export Smart 3D model data to PDMS • 110 furnishings • 652
Export Smart 3D Models • 117
Export Smart 3D Models to PDMS • 109 G
Export Structure • 104
Export Structure Dialog Box • 105 General Tab (Control Point Properties
Export Structure Model • 105 Dialog Box) • 305
Export to PDS Dialog Box • 118 General Tab (Export Grids Dialog Box) •
external appendages • 651 104
Extract Hierarchy Tab (Export To PDS General Tab (Folder Properties Dialog Box)
Dialog Box) • 118 • 384
General Tab (Import Grids Dialog Box) • 82
General Tab (Module Properties Dialog
F Box) • 144
fabricate • 651 General Tab (New/Modify Style Dialog Box)
face • 651 • 330
face plate • 651 General Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 500
Faces Tab (New/Modify Style Dialog Box) • General Tab (Reference 3D Attach
333 Properties Dialog Box) • 261
face-to-face • 651 General Tab (Reference 3D Folder
fasteners • 651 Properties Dialog Box) • 260
feature • 651 General Tab (Reference 3D Generic
fence • 652 Element Properties Dialog Box) • 261
field adjustment • 652 General Tab (Reference 3D Model
File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) • Properties Dialog Box) • 259
510 General Tab (Reference Attachment File
File Menu • 48 Properties Dialog Box) • 276
Filter MDR Results • 466 General Tab (Reference Element
Filter MDR Results Dialog Box • 467 Properties Dialog Box) • 277
Filter Properties Dialog Box • 371 General Tab (SQL Filter Properties Dialog
Find Documents to Publish • 564 Box) • 384
Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box • General Tab (WBS Item Properties Dialog
564 Box) • 532
fire integrity • 652 General Tab (WBS Project Properties
Fit • 240 Dialog Box) • 524
Fit all objects in the active view • 240 generic specific • 652
Fit to Object(s) • 227 Get Point • 409
Fix objects with errors • 267 Global Workshare • 27
flavor • 652 Go to Hyperlink • 183
focus of rotation • 652 Graphics Card Information • 230
Folder Properties Dialog Box • 384 Grids • 614
Follow a hyperlink • 183 GUIDs • 652

Common User's Guide 666

 Index

H Insert Menu • 273

Insert Note Dialog Box • 289
Hangers and Supports • 615 instantiation • 653
Help • 625 Integrating with SmartPlant Enterprise • 551
Help Menu • 624 Interactive Interference Checking (Local
Hide • 387 Detect) • 433
Hide an object • 387
interference checking • 653
host location • 653 Interference Detection • 35
host server • 653 Issue Request Tab (Publish Dialog Box) •
HVAC • 615 562
Hyperlink • 283

I J
job order • 653
Icon Relationships • 254 joiner • 653
Icons in the Workspace Explorer • 246
Import coordinate system • 81
Import Electrical • 75 K
Import Electrical Data Dialog Box • 76 kinematics analysis • 653
Import Electrical Data Using PDS Model ksi • 653
Data Exporter • 77
Import Equipment • 78 L
Import Equipment Data Dialog Box • 79
Import Equipment Data Using PDS Model Label Editor Dialog Box • 505
Data Exporter • 80 leg length analysis • 653
Import Grids • 81 Levels and Layers Tab • 260
Import HVAC • 83 library • 653
Import HVAC Data Dialog Box • 84 life cycle database • 653
Import HVAC Data Using PDS Model Data Lights Tab (Format View Dialog Box) • 319
Exporter • 85 link • 654
Import Piping • 86 lintel • 654
Import Piping Data Dialog Box • 87 load group • 654
Import Piping Data Using PDS Model Data Locate Filter • 149
Exporter • 88 Locate Filter Dialog Box • 150
Import Structure • 89 location • 654
Import Structure Dialog Box • 90 logical member • 654
Import structure model • 89 Look Around • 226
Import XMpLant Formatted Electrical Data • Look at a surface • 215
76 Look at Surface • 215
Import XMpLant Formatted Equipment Data
• 80 M
Import XMpLant Formatted HVAC Data • 84 machinery • 654
Import XMpLant Formatted Piping Data • 88 macro • 654
Importing and Exporting Data • 70 Magnify an area • 239
Indicate elevation on drawings • 297 maintenance envelope • 654
initial design • 653 maintenance parts • 654
initial structural plan • 653 maintenance records • 654
Insert a hyperlink • 283 Manage ToolTips • 498
Insert a note • 286 Managing Sessions • 49
Insert a note at a precise place on an Managing Sessions Common Tasks • 50
isometric drawing • 287 Manipulate the active view • 197
Insert a reference file • 275
Insert File • 274
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box • 284

Common User's Guide 667

 Index

Manually Correlate Multiple Smart 3D Pipe node • 655

Runs/Pipelines with a P&ID Pipe northing • 655
Run/Pipeline • 592 Note • 286
material analysis • 654 Notes Tab • 179, 527, 536
material list • 654 nozzle • 655
Matrix Rule Dialog Box • 509 nozzle standout • 655
Measure • 415 NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter) • 655
Measure a radius or diameter • 425
Measure an actual distance • 419 O
Measure an angle • 426
Measure minimum distance • 420 object • 655
Measure the distance along an element • Object Relationships and Associations • 33
423 Object Type Tab (Filter Properties Dialog
methods • 655 Box) • 377
Mirror and copy objects • 173 occurrence (of part or equipment) • 655
Mirror Copy • 170 occurrence property • 656
Modify a surface style • 325 Open • 55
Modify a surface style rule • 342 Open a session • 55
Modify a view style • 327 Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box •
Modify session properties • 57 99
Modifying Objects • 30 Options • 495
Module Properties Dialog Box • 144 Options Dialog Box • 500, 645
Modules Dialog Box • 146 Organization Tab (IFC Export Options
Most Recently Used List • 126 Dialog Box) • 108
Move • 152, 227 origin • 656
Move a filter • 366 origin point • 656
move from point • 655 orthogonal • 656
Move objects to a new location • 154 orthographic • 656
Move partially constrained objects by a
relative distance • 155 P
move to point • 655 P&ID • 656
MTO neutral file • 655 P&ID File Viewer • 575
My Reports Tab (Run Report Dialog Box) • package • 656
437 painting • 656
Pan • 240
N Pan views • 240
Name Tab (New View Style Dialog Box) • parameter • 656
336 Parent or Related Object Dialog Box • 175
Named Space Tab (Filter Properties Dialog part class • 656
Box) • 375 part number • 656
Named Views • 202 Paste • 133
Named Views Dialog Box • 203 Paste and Restore • 137
natural surface • 655 Paste Dialog Box • 135
Navigate View • 217 Paste from Catalog • 145
New • 52 Paste objects from the Catalog • 146
New Dialog Box • 54 PDMS Export Validation • 112
New Mapping File • 99 PDMS Export Validation Dialog Box • 113
New System • 262 PDS (Plant Design System) • 657
New View Style Dialog Box • 336 PDS Export • 117
New Window • 620 PDS Model Data Exporter • 71
New/Modify Style Dialog Box • 329 PDS Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) •
Next View • 201 380

Common User's Guide 668

 Index

Permission Group Tab (Filter Properties R

Dialog Box) • 377
Recall a saved view • 202
Permission Groups and Routing • 23
Reference 3D Attach Properties Dialog Box
Permissions Overview • 22
• 261
physical occurrence • 657
Reference 3D Folder Properties Dialog Box
PinPoint • 389, 657
• 260
Piping • 615
Reference 3D Generic Element Properties
Place a Control on the Form • 481
Dialog Box • 261
Place Macro Dialog Box • 148
Reference 3D Model Properties Dialog Box
Place objects along another object • 414
• 258
Place objects using cylindrical coordinates •
Reference 3D Tab (Filter Properties Dialog
398
Box) • 381
Place objects using rectangular coordinates
Reference Attachment File Properties
• 393
Dialog Box • 276
Place objects using spherical coordinates •
reference data • 658
395
Reference Element Properties Dialog Box •
Point Along • 413
Position Definition Dialog Box • 509 276
Reference Tab (Filter Properties Dialog
Preface • 13
Box) • 380
Presentation Tab (IFC Export Options
Refresh views in the workspace • 69
Dialog Box) • 108
Refresh Workspace • 69
Preview a CIS File • 90
Relationships Tab • 180
Previous View • 200
Release Claim • 541
principle of superposition • 657
Release Claimed Objects • 541
Print • 124
Remove a hyperlink • 283
Print Dialog Box • 124
Remove a process that has exited in a
Print the active window • 124
Critical or Warning state • 641
Printable Guides • 627
Remove a surface style rule from the
product • 657
database • 342
Product Data Management (PDM) System •
Remove a surface style rule from the
657
workspace • 341
product structure • 657
Remove All Objects from a WBS Item • 544
production planning • 657
Remove correlation with design basis • 611
Project Menu • 519
Remove Correlation with Design Basis
promotion • 657
Command • 611
Properties • 177
Rename a filter • 365
Properties (Session Files) • 57
Rename a filter folder • 365
Properties Dialog Box • 179, 438
Rename or move a session • 57
Properties Tab (Compare with Design Basis
Rendering Tab (New View Style Dialog
Dialog Box) • 586, 601
Box) • 337
Properties Tab (Filter Properties Dialog
Report Parameters Dialog Box • 438
Box) • 379
resource estimation • 658
Publish • 557
Restore model objects from backup • 139
Publish Dialog Box • 558
Restore the next view • 201
Publish documents • 556
Restore the previous view • 200
Publish Tab (Publish Dialog Box) • 558
Restrict edits and propagation to a
Publishing 3D Data • 584
Permission Group • 499
Retrieve Command • 568
Q Retrieve Dialog Box • 568
query select sets • 657 Retrieve Documents • 569
Quit an editing session • 127 Retrieving Data • 565
Return to Default View • 226

Common User's Guide 669

 Index

Review design basis object properties • 610 Select Naming Rules Dialog Box • 449
Review MDR Results • 465 Select Object Type Dialog Box • 385
Review MDR Results Dialog Box • 466 Select objects by fence for a work session •
Rotate a view around a linear object • 213 351
Rotate a view around a new center point • Select objects by filter • 369
212 Select objects by locate filter for a work
Rotate a view around an axis • 210 session • 351
Rotate an Object about a Line or Port • 167 Select objects using QuickPick • 353
Rotate an object about an axis • 164 Select Properties Dialog Box • 384
Rotate an object using bearing, pitch, or roll Select Rule Dialog Box (Label Editor -
• 169 Position Definition) • 508
Rotate an object using perpendicular to Select Rule Dialog Box (Label Editor - Unit
references mode • 165 of Measure) • 506
Rotate Object • 158 Select Space Folder Dialog Box • 450
Rotate View • 209 Select System Dialog Box • 157, 263
route • 658 Select View Style Dialog Box • 449
Rulers • 264 Selected PG Tab (Options Dialog Box) •
Rulers Dialog Box • 264 514
Run a custom command • 459 Send • 58
Run an Existing Catalog Report • 440 Send a session to another user • 58
Run an Existing Personal Report • 440 Server-Based Interference Checking
Run Report • 435 (Database Detect) • 431
Run Report Dialog Box • 436 Session Files Best Practices • 51
Run the S3D Memory Monitor automatically Set Correlation Status Colors Dialog Box •
• 639 577
Run the S3D Memory Monitor manually • Set enhanced edge color • 310
638 Set isometric break control points for
drawings • 295
S Set options for the S3D Memory Monitor •
641
S3D Custom Form Definition Wizard Dialog Set the activation time for QuickPick • 499
Box • 493 Set the Locate Zone • 499
S3D Memory Monitor Dialog Box • 642 Settings Tab (Export Grids Dialog Box) •
S3D Memory Stats Dialog Box • 644 104
satellite server • 658 Settings Tab (Import Grids Dialog Box) • 82
Save • 56 sheetbody • 658
Save a session • 56 shell structure • 658
Save a view • 202 ship • 658
Save As • 56 Shortcut Keys • 631
Saving views • 41 Shortcut Menus • 634
Scaling Data Examples • 280 Show • 386
Schedule [Task] Dialog Box • 98 Show All • 388
schema • 658 Show all invisible objects • 388
schema update utility • 658 Show an invisible object • 386
Select • 348 Show or Hide Workspace Explorer • 257
Select a standard isometric or orthographic Show session properties • 57
view • 204 site • 658
Select Active Project Dialog Box • 258, 521 site administrator • 658
Select by Filter • 355 site setup • 658
Select Directory Dialog Box • 510 sketch and trace • 659
Select Drawing Type Dialog Box • 449 Smart 3D in an Integrated Environment •
Select Filter Dialog Box • 370 547
Select Label Dialog Box • 504 SmartPlant Menu • 546

Common User's Guide 670

 Index

SmartSketch 3D Tab (Options Dialog Box) • Tools Menu • 347

511 ToolTips Tab (Options Dialog Box) • 503
SmartSketch Options • 401 Topology Tab (Compare with Design Basis
Snapshot View • 445 Dialog Box) • 603
Space Management • 615 Topology Tab (Correlate with Design Basis
specials • 659 Dialog Box) • 589
specifications • 659 Transfer Ownership Dialog Box • 182, 526
SQL Filter Properties Dialog Box • 383 Transfer ownership of objects in the model •
SQL Queries in SQL Server and Oracle • 179
369 Translator.ini File Options • 277
steel outfitting • 659 transverse • 660
stern frame • 659 transverse frames • 660
Structural Analysis • 616 trim • 660
Structure • 616 trimmed surface • 660
stud • 659 Troubleshoot 3D Navigation • 230
Style Dialog Box • 328 trunk • 660
Suggested Conversion Factors for tumble home • 660
AutoCAD • 279 Turn a SmartSketch Relationship Indicator
Surface Style Rule Properties Dialog Box • on or off • 500
344 Turn the Status Bar on or off • 500
Surface Style Rule Properties Tab (Surface Turn undo on or off • 130
Style Rule Properties Dialog Box) • 344
Surface Style Rules • 339 U
Surface Style Rules Dialog Box • 342
Surface Tab (Style Dialog Box) • 328 Understanding Integration Terminology •
suspended floor • 659 550
swash bulkhead • 659 Undo • 129
symmetric node • 659 Unit of Measure Dialog Box (Label Editor) •
Synchronize all objects in the workspace • 507
464 unit/module modeler • 660
Synchronize selected objects • 464 Units of Measure Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Synchronize Workspace Dialog Box • 464 • 503
Synchronize Workspace with Catalog • 463 Update Names • 176
system • 659 Update out-of-date objects • 267
System Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) • Update WBS Assignments • 545
373 Use Keyboard-Only 3D Navigation • 220
Systems and Specifications • 616 Use Mouse Only or Mouse + Keyboard
Combinations (Fly Mode) • 221
Use the 3D Navigator • 224
T user attributes • 660
tag number • 659 User-defined Forms • 469
target point • 659 Using clipping • 38
Tasks Menu • 612 Using enhanced edges render modes • 46
The Smart 3D Design Approach • 19 Using multiple graphics windows • 37
Tile Horizontally • 622 Using surface style rules • 45
Tile Vertically • 623 Using system folders to manage styles • 44
Tile windows horizontally • 622 Using the Reference Geometry aspect • 47
Tile windows vertically • 623 Using transparent styles • 42
To Do List • 35, 265 Utility • 463
To Do List Dialog Box • 269
To Do List Properties Dialog Box • 270
To Do Record Meter • 272
tolerant geometry • 660

Common User's Guide 671

 Index

V Workspace Explorer • 243, 257, 662

Validate Connections between P&ID and
3D Objects • 584 Z
Validate mapping details • 112 Zoom Area • 238
Verify P&ID Integrity Command • 582 Zoom In • 237
Verify P&ID Integrity Dialog Box • 583 Zoom out • 237
version control • 660 Zoom Tool • 236
vertex • 660
vertical keel • 660
View and Correlate P&ID Typicals • 580
View by Points • 206
View Menu • 184
View P&ID Command • 574
View P&ID Dialog Box • 575
View the MDR Log File • 468
Viewing and Correlating P&ID Typicals •
580
Viewing P&IDs • 572
Viewing Your Work • 216
viewset • 661
Volume Tab (Filter Properties Dialog Box) •
378

W
water line • 661
watertight door • 661
WBS Item Edit Ribbon • 531
WBS Item Properties Dialog Box • 532
WBS Items and Projects • 520
WBS Project Edit Ribbon • 523
WBS Project Properties Dialog Box • 524
weather deck • 661
weathertight door • 661
Weight & CG • 515
Weight & CG Display List • 517
weight and CG analysis • 661
welding • 661
What's New in Common • 13
windlass • 661
Windows Menu • 619
wirebody • 661
wizard • 661
Work Breakdown Structure Tab (Filter
Properties Dialog Box) • 376
work content • 661
work order • 661
Workflow for Smart 3D in an Integrated
Environment • 554
working plane • 661
workset • 662
workspace • 662
workspace document • 662

Common User's Guide 672